Religious Experience & Tradition

International interdisciplinar y s c i e n t i f i c c o n fe r e n c e

May 11-12, 2012 K a u n a s, L i t h u a n i a

Vytautas Magnus University Vytauto Didiojo universitetas Kaunas, 2012

Editor / Sudarytoja Agn Budrinait (VMU, Dep. of Philosophy, Lithuania ) Editorial board / Redakcin kolegija ivil Advilonien (VMU, Faculty of Catholic Theology, Lithuania) Rta Brzgien (MRU, Dep. of Lithuanian Language, Lithuania) Vida Daugirdien (VMU, Faculty of Catholic Theology, Lithuania) Valdas Mackela (VMU, Faculty of Catholic Theology, Lithuania) Rimantas Viedrynaitis (VMU, Dep. of Philosophy, Lithuania Benas Uleviius (VMU, Faculty of Catholic Theology, Lithuania) Scientific committee / Mokslinis komitetas Prof. dr. Algis Micknas (chair, Ohio university, USA) F. Jonas Emanuelis Le Taillandier de Gabory, CSJ (Prior of the Monastery of St. John the Theologian in Vilnius) Prof. dr. Romualdas Dulskis (VMU, Faculty of Catholic Theology, Lithuania) Prof. dr. Merab Ghaghanidze (Free University, Tbilisi, Georgia) Prof. dr. Peter Jonkers (Tilburg university, Netherlands) Prof. dr. Rekha Menon (Berkeley College, Boston, USA) Prof. dr. Tomas Sodeika (KUT, Dep. of Philosophy and Cultural Science, Lithuania) Prof. dr. Anita Stasulane (Daugavpils University, Latvia) Assoc prof. dr. Olga Breskaya (University of Brest, Belarus) Assoc. prof. dr. Janis Priede (University of Latvia, Latvia) Dr. Istvn Povedk (Blint Sndor Institute for the Study of Religion, Hungary) Organizing committee / Organizacinis komitetas Assoc. prof. dr. Agn Budrinait (chair, VMU, Dep. of Philosophy, Lithuania) Assoc. prof. dr. ivil Advilonien (VMU, Faculty of Catholic Theology, Lithuania) Assoc. prof. dr. Povilas Aleksandraviius (MRU, Dep. of Philosophy, Lithuania) Assoc. prof. dr. Rta Brzgien, (MRU, Dep. of Lithuanian Language, Lithuania) Assoc. prof. dr. Vida Daugirdien (VMU, Faculty of Catholic Theology, Lithuania) Assoc. prof. dr. Benas Uleviius (VMU, Faculty of Catholic Theology, Lithuania) Assist. prof. theol. lic. Valdas Mackela (VMU, Faculty of Catholic Theology, Lithuania) Assist. prof. Rimantas Viedrynaitis (VMU, Dep. of Philosophy, Lithuania) Aura Vasiliauskait (s. Gabriel, VMU, Faculty of Catholic Theology, Lithuania) Audrius Rakauskas (VMU, Dep. of Philosophy, Lithuania) Sandra Krataviit (Caritas, Lithuania)

Publication of this book is sponsored by Japan Foundation. Leidinio rmjas Japonijos fondas.

ISBN 978-9955-12-775-8 e-ISBN 978-9955-12-776-5 Vytautas Magnus University, 2012

Contents / tUrInys
Jean Emmanuel Le Taillandier de Gabory, CSJ, The Monastery of Saint John the Theologian tradition and religious experience ..................................................................................... 8 traditions et exprience religieuse...................................................................................... 9 tradicija ir religinis patyrimas ..............................................................................................10

Friday, May 11, 2012 Session I

Christo LOMBAARD the Word or the word? the Divine experience as Mediated or Direct a Perspective from Biblical spirituality .......................................................11 Peter JONKERS tradition, religious experience, and Personal Commitment ...................................12

Session II A
Ulrike POPP-BAYER religious experience as narrative: reflections on the Advantages of a narrative Approach.........................................................................................................13 Timo KOISTINEN Wittgenstein and religious relativism.............................................................................18 Agn BUDRINAIT Presence of Absolute oneness as non-religious non-experience in Plotinus and Zhuangzi ......................................................................................................24 Krzysztof CYRAN Anenaiki by Augustyn Bloch (1979) a Merger of traditions in religious Music ...29

Session II B
Solveiga KRUMINA-KONKOVA Learning a Foreign experience: the Beginning of yoga Movement in Latvia .......................................................................................................................................36 Alar KILP Detraditionalization of religion and religious symbols of tradition in a Modernized Culture ........................................................................................................41 Istvan POVEDK Bricolage religious experience ...........................................................................................42

Regina CHLOPICKA eastern and Western tradition in the Music of Krzysztof Penderecki as sources of Inspiration for the Composer and of Metaphysical religious experience for Contemporary Man ...................................................................................43

Session II C
Par Pahimi PATRICE Foi, intolrance religieuse et dconstruction sociale dans le nord-Cameroun ...44 Christiane SFEIR Le paysage sacr au Mont-Liban, entre pratiques sociales et mcanismes de sacralisation: les exemples dAnnaya et de Hardine ..............................................57 Krisztina FRAUHAMMER schriftlich formulierte Wnsche und Gebete in realen und virtuellen Wallfahrtsttten ........................................................................................................................63 ivil ADVILONIEN the role of Family tradition in Formation of Personal Faith experience and Practice Die rolle der traditionen in der Familie bei der Gestaltung persnlicher Glaubenserfahrung- und Praxis .........................................................................................65

Session III A
Emmanuel NATHAN of Words and Worlds: the Curious Case of saint Paul ................................................71 Satoshi KIKUCHI repeating Incarnation: Meister eckhart and the Problem of Christs Historicity ...............................................................................................................72 Valdas MACKELA seeing and Believing in resurrection narratives .........................................................77 Anna WIECZOREK tradition of the Genre in the Age of Intertextuality. Wojciech Kilars te Deum....................................................................................................77

Session III B
Orsolya GYNGYSSY Bonds and Memories in the sacred space......................................................................87 Gbor BARNA Via Margaritarum, the revitalized Cult of st. Margaret of Hungary and the spirit of Penance .....................................................................................................87 Hee Sook LEE-NIINIOJA Al-Andalus and Java: still a sanctuary for Interconnecting religions and traditions? ......................................................................................................88 Renata BOROWIECKA stabat Mater sequence in the Works of Italian18th-Century Composers .........95
4

Session III C
Salomja JASTRUMSKYT synaesthetical theology sinestezin teologija......................................................................................................... 103 Bron GUDAITYT Believe God or Believe in God tikti Diev ar tikti Diev ......................................................................................... 104 Povilas ALEKSANDRAVIIUS Martin Heidegger: from religious experience to a Hymn to Holiness Martinas Heideggeris: nuo religins patirties iki himno ventybei .................... 109 Rimantas VIEDRYNAITIS Aporia of Verbalization and textualization of religious experience religins patirties verbalizavimo ir tekstualizavimo aporija ................................. 110

Poster presentations ........................................................................... 116

Tetiana RIAZANTSEVA the theme of religion in the British Metaphysical Poetry of the 20th Century (Poetry of the new Apocalypse, 1939-1941) ........................ 116 Berel Dov LERNER How Did the Prophets Know they Had received Divine revelation? ............... 116

Saturday, May 12, 2012 Session IV

Marcello NERI From experience to tradition the Hard Path Backward ..................................... 124 Olga BRESKAYA religious experience without religious tradition and vice versa ....................... 125

Session V A
Tuija HOVI An ethnographic Approach to the Psychology of religion Doing research in the Field of experience and tradition....................................... 126 Sandra KRATAVIIT the Phenomenon of Christian Conversion in the Prison: Convicts Converts religious experiences ................................................................... 127 Milda ALIAUSKIEN the Place and role of the religious experience in the Context of Contemporary religiosity in Lithuania ................................................................... 134

Anita STASULANE From religious Participation to Political Participation: the engagement of young People in theosophy ..................................................... 135

Session V B
Agnieszka DRAUS Music as a religious experience According to Karlheinz stockhausen ............. 136 Vida DAUGIRDIEN Catechesis of the youth Groups of Liturgical Music ................................................. 141 Kinga POVEDK new Music for new (?) religious experiences ............................................................ 142 Danut KALAVINSKAIT religious experience through Music: Contemporary Lithuanian Compositions religin patirtis per muzik: iuolaikin lietuvi kryba ........................................ 143

Session V C
Aura KAIRAITYT expression of religious experiences in Lithuanian Folklore narratives ............ 146 ivil NEDZINSKAIT new Jesuit saints and their Meaning for the religiosity of the 17-18th Century: Context of GLD Poetics and Poetry nauji Jzuit ventieji ir j reikm XVIIXVIII a. religingumui: pagal LDK poetikos ir poezijos kontekst .................................................................... 151 Ilona IUAUSKAIT Literary expression of the sermons of Vaigantas .................................................... 159 Vaiganto pamoksl literatrin raika......................................................................... 160 Elena BALIUTYT eduardas Mieelaitiss Meditative Fragments Laments and reflections, with the Medieval Anchorite Grigor narekatsi, upon the Fate of Man and the Poets Creative Context eduardo Mieelaiio meditaciniai fragmentai raudos, apmsius kartu su vidurami anachoretu Grigoru narekaci mogaus likim ir poeto krybos kontekstas.............................................................................................. 160

Session VI A
Stephen M. GARRETT Hans Urs von Balthasars third Way of Love: the spiritual-Corporeal encounter of religious experience ................................ 166 Benas ULEVIIUS native or Christian: Interaction of traditions in Peyote religion ......................... 166

Irena Egl LAUMENSKAIT Conversion as a Personal experience in relation to the Meaning of Life events and religious tradition Atsivertimas kaip asmenikas patyrimas gyvenimo vyki ir tradicijos kontekste (konvertitai skirtingose krikioni bendruomense)........................ 173

Session VI B
Silvija RAKUTIEN the spread of the Apocalyptic Feelings in the Lithuanian Poetry of the young Generation .................................................................................................... 177 Magdalena CHRENKOFF Krzysztof Pendereckis Dies Irae Artistic expression of religious tradition ... 187 Elena SAKALAUSKAIT religious experience as expressed in Contemporary Visual rt ............................ 188

Session VI C
Rta BRZGIEN religious Poetry of B. Brazdionis: rhetoric of Form B. Brazdionio religin poezija: formos retorika......................................................... 189 Paulius JEVSEJEVAS the experience of tradition in the Giesm apie pasaulio med of s. Geda tradicijos igyvenimas s. Gedos Giesmje apie pasaulio med......................... 193 Virginija CIBARAUSK sigitas Parulskiss Poetry: Deconstruction of Underlying Principles of Being or the return of the Baroque? sigito Parulskio poezija: pamatini kategorij dekonstrukcija ar barokinio pasaulvaizdio manifestacija?............................................................... 199

Tradition and Religious Experience

Jean Emmanuel Le Taillandier de Gabory, CSJ The Monastery of Saint John the Theologian

The interaction of religious experience and tradition, from which it depends, becomes a crucial issue today when having doubts about the objectivity of religious experience. Many philosophers simply reduce it to the subjective dimension. However, religious experience for the faithful relates to the Reality. In order to express this experience he refers to Aristotle, who states this on his own experience of reality, which has been based on the judgment that reality does exist (existential decision) and therefore that the First Being which is called God in religious traditions can be contemplated. The philosopher contacts with the First Being only indirectly through his reasoning, arguing from reality while the believer says that by the faith he or she is directly connected with God. According to Thomas Aquinas, the intellect under the judgment of faith supports that very divine truth, even if the faith does not fully disclose it. The intellect even without seeing God approves him with a firm act of willpower, because it has a perception of entirety obtained or by obvious signs or by analogy. Then the intellect, which seeks to know God (we have a natural desire to know and contemplate the universal cause for everything), is led by willpower, which subsequently is attracted to everything by God the Goodness. It is understood that the matters of faith shall be offered to the intellect, and the latter, whether seeing a miracle or because of the compelling activity coming from a human inviting to join the faith, should accept them. It is also required that God in his own grace, should touch the intellect from its inside, because no one can know God without grace, which transcends the inherent limitations of human understanding. Then the believer has a true faith. Because of Gods action this cognition is more real than any other knowledge. However, in order to ensure the objectivity of this knowledge, it has to be tested by tradition (the faith of the Church), and does not conflict with the rational mind (the reason).

Traditions et exprience religieuse

Jean Emmanuel Le Taillandier de Gabory, CSJ The Monastery of Saint John the Theologian

La question de linteraction entre lexprience religieuse et la tradition qui en dpend est cruciale aujourdhui suite la remise en cause de lexprience religieuse comme exprience objective. La plupart des penseurs la rduisent en effet purement et simplement sa dimension subjective. Pourtant pour le croyant, lexprience religieuse porte bien sur le Rel. Pour le dire, il sappuie sur le Philosophe (Aristote) qui affirme en partant de lexprience de la ralit, fonde sur le jugement dexistence, par le raisonnement, lexistence dun tre Premier que les traditions religieuses appellent Dieu et que lhomme peut contempler. Cet tre Premier, le philosophe nen a quune exprience mdiate travers le raisonnement, tandis que le croyant en revendiquera limmdiatet travers le jugement de foi qui le met en contact avec Dieu directement. Pour Saint Thomas, dans le jugement de foi, lintelligence adhre la vrit divine elle-mme sans y tre pleinement porte par lobjet mais en sy attachant volontairement avec certitude. Elle ne voit pas Dieu avec prcision mais en gnral, soit partir de lvidence des signes soit partir de quelque chose danalogue (une proposition persuasive). Lintelligence, cherchant connatre Dieu (il y a en nous un dsir naturel de connatre et de contempler la Cause universelle) est alors mue par la volont, elle-mme attire par le Bien universel qui est Dieu. Il faut bien sr que les choses croire lui soient proposes et quelle assentisse soit la vue dun miracle soit sous laction persuasive dun homme qui exhorte la foi. Et il faut pour cela que Dieu la meuve de lintrieur par la grce. Car nul ne peut connatre Dieu qui dpasse les limites de la connaissance naturelle sans la grce. Le croyant a alors la certitude de la Foi. Cette connaissance est plus certaine que toute autre connaissance, cause de Dieu. Cependant, elle doit tre comme vrifie par la tradition (la foi de lEglise) pour sassurer de son objectivit et ne doit pas sopposer la raison.

Tradicija ir religinis patyrimas

Jean Emmanuel Le Taillandier de Gabory, CSJ v. Jono Teologo vienuolynas

Religinio patyrimo ir tradicijos, nuo kurios jis priklauso, sveika, suabejojus religinio patyrimo objektyvumu, iandien tampa esminiu klausimu. Daugelis mstytoj j paprasiausiai susiaurina iki subjektyvaus matmens. Taiau tikiniajam religinis patyrimas yra susijs su Tikrove. Tam, kad galt t patyrim ireikti, jis remiasi Aristoteliu, kuris tvirtina, turdamas savo tikrovs patyrim, grindiam egzistenciniu sprendimu, jog Pirmoji Btis, religinse tradicijose vadinama Dievu, gali bti kontempliuojama. Filosofas samprotaudamas tik netiesiogiai prisilieia prie Pirmosios Bties, tuo tarpu tikintysis teigia, jog tikjimu jis tiesiogiai susisieja su Dievu. Anot Tomo Akvinieio, intelektas tikjimo sprendimu pritaria paiai dievikajai tiesai, net jei tikjimo dalykas iki galo jos neatskleidia. Intelektas, nors ir nematydamas Dievo, dievikajai tiesai pritaria tvirtu valios aktu, nes turi visumos pagav, arba remdamasis akivaizdiais enklais, arba analogija. Tuomet intelekt, siekiant painti Diev (mes turime prigimtin trokim painti ir kontempliuoti visa ko Prieast), veda valia, kuri pai traukia viso ko Gris Dievas. Suprantama, kad tikjimo dalykai intelektui turi bti pasilyti, o is arba ivyds tam tikr stebukl, arba dl tikti raginanio mogaus tikinamos veiklos turt jiems pritarti. Tam taip pat reikia, kad Dievas savo malone intelekt paliest i vidaus, nes niekas be malons negali painti Dievo, pranokstanio mogaus prigimtinio painimo ribas. Tuomet tikintysis turi tikjimo tikrum. Dl Dievo veikimo is painimas yra tikresnis u bet kok kit painim. Vis dlto tam, kad bt utikrintas painimo objektyvumas, jis turi bti tradicijos (Banyios tikjimo) patikrintas ir neturi prietarauti racionaliajam protui (reason).

10

Friday, May 11, 2012 Session I

The Word or the Word? The Divine Experience as Mediated or Direct a Perspective from Biblical Spirituality
Christo LOMBAARD

A bst ra ct In this paper, a critical analysis is offered of historical and existential parallels between the experience of the divine will in ancient Israel and in modern Western(ised) societies. Such a broadly phenomenologically-comparative approach, possible within the theoretical parameters of the discipline of Biblical Spirituality, reveals unexpected correspondencesbetween ancient Israelite, particularly post-exilic, society and Christian experiences in modern and post-modern Western(ised) societies, specifically related to the ways in which the divine will is to be discerned. In post-exilic Israel, namely, contestation is found between the Mosaic law adherents, who would experience the divine will as mediated primarily by holy texts (the Pentateuch), and prophetic-tradition groups, who would understand the divine will as mandatedprimarily by the personalrevelatory experience of the founding prophet. Both these groupsexperienced their interaction with the divine as direct, because of the transformational aspect (albeit vested) inherent to their religious practices, yet both were experiences mediated by the tradition to which the respective groups adhered. This dynamic finds unexpected parallels in two of the prominent practiceswithin Christian circles in modern and postmodern Western(ised) societiesrelated to the ways in whichthe divine will is to be fathomed. This is namely found in the contestation between the Bible-mediated versus the charismatic experience of the divine. Although both socio-theological groupings regard their respective practices of experiencing the divine will as the most legitimate, they are not without mutual influence, which spring from their spiritual traditions. Not only do these latter-day dynamics parallel the ancient religious practices of experiencing the divine will, but they draw on those too, namely as constituting a foundational and legitimising part of their traditions.
Christo LoMbaard, professor of the Department of Christian Spirituality, University of South Africa. Area of scientific interest: Biblical spirituality, Pentateuch theory, the mass media and spirituality, sexuality and spirituality.
11

Tradition, Religious Experience, and Personal Commitment

Peter JONKERS

A bst ra ct In this paper I want to examine the question if the relationship between tradition, religious experience, and personal commitment is a purely contingent one, based on education, socialization, attractiveness etc. or that it can be substantiated in a more reasonable way. My starting point is the observation that in contemporary society (religious) traditions are becoming more popular, but that the reasons for this popularity risk depriving these traditions from their substance. Nowadays, the commitment of many people to traditions is a rather an instrumental one: people are interested in traditions because they see them as means to generate all kinds of interesting religious experiences, as instruments for their individual self-fulfilment, as purely contingent life-styles etc. In the central part of my paper I define the key-concepts of my paper: 1) religious tradition can be understood as a symbolic system (thereby following Lbbe and De Dijn), 2) religious experience can be defined as seeing things through the lens of this tradition (following Vergote), and 3) personal commitment to a tradition is a means of orientating ones life (thereby using Kants insights). Thereafter I will argue that a traditionalist approach to explain the relation between tradition, religious experience and personal commitment (as Rorty and Maquard propose) is problematic, because it only is able to explain this relation on psychological grounds, thereby dismissing the importance of reasonable argument and critique. Finally, by defining religious traditions as substantial ways of life, I try to give a less contingent and more reasonable explanation and defence of the relation between tradition, religious experience and personal commitment.
Peter JonkErS, professor of the Faculty of Catholic Theology, Tilburg University. Area of scientific interest: philosophy of religion, metaphysics, philosophy of culture, and history of modern philosophy (especially Hegel and his contemporaries).

12

Session II A
Religious Experience as Narrative: Reflections on the Advantages of a Narrative Approach
Ulrike POPP-BAYER

Three authors have significantly shaped the social scientific study of religious experiences: William James devised the research agenda for primordial personal religion, Wayne Proudfoot demonstrated the theoretical inadequacy of an unmediated experience and introduced the methodological distinction between descriptive and explanatory reduction, Ann Taves aimed at conceptual tools in order to bridge the gap between the natural sciences and the humanities. Relying on the first-person perspective, the adequate conceptual starting point for the study of religious experience is a formal-hermenteutical concept of experience linked to a narrative articulation. This approach may lead to a celebration of pluralism in religious studies without favouring any analytical concept from natural sciences, social sciences or humanities. To demonstrate some (other) advantages of this conceptualization the ongoing debate about the relationship between religious experience and its representation will be reframed and the common core debate concerning mystical experiences will get a hermeneutical solution. keywords: religious experience, descriptive reduction, explanatory reduction, formal-hermeneutical, narrative

Key Publications in the social scientific study of religious experiences

In 2011, the sociologist of religion James Spickard identified three books that have significantly shaped social-scientific study of religious experience: William James, The Varieties of Religious Experience. A Study in Human Nature (1902), Wayne Proudfoot, Religious Experience (1985), and Ann Taves, Religious Experience Reconsidered: A Building Block Approach to the Study of Religion and Other Special Things (2009). William James devised the research agenda, especially for psychology of religion, based on his famous narrow view of what religion shall comprise for the purpose of his study in human nature: Religion,therefore, as I now ask you arbitrarily to take it, shall mean for us the feelings, acts, and experiences of individual men in their solitude, so far as they apprehend themselves to stand in relation to whatever they may consider the divine (James 1902/1982: 31). To James, it was evident that philosophies, theologies and ecclesiastical organizations derived secondarily from this kind of primordial personal religion he wanted to study by analysing personal documents- especially from religious geniuses. More than 80 years later Wayne Proudfoot offered a critical evaluation of the possibilities and pitfalls of a Jamesian research agenda. Tracing the special interest in religion as experience back to the late eighteenth century, to Friedrich Schleiermachers
13

On Religion: Speeches to the Cultured Among its Despisers (1799) and its enormous influence on the ongoing debate about adequate conceptualization of the essential elements of religion, Proudfoot (1985) highlighted different notions linked to understanding religion as a primordial unmediated experience of the individual, e.g. offering a response to cultural pluralism by distinguishing the common immediate and unmediated (raw) experience and its different cultural interpretations or prohibiting every kind of (social) scientific or humanistic analysis, because these analyses would violate the essence of the genuine experience and reduce it to mundane elements. Although Proudfoot (1982) demonstrates the theoretical inadequacy of this understanding of religious experience (every kind of religious experience has to be identified as such in a description containing ample references to concepts and beliefs), he nevertheless stresses its descriptive accuracy. And this might be the unsurpassed merit of Proudfoots methodological and conceptual contributions to the study of religious experience thus far: he distinguishes descriptive reductionism from explanatory reductionism, suggesting that the former be avoided and the latter accepted. This means that a non-reductive social scientific study of religious experience needs to start by describing religious experience from the subjects point of view and accepting the reality of the object of an experience for the experiencer. Relying on attribution theory, Proudfoot also makes very clear that this perspective often includes specific explanations of the experience, while excluding others. Researchers need not, however, restrict their scope to this perspective. On the contrary, their task is to offer alternative (etic) analyses, interpretations and explanations that transcend the perspective of the experiencer. Disregarding whether we want to analyse the experience of Gods guidance, mystical experiences, the experience of demonic possession or that of prophetic vision, alien abduction or shamanic otherworld journeys, out-of-body or neardeath experiences, we have to start with a description of the respective experience or experiences from the first person perspective of the experiencer. Otherwise we would miss the very object we want to study. Then we may analyse, interpret or explain these experiences depending on our preferred analytical concepts or theories which will not offer the only acceptable understanding of the respective experiences but will yield alternative (and reasonably justifiable) analyses, interpretations or explanations of (aspects of) these experiences in a (social) scientific framework. About 25 years later a scholar aiming to bridge the gap between the humanities and the natural sciences in the field of religious studies wisely reconsiders the topic of religious exeperience. In her sophisticated analysis of the two components of religious experience, Ann Taves (2009) explicitly seeks conceptual tools that make it possible to combine historical, philological and literary scholarship with insights from psychology, the cognitive sciences and brain research. With her terminological shift from religious experience to experiences deemed religious Taves (2009) starts (like James and Proudfoot before her) with the experiencers perspective reminding us explicitly to avoid the conflation of scholars definitions of religion, religions, or religious with the understanding the research partners might have of these unstable and contested Western folk concepts which overlap in some cases and compete in others with a variety of other terms including sacred spiritual, mystical, magical etc. (cf. Taves 2009: 25). Using them as first-order terms enables Taves to analyse what is deemed religious, sacred etc. at individual, interpersonal, group and intergroup levels and to compare things that are deemed
14

religious to those that are not, in relation to broader processses of meaning making and valuation in which people deem certain things special (cf. Taves 2009: 12). Concerning the concept of experience, Taves acknowledges that this word may be used in different ways. In her book, however, she focusses on experience as a (rough) synonym for consciousness(Taves 2009:57). Consequently, Taves relies on insights from consciousness research and neuroscientific research for her analyses of different types of experiences deemd religious and the data potentially available for these analyses. But this conceptual decision is problematic, because it theorizes the analysis of experiences as the analysis of consciousness, implying a hierarchical model of the study of religion that starts with the brain or the mind and ends with the complex composites of religions. Here, rather than building a bridge between the humanities and the natural sciences, Ann Taves is favoring natural sciences as offering the foundations on which the humanities must rely. But this model does not fit our data in the first place, neither in the social sciences, nor in the broad field of religious studies. When we address religious experiences (or experiences deemed religious) we are in fact dealing with language in the form of texts or human utterances transformed into texts for further analysis, interpretation or explanation. We therefore need a concept of experience which fits this starting point. I would argue that a formal-hermeneutical concept of experience relying on Dilthey, Heidegger, Gadamer and Ricoeur would satisfy these requirements.

A Formal-Hermeneutical Concept of experience

According to Dilthey (1910/1981) experience may be understood as a complex, first-person relationship with the world in which perceiving, thinking, imagining, feeling, wanting, remembering etc. disclose the structure of an event in which I am the subject. Heidegger (1920-21/2004: 7) reminds us that experience (Erfahrung) denotes the experiencing activity, as well as what is experienced through this activity. He suggests using the word in this double sense, because it is essential in factual life experience that the experiencing self and what is experienced are not torn apart. Heidegger (2004: 8) describes what is experienced as world, not as object. Nor does he characterize the I-self via consciousness but describes it as a self-world. According to Heidegger (2004:10) I experience myself in factual life . . . in that which I perform, suffer, what I encounter, in my conditions of depression and elevation, and the like. I myself experience not even my ego in separateness, but I am as such always attached to the surrounding world. In any experiencing activity, I experience the world and myself as part of this world at the same time. With regard to the process structure of experiencing, Gadamer (1960) points out that the genuine experience is always negative; it is the disappointment of an expectation. Every experience has active and passive moments. Without actively addressing the world, without expectations, intentions, and actions, I would not have any experiences, but in the process of experiencing something happens to me as well. It is possible to plan activities, but not to plan experiences. And that is why Gadamer (1960) reminds us of the basic structure of the disappointment of an expectation. Related to my expectations, intentions, and actions, my experiences are always something more or something other than the fulfilment of
15

my expectations, the satisfaction of my desires, or the enactment of my plans or scripts. Although I am always already part of the world, my being-in-the-world (Heidegger) is specifically brought to my attention through these kinds of confrontations. They are interruptions in the continuous stream of life, sometimes dramatic confrontations-with the world, which ask for interpretation and reflection. The interpretation and reflection processes are necessary to shape and differentiate the meaningful whole of what is eventually articulated as an experience. And that is why Ricoeur (1991: 426) maintains that human experiences have a narrative structure: articulating this process of experience requires the plotting structure of stories that will enable the synthesis of the heterogeneous by merging multiple possible events into one event, unifying divergent components of human actions and interactions and transforming a mere chronological succession of incidents into the configuration of a meaningful temporal unit.

religious experience as narrative

If we could accept this formal-hermeneutical concept of experience linked to a narrative articulation as a basic conceptual tool for the study of religious experiences (or experiences deemed religious), this conceptualization could serve as a common ground for relating theological interpretations, philosophical interpretations, humanistic research, social scientific research and natural scientific research to each other.This conceptualization ties in with the methodological principle to avoid descriptive reductionism and to allow explanatory reductionism (see above). It requires reconstructing the experiencers narratives on the first place (and not the analysis of different types or levels of conciousness or mental processing), but it does not exclude the topic from these kind of analyses on a second or a third place. And it does encourage evey kind of literary, historical,sociological, disocurse etc. analysis as well. This approach may perhaps lead not to a building-block approach to the study of religion (Taves 2009), but to a celebration of pluralism and multivocality and lively debates in the field of religious studies without privileging any analytical concept from the natural sciences, the social sciences or from the humanities. . To demonstrate some (other) advantages of this conceptualization, I shall try to reframe the ongoing debate about the relation between religious experience and its representation. The formal-hermeneutical concept of (religious) experience does not enable a clear- cut distinction between a kind of raw experience on the one hand and its interpretation on the other hand.The process of experiencing always embodies expectations and intentions necessary for its identification and narrative articulation as a particular experience. But distinguishing the articulation of an experience from its subsequent interpretations is of course possible. To this end, it might be helpful to make an ideal-typical distinction between two formal types of religious experience: (1) experiences deriving religious meaning from the religiously structured expectations and intentions of the experiencer; (2) experiences deriving religious meaning from a religious interpretation by the experiencer. The first type has the experiencing-as structure John Hick (1969) has described. Many accounts of visions, voices, the sensed presence of God, the answer to a prayer etc. can be understood as examples of this type. Examples fitting the second type can be special experiences, for example having been rescued from a dangerous situation that the
16

experiencer can articulate in the first place without any reference to religion, and that he/she explicitly interprets religiously, for instance by thinking about that God might have rescued him/her. A special version of the experience/representation debate between the so-called perennialists and constructivists, known as the common core debate concerning mystical experiences, can also get a hermeneutical solution. As, for example, Wolfson (2011) has noted , the study of mysticism has to be respectful of the contextualist perspective. But in every kind of comparative approach notions of sameness are necessary in order to recognize differences and notions of difference are necessary in order to recognize sameness (cf. Wolfson 2011: 105). Commonalities and particularities are therefore the results of comparisons; it makes no sense to postulate them on the level of the experiences being analysed. But the notion of a common mystical core experience can already belong to the frame of reference of the experiencer and thus structure the very experience to be studied. Whereas Sharf (1998: 114) concluded that all attempts at conceptualizing inner experience are well-meaning squirms that get us nowwhere in religious studies, my impression is that an understanding of religious experience as narrative based on a formal-hermeneutical conceptualization of experience will yield the adequate conceptual tool to deal with some of the most intriguing research questions in the transdisicplinary field of religious studies.

references
Dilthey, W.[1910], 1981. Der Aufbau der geschichtlichen Welt in den Geisteswissenschaften. Einleitung von Manfred Riedel. Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp. Gadamer, H.-G. 1960. Wahrheit und Methode. Grundzge einer philosophischen Hermeneutik. Tbingen: J.C.B. Mohr. Heidegger, M. [1920-21], 2004. The Phenomenology of Religious Life. Translated by Matthias Fritsch and Jennifer Anna Gosetti-Ferencei. Bloomington: Indiana University Press. Hick, J. 1969. Religious Faith as Experiencing-As. In G.N.A. Vesey (Ed.), Talk of God (pp. 20-35). London: Macmillan. James, W. [1902], 1985. The Varieties of Religious Experience. A Study in Human Nature. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press. Proudfoot, W. 1985. Religious Experience. Berkeley: University of California Press. Ricoeur, P. 1991. Life: A Story in Search of a Narrator. In M. J. Valds (Ed.), A Ricoeur Reader: Reflection and Imagination (pp. 425-437). New York: Harvester/Wheatsheaf. Sharf, R. H. 1998. Experience. In M. C. Taylor (Ed.), Critical Terms for Religious Studies (pp. 94-116). Chicago: The University of Chicago Press. Taves, A. 2009. Religious Experience Reconsidered: A Building Block Approach to the Study of Religion and Other Special Things. Princeton: Princeton University Press. Wolfson, E. R. 2011. Teaching Jewish Mysticism: Concealing the Concealment and Disclosure of Secrets. In W. B. Parsons (Ed.), Teaching Mysticism (pp.103-117). Oxford: Oxford University Press. Ulrike POPP-BaiER, associate professor of Psychology of Religion at the University of Amsterdam, The Netherlands and Privatdozentin of Psychology at the University of ErlangenNrnberg. Area of scientific interest: psychology of religion, method and theory in the social scientific study of religion.
17

Wittgenstein and Religious Relativism

timo KOISTINEN

A bst ra ct It has been often argued that Wittgenstein and his followers hold that religious language has its own norms of intelligibility, and therefore those who are not familiar with the religious language game cannot grasp the meaning of religious beliefs and practices. According to this fideistic interpretation, Wittgensteinian philosophy of religion leads to a radical relativism which claims that outsiders can neither understand nor criticise religious beliefs. In this paper I will deal with Wittgensteins own treatment of the nature of religious disagreements in his lectures on religious belief. In the light of these lectures, the fideistic interpretation of Wittgensteins view of religion is obviously too simple. However, Wittgenstein is not an easy thinker, and his lectures are difficult to interpret for a number of reasons. I will explore Wittgensteins thought by referring to recent studies on these lectures by Cora Diamond and Martin Kusch, who in different ways both provide illuminating perspectives on Wittgensteins view of religious disagreements. keywords: Wittgenstein, belief, faith, disagreement Wittgensteins wrote little about religion. There are fragmentary remarks scattered throughout his own writings and throughout the material based on the conversations he had with his students and friends. However, in 1938 Wittgenstein gave a course on belief in Cambridge, and this course included three lectures on religious belief. These three lectures are published in Lectures and Conversations on Aesthetics, Psychology and Religious Belief (1966) [Hereafter Lectures]. Recently, two well-known scholars, Cora Diamond (2005) and Martin Kusch (2012), have dealt with these lectures. One central theme in their studies is Wittgensteins view on the disagreement between the religious believer and the nonbeliever. The question concerning the nature of religious disagreements is closely related to the problem of relativism, which has been a prominent theme in the literature on the Wittgensteinian philosophy of religion. Critics have often described Wittgensteins view of religion in terms of a distinctive religious language game that has its own norms of intelligibility. Diamonds and Kuschs interpretations of Wittgensteins Lectures call into question this fideistic interpretation of Wittgensteins thought. Their approaches to the Lectures are somewhat different, but in my view they both succeed in illuminating some key problems in this difficult text. In the following I will bring together Diamonds and Kuschs insights. I will also use a formal model that outlines the conceptual questions in Wittgensteins discussion about the nature of religious disagreements.

the model of ordinary disagreement

In the Lectures Wittgenstein contrasts religious disagreements with ordinary disagreements. The formal model of this doxastic situation can be expressed by using tools offered by epistemic (or doxastic) logic.
18

The explanation of formal symbols: B the epistemic operator believe a [small font] agent p some arbitrary proposition not/ it is not the case that & and Bap reads a believes p Bap reads a believes that not p Bap reads It is not the case that a believes p Here belief is regarded as a propositional attitude. The talk about propositional attitudes implies that one can have different attitudes, such as believing, hoping, fearing, etc. towards the same proposition. Not all attitudes are epistemic attitudes, and the relation between different kinds of attitudes is a key issue in my presentation, as we shall see. Given these preliminaries, an ordinary disagreement over the proposition There is a Swedish philosopher sitting in the pub (=p) between two persons Smith (=a) and Jones (=c) has the form: (1) Bap & Bcp (Smith believes that there is a Swedish philosopher sitting in the pub, and Jones believes that there is not a Swedish philosopher sitting in the pub.) In the case of an ordinary disagreement Smith and Jones share a common language: they both grasp the meaning of proposition p in the same way, but they disagree on its truth value. In this case, we say that Smiths and Jones beliefs contradict each other. Wittgenstein holds that the ordinary model of disagreement is more or less misleading when we consider the nature of disagreements in religious matters. Examples of the religious belief Wittgenstein often mentions in the Lectures are the belief in the Last Judgement and the belief in life after death. For example, in one place Wittgenstein says: (2) Suppose that someone believed in the Last Judgement, and I dont, does this mean that I believe the opposite to him, just that there wont be such a thing? I would say: not at all, or not always. Suppose I say that the body will rot, and another says No. Particles will rejoin in a thousand years, and there will be a Resurrection of you. If someone said: Wittgenstein, do you believe in this? Id say: No. Do you contradict the man? Id say: No. (Lectures: 53.) In the Lectures there are also many other remarks that have to do with the question whether religious and non-religious persons contradict or oppose one another, although it appears that they do. (I have omitted other remarks on account of the sake of limits of this presentation.) These remarks show that Wittgenstein is obviously puzzled by these kinds of disagreements, and in many places he speaks with caution. It is often difficult to see what he intends to say. I will start from the common fideistic reading of his views.

Fidestic reading
Kai Nielsen was the first to use the label Wittgensteinian fideism. In a famous article published in the late 1960s he argued that followers of Wittgenstein hold
19

that religious belief is intelligible only to those who participate in a religious form of life. Religion has its own criteria of intelligibility and rationality, and therefore outsiders cannot criticize religion. Nielsen, who was and is an atheistic critic of religion, regarded the fideistic stance as inadequate. Since then the label fideism (in one form or another) has repeatedly associated with the thought of Wittgenstein and/or his followers like Peter Winch and D. Z. Phillips. (Nielsen incidentally did not direct his critique at Wittgenstein himself. On the themes and the history of the debate, see Nielsen & Phillips 2005.) If one were to characterize Wittgensteins thought in terms of the fideistic interpretation, the ordinary model of disagreement in religious matters is in his view misleading, because believers and non-believers play different language games. The religious believer and the non-believer do not understand religious propositions in the same way; they do not speak the same language and talk past each other. Even a cursory look at the Lectures shows that the fideistic reading gives too simple a picture of Wittgensteins thought, and both Diamond and Kusch reject the fideistic reading of the text, but they do it for different reasons.

Diamond: variety of distances

Cora Diamond (2005) argues that the Lectures should be seen against a conception of language that is found (in somewhat different forms) in Freges thought and in early Wittgenstein. According to this conception, all speakers of language operate in the same logical space: when language is seen in that way, there are no different kinds of logic, but only one logic. All thoughts lie in one logically interconnected space, which means that, in principle, every thought can be understood by all speakers of language (Diamond 2005: 101). Controversies and disagreements take place in this common logical space. According to Diamond, in Lectures Wittgenstein opposes the picture of a common logical space. However, she argues that Wittgenstein does not replace this picture by a language game approach, which says that there are many logical spaces, i.e., language games, and which also argues that genuine disagreement between us presupposes that we are in the same game. The language game approach is then closely related to what I have called fideism: it claims that if the believer and the non-believer are not in the same game, they cannot contradict and genuinely disagree with each other. Diamond shows that in the Lectures Wittgenstein is not committed to the view that there are only these two alternatives: the model of one logical space or the fideistic model. Instead, the Lectures include a much more complicated picture of the ways we can disagree and be distant from the thought of others. She draws attention to three different types of case: (i) First is the case that I have above described as the ordinary disagreement. (ii) Second is the case where you say something which I cannot find it in myself to move with at all (Diamond 2005: 105). According to Diamond, this is Wittgensteins own attitude towards the belief in the Last Judgement. As we have seen in a remark (2) Wittgenstein says that he would say No when asked: Wittgenstein, do you believe in that particles will join, etc. Nevertheless Wittgenstein
20

holds that he does not contradict the believer. In that case I dont believe in this means, by using Wittgensteins own words, that I havent got these thoughts or anything that hangs together with them (Lectures: 55). For Wittgenstein the talk about the Last Judgement is unintelligible (or rather perhaps we should say: he cannot make any use of it) but he does not oppose it or say that the believer is wrong. (iii) The third case is the difference between an atheist and the assertor of the Last Judgement (Lectures 58). This case reminds us of the second case, for the assertor and the atheist do not share a mode of operating with propositions (Diamond 2005: 105). However, according to Diamond, the atheist mentioned in the Lectures, unlike Wittgenstein, is denying or naysaying what the believers says. Another example of this third case is the difference between a Christian and a Jew, who disagree on an understanding of what counts as the fulfilment of Messianic expectation in the Bible. In this case there is a difference in understanding what the Bible says, nevertheless the Christian and Jew may say You are wrong to each other (Diamond 2005: 105). Now, the formal model of ordinary disagreement (1) can be applied only to the first case, in other cases it is more or less misleading. Wittgensteins (=d) own attitude could perhaps be expressed by (3) Bdp & Bdp This is to say that Wittgenstein does not believe anything about the matter. (Note that Wittgensteins attitude does not represent epistemological religious scepticism: the reason for the lack of belief-attitude is not that he does not have sufficient evidence for p or p.) Wittgensteins atheist case is more complicated. Because the atheist (=e) is denying (or naysaying) p, his attitude looks formally like (4) Bep However, as far as I see, the formal model is inaccurate for Wittgenstein holds that is not clear whether an atheist understands p in the same way as the believer (see Lectures: 55). The main point of Diamonds comments on Wittgensteins Lectures is that there is not just these two alternatives: (a) either the believer and the non-believer disagree with each other (and speak the same language), or (b) they do not disagree at all (and speak different languages). Instead, differences and distances come in degrees and can take different forms. In some cases the believer and the non-believer pass each other like ships in the night. In other cases they disagree or even contradict each other, although they do not occupy the same logical space. Diamonds lesson to us is that disagreeing, contradicting and believing the opposite have several uses.

Kusch: extraordinary beliefs

Martin Kuschs (2012) discussion on Wittgensteins Lectures goes in a somewhat different direction. He starts from the two utterances: (5) I believe that there will be a Last Judgement. (6) I believe that there wont be a Last Judgement. According to Kusch, most of us would probably be inclined to think that if I say
21

(5) and you say (6) , we have a disagreement about the Last Judgement, and our disagreement is not faultness. Faultness disagreement are, for example, matters of taste. Obviously, all disagreements are not like this. In many areas of life in science, in mathematics, in politics and in ethics we do not think that all opinions are as good as each other. Does Wittgenstein regard religious disagreements as faultness? Kusch says that we can go in two directions in explaining Wittgensteins thought. Firstly, we can explain the religious disagreement in terms of incommensurability, which is basically the same as what I have called the fideistic reading. However, Kusch argues that the incommensurability thesis cannot be attributed to Wittgenstein. Wittgenstein holds, according to Kusch, that the non-believer can (or can learn to) understand the propositional content of religious belief. Secondly, it is possible that the reason why Wittgenstein does not speak of a contradiction between non-believer and believer is that he does not have the propositional attitude the believer has. This is the direction which Kuschs explanation takes. Kusch distinguished between two senses of belief: ordinary and extraordinary belief. He he finds both of them in the Lectures. Ordinary beliefs are associated with terms like opinions or hypothesis. They might be reasonable or unreasonable, they can be based on and supported by the empirical evidence. Extraordinary beliefs do not share these features. Wittgenstein notes that we use words like dogma or faith in talking about them. They are not confirmed or falsified by evidence. According to Wittgenstein, religious beliefs are firm, unshakable and they regulate and guide peoples life. (Lectures: 56-59.) We can now introduce a new symbol F for the operator faith, i.e., extraordinary belief. Then, in the light of Kuschs interpretation the genuine logical form of the disagreement between the believer (=a) and the non-believer (=c) can be expressed by the model: (7) Fap & Fcp (a has faith that p, and it is not the case that c has faith that p) The use of a new operator stresses the fact that religious disagreements are independent of ordinary epistemic disagreements. In fact, one could say that they are not epistemic disagreements at all: Wittgenstein says that evidence is irrelevant in order to accept this attitude (Lectures: 56). Kuschs analysis has many interesting consequences: for example, a persons (=a) attitude towards There will be a Last Judgement (=p) may take the form (8) Fap & Bap (a has faith that p, and it is not the case that a has ordinary belief that p) This might appear a strange formulation, but, as mentioned, Wittgenstein holds that it is a confusion to treat religious beliefs as ordinary beliefs. Therefore, in (8) I use the form Bap rather than Bap. Wittgenstein seems to think that treating religious faith as a hypothesis ends up with a view of faith as a kind a pseudoscience, superstition or suchlike (Lectures: 57-59). From this it also follows, e.g., that both believer and non-believer may share the same ordinary (epistemic) belief-attitudes. If faith, then, is not an epistemic attitude at all, religious disagreements are unlike ordinary disagreements. According to Kusch, the disagreement expressed in the form (7) can be called a non-standard faultless disagreement. He associates
22

it with a non-standard form of relativism that takes the form of the relativism of distance (Bernard Williams). By that notion Kusch refers to a situation where the view of the other is not a live or real option for me. In this situation, the question of the acceptance of faith does not arise for the non-believer, as only only a conversion, and thus reordering of all real or live options, would take [the non-believer] to the religious stance. Kuschs interpretation coheres well with some parts of the Lectures. However, many questions remain open. In this context, one question of special interest to us is: why is extraordinary belief (faith) a real option for someone and not for someone else? How could the distance or disagreement between us be described and understood in the light of Kuschs interpretation of Wittgensteins thought? This is a complex question. However, there is some evidence in Wittgensteins writings that he gives an important role to different personal experiences in religious life. In Culture and Value he writes: Life can educate one to a belief in God, and explains that by not referring to visions and other forms of sense experience but to experiences such as sufferings of various sorts (86c). This suggests that the relativism of distance has to do with differences in the lives we have led. These life experiences should not be not be treated as comparable to empirical experiences. The laboratory of life does not always produce the same results.

Bibliography
Diamond, C. 2005. Wittgenstein on Religious Belief: The Gulfs Between Us. In D. Z. Phillips & M. von der Ruhr (Eds.), Religion and Wittgensteins Legacy. Aldershot: Ashgate. Nielsen K. & Phillips, D. Z. 2005. Wittgensteinian Fideism? London: SCM Press. Kusch, M. (2012). Disagreement and Picture in Wittgensteins Lectures on Religious Belief. Retrieved from http://univie.academia.edu/MartinKusch/Papers/928873/ Disagreement_and_Picture_in_Wittgensteins_Lectures_on_Religious_Belief. Wittgenstein. L. 1966. Lectures and Conversations on Aesthetics, Psychology and Religious Belief . Compiled from Notes taken by Yorick Smythies, Rush Rhees and James Taylor. C. Barrett (Ed.). Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press. Wittgenstein. L. 1980. Culture and Value. Transl. by Peter Winch. Oxford: Basil Blackwell. Timo KOistinEn, PhD in Theology, Lecturer in Systematic Theology, Faculty of Theology, University of Helsinki, Finland. Area of scientific interest: philosophy of religion.

23

Presence of Absolute Oneness as non-Religious non-Experience in Plotinus and Zhuangzi

Agn BUDRINAIT

The paper analyzes a phenomenon that could be called a presence of absolute Oneness from the philosophical point of view. Descriptions of such phenomena may be found in the writings of the mystics of all major religions. The paper focuses on the notion of the Absolute and its presence as it is found in the writings of Plotinus and Zhuangzi. These two philosophers talk about similar state of wakeful though contentless consciousness despite of different intellectual traditions they belong to. It is not an achieved union between the human and the Divine and not a perception of the oneness of the world observable from the outside. The paper raises the question: even though such presence of absolute Oneness is described in terms of a particular religious and/or philosophical tradition, can it be considered a religious experience? key words: Oneness, Plotinus, Zhuangzi, mystical experience One of the longest-lasting discussions among contemporary scholars of mysticism is about the nature of mystical experience. A lot of different opinions were offered after Steven Katz formulated his constructivist theory. According to it, there are no unmediated experiences (Katz 1983: 4-5); all mystical experiences are a mere product of a particular culture and religion (Katz 1978: 56-57). Many scholars of mysticism noted, that the main and common focus of different mystical traditions is the exaltation of the state which will be named a presence of Absolute Oneness in this paper. Such state is not a simple pre-reflective state of consciousness as a part of everyday empirical experience. It is neither a total disappearance of consciousness. It is called wakeful though contentless consciousness (Forman 1990: 8; Stace : 41-51, 86-90; Wainwright 1981: 1, 5 and many others). According to the constructivist theory, the similarities describing divine absolute One in Upanishadic and Advaita Vedantic Hinduism, Sufism, Hasidic Judaism and Christian mysticism are mere coincidences. There are no mystical experiences; there are just experiences of the mystics. Accordingly, the presence of absolute Oneness is impossible. There can be only some kinds of cultural shaped experiences that are interpreted as the presence of Oneness. I see two possible preconceived convictions in the constructivist attitude towards the pure mystical experience or the pure state of Oneness: 1) negation of the very existence of the Absolute; 2) negation of the possibility and ability of human being to know the Absolute through unmediated experience of Oneness and without considering it as an object. In this paper I will discuss notion of the Absolute and the state of the presence of absolute Oneness as it is found in the writings of Greek philosopher Plotinus and Chinese sage Zhuangzi, especially in the sixth Ennead ninth tractate named On the Good, or the One and in the second chapter of Zhuangzi named On making things equal (q w ln). These thinkers lived in different ages, different cultures and had different religious beliefs. Despite of this, we can find similar descriptions of the notion of Oneness, its incommunicable nature and the general steps in the way of

24

seeking union with Absolute as well as conception of this union as a non-union. Comparing the texts describing the phenomenon that is called mystical experience now, we probably could find the alternative to the constructivist theory of Steven Katz and his colleagues or at least soften its categorical affirmations.

transcendent and immanent First Principle in Plotinus and Zhuangzi

Precondition of the presence of absolute Oneness is a belief in the ever-existing allembracing Absolute. For Plotinus this is the One and for Zhuangzi Dao. For both it is the self-sufficient inexhaustible source of all things that is totally transcendent. At the same time it is immanent through maintaining Being and all its forms. Talking about the absolute and transcendent One and its immanence, Plotinus outspreads it into hypostases giving them different names. He constantly reminds the listener/reader about the unity of hypostases and their conditional character. There is just the only and absolute One while hypostases and things are eradiation of it (Plotinus VI.8.6). Therefore word One seems to him an improper name for the Absolute along with all other names (the Good, the God, the Supreme) because they always suppose opposition (plurality, evil, etc.). Zhuangzi uses word Dao for the Absolute. This concept is common to all Chinese culture. Its meaning changes strongly according to the context and interpretation. In the writings of Zhuangzi, Dao, as the principle of Oneness, is used at least in three ways: the Great Dao, the Dao of Heaven and the Dao of man. Despite of making a clear difference between these concepts, (Zhuangzi 11) Zhuangzi constantly emphasizes the oneness of Dao and also states that no name is suitable for it (Zhuangzi 22). Both authors are concerned with the transcendence of the Absolute. The One or Dao is not an object of our ordinary experience or perception. The Way has its reality and its signs but is without action or form, as Zhuangzi says (Zhuangzi 6). That means, there is nothing for our mind or senses to grasp at. Plotinus sustains this outlook and eliminates the possibility to even imagine the One: The Unity is without shape, even shape Intellectual (Plotinus VI.9.3). While being totally transcendent and without losing its transcendence, the One/Dao is the source and maintaining principle of all things: Generative of all, The Unity is none of all; neither thing nor quantity nor quality nor intellect nor soul (Plotinus VI.9.3). Consequently, we cannot find the One either by simply looking at things or ignoring things as unrelated to the One. As we read in the Zhuangzi, you must not expect to find the Way in any particular place there is no thing that escapes its presence! (Zhuangzi 22). The relationship between the One and things in Plotinus can be misunderstood, especially when compared with the Daoist conception, in which the ontological hierarchy is not as strongly emphasized. It seems that for Plotinus the One is more real than things. The One is Supreme and First, it is full of Itself. Accordingly, everything else is lower, later, smaller and emptier up to the non-Being. The question of relationship between the One and Nothingness comparing with that between Dao and Emptiness requires a separate discussion that would take much more space than it is intended for a conference paper. The metaphor of light or sun strengthens this vertical character of relationship. Despite this, the One is always present in all things (Plotinus V.2.1; III.8.10) and
25

the One in its Oneness cannot be more or less real or unreal. We can reasonably state that differences arise according to the perspective from which one or another thought is told. The perspective of Oneness as a whole is different from the perspective of the One as the Supreme source of all Being and different from the perspective of things. Both philosophers are talking about central character of the Absolute. First of all it is a self-center, its own source, its own root (Zhuangzi 6). At the same time it is the center of everything, center of all the centers for Plotinus (Plotinus VI.9.8) and Dao shu the hinge of Dao for Zhuangzi (Zhuangzi 2). They both conclude that this centre is not related to time or space or hierarchical order, but rather to the equality of all oppositions in respect of oneness and harmony of the whole. It is obvious that for Plotinus and Zhuangzi the Absolute is the source not only for all things but for all human beings and all processes as well. Such an aspect of Deity we can find in most major religions. Naturally, religious texts emphasize not only absoluteness of God but His attributes, especially if we think about the conception of monotheistic God. Nevertheless, in the texts of Plotinus and Zhuangzi, the words and conceptions are employed for negation of any definition of the Absolute even if they talk about it as the One. The very notion of the Absolute suggests that the experience or knowledge of the Absolute is a non-religious state. Should the constructivists consider the question of Absolute, I suspect they would agree with that. One could not suppose all constructivists to be irreligious people. Rather, they seem to believe that they can disassociate themselves from their underlying religiosity and investigate the religious experience of other people avoiding their own subjectivity but preserving the objectivity of the research. The presence of absolute Oneness, however, supposes another precondition: the Absolute should be found without mediators, i.e. religious symbols and concepts. Negation of such possibility is the leading argument of Katz (Katz 1983: 51; Katz 1978: 26, 59).

Presence of Absolute oneness

The immanence of the Absolute as it is described in the texts of Plotinus and Zhuangzi creates the possibility for everyone to stand in the presence of Oneness, or in other words, to become this Oneness. The presence of Oneness is an aim of both, Plotinus and Zhuangzi, though both of them understand that human will and rationality is something to be put aside first and foremost. This is not a real aim that could be achieved through ones endeavor. The experience authors are talking about is hardly an experience at all because both of them suppose that the experiencer has to lose oneself and become this Oneness in order to experience it. No subject or object is left in the presence of absolute Oneness. To lose oneself is to lose the subject or the shape of the experiencer. To become Oneness is to loose all objects or the possible contents of the experience. According to Plotinus, man in this state loses his self-consciousness, his I-ness and any kind of intentional consciousness: The man is changed, no longer himself nor self-belonging; he is merged with the Supreme, sunken into it, one with it: centre coincides with centre, for on this higher plane things that touch at all are one (Plotinus VI.9.10). Zhuanzgi expresses similar thoughts talking about the true man, i.e. somebody who has reached oneness with Dao: He passes in and out of
26

the boundless, and is ageless as the sun. His face and form blend with the Great Unity, the Great Unity which is selfless (Zhuangzi 11). Accordingly, a man seeking this state has to become selfless, or no-I (w w). Both authors emphasize becoming, not experiencing or understanding: from many, we must become one; only so do we attain to knowledge of that which is Principle and Unity (Plotinus VI.9.3); forget you are a thing among other things, and you may join in Great Unity with the deep and boundless. Undo the mind, slough off spirit, be blank and soulless, and the ten thousand things one by one will return to the root (Zhuangzi 11). Paradoxically, the losing of ones I-ness concludes in finding ones true self that is united with the One or Dao. Loosing every thing one gains everything. Experience of everything is hardly an imaginable thing. Therefore the withdrawal of rational thinking is an essential condition of pursuing the presence of Oneness as well as it is its feature. As Zhuangzi says: return to the root and not know why. But if you try to know it, you have already departed from it. Do not ask what its name is, do not try to observe its form (Zhuangzi 11). The rational thinking divides everything and separates the mind from the world. It is the main obstacle to experience Oneness therefore and Supreme [...] is to be known only as one with ourselves. (Plotinus VI.9.10). I am not one with the Absolute as long as I am the experiencing or perceiving person. Only sunken into it and lost there I can achieve it. According to Plotinus, awareness of this Principle comes neither by knowing nor by the Intellection that discovers the Intellectual Beings but by a presence overpassing all knowledge. (Plotinus VI.9.4). Becoming simple and without diversity brings a kind of experiential knowledge. Not even knowledge but the existential and metaphysical steadiness that usually is called pure knowing (Plotinus VI.9.10) or knowledge that doesnt know (Zhuangzi 4). The presence of absolute Oneness is not an unnatural state for human being, according to Plotinus and Zhuangzi. They both use similar metaphors of the returning to ones own root and source (eg. Zhuangzi 13; 11; Plotinus IV.8.4; VI.9.9). The man who becomes pure and simple like in the very beginning can see not only himself but also everything and every thing in the true light. The presence of absolute Oneness does not eliminate the humanity i.e. materiality of a man. The man does not become the One fully and finally for he still is a man. After being in the presence of absolute Oneness, he can look at everything from the perspective of the One and also from the new, shifted perspective of things. The Oneness and unmediated contact are indispensable for the state of presence but return back to the rational state of mind and I-ness is indispensable for experiencing this state. The experience arises only after the disjunction of subject and object. The presence of absolute Oneness is characterized as fully conscious and even over-conscious state, though both authors agree that it is indescribable like indescribable the One or Dao is. Trying to understand this non-experiential state rationally, philosophers create distance from themselves and from the Oneness. They use concepts of their religious and intellectual traditions. Therefore experience is always shaped by culture, though culture is neither the source nor the content of the presence that goes before the experience. Appealing to the texts of Plotinus and Zhuangzi we can agree with constructivist theory that there are mere
27

experiences of the mystics. Equally we can guess, if not affirm, that there is also a presence of absolute Oneness and it is non-religious non-experience, independent of all cultural models that are used trying to realize and convey it.

Concluding remarks
The presence of absolute Oneness cannot be called religious phenomena because it is beyond any religious consciousness. It cannot be called even an experience or phenomenon because in the presence of absolute Oneness there is neither object, nor subject, neither experiencer, nor intentional consciousness left. This nonexperience of the present of absolute Oneness only later becomes an experience through self-reflection and reflection of surroundings influenced by culture and religion. No language is capable to express presence of Oneness even looking at this state from a distance and both authors are warning against misunderstanding of their words while talking about the One and Oneness. Why Plotinus and Zhuangzi are talking about such inexpressible things at all? Neither argumentation nor persuasion is the aim of their writings. These texts are just denotements of the possibility and ability of human being to know the Absolute without mediation standing in the presence of absolute Oneness. Plotinus says very clearly: to those desiring to see, we point the path; our teaching is of the road and the travelling; the seeing must be the very act of one that has made this choice. (Plotinus VI.9.4).

Bibliography
Forman, R. K. C. 1990. Mysticism, Constructivism, and Forgetting. In Robert K. C. Forman (ed.) The Problem of Pure Consciousness. Mysticism and Philosophy (pp. 3-49). New York: Oxford University Press. Katz, St. 1983. The Conservative Character of Mysticism. In St. Katz (ed.), Mysticism and Religious Traditions (pp. 3-60). New York: Oxford University Press. Katz, St. 1978. Language, Epistemology and Mysticism. In St. Katz (ed.), Mysticism and Philosophical Analysis (pp. 22-74). New York: Oxford University Press. Moeller, H.-G. 2006. Daoism Explained: from the Dream of the Butterfly to the Fishnet Allegory. Chicago: Open Court. Plotinus. Enneads. Transl. by St. MacKenna & B. S. Page. Retrieved from http://www. davemckay.co.uk/philosophy/plotinus/ Stace, W. T. 1960. Mysticism and Philosophy. London: MacMillan. Wainwright, W. J. 1981. Mysticism: a study of its nature, cognitive value, and moral implications. The University of Wisconsin Press. Zhuangzi. Chuang Tzu: Basic Writings. Transl. by B. Watson. New York: Columbia University Press. 1964. Reprint: 1996. Retrieved from http://terebess.hu/english/chuangtzu.html agn BudRinait, assoc. professor of philosophy at the Vytautas Magnus University, Kaunas, Lithuania. Area of scientific interest: religious experience, Eastern traditions of thought (especially Daoism and Chan Buddhism) and religious existentialism.

28

Anenaiki by Augustyn Bloch (1979) a Merger of Traditions in Religious Music

Krzysztof CYRAN

A bst ra ct Among dozens of compositions dedicated to John Paul II, Anenaiki by a Polish composer Augustyn Bloch definitely stands out. Its uncompromising modernity of sound, unusual approach to the textual layer and unique setting (16-part nonaccompanied mixed choir) make its specific profile. Whats more, despite clear historical context, it carries the message far from obvious. As for the text, Bloch uses two sentences from Latin and from Old Church Slavic (Orthodox). He also makes a mosaic of a few dozens syllables, connected in many ways: repeating, interfering, being only a sound object or creating words in different languages, all of which are fragments of prayers. The title itself, Anenaiki, is a Slavic word referring to old Greek melismatic chant. However, the composition made out of it - traditional Byzantine modal formulas - is considerably rich in harmony, colour and texture. References to Gregorian, Byzantine, Orthodox or Synagogal chant are organically immersed into modern twelve-tone language. Fundamental also is the way the text works here, moving from asemantics to allusions and citations to full semantics. Consequently, the Wort-Ton liaisons not only refer to tradition but also create new expressivesemantic qualities. From that point of view, the piece seems to be a good example for a real synthesis, avoiding the danger of eclecticism. The motto, Renovabis faciem terrae (and you will renew the face of the Earth), draws our attention to a biblical scene of Pentecost. The correspondence with famous John Paul II words: Let Thy Spirit come and renew the Earth, is astonishing. It seems obvious to point out the similarity of the pieces message a symbolic connection between East and West - to the popes ecumenical and universal approach to religion as a phenomenon of human life. keywords: anenaiki, Bloch, choir, religious, tradition As the composer himself wrote : I have entitled my piece Anenaiki for at least two reasons: firstly I liked the way this word sounds, secondly the contemplative or even prayerful character of chant suggested by the meaning of this word was special to me. The composition is based on apparently meaningless syllables excluding words Deum de Deo, lumen de lumine taken from a Catholic liturgical Credo, and a few words from Old Church Slavic (Orthodox) liturgy (). The piece has a contemplative character, being a kind of a prayer to Universal God (Bloch 1979). The title itself provides the clue to understand a musical content of the piece. According to the artist: Anenaiki is actually a Slavic word referring to old Greek melismatic chant. In numerous texts of liturgic chants used in Byzantium and later in Russia, () there were put byzantine intonation formulas, based on syllables such as ananeanes, neanes () etc. According to research, similar manner existed in Old Hebrew Synagogoue chant, in religious chant of Manicheism as well as of Tunisian Bedouins (Bloch 1979).
29

text
a) texts indicated by the composer: Deum de Deo, lumen de lumine (Latin) God of God, Light of Light Dnes Dewa raajete Tworeca wiesiemo (Old Church Slavic) Today the Virgin is bearing the Creator of all creatures Pokazujet zwezda Christa Sonieca (Old Church Slavic) The Star shows Christ the Sun b) single words in the score Haghia (Gr.) saint Sela (Hebr.) a calling from the Book of Psalms: with unclear meaning, probably referring to musical performance (Biblia Tysiclecia 2000: 1639) Alla (Arab.) God! Misericordia (Lat.) mercy Mose (Hebr.) Moses All of them regardless of a confession carry a religious meaning. c) The main part of the textual layer is a mosaic of syllables (see Tab.1). Seemingly meaningless, they are primarily a sound phenomenon. But their real function becomes clear only in cooperation with the musical layer.

Music
Its complexity requires pursuing for main ordering ideas. As detailed analysis shows, these ideas are colour and time, whose musical analogue are sphere of timbre and time organization. From a musical point of view, crucial here are sonic planes undergoing constant internal and external changes. What has been underlined in purely vocal setting, is also the colour of text articulation i.e. sonic richness of consonants and vowels. A full twelve-tone material is used, however undergoing a strict selection in each part of the piece. The beginning of phase B1 (m.111-132) would serve as an example: here are first presented and then overlapping the three types of harmony carrying a concrete stylistic connotations: the part of Bassi resembles Old Church Russian orthodox chant, that of Tenori Greek Byzantine chant, and that of female voices 20th century serialism. Thanks to material selection the composer successfully creates independent sonic layers whose overlapping makes not only strictly musical but also stylistic counterpoint. Time organization makes only the scenery for musical events. Time signature 4/4 has a strictly technical meaning, barlines are only visually ordering symbols. A neutral tempo value = 60 is constant throughout the piece, excluding the last minute (7% of duration) where it slows to = 44. The use of constant rhythmic unit with different rhythmic values without a meter makes pulse barely perceptible but subconsciously present, similarly to Renaissance tactus. As pitch relations are extremely difficult, perception needs another basis. The composer uses a kind of perception management presenting textures with different grade of legibility, from clear unisoni and homorhythmic chord shapes to micropolyphonic mosaics where differences are barely if at
30

all - perceptible. In this situation, it is harmonic saturation1 (Zieliski 2009;19-23) and contrasts of registers what plays a role of road-sign for perception and consequently particulates the musical form in an auditive aspect.

relations between music and word

It should be emphasized that three main texts mentioned by the composer: Deum de deo, Dnes Dewa, Pokazujet (see Tab.1) were set in different techniques. A particular space of word perception has been deliberately designed in solely textual layer - from asemantics to allusions to full semantics. The musical setting obscures its legibility even more and adds another level of allusions and citations (see Tomaszewski 1996). This deliberacy is visible in a deep disproportion between massive bulk of text in the score and bare chances of understanding it by the listener. When looking perceptively into the score, it becomes clear that the composer saying The composition is based on a p p a r e n t l y ( highlighted by KC) meaningless syllables gives a secret clue: a few sequences of syllables seem to carry a hidden meaning as an allusion or citation. This is indicated by the musical setting and/or often repeating of some sequences. The first case is (or are) eponymous anenaiki (plural), consisting of a psalm tone (echos) melodic basis with fixed syllables to help memorizing (Abijski 2011). The syllables ane, na, ne, ni and others similar to them (which Russian termed anenaiki) are known in Byzantine liturgical singing to be intonational formulae, whose function was to bring the singers into the tuning of a given mode or Tone. The Greek intonation formulae are as follows: Tone 1 ananeanes Tone 2 neeeanes Tone 3 aneeeanee Tone 4 nanaaaagia Tone 1 (plagal) aneeane Tone 2 (plagal) neeanee Tone barys (7)aanee Tone 4 (plagal) neagie (Gardner 1980:283-284) It turns out that many of them serves (although in hidden way) as a melodic constructional material in the polyphonic coil of Blochs piece. The second use of apparently meaningless syllables in Greek liturgy was kratima: a charismatic chant derived from hesychasm an ancient mystical monastic tradtion, called also chant of angels. From the musical point of view it was a melisma filled with syllables containing voiced consonants. The beginning of Kyrie eleison could look like this: Kyrie eee eee nenene nenene tororo tororo re ri rem, te ri rem (Abijski 2011)
1 That is a sonic quality of an interval or a chord, placed on a continuous scale from unison (saturation= 0), to euphonic (low saturation) to selective (high saturation). That continuity stands in opposi tion to an old dichotomy: consonant dissonant, giving more precise insight into physical nature of sound, not forgetting its expressive implications. 31

Theological meaning of this technique was to contemplate the word, to stop time. In non-accompanied choir voiced consonants simply imitated instruments forbidden in Orthodox liturgy (Abijski 2011). In Blochs piece the bell-like segment (m.65-83) introduced by syllables u-lu-lu refers to kratima. Therefore, all sequences referring to anenaiki or kratima although meaningless, indicate the relation to Greek Byzantine liturgy. The next allusion is sequence E-U-O-U-A-E, used in medieval Latin antiphonaria books as a shortcut for saeculorum amen, being itself a part of a doxology formula Gloria Patri et Filio. The composer proves familiarity with this abbreviation by using two similar versions E-U-LO-RU-A-ME and E-U-O-U-A-ME.23
Tabela 1. Augustyn Bloch, Anenaiki a simplified text setup, form, musical setting
Time 000 (approx.) Measu- 1-40 res Text A, NA, NE, A, NES 310 41-74 A, NA, NE, A, NES, HA-GHIA U, LU, 610 75-110 930 111-138 1200 139-153

A,E,I,O,U, ,,, Y

ON, AN, E-U-O-U-A-E Form The musical setting of the text a Asemantic character Structural birthplace of basic sound cells b Widening of sound: musically: wider ambitus, new intervals and chords, textually: new phones Sonic climax2: onomatopeic Bell-like segment built on the syllables on, an.

A, NA, NE, A, NES, A, NA, NE, A, HA-GHIA NES, HA-GHIA Y-U-A-Y-AN-ES dnES dEWa RaaJEtE TWorECa WiEsiEMO dEuM dE dEO, WA-HIT-RAS LUMEn dE LUMO-SE MinE MO-HOL-LEL, KUR-NA-NI-BA SE-LA MI-SE-RI-COR -DIA E-U-LO-RU-A-ME E-U-O-U-A-E, E-U-O-U-A-ME AL.-LA A-E-U-A C b1 Semantic clarity Climax of and legibility: both one-text two-choir dialogue heterophonic as in chord-stack well as different texture texts overlap Semantic cliping 3 max : Deum de Deo, the only understandable segment in the whole piece

PokaZUJETE ZWEZda CHRista sOniECa

a1 Legibility obscured by splitting into single syllables and heterophony Integration on the musical level: two twelve-tone series: a vertical and a horizontal

A particular code is formed by sequence Y-U-A-Y-AN-ES. Excluding Deum de deo it is the only text set in clear simple chord texture, so one can expect important message here. In fact, this is a musical citation a beginning of old Polish Easter song Chrystus zmartwychwstan jest (Christ is risen), whose vowels create above sequence. The melody clearly legible in the score is hard to recognize
2 3 32 See Tomaszewski 1998: 50-53. Ibid.

auditively in eight-voice semitone harmonization. The musical setting of the text Deum de deo is a stylization of Gregorian-like melody with similar harmonization, putting it also in clear 20th century harmonic context. One of very rare fortissimo exclamations calls Alla (m.109-111). Although very discreet, this could be a allusion to Islamic chant, perhaps Bedouins? It can also be guessed that numerous repetitions of sequence A-E-U-A means simply Hallelujah.

the message a reconnaissance4

Augustyn Bloch mentions contemplativeness as a main expressive cathegory of his composition. On a musical level it is witnessed by means such as: Time flow - long notes without a meter somehow stop time Lack of caesuras - the segments tend to overlap Abundance of pedal points (normal, multiple, internal and inverted) and drones playing role of local tonal centres Melic evolution a meditative multiple return to the original thought. On a textual level the crucial factor is asemantics which in Christian understanding differs a contemplative prayer from a meditative one. Still, rich theological content can be found here: three main texts are clearly christocentric, referring to Christ as the Light and the Sun, recollecting His double nature (born of God and of the Virgin). Besides, there are traces of numerous liturgical traditions; Greek byzantine modal formulas and graces Latin quasi choral melodies, allusion Saeculorum amen Polish a song Chrystus zmartwychwstan jest Russian polyphonic orthodox chant, the register basso profondo Hebrew Sela Arabic Alla The motto Renovabis faciem terrae forms the next interpretative clue. Its coincidence with the famous words of the Pope John Paul II said in June 1979 in Warsaw can be explained this way: although the premiere took place a month before, the motto itself appeared only in printed edition, therefore a couple of months later. How much the artist was inspired by the pope is an open question. What is undisputable, the fragment of Pentecost liturgy is by no means added ex post, but it highlights three important semantic fields already present in the piece: All mentioned traditions and nations in the composers commentary create an area of ancient universum - the Roman Empire, corresponding with the geography of the Pentecost Day. Mediterranean roots remind silently of deep unity between so understood East and West. Huge segments built on sequences of asemantic syllables refer to ancient Christian charismatic prayer in languages5, called glosolalia6.
4 5 6 A term by Mieczysaw Tomaszewski. Nowadays revived in many spiritual Christian groups. See 1 Corinthians 12-14 with footnotes. This way of prayer with meaningless syllables was also called the prayer of languages and St.Paul probably refers to it on the beginning of the Hymn of Love calling it the language of angels (Biblia Tysiclecia 2000: 1495-1498). 33

Christian Theology of the Pentecost puts an accent to opening the religion of God of Israel to the whole world, and theology of the Holy Spirit is a Christian approach to the science of universal God, to whom according to the composer Anenaiki is a prayer (Bloch 1979).

Conclusion
To read the message in the possible broadest context, necessary is referring to three main levels of meaning: In a musical sense this is a stylistic synthesis, but absolutely modern: the composer cares for stylistic unity of the whole piece, unlike postmodern polistylistic tendencies. References to Gregorian, Byzantine, Orthodox or Synagogal chant are organically immersed into modern twelve-tone language. A contemplative character, named expressis verbis, is accomplished by adequate musical means. In a literary sense - text selection and setup expresses a theology of universal God, based on the foundation of Christ and the Holy Spirit all-renowning Spirit of unity. Here contemplativeness is underlined by the asemantic factor. A ritual sense means how both musical and textual layers function in social context. Reading the piece in that way, one can find references to official liturgy as well as free, charismatic prayer. The unity of office and charisma forms a principle of functioning the Church as a social system. Just for these reasons, despite the artist places the message of his composition beyond (or above?) a concrete denomination, his oeuvre, still not fitting in any liturgy, fulfills all requirements of true church music, in which aesthetic values serve theological message and are rooted in an identifiable spiritual tradition. Highlighted by the composer himself, contemplativeness and universalism do not melt a cultural identity of the piece. It appears as a beautiful example of open religious art, inviting each man of a good will to experience sacrum in his personal way, according to individual sensitivity.

Annex: about the piece

Text fragments of the Latin Credo and Old Church Slavic (orthodox) and a few dozens of syllables from Greek, Latin, Old Church Slavica, Hebrew, Arabic and from beyond any language setting 16-part non-accompanied mixed choir (SSSSAAAATTTTBBBB) Year 1979 dedication Renovabis faciem terrae. Joanne Paulo II Summo Pontifici Premiere 12.05.1979, Warsaw, a chamber choir Ars Antiqua, Maciej Jakiewicz (dir.) First edition PWM Edition, Krakw 1980 recorded for the Polish Radio, performed by above, CD Augustyn Bloch, Intersound, Munich 1997 duration 14(ca)

34

Bibliography
Abijski, M. 2011. Prawosawny piew liturgiczny a muzyka cerkiewna. Rozwaania nad form muzycznej oprawy liturgii bizantyjskiej [paper presented at a national conference for music school teachers], 3 December, Warsaw Biblia Tysiclecia 2000. Pismo w. Starego i Nowego Testamentu w przekadzie z jzykw oryginalnych. Pozna: Pallottinum. Bloch, A. 1979. Anenaiki. In Programme book of 23rd Warsaw Autumn Festiwal, Warsaw Tomaszewski, M. 1996. Muzyka Chopina na nowo odczytana. Studia i interpretacje. Krakw: Wydawnictwo Akademii Muzycznej Tomaszewski, M. 1998. Nad pieniami Karola Szymanowskiego. Cztery studia. Krakw: Wydawnictwo Akademii Muzycznej Zieliski, T.A. 2009. Podstawy harmoniki nowoczesnej, Krakw, PWM Edition Krzysztof CYran, PhD student, Academy of Music in Krakw. Area of scientific interest: contemporary music, religious tradition, music and meaning, perception of music.

35

Session II B
Learning a Foreign Experience: the Beginning of Yoga Movement in Latvia
solveiga KRUMINA-KONKOVA

At the turn of 20th 21st centuries Latvia witnessed the fast development of yoga movement. Near the so-called fitness yoga now the most popular directions of yoga are Hatha yoga with such variations as of Ashtanga (dynamic) and Bikram (hot) yoga, which are formed only in the 20th century; Kriya yoga (focused on the spiritual practices and requires penance), Kundalini yoga (activates ones inner power, the Western world is familiar with this direction only in the 20th century), Tibetan yoga (practiced in the Buddhist centre in Baltezers), Bhakti yoga (yoga of devotion and sacrifice); Sahaja yoga (for cosmic force to enter in a particular human being), Tantra yoga (the so-called red yoga, mostly focused on the release of sexual energy). Today Latvian yoga groups also are both in Reiki and Sufi centres. Overall, there would be around 100 different yoga centres in Latvia and for such a small country it is quite an impressive number. The most of them are close to typical client cults described by sociology of religion. All centres are united by the fact that a large part of their offer is paid services for the interested customers. Namely, they form certain social networks offering their services, and the relationship between the centres leaders and followers are similar to the relationship between the doctor and the patient or the seller of certain goods and the buyer. Selecting a particular service, following the specific instructions and expecting certain results clients are often not interested in more information about the teaching of one or another yoga school. More important are evidences that skills of their instructors can ensure the expected results. Thus, compelling personal experience of instructors and good advertising of this experience are essential, even vital for the success of one or another particular centre. Because of this narrow practical orientation, contemporary yoga movement can hardly be called a philosophical or even more a religious movement, and this orientation also distinguishes the modern interest in yoga from that interest which appeared in Latvia in the beginning of the 20th century. Although at that time, as this will be seen below, the interest in yoga teachings was largely the result of a personal desire to extend human capabilities and limitations of spiritual experience. The aim of this paper will be to provide insight into the development of yoga movement in Latvia in the first half of the 20th century. The first data on a variety of yoga and famous yogis appeared in Latvia already at the end of the19th century, mainly in the press publications, as well because of people practicing some yoga techniques, like Hatha yoga. The broader interest in yoga (at least in Latvian society) we can notice only in the 1920-ties. So, this paper will focus mainly on the
36

archival materials, which reflect the gradual transformation of The Latvian Society of Parapsychology, founded in 1924, into the Latvian Yoga Society in 1939. The Latvian Society of Parapsychology was founded in 1924 by Emma Apare, Fricis Gailis, Olga Vanags and another 2 or 3 persons. According to the 1st paragraph of the Statutes of the Latvian Society of Parapsychology, its main purposes were to investigate and clarify various psychological phenomena and learn, and find out the ancient Eastern metaphysical teachings1. For this purpose, the Society was able to hold a variety of private and public lectures and readings, to collect a library and establish reading rooms, to publish and distribute books and periodicals, as well as to organize different occult experiments. For example, Fricis Gailis, one of the most active members of the society, organized sances of spiritism, which were very popular among other members of society. Emma Apare, who was the first head of the Society, interested in the questions of persons possible spiritual perfection. She knew the Vedanta and other Indian religiousphilosophical teachings, but looked at them mostly from theosophical and anthroposophical point of view. From 1926 up to 1928 Latvian pararapsychologists published literary-scientific and philosophically-religious monthly edition The Bells, edited by Emma Apare. In the Editorial of the 1st issue of this monthly, she stressed that first and foremost the edition will deal with Indian philosophy, given special attention to yoga and Vedanta systems which are still little known by general public. The Bells will deal with everything that is valuable in science, philosophy and religion, as well as will explore a variety of parapsychological phenomena.2 In 1928 Emma Apare left the Society, but some years later, in 1930, she together with her husband Aleksandrs Balodis established The Latvian Society of Spiritual Sciences and started also publishing of a new literary-scientific philosophically-ethical monthly The Crown. Starting the 1st issue, she pointed out that The Crown takes place of The Bells and that the Christian esotericism and teachings of Indian yogis are the principal names for our ideological concepts, as a clear material of our scientific mind which illuminates all the sites of the Christian doctrine, recently becoming a vanguard of contradictions and creating chaos. Thanks to this light, we can see such values of the Christian doctrine about which human being of our era is not even able to dream of. [--] We will present works of Abhedananda, Ramakrishna, Vivekananda, Ramacharaka and many other famous yogis. We will illuminate them in such a way that the reader could get not just abstract concepts, but would understand their nature and gain the wonderful strength of their power. [--] In other words, it will be the union of religion and science. This, in turn, will create strong, solidary, healthy minded collective that will form from itself the core of a new cultural era. The latter is also the mystical mission of our nation3. However, this edition was not successful and only two issues were published. Gradually interest in yoga was also reduced among the members of The Latvian Society of Spiritual Sciences. Emma AtvareBalodis and Aleksandrs Balodis left the Society in 1933 (they returned in 1935). Emma Apare helped her husband who, in his turn, in 1930-ties actively engaged in
1 2 3 Statutes of the Latvian Society of Parapsychology // LSHA, F. 2135, D.1, C. Nr.1. P. 120. In Latvian. Editorial // The Bells. Riga: E. Apare, 1926. Nr. 1. P.1. In Latvian. Editorial// The Crown. Riga: E. Balode, 1930.Nr.1. P. 2-3. In Latvian. 37

different experiments with aura and read more then 50 lectures mostly in Russian in the meetings of The Society of Cosmosophy4. Turning to a more serious yoga study took place around 1928 when Harijs Dkmanis (born in 1895), which in later years was sometimes referred to as the only real Latvian yogi, actively involved in the development of The Latvian Society of Parapsychology. Dkmanis, who daily worked as an expert in customs office and had a good knowledge of English, became well known for his consistent interest in yoga, presented in his public lectures and in several serious articles on Hatha yoga in the Bells. Dkmanis already had skills of Sanskrit and started to learn Hindi. A few years later, in 1931, in the letter to SRimat Kuvalayananda Dkmanis wrote: I have succeeded in rousing on interest in our country to the Yogic philosophy5. We can find a few records on the popularity of his lectures and their audience also in the protocols of the Society. Here is the illustration: Particularly encouraging is the fact that among visitors of lectures are people mainly from the intellectuals and not only the youth, the students, but between them we can see even representatives of the highest military and police departments, people with higher education and even the most outstanding graduates6. Such a success could be confirmed also by the fact that in 1934 the Society of Parapsychology was re-registered under the name of The Centre of Yoga Science in Latvia. The new name gave a rise to the need for emphasizing yoga not as a philosophical and religious, but rather as a purely scientific teaching. The changed Statutes of the Society indicated also the new targets: 1) A harmonious development of body, mind and soul; 2) Scientific techniques of the Self-realization, 3) To study Indian philosophy, given special attention to Yoga, Vedanta and Samkhya. 4) To study and interpret a variety of psychological phenomena7. In the local archives we can find a document, which provides a more comprehensive explanation of the Societys view on yoga. Most obviously, this explanation was written by Harijs Dkmanis. Here are some more extensive passages, making a clearer picture of what was the real content of previous mentioned targets of The Centre of Yoga Science in Latvia: In recent centuries, as a result of a long observation and experiments several yoga disciplines have been developed, which may be used according to human nature and the level of development of every concrete person. Thus, Hatha and Kundalini yoga with a variety of body and breathing exercises are taught how to manage your body, get blooming health and physical force to maintain a long youth. Karma yoga teaches life activity, unselfish actions and the active serving to society and humanity, Bhakti yoga to love God; Raja yoga is the path of the concentration of mind, which teaches how to manage our senses and mind and develop a strong will and ability of the concentration. Dnjana yoga or yoga of wisdom, which is based on a philosophical system of Vedanta, teaches people to know
4 5 6 7 38 The exact name of this society was The Society for the Promotion of Cosmosophy in Latvia. It was established in 1933 and was rather popular in German and Russian intellectual circles. SRimat Kuvalayananda. Yoga Mimansa. Kessinger Publishing, 2003. P.258. From the Protocol Nr. 5, 15 of May, 1934// LSHA, F. 2135, D.1, C. Nr.2. P.18. In Latvian. Statutes of the Centre of Yoga Science in Latvia // LSHA, F. 2135, D.1, C. Nr.1. P.93.

oneself, that is, our inner I and seek a higher truth a reality on which all the subjective and objective world is based, it is purely a philosophical method. All these methods are interrelated, since all they have one common aim, namely: harmonized and comprehensive development and perfection of human body, mind and abilities of soul. In recent decades, yoga techniques, especially of Hatha and Raja Yoga, have been scientifically tested in clinics and laboratories in India, Europe and America. [--] To get the correct information and materials, the Centre of Yoga Science in Latvia has established close relations with yoga institutes and other centres in India and America and therefore can provide to its members and the general public the proper yoga exercises and techniques, without any distortions and exaggerations, that has been so far done in the lectures organized by the Centre8. For the scientific evidence of the Centres view on yoga well serves also the book Hatha-Yoga practice. Asanas and pranayama, published by Dkmanis in 1934. In 1934, H. Dkmanis established closer ties with the Sri Jogendras Yoga Institute in Bulsara (India) and a little later, in 1935, the Centre of Yoga Science became a representative of this Institute in Latvia, but Dkmanis had been appointed as the only representative of this Institute in Europe. Relations with great yoga teacher Swami Sivananda and his Divine Life Society also were developed at the same time. As a result, Swami Sivananda kindly allowed translating and publishing in Latvian and other languages all his works, without any royalties, and such translations had also been successfully done. Here is a testimony about Dkmanis and his Centre left by Sivananda himself: Mr. Harry Dikman, the Director-Founder of the Yoga Centre in Riga, Latvia (Europe) is a good specialist in these Yoga-Asanas, Bandhas and Mudras and his opinion and advice to persons suffering from various kinds of diseases, curable and incurable, are increasingly becoming popular in Europe. I have not heard of another man either in Europe or in America, who takes such a keen and lively interest in this subject and is making researches in the same. You will be surprised to know that Mr. Harry Dikman is essentially a philosopher and a sage9. References to the activities of the Centre of Yoga Science in Latvia and, in particular, to Dkmanis can be found also in some other books devoted to the movement of Sivananda. One of these books point out: To take a typical case, the book Kundalini Yoga so impressed Mr. Harry Dickman, by its inestimable practical worth as a peerless guide to the science of Yoga, that the highly cultured Latvian gentleman has exhibited a miracle of industry and patience in making a complete translation of the entire work with all the diagrams, charts and illustrations faithfully reproduced. [--] As a devout offering, Mr. Dickman sent two cyclostyle copies of this translation to Swamiji and they now lie in the library at Ananda Kutir, silently testifying to the influence he is wielding in the distant West. It is a salute of the Occident to the Eastern sun. Swamiji takes great pleasure in showing these volumes to all earnest visitors and to tell them what ones zeal and enthusiasm for a Divine Cause should be.
8 9 Explanation of the Societys objectives and activities // LSHA, F. 2135, D..1., C.Nr. 1. P. 51. Sri Swami Sivananda. Practical Lessons in Yoga. 8th edition. India: Yoga-Vedanta Forest Academy Press, 1997. P.72.-73. 39

Mastering the technique of all the Asanas, Mudras, Bhandhas, Kriyas and Pranayama and drinking deep at the fountain of ancient Vedic culture, Mr. Harry Dickman was working untiringly for the spread of Divine knowledge and Spiritual culture. Arranging classes, instructing seekers and training workers, his activities have come as a glad answering echo from the heart of mammon-ridden West to the stirring call of this dynamic, divine foster-child of the fortunate foot-hills of the Himalayas. The elite of Latvia animated by a lively and active enthusiasm characteristically occidental, have taken up the ideas of Sadhana and service in right earnest. Inspired by the teachings and the influence of Swamijis work, the Yoga Society of Latvia has received a strong impetus towards sustained progress and looked confidently forward to vastly enlarged activities in the near future. Coming into contact with Swamijis writings, it has produced a marvellous change for the better in the activities of the aspirants there so much so, that they are determined upon great achievements, in the field of self-culture. So greatly have they felt the influence of Swamijis work and its value, that they believe him to have been specially chosen by Providence to enlighten the West on the subject of Yoga and Adhyatmic Sadhana10. The reference to the experiments of Dkmanis, which were mentioned in the previous citation, requires some additional explanation. Some information we can find in the Annual Report of The Divine Life Society of 1937. Thus, there is mentioned that Dkmanis taught effective practical methods for the maintenance of Brahmacharya11. [--] He gave also a demonstration of muscular control the most interesting was the intercostals control. He was able at his will to inhabit the functions of either half of the chest while the other half breathed most forcibly. He did another performance of stopping his heart at his will. In a few minutes he raised his heart-beat to 132 in a minute, and after a few minutes slowed down to 21 beats in a minute. He suspended the action of his heart completely for four minutes.12 Thinking about the various links of Latvian yoga enthusiasts with outstanding teachers in India and the U.S., question is how this relationship was maintained and strengthened: just by the exchange of letters, or however by the most direct contact, such as journeys to India. In archives only one reference to a possible more direct contact can be found: On April 4, 1940 Robert Legzdin read a lecture Three months with Sri Jogendra. So, perhaps Legzdin had been sharing in their personal impressions. In 1939, the Centre was renamed into The Latvian Yoga Society and under this name existed till the beginning of Soviet occupation in 1940. In 1939, The Society had 64 full members, but at the beginning of 1940 79 full members. There were people of different education and of different social groups. Engineers, civil servants, traders and other professionals, students and housewives they all together with a true zeal and great success learned sometimes very complicated yoga exercises. Their experience and the fact how high they had been evaluated by the outstanding Indian teachers of yoga is an amazing example of how it is possible to fully learn the experience of other cultures and religions, only by reading
10 Sri Swami Chidananda. Light Fountain. 5th edition. India: The Divine Life Trust Society, 1991. Read in http://www.dlshq.org/download/light.htm, 06.02.2012. 11 Brahmacharya is the term used for the practice of self-imposed celibacy that is generally considered an essential prerequisite for spiritual practice. 12 The Second Annual Report of the Divine Life Society. India: Rishikesh, 1937. P.24. 40

books. Perhaps we just do not know anymore how to read something so carefully. Perhaps yoga movement today simply have not such a charismatic leader as Harijs Dkmanis was for other enthusiasts of yoga in 1930-ties. The last protocol of the Latvian Yoga Societys Board was written on September 23rd, 1940. In archives there is no information about what happened to the Societys members after. However, the history of the Latvian pre-war yoga movement does not stop with the last record in the Societys protocol book. At the end of the Second World War Dkmanis arrived in Germany, spent several years in the DP filtration camp, then moved to England and later in the beginning of 1970-ties to the USA, where he became a well-known spiritual teacher in New York area. He is also author of the books Siva. His Life and Mission, published around 1947 48 and Yoga Chakravarty: Sri Swami Sivananda, published in 1958. Remembering the pre-war years, Dkmanis wrote: Many were cured from ignorance and get faith in the existence of God and Soul. [--] To the intelligentsia was given ample proof of the raison-dtre of the Science of Yoga13. Becoming a well-known yoga teacher in the West, Dkmanis again confirmed the amazing vitality of Latvian yoga movement as well as its unique ability to fully learn rather different spiritual experiences in a relatively short time.
solveiga KRuMina-KOnKOva, PhD, leading researcher, Institute of Philosophy and Sociology, University of Latvia. Area of scientific interest: phenomenology of religion, sociology of religion, new religious movements.

Detraditionalization of Religion and Religious Symbols of Tradition in a Modernized Culture

Alar KILP

A bst ra ct Theoretically, the paper follows Robert Bellah, Peter Berger and Thomas Luckmann, by arguing that modernizing social environment particularly structural changes in the economic production and means of communication, and the advance of consumer culture and mass society presents similar set of challenges for all religious traditions. In late modernity the general sense of transcendence tends to shrink and the mundane reality is increasingly perceived as the only social reality. The general trends of privatization, individualization and detraditionalization of religion, however, are paralleled by new patterns of cultural homogenization. Concomitantly, the crucial question is, whether the religious tradition which itself is modernizing in its social environment - succeeds in maintaining the connection to the political culture, because this connection protects it from the processes of pluralization and commodification, which in other spheres of social life including the sphere of religion undermine its social status.
13 Yogiraj Sri Harry Dikman. Siva. His Life and Mission [without the place and year of issue]. P.19. 41

Empirically, the paper focuses on two questions. First, what difference did the experience of Communism make regarding the cultural relevance of religious traditions? Typically, religion in post-communist societies is less detraditionalized, privatized and individualized, the identification with religion is more related to historic religious traditions than in Western Europe. Second, the increasing visibility of Orthodox, Catholic and Lutheran cultural Christianities during two post-communist decades is a novel ideal-typical pattern of fusion between nation, state and traditional Christianity. In this ideal-typical symbiosis, religious traditions function as a symbol of the community and identity, rituals and norms, which are defined by nation, ethnicity and culture. Empirically, Lutheran cultural Christianity conforms most to this ideal type and Catholic cultural Christianity the least. In all cases, however, the confessional traditions function as symbols of tradition in a modernized culture.
alar KilP, lecturer in Comparative Politics at the Institute of Government and Politics, University of Tartu, Estonia. Area of scientific interest: Church in post-communist countries, relationship between religion and politics.

Bricolage Religious Experience

Istvan POVEDK

A bst ra ct During the past five years the calendar of Hungarian festivals turned upside down. Along with the well-known rock festivals for the young (e.g. the Sziget) moving hundreds of thousands every summer, a new type of cultural festival is gaining tremendous popularity in Hungary. Both the National Assembly of Hungarians and the Kurultaj are patriotic/nationalist/religious-like, 3-day-long events moving all segments of Hungarian population from teenagers to older generations. Both festivals contain the following significant characters: patriotism, the revitalisation of Hungarian folk culture, anti-globalisation, anti-communism, close-to-nature ideology, religiosity (certain forms of neopaganism, vernacular Christianity, political religiosity) and a certain anti-church attitude at once. My paper will investigate the religious expressions, attitudes, experiences and rituals of these patriotic festivals. Are they really Christian rituals as it is advertised by the organizers and expressed by the participants or these are something more complex and complicated new type of political or national religiosity? What is the attitude of Christian Churches towards the festivals? Why participants of the festival organize pilgrimage to the neighbouring Roman Catholic Church and participate in pagan-like rituals at once? Why do they hold themselves to be Christian and rejecting the official Churches (mainly Roman Catholic Church) at once? Is it the re-awakening of traditional Christian values or anti-religiosity what can be experienced during these rituals? How these divergent traditions are elevated into transcendent sphere?
istvn POvEdK, PhD, Blint Sndor Institute for the Study of Religion, Szeged, Hungary.
42

Eastern and Western Tradition in the Music of Krzysztof Penderecki as Sources of Inspiration for the Composer and of Metaphysical Religious Experience for Contemporary Man
regina CHLOPICKA

A bst ra ct In his works Krzysztof Penderecki has raised grand themes of Christianity for nearly half a century and considered them from the perspective of contemporary man, asking dramatic questions and drawing attention of the audience to the world of universal values. He started from depicting the history of the passion and death of Christ in the light of two traditions: Latin liturgical tradition of the West (St Luke Passion) and Orthodox tradition of the East (Utrenya part 1: Entombment and part 2: Resurrection). In the cantata-oratorio works that followed the composer drew on Polish religious tradition (Polish Requiem, Credo) as well as on the tradition of German Protestant chorales (Credo, Kadish), and recently on the tradition of Jewish ritual mourning (Kadish). These works bring the message of hope and faith in spiritual values, which are meaningful for every denomination and every nation. The composer noted: My art, which has grown from Christian roots, aims at rebuilding the metaphysical space of human being, shattered by the cataclysms of the 20th century. The restoring of the sacred dimension of reality is the only method of saving man. In the above-mentioned works a special role is played by the meditative, prayerful movements which refer to another, sacred reality. The present paper aims at presenting the repertoire of musical means which constitute the basis of musical narration and communication with the audience as well as at specifying individual features of the composers music which takes us into the sacred space and time.
Regina CHOPiCKa, professor of Musicology in the Academy of Music in Krakw, Poland. Area of scientific interest: music of K. Penderecki, interaction of religion and music.

43

Session II C
Foi, intolrance religieuse et dconstruction sociale dans le Nord-Cameroun
Par Pahimi PATRICE

Introduction
Lexprience de la foi et de la conversion relve du spirituel, donc du transcendant. Cependant, elle est tout ce qui engage lhomme dans toutes ses dimensions, tant il est admis que sommeille en chacun la pense de lternit, la recherche de Dieu. Si depuis prs de trois sicles dj les tenants de la thse dite de la scularisation prdisaient la fin de la religion, jamais cependant les humains nont cess de croire au surnaturel, donc ce qui est qualifi tort ou raison dirrationnel. Aussi lexpression religieuse ou lexprience de la foi na t aussi dynamique que ces derniers temps. Car comme lattestent certaines tudes, il semblerait mme que la religion, mieux les religions, ne cessent de sadapter aux nouveaux cosystmes sociaux. Par consquent, on parle juste titre dune augmentation fulgurante de la thodiversit. Jour aprs jour en effet, de nouveaux mouvements religieux se crent, entranant ipso facto des vagues de conversions. Vrai zle pour Dieu, simples drives sectaires ou toute autre raison souterraine, l nest pas le dbat. Limportant reste tout de mme le rapport entre la ferveur religieuse actuelle et le clash avec certaines orthodoxies ou mouvements religieux classiques. Les conversions aux nouvelles religions sont gnralement trs mal perues, et entrainent une sorte de censure ou de dsapprobation sociale. Dans cette perspective, conversion et adhsion, surtout aux nouvelles glises vangliques ou pentectistes, sont indexes comme tant la base de la dconstruction sociale, et davantage des mnages, cellules de base de la socit par excellence. En effet, beaucoup redoutent la pentcotisation de la socit et donc ses effets jugs pervers. La conversion ou ladhsion dune personne ces nouvelles glises quon dit mystiques en raison des scnes de prires bruyantes et des pleurs intempestives, provoque son rejet, mieux une sorte de dsapprobation. Les concerns quant eux parlent de perscution, dintolrance religieuse ou de refus de la diffrence. De nombreux parents membres des glises classiques (catholique, protestante ou toute autre anciennement tablie) acceptent difficilement de voir leurs enfants arrachs par les loups pentectistes . Leur attitude semble relever de la volont de protger leurs prognitures contre ce quils appellent la vague pentectiste. Quoiquil en soit, la persvrance des nouveaux convertis, leur fermet finissent par arracher la rsignation de leurs contempteurs. Car plus ils sont combattus, plus leur mouvement (le nouvel vanglisme) stend, samplifie. Do lintrt que nous portons la dynamique de la foi, de sa pratique et de son emprise sociale dans le Nord-Cameroun. En clair, nous voulons montrer en quoi lexpression de
44

la foi religieuse, loin de toujours renforcer lunit familiale, est plutt bien des gards un facteur de dconstruction sociale au nom de lintolrance ou de la non acceptation de la diffrence. Pour rendre compte de la complexit du phnomne religieux dans cette partie du pays, nous recueillerons les tmoignages des uns et des autres dans une perspective critique et analytique.

I. Le cadre dtude : hommes et dieux dans le nord-Cameroun

Le milieu, les hommes et la religion
Lespace Nord-camerounais dont il est ici question stend entre les 6 et 13 degrs de latitude Nord, soit une superficie globale de 168.144 km (B. Gonn &Mbring, 2001: .4). Il constitue une zone dont luniformit du relief est quelque peu compromise par des blocs ou massifs rocheux qui dans lHistoire, se sont rvles tre des sites privilgis de refuge pour des populations en tat de pril face aux envahisseurs (Peuls et Europens). Le milieu physique est de par sa rigueur et son caractre plus ou moins austre, donc une zone de dfis surtout en terme de scurit alimentaire. En dpit de ce dfi plutt majeur, le Nord du Cameroun a t dans lhistoire un vritable carrefour des peuples et des civilisations. Il est en effet peupl dune mosaque de peuples ou groupes ethniques ayant des formes dorganisation sociale, conomique et politique souvent divergentes. La diversit humaine est de ce fait un important facteur de disparits. Par ailleurs, il convient dindiquer que le Nord-Cameroun connat un fort ancrage religieux. Les diffrentes activits humaines sont en effet fortement lies aux pratiques religieuses. On parle notamment des rites agraires, des ftes de rcoltes en clbration des divinits de la fertilit et de la productivit, ou encore des rites initiatiques. Dans la littrature ethnologique et anthropologique coloniale, il est gnralement fait mention des peuples africains comme des ftichistes, des paens et des totmistes. Ce qui coup sr aura eu le mrite de dnigrer outre les pratiques cultuelles, les croyances mmes de ces peuples, les prsentant ni plus ni moins comme des formes sauvages et irrflchies dexpression de la foi (Lire J. Benoist., 2009, dition numrique, Les Classiques des Sciences sociales). Cependant, seul lanimisme semble le mieux traduire la dynamique religieuse dans lAfrique ancienne. Cest de l quintervient la conscration du sacr et de la notion de sacralit, tant pour les africains dits traditionnels, lme de leurs croyances se trouve tre les forces de la nature considres tort ou raison comme tant les lieutenants des divinits puissantes, gnralement difficiles daccs sans intermdiaires (voir J. Lestringant, 1964 : 115). Notre propos dans ce texte est loin dtre une apologie des pratiques religieuses de lAfrique traditionnelle, encore moins un procs contre elles. Il vise plutt apprcier la dynamique religieuse en Afrique en gnrale et au Cameroun en particulier, et ceci la lumire des interfrences trangres, lesquelles participent du renouveau de la pense et des pratiques religieuses. Nous nous intressons davantage aux contacts non pas sur fond de choc, mais surtout dune complmentarit gnratrice des syncrtismes divers, et dans une mesure non moindre, dincomprhension, dintolrance et de dconstruction sociale. Comment en effet expliquer linfiltration et limplantation du christianisme dans un univers nord-camerounais fortement religieux?
45

Lunivers religieux nord-camerounais prcolonial

La spiritualit, le surnaturel, le mysticisme, le merveilleux et les croyances religieuses occupent une place de choix dans lunivers africain en gnral et nord-camerounais en particulier. Tous traduisent la volont humaine de percer le mystre de la vie, de la simplifier, mieux de la dominer. En tant que fait social, la religion fait partie intgrante du patrimoine culturel commun de lhumanit. Les peuples ont tous une ide, mieux une conception de Dieu. Ceci se matrialise par divers rites qui sans aucun doute sarticulaient autour des croyances et autres pratiques cultuelles. Dans lensemble du Nord-Cameroun, de populations ont t qualifies tort de paennes, sans doute en raison de la diffrence de leurs croyances et du caractre peu ordinaires de leurs pratiques cultuelles (Lire Lembezat, 1961). Que ce soit chez les peuples de montagne ou de plaine, le sentiment religieux est plus renforc et matrialis par la pratique de rituels divers. Si comme lestiment mile Durkheim et Rudolf Otto les religions sont lexprience du sacr et les formes lmentaires de la vie religieuse comme un systme solidaire de croyance et de pratiques relatives des choses sacres, cest--dire spares, interdites (cit par Douchin, 2009 : 1), il est clair dans le contexte du Nord-Cameroun que lancrage spirituel est assez notoire. Il sexprime dans la diversit des cultes dits ancestraux, des rites parfois jugs barbares et irrflchis. Ce sont ces diffrentes croyances peut-tre non uniformes mais riches de leurs diversits qui constituaient nanmoins ce quon pourrait juste titre qualifier de religions africaines. Dans cette mesure, il est impossible de comprendre les populations locales sans au pralable apprhender le domaine religieux qui en fait imprgne profondment la mentalit des individus (Bigo, 2005 :11). De faon gnrale, tous les aspects de la vie des populations sont rgls par la religion. Cela sobserve travers les rites de semailles, les ftes de rcoltes et autres conduits par les prtres traditionnels connus sous diverses appellations, et ceci dun peuple un autre. La pntration chrtienne et la vague expansionniste musulmane du XIXe sicle ny changera pas grand-chose. Il est vrai que lIslam est venu impulser une nouvelle dynamique socio religieuse dans le Nord-Cameroun, mais lessentiel des populations dites kirdis y opposrent une rticence quasi lgendaire1. Cest par exemple le cas des Moundang de la Plaine du Diamar, des Toupouri pour qui ladhsion ou la conversion cette religion nest ni plus ni moins quune forme dassimilation, mieux de perte didentit (Pahimi, 2010 : 64-66). Et mme il faut indiquer quavec lavnement du christianisme, on ne connatra pas au dbut une grande effervescence quant ladhsion des populations. Plus tard cependant comme lindique Rn Bureau, les diffrences de traditions de caractres tribaux et surtout la varit des expriences passes de la rencontre avec le Blanc influencrent la qualit et la forme de la conversion au christianisme. Aprs le renversement de lopinion (toutefois), se dclencha un mouvement quasi automatique dadhsion la Mission , (Bureau, 1964 : 97). Le paen autrefois tax de sauvage va la faveur des nouvelles recompositions sociales et religieuses progressivement intgrer le christianisme dans ses murs.
1 Pour une tude plus approfondie du phnomne, lire Kees Schilder, 1994 et Njeuma, Njeuma, M-Z.,1978, Fulany hegemony in Yola (old Adamawa) 1809-1902, Yaound, CEPER

46

Et pour preuve, on rencontre de nos jours dans nos socits, un bel exemple de syncrtisme, lequel est de loin un garant de la tolrance religieuse. La diffrence est quasi inexistante, ce dautant plus quon retrouve de par et dautre les lments du christianisme et des religions traditionnelles africaines.

II. La dynamique religieuse au Cameroun depuis 1990

Contexte social et juridique
Le rgime de culte au Cameroun est rgi par la loi. Dans un pays multiculturel et aux grandes diversits ethniques comme celui-ci, la rglementation des pratiques religieuses est dune ncessit imprieuse, tant la diversit peut donner lieu de graves drives, voire une profonde dstructuration sociale. Les bases juridico-lgales de lexercice des cultes au Cameroun sont notamment fixes par le dcret du 28 mars 1933 et complt par celui du 13 octobre 1937. Ces textes constituent pour ce qui est de la priode coloniale, les fondements de la libert de culte, du moins dans un contexte dEtat colonial voulu moderne.2 Dans le souci de prserver lordre social et la cohsion entre les populations, des dispositions similaires sont prises au lendemain des indpendances par le Prsident Ahmadou Ahidjo. Il sagit notamment de la loi n67/LF/19 du 12 juin 1967. Cette dernire sinscrit dans une logique de continuit, question de mieux cadrer les pratiques cultuelles. Quoiquil en soit, des pesanteurs sont observes et l, car entre le texte et son application il ya un gouffre. Selon les tmoignages recueillis auprs de certains chrtiens de la ville de Maroua3, la ville tait dans les annes 1960 en tat de sige, surtout en ce qui concerne lexercice de la foi chrtienne. Selon ces derniers en effet, le contexte de lpoque tait alors marqu par la volont des fidles musulmans dasseoir un rgime de prminence religieuse, et ceci sur fond dintolrance. Lexercice du culte chrtien tait soumis un tat de psychose sociale. Des administrateurs civils musulmans trop zls, ont souvent vers dans des actes peu recommandables envers les chrtiens. Virtuellement cependant, tout laissait indiquer que les populations ne faisaient lobjet daucune contrainte ni restriction dans lexercice de leur foi ou dans lexpression de leurs croyances au travers des cultes. Comment alors expliquer le contraste dune socit qui se veut pourtant ouverte et surtout dtermine relever le dfi de lintgration nationale par une cohsion entre les diverses composantes de la socit ? Le cas de la ville de Maroua mrite une attention particulire. Dans une large mesure, de nombreux musulmans de lre Ahidjo se sentaient en position de force face aux autres groupes religieux, et entendaient bien en jouir, mme au mpris des dispositions lgales. Beaucoup agissaient ni plus ni moins comme des roitelets en qute daffirmation et apparemment dtermins tirer profit soit de la complaisance des autorits tatiques, soit de ce quon pourrait qualifier de tolrance administrative.
2 Il faut indiquer que dans le cadre des cultes traditionnels, il ntait pas besoin dune lgislation caractre restrictif. Lexercice du culte, outre le cadre public, est avant tout une affaire de famille. Il est ds lors prsid par le chef de famille qui en assure la prennit au travers des rites et sacrifices divers. Pour des raisons de protection de nos informateurs, nous avons voulu taire leur identit. 47

Mme sil est clair que les textes disposaient dun cadre pour un libre exercice de la libert dassociation et de culte, il ne fait lombre daucun doute que le contexte socio politique des 1960-1970 a donn lieu quelque sursaut dintolrance, surtout en ce qui concerne la partie septentrionale du pays o on rencontre une communaut musulmane non ngligeable4. Cest sans doute en rapport avec les rminiscences dun pass plus ou moins tumultueux ou marqu par la prminence musulmane que de nombreux chrtiens virent en lavnement de Paul Biya (un chrtien originaire du Sud-Cameroun) au pouvoir en 1982, la ralisation dune prophtie. Cela fut dailleurs assimil une vritable renaissance chrtienne5, tant il devait marquer un tournant dcisif dans la dynamique chrtienne au Nord du Cameroun. Cependant, il a fallu attendre le dbut des annes 1990 pour assister un rel boom chrtien au Cameroun.

Nouvelle cartographie religieuse depuis 1990

La loi du 19 dcembre 1990 portant libert dassociation au Cameroun constitue un tremplin lexpansion chrtienne, surtout en ce qui concerne les mouvements vangliques ou pentectistes. Cest le lieu de parler en terme de vague pentectiste, mieux de dbut de pentectisation de la socit camerounaise. Le contexte des annes 1990 mrite une attention particulire. Avec le retour la dmocratie et la restauration des liberts longtemps confisques, le peuple bascule malheureusement dans la licence (Voir P. Pahimi, 2010, pp 219-221). Si pour les pouvoirs publics il tait question de crer des conditions dune meilleure expression des droits et des liberts, pour les populations au contraire, venait de souvrir lre de limpunit, dabsence de rglementation, et donc de clbration du principe du il est interdit dinterdire . Ds lors, on assiste mme dans le domaine du sacr, au rgne de lanarchie et de mpris des normes rgissant limplantation et le rgime des glises au Cameroun. A titre dillustration, lunivers chrtien au Cameroun est du point de vue lgal une vritable nbuleuse. Il existe certes une kyrielle dorganisations religieuses, allant de ce quon peut appeler les glises classiques (les Missions catholique romaine, baptiste, presbytrienne, vanglique luthrienne, Fraternelle luthrienne, Adventiste, apostolique, les Tmoins de Jhovah, lEglise pentectiste chrtienne du Cameroun) aux nouvelles glises ou glises rveilles , mais trs peu ont reu un mandat lgal pour exercer au Cameroun. Le titre de larticle publi dans le Journal camerounais La Nouvelle Expression du 08 aot 2008, Ces glises qui dfient Marafa6 est assez vocateur. Selon les rvlations de ce Journal, le ministre camerounais de ladministration territoriale et de la dcentralisation ne reconnat que 46 glises existence lgale. Et pourtant, larticle 23 de la Loi N90/53 du dcembre 1990 portant libert dassociation, dispose que toute association religieuse doit tre autorise. Il en est de mme de tout tablissement congrgationniste .
4 5 6 Selon les apparences en effet, il semble que le nombre de fidles musulmans dpasse de loin celui des dnominations chrtiennes runies ; ce qui nest pas vrai, surtout dans le contexte actuel de libration de Entretien avec Hamandjam Samuel, Maroua, 10 Mars 2012. Marafa Hamidou Yaya est lancien ministre camerounais de ladministration territoriale et de la dcentralisation.

48

En dpit de la volont de rglementation des pratiques cultuelles, le dfi majeur demeure limpossibilit de cerner le phnomne des migrations religieuses qui traduisent toute la dynamique et les profondes mutations religieuses en Afrique subsaharienne en gnral, et au Cameroun en particulier. La porosit des frontires et la libre circulation des hommes et des ides constituent dans une large mesure un amplificateur de la nbuleuse chrtienne au Cameroun. Les glises de rveil en provenance du Nigria et dont les mthodes dvanglisation sont axes sur la promotion de la thologie de la prosprit et le show vanglique, font en effet bonne fortune au Cameroun. Cest fort de lampleur du phnomne que Norimtsu onishi a dclar : si lAfrique du sud est le plus gros exportateur africain sur le plan commercial, le Nigria est son quivalent sur le plan religieux. Ses glises se dveloppent dans toute lAfrique et jusquen Europe et aux Etats-unis (Norimtsu onishi, 2002: 48). En clair, comment expliquer le fait que des mouvements religieux censs prcher par lexemple en matire de conformit la rglementation choisissent plutt la voie de la clandestinit ? Ceci devrait notamment attirer lattention sur leurs vritables motivations. Il est cependant avr que de nombreuses glises dobdiences diverses sont en comptition au Cameroun, et en cela, la partie septentrionale du pays ny chappe pas. En effet, profitant de la vulnrabilit des populations surtout en zone urbaine, les nouveaux mouvements religieux de par leur dynamisme ou leur rapacit, se dploient assez rapidement dans le Nord-Cameroun, et ceci gnralement sans existence lgale (voir Adjia et Nd Noutack, 2010 : 63). Elles ont ainsi en deux dcennies presque russi fragiliser les glises classiques (catholique, protestante en loccurrence) coupables de statisme ou de mutisme. Les stratgies mises en valeur passent notamment par la disposition des instruments musicaux (une source dattraction pour les jeunes), la promesse dune prosprit matrielle, de la gurison, dun emploi, dune restauration de la fertilit, bref une gurison totale par le biais de la prire et des miracles. Sous ce rapport, il est pratiquement difficile aux populations en qute desprance de se drober ce business de la foi. En dpit de cette menace relle, les glises classiques, les catholiques et les vangliques surtout ont opt pour un renforcement de lencadrement des jeunes qui sont dailleurs considrs comme une proie facile pour les glises dites rveilles. Aux expriences mouvantes de la foi, lEglise catholique semble opposer le mouvement charismatique. Ce dernier peine cependant toujours gagner ladhsion mme des fidles catholiques. Au total, le paysage chrtien nord-camerounais prsente quelques Eglises classiques qui de par limportance de leur extension sociale, constituent des poids lourds du mouvement religieux national et rgional7. Il sagit notamment de lEglise catholique romaine, lEglise Evanglique Luthrienne du Cameroun, de lEglise Fraternelle Luthrienne, lEglise Baptiste du Cameroun, lEglise Evanglique du Cameroun, lEglise presbytrienne, lEglise apostolique. Ces deux dernires connaissent une faible expansion dans le Nord-Cameroun. Les raisons de cette faible reprsentativit ne sont malheureusement pas explorer dans le cadre de cette tude.
7 Ces glises classiques sont en effet de grands propritaires terriens. Ceci se justifie sans doute par leurs investissements sans les uvres sociales telles que les coles et les centres de sant. 49

A ces glises classiques, sont venues sajouter depuis louverture de lre de la libert dassociation, une kyrielle dglises dites rveilles, encore appeles nouvelles glises. Ce sont notamment la Mission du Plein Evangile, la Vraie Eglise de Dieu, lEglise Frontires globales, lEglise Evanglique messianique du Cameroun, les Tmoins de Jhovah, lAssociation Missionnaire internationale, lAssemble de la vrit, la Communaut missionnaire chrtienne internationale, le Centre de Victoire Bethesda, lEglise Sion pour Christ, lEglise Messianique Evanglique de la Foi , la Winners Chapel, lEglise Christ Embassy, etc (Adjia et Nd Noutack, 2010 : 70-85). Il faut cependant indiquer avec Seignobos et Iybi-Mandjek que la reprsentation cartographique des diffrentes religions (au Nord-Cameroun) souffre de ne pouvoir runir les mmes types de donnes pour chacune Les bastions paens originels ont t trs entams par le proslytisme de lislam puis par larrive des missions protestantes, suivies des catholiques. . (Seignobos et IybiMandjek, 2000 : planche 29). Toutefois, il faudrait relever que les glises chrtiennes, au regard de leur dynamique actuelle, ne sauraient tre qualifies de petites colonies de chrtiens qui entretiennent une infinit de petits temples et de lieux de prdication servis par des vanglistes et des pasteurs locaux. En effet, les zones de plaine autrefois considres comme des bastions de lIslam sont de nos jours en pleine reconfiguration. De nombreuses glises tant classiques que nouvelles y gagnent de plus en plus du terrain, quoique le nombre de fidles ny crot pas de faon exponentielle. Pour tout dire, au regard du contexte actuel, on a limpression dassister dans le Nord-Cameroun une relecture des phnomnes religieux et de leur reprsentation sociale et publique de plus en plus accrue. Au del des clichs et des reprsentations que lon pourrait se faire de la dynamique religieuse au Nord-Cameroun, il est cependant impratif de faire une vritable autopsie de la cohabitation, mieux de ltat de la tolrance et de lintolrance dans un univers chrtien pluraliste. Il sagit en effet de jeter un regard critique sur le processus dintgration, de construction ou de dconstruction sociale la lumire des conversions ou des nouvelles expriences religieuses dans un contexte marqu par la vague pentectiste. Comment en effet les gens vivent-ils leur nouvelle foi, leur conversion ou adhsion aux nouvelles glises? Comment sont-ils perus par leurs parents, amis rests fidles aux glises classiques?

III. eglises classiques et vague pentectiste : entre clash et cohabitation

Vivre sa foi dans un univers religieux pluraliste
Lexprience de la foi et des pratiques religieuses participe au sens global de la dynamique socioculturelle. Cependant, le contexte de pluralisme religieux camerounais de par sa complexit, exige une lecture nuance de la question, surtout dans la perspective dune meilleure appropriation des notions de tolrance et dintolrance religieuses. En effet, contrairement la tendance qui voudrait que lintolrance soit caractristique des rapports entre religions traditionnelles et christianisme au Cameroun en gnral et au Nord-Cameroun en particulier, on assiste une opposition interne et souterraine entre diffrentes obdiences chrtiennes. Ceci est particulirement le propre des glises dites classiques lgard des glises
50

 rveilles , encore connues sous le nom de nouvelles glises. Sil est admis que lintolrance est la ngation de la tolrance, et que lexcs de celle-ci pourrait tre jug galement comme intolrable (Makram, 2005 : 326), dans une rgion fort ancrage traditionnel comme le Nord-Cameroun, cette question devrait tre des plus vives. Seulement, les glises classiques, en raison de leur ancienne prsence sociale, ont fini par saccommoder voire simposer comme des locomotives religieuses, mieux des rfrences incontestables dans un contexte pourtant pluraliste. La conscration du monopole des glises classiques est dailleurs conforte par les gardiens mmes des religions traditionnelles locales. En effet, des facteurs non ngligeables et pouvant rentrer dans la stratgie diplomatique de lglise catholique surtout, ont permis une intgration progressive des croyances chrtiennes dans les murs des populations autrefois fondamentalement animistes. Et pour cause, les glises classiques dans lensemble et lglise catholique en loccurrence, nont marqu aucune volont brutale de dissolution ou dextinction des croyances anciennes. Il est vrai que leur introduction dans un univers animiste et visiblement acquis lindpendance dun point de vue doctrinal a t cause de mutations socio culturelles. Mais le fait quelles ne constituaient pas une menace directe aura facilit la cohabitation. Ainsi, il est clair quavant lavnement du christianisme en Afrique, les populations locales pratiquaient des cultes ancestraux, lesquels seront progressivement infods par le christianisme (Messina et Jaap, 2005 : 238), mais cette considration est loin de traduire un lan violent de phagocytose. En effet, il faut indiquer que le phnomne dit de syncrtisme aura sans commune mesure permis la normalisation, mieux lapaisement des rapports entre religions traditionnelles et christianisme dans le Nord du Cameroun. Beaucoup en effet y vivent leurs croyances chrtiennes avec une forte coloration animiste, et donc une dose surprenante de tolrance. Ceci est sans doute rvlateur de la logique paradoxale des religions dites occidentales et de leur adaptabilit aux ralits locales. Au regard de cette considration, il apparat clairement que les religions traditionnelles en gnral semblent plus garantes de la tolrance mme dans un cadre pluraliste. Car, le plus beau spectacle dun mariage douloureux est plutt celui des relations souvent tendancieuses quentretiennent les glises classiques (catholique, protestante), titulaires dune sorte de chaire ou dun titre foncier inviolable, et les nouvelles glises. Visiblement satisfaites de leurs prestations, savoir leur palmars en matire de ralliement et de rconciliation avec les croyances animistes locales, ces glises anciennes ou classiques ont malheureusement vite plong dans un sorte de mutisme qui ne devait avoir pour finalit que de les rendre fades. Bien que continuant de charrier le plus grand nombre de fidles, les glises classiques connaissent nanmoins une dgringolade somme toute inquitante du point de vue de leur cotation sur lchelle de valeur religieuse. Beaucoup leur reprochent en effet leur mutisme, leur orthodoxie sans intrt, et donc leur rticence sadapter aux ralits contemporaines. Aussi, les programmes allchants, novateurs et porteurs despoir que brandissent les nouvelles glises russissent-elles captiver le plus grand nombre de fidles, et surtout les jeunes sans doute abandonns eux-mmes faute daffection, dattention et de valorisation. Grande campagne de miracle , programme spcial de gurison divine , soire de dlivrance et de
51

prophtie , telles sont les annonces qui continuent dbranler un univers religieux africain tenu des mains de matres par les glises classiques depuis la priode coloniale. Ce qui sans doute tmoigne de la visibilit croissante des manifestations pentectistes en Afrique subsaharienne en gnral, et au Cameroun en particulier (Mayrargue, 2008 : 1-4). Cest dans ce contexte marqu par la comptition lance par les nouvelles glises que sinstalle une logique conflictuelle qui, dfaut dtre ouverte et officielle, ne suscite pas moins entre les lments sociaux des tensions cibles. En effet, dans la plupart des cas, la conversion ou ladhsion de certaines personnes aux nouvelles glises est perue par la socit comme une marque de trahison, mieux une intolrable hrsie. Dans cette perspective, le principe de la dignit humaine et donc de lautonomie de lindividu, sa libert de conscience, le respect des croyances dautres groupes ou individus et la revendication du droit la diffrence culturelle (Makram, 2005 : 329) tel que souvent invoqu apparat comme un simple paravent. Dans lessentiel des cas en effet, ceux qui adhrent ce que daucuns qualifient de nouvelles croyances subissent une sorte de censure sociale, de dsapprobation, mme par les membres de leurs familles rests fidles aux glises classiques. A lissu des enqutes que nous avons menes dans la ville de Maroua et dans dautres localits du Nord-Cameroun, tout laisse indiquer que les glises classiques, selon leur zone de prdilection, sont vritablement considres comme tant les seules glises officielles. Mme des parents animistes tolrent mieux que leurs enfants se convertissent et adhrent soit lglise catholique, vanglique luthrienne, presbytrienne ou baptiste par exemple. Leur attitude dmontre en effet quil est mieux de sallier de vieilles connaissances que de pactiser avec des inconnus. Par ailleurs, selon de nombreux tmoignages recueillis par Ndongu Yannick auprs des convertis aux tendances du mouvement pentectiste, il ressort clairement que tout ce qui se nomme nouvelle glise ou glise rveille est officieusement traqu. De l la matrialisation mme de lintolrance. Si dans les textes lgaux la libert de conscience et la tolrance religieuse sont reconnues, dans la ralit sociale cependant, elle demeure difficile intgrer. Cest sans doute dans cette mesure que de nombreux nouveaux convertis se virent renis ou dsavous par leurs familles. Pour ceux encore financirement dpendants de leurs parents comme les lves et les tudiants, ils se virent suspendre les vivres, le paiement de leur scolarit. On estimait sans doute que la trahison tait grave et ne pouvait avoir pour seule rtribution quun tel dsaveu. En outre, on crut devoir limiter la vague pentectiste par lapplication rigoureuse des mesures dissuasives contre tous ceux accuss de prostitution ou dhrsie spirituelle. Quoiquil en soit, chrtiens et non chrtiens continuent de tolrer avec peine la diffrence religieuse. Pour justifier cette intolrance qui semble se justifier par linstinct de survie dans un contexte de pluralisme et de comptition religieuse, on avance lide selon laquelle Lglise ne perscute que par amour, et pour faire du bien; les impies au contraire perscutent par haine, et pour faire du mal; celle-ci pour corriger, ceux-l pour pervertir; celle-ci pour retirer de lerreur, ceux l pour y jeter. (F.Fuente Alcantara, 1996 : 29-30 ). Tout ceci cependant est loin de ddouaner toute attitude dintolrance qui ne ferait quentretenir la suspicion et donc la dconstruction sociale.
52

Vers une dconstruction sociale

Bien que gnralement prsente comme un ciment social et un important facteur de construction identitaire dune nation (J.Attali, 2010 :7, 9), la religion est reste dans lhistoire humaine la base des bouleversements sociaux en termes de construction et de dconstruction. Dans le Nord-Cameroun en effet, le pluralisme religieux est la base des jeux de recomposition et de reconfiguration socio culturelles. Cette rgion du pays est selon la cartographie religieuse locale forte coloration musulmane, du moins en ce qui concerne le dploiement ou les dveloppements actuels favoriss par linfiltration de nouveaux courants islamiques visiblement dtermins tendre les frontires de lIslam en Afrique noire en gnrale, et au Nord-Cameroun en particulier. La vague pentectiste qui, lobservation gnrale constitue un facteur de rvolution religieuse par louverture dune relle comptition, est venue modifier les considrations ou la perception du religieux. Selon de nombreux tmoignages recueillis auprs de fidles dobdiences pentectistes diverses, il peut tre clairement tabli que depuis dj deux dcennies, on assiste de nouveaux sursauts dintolrance ou de difficults accepter la diffrence. Les pentectistes dans lensemble sont perus comme des fous de Dieu dont le zle et les lans spirituels dbordent de vie et dnergie. Cette nouvelle pratique religieuse qui se veut novatrice, constitue un dfi la survie des glises classiques qui ne tarissent de rcriminations leur gard. Aussi les accuse t-on de nuisance sonore (expression bruyante du culte, chants qualifis de vritables tintamarres), de perturbation de lordre et de la paix sociale (Lindovi Ndjio, 2008). Cette description est releve par Maud Lasseur et Cdric Mayrargue (2011: 7-8) en ces termes: Depuis une vingtaine dannes, une prsence sonore croissante du religieux semble encore amplifier cette monte en visibilit : lie ... lhabitude prise par certaines glises pentectistes dinstaller des baffles sur la rue usage qui culmine lors des croisades dvanglisation organises en plein air, sur des places, des friches urbaines ou dans des stades , elle contribue accrotre la perception dun religieux omniprsent dans lespace public. Au del de cette considration, lomniprsence du religieux dans la sphre publique nest pas que porteuse de mutations positives. De nombreuses familles sont de nos jours en profonde dislocation du fait de lexpression de la libert de culte et de conscience dans un contexte lac et fondamentalement pluriel. Les dclarations bibliques sont en parfaite adquation avec les ralits du monde chrtien actuel. Dans la prparation de ses disciples aux perscutions venir, Jsus-Christ leur a tenu les propos ci-aprs: Ne croyez pas que je sois venu apporter la paix sur la terre; je suis pas venu apporter la paix, mais lpe. Car je suis venu apporter mettre la division entre lhomme et son pre, entre la fille et sa mre, entre la belle fille et sa belle-mre; et lhomme aura pour ennemis les gens de sa maison 8. Ces paroles de haute porte prophtique sont de nos jours en plein accomplissement. La situation est par ailleurs presque insoutenable dans les familles o le pluralisme, loin de garantir le libre choix, est plutt une cause majeure de discorde
8 La Sainte Bible, (Evangile selon Mathieu, Chapitre 10, versets 34 36. 53

et dincomprhension. Dans lessentiel des cas, les familles les plus menaces de dislocation sont celles o il nexiste aucune uniformit religieuse. Le cas de figure ci-aprs est sans doute vocateur : un pre de famille dobdience fraternelle luthrienne, une mre de famille catholique, un des enfants musulmans. Ce qui en fait devrait tre une source de richesse du fait de la complmentarit, nen est malheureusement pas dans le contexte nord-camerounais. Chacun a en effet pour ennemi les gens de sa famille. A cela sajoute la pression sociale, son jugement plus ou moins radical et dnu de toute tolrance. En effet, il est devenu prilleux pour certains sous peine dabandon ou de reniement, dadhrer aux nouvelles glises, quelle que soit la beaut et la pertinence du message vanglique prsent. Pour apprcier la dynamique paradoxale du christianisme et du dploiement redout des glises pentectistes, nous rapportons titre dexemple, un tmoignage sans doute rvlateur de la sant des rapports entre glises classiques et glises rveilles: Je me nomme Mbraogu. Je suis issu dune famille de longue tradition catholique. Depuis ma tendre enfance, jai t enseign selon les normes et la tradition catholique, baptis quelques mois aprs ma naissance puis confirm par Mgr, vque de son tat, et au regard de lglise, rempli dune onction divine. De ce point de vue, jtais un privilgi, car tre baptis ou confirm par lvque en personne semble confrer un certain prestige spirituel. Cependant, ma vie chrtienne pendant mes vingt premires annes ne fut que suivisme, donc sans vritable exprience personnelle de vie avec Dieu. Jtais engag dans ce quon appelle gnralement la foi du charbonnier, laquelle consiste faire ce quon voit les autres faire, juste par conformisme. Quand jatteignis lge de 22 ans et que jtais en deuxime anne de facult, quelques amis du Deeper Life9 minvitrent une croisade qui allait tre un tournant dcisif dans mon parcours chrtien. Un jeune pasteur zl et visiblement ptrie de la connaissance de Dieu et ayant de par sa posture, une relle passion pour les mes. Il mblouit par son sermon et je maperus pour la premire fois que javais besoin dun renouvellement spirituel, dune reconversion. Je ne savais pas en allant cette croisade que ma vie allait basculer. Avec une ferveur jamais vcue auparavant, je mengageai dans le Deeper life et reus le baptme par immersion dj contraire aux pratiques de certaines glises classiques linstar de mon glise dorigine. Jtais cependant loin dimaginer les consquences de ma conversion qui dans ma famille fut perue comme une marque de dfiance. On rapporta mes parents que leur enfant tait entrain de sombrer dans lhrsie, quil avait reni la foi et les principes de la sainte glise catholique romaine . Dsempars et courroucs, mes parents ne savaient comment braver le jugement de la communaut locale. Pour eux en effet, ladhsion au Deeper Life tait symbole de pacte avec le diable, dassociation avec les magiciens, lglise des pleureurs attitrs. Il leur fallait dans cette mesure me dsapprouver par une censure sans complaisance. Je fus mis en quarantaine et vis mes subsides suspendus. Pendant les deux annes qui suivirent, je ne reus ni mandat, ni frais de scolarit. En tant que garant de lintgrit et de lorthodoxie catholique familiale, mon pre me bannis et minterdit de franchir le seuil du domicile familial, et ce jusqu sa mort. Pour moi commenait une longue vie de calvaire, de dfis. Je maperus de
9 54 Eglise biblique de la vie profonde.

la pertinence des paroles de Jsus-Christ qui affirmait tre venu non apporter la paix mais le trouble. Je suis devenu tranger dans ma propre famille, un vritable paria pour mes frres et mes amis qui, du fait de mes nouvelles croyances, eurent ds lors mon gard que crainte et rpugnance. Je venais en fait de raliser que la tolrance religieuse nest quune ralit dans les textes10. Ce tmoignage sans doute pathtique traduit le contraste dune socit qui se veut lac. Dans lensemble, la lecture quon peut faire de la rticence des gens lendroit des mouvements pentectistes, cest le sentiment de crainte de linconnu. De nombreux parents justifient leur attitude lgard de leurs enfants dsormais adeptes des glises dites rveilles par un sentiment dchec. Ils estiment avoir manqu leur devoir dencadrement, de prservation, selon que le dclare le Livre des Proverbes au chapitre 22, le verset 6 : instruis lenfant selon la voie quil doit suivre. Quand il sera grand, il ne sen dtournera pas . Aussi se laissentils aller une culpabilit dont ils peinent pendant de nombreuses annes encore sen remettre. Le constat de nos jours est que de nombreuses glises au niveau local ne russissent plus capter une masse critique de fidles suffisante pour leur permettre de poursuivre leur travail de construction communautaire (C.Mayrargue, 2004 : 102). La comptition religieuse semble sous ce rapport renforcer linstinct de survie des diffrentes obdiences. La dconstruction sociale semble plus que jamais consacre au Nord-Cameroun depuis le retour la dmocratie et la restauration des liberts. Ces facteurs qui participent de la dynamique sociale, ont cependant mis en place une atmosphre trouble. Au nom de Dieu, des frres et surs sexcluent de la communaut familiale, se combattent. Tout ceci ne tient certainement pas la pluralit de Dieu, mais bien la divergence des points doctrinaux.

Conclusion
Le Nord-Cameroun est depuis le XIXe sicle un vaste champ de comptition religieuse. Dans cet univers autrefois profondment animiste et pour certains ftichiste, on a assist linfiltration ds le XIXe sicle du christianisme et de lIslam. Ces deux dernires religions essentiellement trangres, introduisirent sans aucun doute des bouleversements sociaux et culturels importants. Cependant, dfaut de se laisser phagocyter par le christianisme dont il est principalement question dans cette tude, les religions dites traditionnelles ou les croyances locales en intgrrent certaines principes non contradictoires, ou du moins peu nocifs. Cest ce quon a appel le syncrtisme. La priode coloniale sera sans doute un tournant dcisif dans lexpansion du christianisme dans cette rgion du Nord-Cameroun o lIslam venait de simplanter la faveur du jihad ou conqute religieuse. Depuis ces deux dernires dcennies cependant, on a assist une vritable reconfiguration de lunivers religieux qui dsormais intgre de nombreuses obdiences pentectistes, lesquelles constituent fondamentalement une menace pour la sphre dinfluence, de prestige des glises dites classiques linstar de lEglise catholique romaine, des glises luthriennes,
10 Ce tmoignage a t recueilli par Ndongu Yannick Maroua au mois de mars 2012. Par mesure de protection de la source de linformation, le nom port est juste indicatif. 55

etc. Ceci a donn lieu une relle dconstruction sociale, notamment avec des msententes sur fond dintolrance ou de refus de la diffrence. Le cadre juridicolgal pour une meilleure expression de foi chrtienne est soumise dure preuve du fait des lans dintolrance ou des antagonismes entre fidles des glises classiques et ceux du mouvement pentectiste. La socit nord-camerounaise est du fait du pluralisme religieux, devenue une zone de dploiement des controverses. Le christianisme, au lieu dtre un ciment social est devenu un important facteur de dconstruction, mieux de perturbation dun univers religieux autrefois peu agit.

Bibliographie
Ouvrages
Benoist, J., 2009, Kirdi au bord du monde, Classiques des Sciences sociales, dition numrique, Bigo, S., Un certain regard sur le cheval et sur le monde. Lhomme de lAfrique Noire, 2OO5 Lembezat, B., les populations paennes du Nord Cameroun et de lAdamaoua, Paris, PUF, 1961 Messina, J-P, et Jaap, S 2005, Histoire du Christianisme au Cameroun des Origines a nos jours ; Approche Oecumnique, Paris, Karthala, p .238.) Schilder, K., 1994, Schilder, K, 1994, Quest for esteem: State, Islam and Mundang ethnicity in Northern Cameroon, Leiden, ASC. Njeuma, M-Z.,1978, Fulany hegemony in Yola (old Adamawa) 1809-1902, Yaound, CEPER

Articles
Attali, J., 2010, Religions et gopolitique , in The Paris globalist - VOL. IV N1. Douchin, E., Religions, magie, superstitions et sectes , Confrence du 05 fvrier 2009. Fuente Alcantara (d.), Cultura de la tolerancia, Fundacin Pablo VI BAC Madrid -70 Lindovi Ndjio, Ambiance : Nuisance sonore au nom de Dieu , in La Nouvelle Expression -du 08 aot 2008 Makram Abbes, 2005 La question de la tolrance en Occident travers le livre de YvesZarka, C et Fleury, C: difficile tolrance, Astrion, n 3, (septembre) Maud, L et Mayrargue, C., Pluralisation religieuse, entre clatement et concurrence , in Politique africaine 123 - octobre 2011 Mayrargue, C 2008, Les dynamiques paradoxales du pentectisme en Afrique subsaharienne, in Notes de lIFRI Mayrargue, C., Trajectoires et enjeux contemporains du pentectisme en Afrique de lOuest , in Critique internationale n22 - janvier 2004 Par Pahimi PatRiCE, PhD, Charg de Cours, Ecole Normale Suprieure de luniversit de Maroua-Cameroun

56

Le paysage sacr au Mont-Liban, entre pratiques sociales et mcanismes de sacralisation: les exemples dAnnaya et de Hardine
Christiane SFEIR

A bst ra ct In over less than a century, five saints from the Maronite community in Lebanon have been recognized by Rome. The events linked to supernatural phenomena are always related to a site, a monastery, or an edifice and they often express themselves further than the site itself. The canonization of a saint has social consequences such as the manifestations of individual expressions of faith, divine calls or messages interpreted by believers. The mobilization of pilgrims is then visible, with the occupation of public spaces well beyond the sacred location. These dynamics affect the site and are the reason put forward for the geographical readaptation on religious territory. Through a comparative approach between two sites that have reacted differently to the emergence of a saint, we endeavoured to identify the different social practices and the construction of sacred territories in the village of Annaya, which witnessed the emergence of Saint Charbel. As a result to this particular event, the landscape went through a chaotic mode of development created by pilgrimage movements, while in Hardin, remained in oblivion despite the presence of Saint Al-Hardini. These comments pose the question of the role of symbolism in sacred places: What explains the logic of a sacred place and who are the actors responsible for the subsequent development? Religious institutions and political movements are both involved: the Maronite Church, present and active has a leading role and a legitimate power through its organization of special religious events, used to confirm the Christian presence and sense of group solidarity in a perceived threatened environment composed of a Muslim majority. Local actors, in turn, benefit from the event and provide a master plan for a local development that does not coincide with the spiritual dimension. The geography of the area is reframed and the borders between secular and sacred spaces are erased. key words: territory, pilgrimage, movements, development, saint.

Introduction
Le 22 juin 2008, Beyrouth sagite pour la batification dune nouvelle figure religieuse - une quatrime - le frre Jacques Haddad, qui sajoute la liste des bienheureux ou saints libanais Charbel Makhlouf, Rafqa ar-Rayes et Nimatullah Kassab Al-Hardini. En juin 2010, le frre Stphane Nehmeh est batifi son tour et en moins dun sicle, cinq figures provenant de la communaut maronite sont reconnues par Rome. Ces canonisations et batifications de maronites issus du Mont-Liban induisent des mouvements religieux divers : plerinages, vnements organiss par des associations ecclsiastiques, caritatives, des coles, ou des groupes sociaux. Messes et processions spectaculaires incitent des dplacements qui engendrent souvent des mutations spatiales. Ainsi, tout phnomne religieux est constamment suivi dune dynamique qui affecte le lieu concern, notamment lorsque celui-ci devient
57

lieu de plerinage. Le comportement des plerins dessine alors une nouvelle gographie du fait religieux qui sexprime par une transformation du territoire. Gnralement, les lieux de plerinage sont soit les lieux o a vcu le fondateur de la voie spirituelle des plerins, soit ceux o lun de ses disciples a vcu, soit ceux anims par une prsence divine particulire (Deshayes, 2007). Au Liban, les causalits propres un plerinage dpassent ces trois critres et il suffit quun fidle fasse part dune vision surnaturelle pour quun dplacement de masse ait lieu. La prsence dun saint provoque galement des dplacements soit vers son village natal, soit vers le couvent o il a vcu, soit galement vers le lieu o il est dcd. Or, si certains sites du Mont-Liban sont touchs par des transformations spatiales majeures la suite de lmergence dun saint, dautres le sont beaucoup moins. La mtamorphose gographique ntant en aucune faon uniformment rparties sur les sites, nous nous interrogeons donc sur les modalits de la sacralisation, et sur la raison pour laquelle certains sites ragissent linstallation de lieux saints et dautres non. Nous tablirons une comparaison entre deux lieux ayant ragi diffremment une canonisation afin de saisir la nuance entre les pratiques sociales et la sacralisation dun territoire. Le village dAnnaya, associ Saint Charbel, a connu un dveloppement dsordonn lorsquil est devenu lieu de plerinage, tandis quun autre village, Hardine, est rest anonyme malgr la prsence du saint Nimatullah Kassab Al-Hardini.

Les chrtiens du Liban, une minorit menace ?

Ces regroupement massifs de croyants prennent une toute autre dimension quand on les rattache aux logiques internes dune communaut ayant t affecte par une guerre civile confessionnelle. Il sagit dexpressions individuelles de foi, dappel, de messages divins interprts par les croyants qui expliquent en partie ce mouvement collectif vers la foi. Une srie de visions, de statues de Vierge qui tournent sur ellesmmes, de lhuile qui coule dimages de saints, des mains qui saignent (les exemples sont multiples) sont autant de raisons qui peuvent entraner des dplacements massifs de fidles. Mais quel est le fil conducteur qui explique ces dplacements de masse ? Sagit-il dacteurs autonomes domins par un lien divin vertical et direct vers Dieu ou bien peut-on lexpliquer par un phnomne de masse, une forme de contagion se transmettant horizontalement dun pratiquant un autre ? Les maronites sont une des composantes de la socit confessionnelle libanaise, dfinie par Dubar comme une juxtaposition de plusieurs units : lignes familiales, rgions et confessions (Dubar, 1974). Chrtiens originaires de la Syrie gographique, les maronites ont une histoire ancre dans la rgion de lAntioche du Ve sicle (Mouchy, 2008). Un groupe de fidles dcide lpoque de suivre le moine Maron (un des Pres de lglise chrtienne) un moment doctrinal complexe de lEmpire romain dOrient. Cette petite communaut se forme partir de lanne 687 ; ses membres lisent alors leur propre patriarche et sisolent peu peu de Constantinople cause de loccupation toute rcente de la Syrie par les musulmans. Perscuts par les Byzantins car accuss de monothisme, certains maronites fuient dans les montagnes du Mont-Liban, convertissant puis supplantant les jacobites et les autres communauts chrtiennes locales. Durant la priode
58

des Croisades, ils sallient Rome, et stendent ensuite vers les rgions de Kesserwan et du Chouf, lune majorit chiite, et lautre majorit druze. Mais leur dese tin prend une direction nouvelle au XIX sicle, quand cette communaut place sous la mouvance de lglise catholique et proche de la France, souvre lOccident et commence avoir une influence dominante sur ce qui deviendra le Liban. Lorsque ce Liban acquiert, bien plus tard, son indpendance, le Pacte national de 1946 garantit une rpartition quitable des charges politiques entre les diffrentes confessions du pays, tout en laissant chaque communaut sa juridiction propre. ce titre, la communaut maronite dispose de son propre rite et dune hirarchie clricale autonome sous lautorit dun patriarche qui accumule la fois pouvoirs spirituel et temporel.

La situation critique des maronites au Liban

Mais dans une rgion aussi instable que le Proche-Orient, traverse par des conflits politiques caractre religieux, le Liban est trs expos. Et la minorit chrtienne est certainement la plus menace, cause denjeux gopolitiques majeurs. De plus, la prdominance dmographique chrtienne a connu une baisse significative aprs la guerre civile de 1975-1990. Les accords de Taf (1989) ont rduit la suprmatie politique des maronites, en donnant plus de pouvoir aux communauts chiite et sunnite. ce fait sajoute la forte migration des chrtiens vers lOccident ou vers les pays du Golfe. La communaut maronite se dit maintenant en situation de dfense et se trouve confronte des enjeux rgionaux qui rpondent mal aux intrts historiques des chrtiens du Proche-Orient. Les structures miliciennes dauto-dfense qui staient constitues pendant la guerre dclinent partir de 1996 (Messara, 1996)(Messarra 1996), et cdent la place deux groupes politiques de natures diffrentes1. La population maronite est actuellement profondment divise, et le petit clerg soppose souvent sa hirarchie, autant de facteurs qui contribuent au dsarroi de la communaut.

Annaya : un territoire en mutation

54 km de Beyrouth, le village dAnnaya-Kfarbaal auparavant chiite, est devenu chrtien au dbut du XIXe sicle (Heyberger, 2002)(Heyberger 2002). Ce village fait partie de sites associs un saint qui ont subi des transformations lies lclatement, les dplacements, les plerinages, ainsi quun fort dveloppement aprs une batification. Ils sont sacrs pour ceux qui les visitent. Avec le miracle qui accompagna la mort de saint Charbel, le site devint un lieu de plerinage, visit par des croyants et curieux venus des quatre coins du monde. Jusqu la fin des annes 1980, la hirarchie cclsiastique a russi prserver le caractre spirituel et recueilli du lieu ; mais depuis, ce caractre disparat progressivement pour cder la place au religieux commercial.
1 Signalons le Hezbollah, (parti de Dieu), la structuration solide et soutenu par lIran, et le parti du Futur, reprsent par Saad El Hariri. Les chrtiens sont diviss entre les partisans du gnral Aoun, allis au Hezbollah, et les Forces Libanaises, partisans de Samir Geagea, allies au groupement Futur . 59

Depuis la batification en 1965, et pendant la priode du procs sur la canonisation, le plerinage dAnnaya est dj instaur. Le site dispose de plusieurs difices religieux rpartis proximit. Tout le confort matriel est assur aux visiteurs : distribution gratuite dhuile et dencens, ventes de souvenirs et de livres, restaurants et facilits daccs au parking. Lentement, ces plerinages commencent prendre une forme plus systmatique scande par des dates rgulires (exception faite des dimanches) : chaque 22 du mois, chaque vendredi soir, les trois dates cls, celle de la naissance du saint, la fte de saint Pierre et saint Paul, et les jours de commmoration de lordination de Charbel. Les prires, encadres en grande partie par des personnes qui peroivent des signes et des appels divins, sont clbres publiquement et lespace appropri pour le culte dpasse la cour du monastre pour occuper jusquux routes et espaces publics. La dynamique spatiale brouille les limites entre lespace sacr et lespace profane2.

Figure 1 : Annaya - Couvent saint Maron (sfeir, 2008)

Hardine: une statique spatiale

Le contre-exemple serait le village de Hardine, qui a connu la canonisation de saint Hardini en mai 1998. Malgr cela, la commune na pas connu de dveloppement remarquable, la faute tant impute plusieurs facteurs politiques, sociologiques, et conomiques.Le Mont-Liban tant dcoup en troits interfluves orientes estouest, le relief contribue lisolement de Hardine. A lcart, sur une colline du Nord-Liban, le village avait lorigine des atouts stratgiques qui lui ont valu dtre la cible des troupes syriennes installes sur une colline adjacente durant la guerre de 1975-1990 . La municipalit na pas pu - ou su - instaurer une relle politique pour profiter de lirruption du sacr et les investisseurs taient alors rticents lide de dvelopper des activits touristiques.
2 Le site reoit chaque anne plus de quatre millions de visiteurs avec un million deux cent mille crmonies de premire communion, et neuf cent baptmes

60

Figure 2 : la maison du saint transforme en muse et glise (sfeir, 2008)

Une seule tentative individuelle se limita la construction dun petit htel pour recevoir les plerins. La maison o vcu le saint fut transforme en une petite glise et un modeste muse exposant des objets antiques trouvs sur le site. De leur ct, les autorits religieuses se sont galement dsintresses de ce village abandonn. Mais plong pendant longtemps dans loubli, Hardine se rveille le 11 mai 1998 lors de la canonisation de saint Neemetallah Kassab el Hardini. Depuis, tous les ts, plus de 70 personnes par jour visitent le lieu de naissance du saint, tandis quen fin de semaine, il y a 150 200 visiteurs.Ce dveloppement reste trs timide en comparaison avec le site de saint Charbel ou de sainte Rafqa. Curieusement, un peu plus au nord, la valle de la Quadicha est connue sous le nom de la valle sainte , sans quon y localise le moindre saint3. Une stratgie visant lintgration dune dmarche paysagre dans les perspectives de mise en valeur du territoire a pratiquement accrdit le site dun tourisme religieux. La valle fait maintenant partie du patrimoine de lUNESCO. Sans doute faut-il voir ici une sacralisation voulue de lespace en question, fait mettre en relation avec lhistoire particulire des diffrents groupes chrtiens de la montagne.

Le rle des politiques publiques et prives

Dans le Mont-Liban daujourdhui, cest la volont de lhomme politique local et le secteur priv qui activent le retour en force des pratiques religieuses par une vritable frnsie visible de constructions de lieux de culte. Dune part cest lglise maronite, prsente et active qui sapproprie un pouvoir lgitime de hirarchisation en procdant lorganisation dvnements religieux particuliers, et dautre part les chefs des partis maronites qui travers leurs discours et positions, associent
3 Des manuscrits maronites du XVIe sicle localisent sainte Marine proximit du monastre de Quannbin, sige du patriarcat ( Heyberger, B., 1998, Saintet et chemins de la perfection chez les chrtiens du Proche-Orient: Revue de lhistoire des religions, v. 215,, p. 117-137. 61

religion et politique, afin daffirmer la prsence chrtienne sur lespace en question. Quand des vnements surnaturels, des dplacements mystrieux, et la fondation spontane de lieux sacrs sont dclars conformes la foi par lglise, le marquage du territoire a lieu, et la sacralisation rpond des stratgies menes soit par un pouvoir politique, soit par le pouvoir ecclsiastique. Chez les maronites, la fusion des intrts du religieux et ceux du politique date de 1904, avant mme la cration du Grand-Liban, quand, soutenue par la bourgeoisie maronite et de lglise, la direction spirituelle et politique de la communaut tout entire fut confie au Patriarche. Lintention dinstaller un monument religieux au sommet dun relief qui domine la baie de Jounieh, fut incarne par linauguration de Notre-Dame de Harissa en 1908. Ce lieu de plerinage prit rapidement une signification mondiale symbolique dun courant politique clair. En 1971 une nouvelle basilique, dont la taille dpasse de loin le sanctuaire primitif, renfora cette dtermination de marquage territorial. Des messes traditionnelles commmorant les martyrs des Forces libanaises (la milice dominante durant la guerre civile de 1975 1990) sont marques par une participation impressionnante de fidles et une importante mobilisation populaire. Lvnement est toujours couronn par des discours politiques idologies autonomistes, et les images gantes de cadres politiques assassins places prs de lautel sont gnralement loccasion de renvoyer des conflits politiques anciens lactualit. Le dveloppement des villages qui ont connu linvention dun saint, savre tre li un systme dacteurs public-priv, qui justifient la construction dun sens sacr . Le systme dacteurs publics ayant la base une dimension politique, ce sont les acteurs locaux, les maires, et parfois mme des zaims (les hommes forts locaux) qui financent les projets instrumentalisant le sentiment religieux vises conomiques, induisant par l la transformation dun lieu en un site de plerinage. La route dAnnaya (Saint Charbel) ou le village de Deir El Ahmar o Saydat Bchouat (Notre-Dame de Bchouat) sont des lieux qui ont connu de pareilles transformations.
liEuX dE PlERinaGE Annaya 7 13 42 5 1 Hardine 51 10 7 0 0 Harissa 1 2 51 10 4 Bchouate 32 15 20 1 0 Kfifane 18 25 20 5 0

nombre de visiteur (s)/68 Une fois dans sa vie visitEs 62 Une fois tous les2-3 ans Une fois par an Deux fois par an Plus que deux fois par an

Conclusion
Tandis que lidentit de lglise catholique en Occident court un risque deffacement devant la scularisation dun ct, et la monte en puissance de lislam, des vanglistes et des sectes de lautre, une tranche de chrtiens dOrient, les

maronites, tentent de marquer gographiquement leur identit et leur confession. Soutenus par Rome, des vnements surnaturels sont officialiss par le pouvoir cclsiastique libanais, mais galement par les politiques, et ils sont instrumentaliss pour tayer une stratgie de dveloppement territorial. On assiste donc un engagement actif de la part des autorits de lglise, qui semblent se rallier aux acteurs politiques pour engager des actions de recomposition territoriales communes. Cependant, leurs objectifs rciproques sont bien distincts : pour les cclsiastiques, lobjectif a clairement un caractre identitaire, tandis que pour les politiques, la dimension conomique prime, sans souci rel dune identit qui tend peu peu seffacer.

Bibliographie
Deshayes, L., 2007, Les plerinages: Paris, Plon, 125 p. Dubar, C., 1974, Structure confessionnelle et classes sociales au Liban: Revue franaise de sociologie, v. Vol. 15, No. 3 p. 301-328. Heyberger, B., 1998, Saintet et chemins de la perfection chez les chrtiens du ProcheOrient: Revue de lhistoire des religions, v. 215,, p. 117-137. Heyberger, B., 2002, Saint Charbel Makhlouf ou la conscration de lidentit maronite, in Mayeur-Jaouen, C., ed., Saints et hros du Moyen-Orient contemporain: Paris, Maisonneuve & Larose, p. 139-159. Mouchy, N., 2008, Les Maronites, de la marginalit au destin historique, Garrigues et sentiers, Dossier Chrtiens en terre dislam. Messara, A., 1996, Les partis politiques au Liban: une exprience arabe pionnire et en dclin: Revue du monde musulman et de la Mditerrane, v. 81-82, p. 135-151. Christiane sFEiR, Architecte-Paysagiste, Coordinatrice Gnrale des Masters- IBA Universit Libanaise. Sorbonne- Paris4, UMR 8185 Espaces, Nature et Culture, Gographie historique, politique et culturelle.

Schriftlich formulierte Wnsche und Gebete in realen und virtuellen Wallfahrtsttten

Krisztina FRAUHAMMER

Wenn ein Glubiger einen sakralen Ort oder Wallfahrtsttte aufsucht, leitet ihn in erster Linie die Sehnsucht nach dem Erleben der Transzendenz. Er glaubt daran, dass diese Weihesttten von der Anwesenheit dieser Transzendenz gekennzeichneten Orte sind, so auch Orte fr das Kontakthalten mit ihm sind. Er glaubt daran, dass er fhig ist, sich in das Leben der Menschen und in die Ereignisse der sie umgebenden Natur einzumischen und sucht deshalb die Mglichkeit mit ihm in Kontakt zu treten. Eine der ltesten, fast in jeder Religion anwesenden Erscheinung dieser Kontaktaufnahme ist das Gebet. Zahlreiche Forscher haben sich schon aus zahlreichen
63

Aspekten mit den Gebeten, hauptschlich mit den mndlichen oder schriftlichen Formen derer beschftigt. In den vergangenen Jahren hat aber die immer beliebter werdende, vollkommen ungebundene, schriftlich erscheinende Art des Betens das Interesse der Forscher aufgeweckt. Nacheinander erscheinen an unseren Wallfahrtsttten, Besucherbcher, oder manchmal werden sie auch Gstebuch genannt, mit dem Zweck Bitten, Gebete, Danksagungen festhalten und aufbewahren. Die Seiten dieser Bcher sind voll mit individuell formulierten Bitten. Das auergewhnliche an diesen ist aber, dass wir durch sie Zeugen einer ganz besonderen Kommunikations-Situation, der schriftlichen Reprsentation einer ungebundenen, nicht formalisierten mndlichen Offenbarung werden knnen. Das Schreiben oft objektiviert und ritualisiert sogar diesen speziellen Gebetsakt. Die Gstebcher der Wallfahrtskapellen und der Kirchen bieten fr diese auerordentlichen Anlsse, ein fr jeden erreichbares Forum. Eine weitere Besonderheit dieser Bcher ist die enge Verflechtung der sakralen und profanen Schrifttraditionen und der Verhaltensmuster, was bei dieser modernen Art der schriftlichen Devotion eine sehr dominante Rolle spielt. In meinem Vortrag mchte ich solche an ungarischen Wallfahrtsttten gesammelten Gstebcher, bzw. die Konklusionen einer komparativen Analyse dieser vorstellen. (Ich untersuchte 5 Wallfahrtsttte und deren Gstebcher mit ber 7000 Eintrge in dem ung. Sprachgebiet: darunter waren ganz kleine, kaum gekannte Orte, wie: Mriaklnok, und Egyhzasbst, die bis heute keine kirchliche Anerkennung erworben hat, es wurden natrlich grosse, sehr berhmte W.Orte auch einbezogen: Mriagyd, Mtraverebly, und Mriapcs, der berhmte grichisch-katholische Wallfahrtsort.) Diese Bcher knnen wir, als solches Forum betrachten, welches eine Mglichkeit zur Offenbarung an einem heiligen Ort, zur Kommunikation mit dem Transzendenz bietet. Diese Offenbarung ist weder aus inhaltlichen, noch aus stilistischem Aspekt formalisiert, dies fhrt zur einzigartigen Mischung von profanen und sakralen Elementen. Diese auf jedem Gebiet erscheinende Ungebundenheit bietet Mglichkeit neben der Glaubensbekenntnis auch weitere Zwecke zu erfllen und eine viel weitere Verwendung mglich zu machen (Verewigen von Pilgern, Wallfahrten, Gebetsmanifestation, Ritual, Autokommunikation, Gewinnen von seelischen Trost, Erwecken von Gemeinschaftsgefhl). Dieser sehr weit interpretierbaren Verwendung ist auch zu verdanken, dass der Kreis derer, die mit der in diesen Wallfahrtsorten gebotenen Mglichkeit leben und leben knnen sehr weit ist. So ist es heutzutage zu beobachten, dass sich mit der Internet-Verbreitung die realen Grenzen dieser sakralen Kommunikation ber sich hinaus wuchsen und man immer fter mit virtuellen Kultsttten trifft. Am Ende meinem Vortrag mchte ich auch solche virtuellen Kultsttten und die hier auch existierender und immer beliebter modernen Devotionspraktiken unter die Lupe nehmen.
Krisztina FraUhaMMEr, Blint Sndor Institute for the Study of Religion, Hungary.

64

The Role of Family Tradition in Formation of Personal Faith Experience and Practice Die Rolle der Traditionen in der Familie bei der Gestaltung persnlicher Glaubenserfahrung- und Praxis
ivil ADVILONIEN

A bst ra ct A lot of research has been carried out in Lithuania and foreign countries, analysing faith experience and practice as a long-term, continuous process influenced by different socio-cultural, psychological, etc factors. Faith experience is understood as a reality that is subjectively meaningful and significant to a person in a greater or a lesser degree influencing their social life, behaviour, world outlook, and values. It is embodied in their faith practice expressed in one way or another. According to D. Hervieu-Leger, N.Ammerman and others, faith experience and practice become multidimensional and multi-plane realities, involve syncretism of religious beliefs and influence personal way of life, peoples behaviour, relation with surrounding environment, other people and God. The report presents correlations between previous (formed in parents family) and current personal faith experience and practice, analyzes their factors with reference to insights of Lithuanian and foreign researchers. Exclusive attention is paid to the links between family traditions and personally professed faith: formation of faith experience, picked elements of religious practice in female and/or male line, concept of God, etc. It is noted that faith experience and practice acquired in the family may change with rise of other factors, e. g. conversion process, non-ordinary religious experience, deepening of religious awareness, etc. Besides that the report analyses the concept of faith experience and practice, their expression, types and factors as well as response of a person to essential changes in faith experience and practice in their life. Qualitative research (N-30) carried out in Lithuania revealed different types of conveying / formation of faith experience and practice in context of Catholicism, namely: spontaneous pick-up of faith experience and practice when a person simply assimilates religious experience and practice of their parents or other micro-social environment, and rationally, purposefully planned conveying of religious experience and practice when it is reduced to formal religiosity, children preparation to receive sacraments and occasional, irregular practice of professed faith. key Words: faith experience, faith practice, religious experience, religious practice, tradition in the Family.

einfhrung
Die pluralistische Gesellschaft bietet den Menschen viele Mglichkeiten, Glck und Sinn im Leben zu finden, als auch eine attraktive Lebensweise zu fhren und eine persnliche Weltansicht zu bilden. Allerdings muss jeder selbst herausfinden, was sein Leben sinnvoll macht, was ihm Freude schenkt und eigenen Sinn stiftet. Viele regionale und internationale Forschungen im sozialen, psychologischen, pastoraltheologischen Bereich zeigen, dass die Menschen Sinn aus verschiedenen
65

Dingen bilden. Es kann Geld, Kariere, Glauben, (Volks)kultur, Religion u.a. sein (vgl. Grawe, 2002, 2006; Kaufman, 1997). In diesem Artikel und Vortrag handelt es sich um den Sinn, welchen die Menschen in ihrer Familie der Religion zuwenden. Dies untersucht man durch die Rolle der Traditionen in der Familie bei der Gestaltung persnlicher Glaubenserfahrung und Praxis. Man muss beachten, da Spiritualitt, Religiositt, Gottesvortsellung und damit verbundene Glaubenserfahrung- und Praxis in Zeit der Postmoderne vielfltige, subjektive und in gewisser Weise beliebige Form annehmen kann. In diesem Artikel und Vortrag folgt man der Position, da die Erfahrung und die Praxis des Glaubens ein lebenslanger Prozess ist, deswegen braucht man verschiedene soziologische Kriterien zur Einordnung und Bewertung religiser Einstellungen und Praktiken. So findet man es bei vielen Autoren und in vielen Forschungen, vor allem bei U.Boos-Nunning (1972), J.W.Fowler (1991), Th.Luckmann (1991), P.L.Berger (1994), Ch.Heinrich (2002), K.Frielingsdorf (2003), D.Hervieu-Leger (2003, 2004), A.Paskus (1998, 2002), K.A.Trimakas (1998, 2003, 2005), B.Briliute (2005), H.Kohler-Spiegel (2008) u.a. Der Einfluss der Traditionen in der Familie bei der Gestaltung der Glaubenserfahrung- und Praxis, als auch auf verschiedene Aspekte dieses Bereiches, wurde in zahlreichen Studien untersucht. Die Ergebnisse der Studien im Ausland lassen sich aber auf den litauischen Raum nicht zwangslufig bertragen, da nicht nur heutige, sondern auch weil der frhere soziokulturelle Kontext ganz unterschiedlich war, vor allem wegen der langen sowjetischen Periode. Neue Unterschiede beeinflut auch der Prozess der Globalisierung. Alle diese Prozesse und Herausforderungen auf der politischen, soziokulturellen und mentaler Ebene haben Einfluss auf den einzelnen Menschen, sein Leben und seine Weltanschauung. Dies fhrt dazu, dass man den Menschen nicht als isoliertes Einzelwesen begreift, sondern auch seine soziokulturelle Situation bercksichtigt. Gerade dies macht ihn zu dem, wer er ist. D.h. seine individuelle Lebensweise, Weltanschauung, auch Glaubenserfahrungund Praxis des Menschen ist nicht mehr vom weltweiten Kontext zu trennen. Dies stellt die Frage nach dem Einfluss der verschiedenen Faktoren auf die Glaubenserfahrung- und Praxis des Kindes, wie auch des erwachsenen Menschen. Die im Vortrag vorliegende Studie untersucht die Rolle der Traditionen in der Familie im Leben der Befragten, in ihrer Kindheit wie auch heute. Das Ziel des Vortrages ist die Ergebnisse der qualitativen Forschung ber Glaubenserfahrung- und Praxis in litauischen katholischen Familien vorzustellen. In dieser Forschung wurde die Rolle der Familietraditionen bei der Gestaltung persnlicher Glaubenserfahrung- und Praxis der Befragten untersucht. In der Forschung nahmen N-20 Informanten teil. Neben der Frage nach eigener Glaubenserfahrung wurde die Frage ber christlichen Traditionen in der Elternfamilie, auch Merkmale der Glaubenspraxis untersucht. Beim Sammeln der Information wurde als Forschungsstrategie Grounded Theory (Straus & Glaser, 1967, 1998), als Forschungsinstrument narrative Interview gewhlt. Diese Auswahl beeinflute die Bestrebung tiefere Information zu erhalten. Die gewhlte Forschungstrategie gibt den Befragten eine Mglichkeit aus heutiger Sicht die eigene Glaubensgeschichte zu betrachten, als auch wichtigste Merkmale der Glaubenspraxis in der Kindheit und heute, auch die wichtigste Faktoren, die es beeinflut haben, zum Ausdruck zu bringen. Whrend der Forschung wurden Interwievs mit N-20 Erwachsenen im Alter zwichen 25 bis 67 Jahre durchgefhrt. In der

66

Forschung nahmen N-5 Geistliche, N-6 aktive und N-4 passive Katholiken1, N-5 Indifferenten teil, um zu vergleichen, welche Rolle die Lebensweise und Position zur Religion, auch die Traditionen in der Elternfamilie der Befragten gespielt haben. Bei dem Auswahl der Informanten wurde Theoretical Sampling gewhlt.

traditionen in der Familie als Faktor der Glaubenserfahrung- und Praxis

Traditionen, die sich in der Elternfamilie entwickeln, ist nur einer von vielen Faktoren persnlicher Glaubenserfahrung- und Praxis. H.Kohler-Spiegel nach, wenn Erfahrungen des Heiligen und des Unheiligen biografisch sind, dann sind diese Erfahrungen angebunden an unsere Entwicklung. Dann wird bedeutsam, was ich als Kind erlebt habe, wie die nchsten Angehrigen mit mir umgeganden sind, wie sich Gefhle in mir entwickelt haben, wie ich gelernt habe, eigenstndig zu sein (Kohler-Spiegel 2008: 65). Viele Autoren betonen die Rolle dessen, was in der Familie geschieht. Man spricht ber bernommenes Verhalten, Werte, Weltanschauung, Lebensweise, Gottesvorstellung usw. Wie es H.KohlerSpiegel sagt, was Mensch von frher Kindheit an prgt, gibt auch die Basis, Heiligen zu erfassen (Kohler-Spiegel 2008: 65). Es geht darum, da anhand der erlebten Muster die eigene Muster wahrgenommen und verstanden werden. Diese sind normalerweise von anderer Menschen im eigenen Umfeld entdeckt und verstanden. H.Kohler-Spiegel nach, unsere Art, uns zu binden, gilt im Blick auf andere Menschen, aber natrlich auch im Blick auf Religises. Uns mit Religisen auseinanderzusetzen, uns auch im Religisen zu binden, geschieht nicht unabhngig von unseren Bindungsmustern (Kohler-Spiegel 2008: 68). Man muss hier bemerken, dass es konstruktive, wie auch destruktive Muster sein knnen. Darber sprach K.Frielingsdorf (2003). Seiner Meinung nach, knnen strenge Eltern dem Kind die Vorstellung eines bsen, strengen, fordernden Gottes geben oder, im Gegenteil, die Kinder verstehen den Gott als sorgfltigen Untersttzer, als liebenden Vater. Andererseits, viele Forschungen begrnden die groe Rolle der Mutter bei der Gestaltung der Gottesvorstellungen, Glaubenserfahrung- und Praxis (Frielingsdorf, 2003, Adviloniene, 2008). Alle diese Muster betonen eine wichtige Rolle der Traditionen und Beziehungen in der Familie auf das Verhalten, der Glaubenserfahrung und das Gottesverstndnis des Kindes. Z.B., nach K.Trimakas (1998, 2003, 2005), B.Grom (1992), K.Frielingsdorf (2003), H.Kohler-Spiegel (2008) u.a. ist ein Zusammenhang zwischen persnlicher Religiositt, Religionspraxis und Muster in der Familie sehr stark. Mit der Frage nach der Glaubenspraxis ist eng die Frage nach der Glaubenserfahrung in der Elternfamilie und der hier gebildeten religisen Traditionen verbunden. Deswegen war Ziel der vorliegenden qualitativen Studie die Einstellungen der Eltern zur Religion, ihr religisen Verhalten und persnlichen Sicht nach Glauben als potentieller Einfluss auf das Verhalten des Kindes im religisen Bereich zu untersuchen.
1 Unter aktiven Katholiken sind relativ die gemeint, die aktiv und regelmig nicht nur ihren Glauben praktizieren, sonder auch an irgendwelcher religisen Organisation teilnehmen oder aktiv in der Seelsorge der Pfarrei, Freiwilligenarbeit im Bereich der Religion ttig sind. Im Gegenteil, als passive Katholiken wurden in dieser Forschung relativ die Katholiken genannt, die ihren Glauben praktizieren, aber nicht unbedingt regelmig, die auch keine Beziehungen mit Aktivitten in der Pfarrei, religisen Organisationen usw. haben. 67

Dieses Thema kann man in interdisziplinren Zusammenhang analisieren, da in diesem Bereich existiert als immanente, so auch transzendente Ebene, welche wieder in unterschiedliche Dimensionen aufgeteilt werden kann Rituale, Symbole, Akzeptanz des Glaubens an Gott, Gottesvorstellung und Beziehung mit ihm usw. Jede von diesen Dimensionen kann man als getrennt, als auch verbunden betrachten. Deswegen wurden in frher genanten Studie N-20 Erwachsene befragt, welche christliche und andere Traditionen in ihrer Elternfamilie gebildet wurden, welche von denen einen tieferen Eindruck auf sie gemacht haben und wie viel diese ihre eigene Glaubenserfahrung- und Praxis beeinflusst haben. Es wurde untersucht, welche Faktoren (signifikante Leute, regelmige Glaubenspraxis, Beispiel von Eltern, Groeltern, Verwandten usw.) spielten hier die wichtigste Rolle. Die Ergebnisse der Forschung lassen einige Strategien von Weitergabe des Glaubens in der Familie durch Traditionen erfassen: 1) natrliche Weitergabe der Glaubenserfahrung- und Praxis. In diesem Fall lernen (bernehmen) die Kinder automatisch den Glauben und die religise Praxis von ihren Eltern und/oder Groeltern. Sie sehen das Verhalten ihrer Eltern und haben eine Mglichkeit es natrlich zu internalisieren. Es ist bedeutsam, wenn die Eltern oder andere fr das Kind wichtige Personen mit ihm ber den Glauben, die Werte und ber die Weltanschauungen reden. So gesehen ist das Beispiel der Eltern echte religise Bildung. D.h., Familie dient als Mglichkeit, sich in eine personale Gemeinschaft zu integrieren, eigene Werte, Glaubenserfahrung und Praxis zu formieren. In solchen Fllen kann man von einer Inklusion der Vollperson (M.N.Ebertz, 2005) sprechen. Die Befragten betonten, da sie gleiche oder hnliche Strategie auch in eigener Familie benutzen. 2) Die rationale, gezielt geplante bergabe der religisen Erfahrung- und Praxis. In diesem Fall geht es die Sprache um formalen Religiositt: die Eltern haben ihre Kinder fr Sakramente (Bue, Erstkomunion, Firmung) vorbereitet, Glaubenserfahrung aber war in solchen Familien nicht wichtig, Glaubenspraxis - lssig und unregelmig. Die Ergebnisse der Forschung haben gezeigt, da bei der Formierung des Glaubespraxis in der Kindheit sehr wichtig der Zugang der Familie zur Religion ist. Neben den genannten Ergebnissen enthllten sich einige Strategien der Familieposition zur Religion und Praktizieren der religisen Traditionen. Auf diesem Grund wurde in der Familie auch das Glaubensvertndnis- und die Erfahrung der Befragten geformt. Es wurden solche Modelle enthllt: indifferentisches, traditionell-kulturelles, christlichkulturelles und aktivchristliches (kirchliches). Diese Modelle sind hnlich wie andere Modelle, die haben einige auslndische Forscher beschrieben (z.B., T.Hipp, 1999; P.M.Zulehner, I.Hager und R.Polak, 20012). In dem indifferentischen Modell nahm die Elternfamilie eine neutrale, gleichgltige Position zur Religion ein. Der Glaube wurde nicht praktiziert, es wurde aber minimalistisch die religisen Feiertage gefeiert. Es ist zu bemerken, da religise Feiertage in solchen Familien
2 T.Hipp, basierend auf Kriterienien der Kirchenbindung, Kirchgang und formeller Gottesglaube hat solche Gruppen der Glubigen identifiziert Kulturkirchliche (sie teilnehmen regelmig an Gottesdienst, aber glauben nicht an Christus, sodern an irgendwelche hhere Macht oder uberhaupt die Egzistenz von Gott in Frage stellen), Christlichen (ihr Gottesverstndnis ist christlich, aber in die Kirche gehen sie nur in besoderen Fllen, z.B., im Notfall, Weihnachten, Ostern), Kulturchristlichen (sie glauben an hhere Macht oder Kraft, am christlichen Feiertagen oder im Notfall gehen sie in die Kirche), Unchristliche (sie glauben nicht an Gott, auch nehmen nicht an Gottesdienst teil; Hipp 199: 11). P.M.Zulehner, I.Hager, R.Polak (2001: 325-326) haben solche Gruppen der Glubigen identifiziert: Kirchliche, Kulturkirchliche, Religis, Kulturreligis, Unreligis (Zulehner, Hager, Polak 2001: 325-326)

68

traditionell-kulturellen Inhalt haben. Andererseits, vielen Erwachsenen blieben die religisen Fragen unbeantwortet, da die Auseinandersetzung mit religisen Themen kaum je stattgefunden hat oder im Jugendalter abbrach. Dies gilt besonders bei Erfahrungen der Indifferenten. In dem zweiten, traditionell-kulturellen Modell hat die Elternfamilie formal die groen christliche Feiertage (Weihnachten, Ostern) gefeiert, aber ihm wurde traditionell-kultureller Inhalt gegeben. In diesem Modell wurde auch unregelmige christliche Glaubenspraxis praktiziert (z.B., am grten christlichen Feiertagen, beim Begrbnis, Taufe, Trauung usw.). Die Kinder wurden minimalistisch christlich erzogen: sie wurden auf die Sakramente vorbereitet, aber das Glauben wurde unregelmig oder fast nicht praktiziert. Manchmal wurde das christliches Erziehen ignoriert. Im dritten, christlichkulturellen Modell wurden den Kindern christliche Werte und christliche Weltanschauung formiert. Glaubenspraxis war in solchen Fallen mehr oder weniger regelmig, auch wurden christliche Feiertage gefeiert, die Kinder wurden christlich erzogen und ermutigt das Glauben zu praktizieren. In dem vierten, aktivchristlichen (kirchlichen) Modell wurde Glaubenspraxis regelmig praktiziert. Die Familie war aktiv in religisen Organisationen, Seelsorge der Pfarrei oder in der Freiwilligenarbeit im Bereich der Religion ttig. Das Erziehen der Kinder wurde in diesem Modell tief christlich und kirchlich orientiert, die Eltern formierten ihren Kindern als ethische und kulturelle, so auch gemeischaftliche und emotionelle Identitt mit der Katholischen Kirche.3 Solche Familien waren kirchlich und sozial aktiv, religis motiviert und regelmig praktizierend. Die Ergebnisse der Forschung zeigen einen Zusammenhang zwischen regelmiger religiser Praxis und den kirchlichreligisen Elementen im Alltagsleben der Elternfamilie. Andererseits, es handelt sich um ein multidimensionales Konstrukt, das emotionale, mentale, soziale, spirituelle und verhaltensbezogene Komponenten der Glaubenserfahrung- und Praxis (des Handlungsvermgens) aus der subjektiven Sicht der Person beinhaltet.

schlussfolgerungen
Den Einfluss auf Glaubenserfahrung- und Praxis der Befragten machen verschiedene soziokulturelle, psychologische und andere Faktoren. Die Personen, die an der Forschung teilgenommen haben, nannten inhaltlich heterogene Traditionen und Elemente der Glaubenspraxis in der Elternfamilie und konnten ihre Erfahrung und Glaubenspraxis mehr oder weniger eng miteinander verknpfen. Die Ergebnisse zeigen, dass Elemente der Traditionen in der Familie verschieden sind. Z.B., es war regelmige religise Praxis Eltern und/oder Groeltern (z.B., Gebet, Gottesdienste am Sonntag oder am Wochentagen usw.), gemeinsame Aktivitten in Pfarrei, christliches oder traditionellkulturelles Feiern von Feiertagen usw. Auf Grundlage solcher Erfahrungen hat sich die Gottes- und Religionsvortellung, auch die Glaubenserfahrung- und Praxis der Befragten gebildet. Aus dem vorliegenden Ergebnissen kann man folgende Schlussfolgerungen ziehen: Die Werte und Glaubenspraxis sind erlernbar, besonders in den Familien, wo
3 Hier kann man Analogie mit D.Hervieu-Leger finden. Sie unterscheidet solche Identittsebenen (Dimensionen) - communal dimension of religious identification, emotional dimension of religious identification, ethical dimension of religious identification, cultural dimension of religious identification (D.Hervieu-Leger, 2004). 69

Glaubenspraxis intensiv ist. Fr die Formierung des Glaubenserfahrung- und Praxis spielt eine groe Rolle mtterliche Linie: die Gottesvorstellung und Glaubenspraxis von der Mutter. Die Grundlage, die dem Kind seine Glaubenserfahrung- und Praxis prgt, ist: Traditionen in der Familie, Position der Eltern zur Religion, Muster der Eltern oder anderen Verwandten, regelmige Glaubenspraxis. Die Traditionen, die in der Elternfamilie gebt wurden, auch Muster, die gesehen wurden, werden auch in der eigenen Familie weitergegeben. Die Werte- und Religionorientierte Erziehung des Kindes in der Familie formiert sein Gottesvertndnis und gibt Elemente der Glaubenspraxis weiter.

Literatur
Berger, P.L. 1994. Sehnsucht nach Sinn. Glauben in einer Zeit der Leichtglaubigkeit. Frankfurt/New York: Campus Verlag Boos-Nunning, U. 1972 Dimensionen der Religiositt. Zur Operationalizierung und Messung religiser Einstellungen. Mnchen Brilit, B. 2005. Search for spirituality and identity in postcomunist Lithuania. In Roebben, B., Warren, M. Religinis ugdymas kaip praktin teologija (pp 61-80). Kaunas: Marijon talkinink centras. Fowler, J.W. 1991. Stufen des Glaubens. Die Psychologie der menschlichen Entwicklung und die Suche nach Sinn. Gtersloh. Frielingsdorf, K. 2003. Demoniki Dievo vaizdiai. Vilnius: Katalik pasaulis Heinrich, Ch. 2002. Die Konvertiten. ber religise und politische Bekehrungen. Mnchen: Carl Hanser Verlag Hipp, T. 1999. Religiose Identitt und Konfession. In Miteinander. Newsletter deutschsprachider katholischer Gemeinden im Ausland. Katholisches Auslandssekretarit der Deutschen Bischofskonferenz. Ausgabe Marz. (p. 11) Kohler-Spiegel, H. 2008. Erfahrungen des Heiligen. Religion lernen und lehren. Mnchen: Ksel-Verlag. Luckmann, Th. 1991. Die unsichtbare Religion. Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp Pakus, A. 1998. Tikjimo ir netikjimo slytis iandien. Kaunas: Lietuvos katechetikos centras Pakus, A. 2002. vilgsnis pasaulirin aplink, ventov, save. Kaunas: Lietuvos Katechetikos centro leidykla Richter, A. 2003. Der Einfluss von Religion auf Arbeitsfelder amerikanischer Jugendhilfe und seine Charakterisierung. Dissertation zur Erlangung der Wrde eines Doktors der Philosophie (Dr. phil.) im Fachbereich Erziehungswissenschaft und Soziologie der Universitt Dortmund. Dortmund: Iniversitt Dortmund Trimakas, K.A. 2003. Jaunimas apie tv ir motin. Antroji dalis. Santykiai su tvais. Kaunas: Marijon talkinink centras Trimakas, K.A. 2005. Motina ir tvas dukros ir snaus patirtyje. Kaunas: Marijon talkinink centras Trimakas, K.A. 1998. Tikint brsti. Egzistencinio apsisprendimo psichologija. Kaunas: TKKL Zulehner, P.M., Hager, I., Polak, R. 2001. Kehrt die Religion wieder? Religion im Leben der Menschen 1970-2000. Ostfilden: Schwabenverlag ivil advilOniEn, PhD in Social Sciences, assoc. professor at Marijampol College and Faculty of Catholic Theology at Vytautas Magnus University. Area of scientific interest: sociology of religion and culture, methodology of social research, qualitative research.

70

Session III A
Of Words and Worlds: The Curious Case of Saint Paul
emmanuel NATHAN

A bst ra ct Traditional Pauline scholarship has generally refrained from delving too much into the nature of Pauls individual religious experience and mostly concerned itself with the various aspects of his theology. This landscape began to change markedly in the latter half of the 20th Century, when Pauline studies began to incorporate insights from the social sciences. Thus it is only of late that the topic of religious experience in early Judaism and Christianity has begun to return to Pauline studies, this time with insights from as far afield as neuro-biology and neuro-psychology. On the other hand, there is an established trajectory within Pauline studies that examines his use, appropriation, and reconfiguration of existing Jewish traditions in his letters. This line of inquiry has always assumed Paul as a hybrid of at least two worlds, Jewish and Hellenistic, and viewed his use of traditions as a consequence of this synthetic existence. Both lines of inquiry, whether into Pauls individual religious experience or his use of traditions, wrestle with the dialectic of word and world language and experience, the vexing problem of pinpointing the extent to which Paul was culturally conditioned and innovative at the same time. Paul and his writings therefore offer us a welcome opportunity to examine the interaction of both religious experience and tradition. In this paper I will concentrate especially on 2 Corinthians 3, a chapter that can be viewed from both perspectives: (a) whether Paul is referring to individual religious experience (e.g., the language of glory and transformation); or, (b) relying on traditions (e.g., new covenant and the glorified Moses) to give expression to it. I shall suggest a more down-to-earth alternative. The discussion on sufficiency in ministry in 2 Corinthians 3 was brought on by the conflict situation at Corinth at the time of writing the epistle. This context provided Paul an opportunity to present a new understanding of Moses that was informed by reflections on Pauls own conversion experience. From this perspective, the Moses in 2 Corinthians 3 has now been turned into a reflection of the pre-Christian Paul prior to his own encounter with the Kyrios, an example of a synthesis between religious experience and tradition.
Emmanuel naThan, Faculty of Theology and Religious Studies, Catholic University of Leuven. Area of scientific interest: biblical studies, hermeneutics of St. Pauls writings.

71

Repeating Incarnation: Meister Eckhart and the Problem of Christs Historicity

satoshi KIKUCHI

A bst ra ct This paper aims to approach the general theme of the conference tradition and experience from the particular viewpoint of the theological thought of the German Dominican Meister Eckhart (ca. 1260-1328). At the later stage of the current of medieval mysticism, Eckhart pronounced the most radical Christology. He says that the incarnation of Christ might be meaningless unless it takes place in each one of us. This existentialistic re-interpretation of Christs soteriological role was eventually judged by the Church authorities as undermining the uniqueness of Christ. However, precisely by his delicate position within the tension between the Church and mysticism, Eckhart seems to suggest that we reconsider the balance between the religious tradition and the direct relationship of individuals with the divine. keywords: Meister Eckhart, incarnation, human nature, Christology

Background to the topic of the paper

The development of the intense concern for a direct union with God was one of the characteristics of the broad religious enthusiasm in the later Middle Ages. Within three centuries, a number of significant mystical authors appeared who were manifesting the theme of the mystical union, such as the 12th century Cistercians, Bernard of Clairvaux and William of Saint-Thierry; the 13th century Beguines, Hadewijch and Marguerite Porete; the German Dominicans in the 14th century, Meister Eckhart, John Tauler and Henry Suso; and the Brabantse mystic Jan van Ruusbroec, etc. In the same period, a current of heretical movements was also flourishing. The socalled heresies of Free Spirits and the radical sect of Beguines and Beghards were insisting radically on the possibility of the human persons deification without any kinds of intermediary agents between God and humans, such as virtuous works, the Churchs doctrine, the Church itself, or even the mediator-ship of Christ.1The Church authorities had to, therefore, repeatedly announce their rigid opinions on such heretical doctrines through councils, papal bulls and the inquisition.2 The most decisive opinion was announced in 1329, when the papal bull In agro dominico condemned the twenty-eight statements of the mystic and also one of the most prominent theologians at that time Meister Eckhart.3 As a Dominican,
1 2 3 The best document of the doctrines of the heresies left for today is the list of ninety-seven statements of the so-called Brothers of Free Spirit made by Albert the Great (see de Guibert 1931: 115-127). The bull Saepe sanctam Ecclesiam (1296) condemns the statements of the Free Spirit, while the bull Ad nostrum qui (1312) condemns the doctrines of radical sects of Beguines and Beghards (see Denzinger & Schnmetzer 1976: n. 866; n. 891-908). Oliver Davies points out that the condemnation of Eckharts doctrine was the only case in the history of Church where the structure of the inquisition was used against Dominicans, which is organized for counter-heresy campaign, moreover, where the doctrine of a first rank theologian like Eckhart was condemned by the papal bull (see Davies, O. 1990: 433).

72

his task was initially to preach the ecclesiastical meaning of the union with God to those who claimed a similar idea without sufficient religious education and were thus susceptible to heretical views. Nevertheless, his teaching itself was judged as heretical or suspected of heresy. Unlike the heretical groups, Eckhart never dared to object against the Churchs doctrine, although the condemned article includes, indeed, quite controversial sentences on the deification, such as: whatever God the Father gave to His only-begotten Son in human nature, He gave all this to me. I exclude nothing, neither union, nor sanctity or Whatever holy scripture says of Christ, all that is also true of every good and divine man (Zimmermann & Sturlese 2006: 598. For English translation, see Colledge & McGinn 1981: 78). In this regard, Eckhart was most delicately situated in the midst of the tension between the institution of the Church and the mystical movement. As a matter of fact, Eckharts condemned sentences contain several doctrinal issues. For this conference, we limit our focus to his understanding of the incarnation of Christ and its repetition in each human person. In this particular doctrine, the issue of the balance between the historicity of Christ and the experience of individuals is most evidently discussed. In the following, we will examine a number of texts in his original works in German as well as in Latin.

equality between Christ and humans in human nature

We begin our examination by taking a look at the following quote, which contains the aforementioned condemned sentence:
He [a master] says further that in all that the Father ever gave His Son Jesus Christ in human nature, He meant it more for me, and loved me more, and gave it to me rather than to him. How is this? He gave it to him for my sake, for I needed it. Therefore, whatever He gave him, he meant for me and gave it to me as well as to him. I except nothing, neither union nor the holiness of the Godhead nor anything else. All that He ever gave him in human nature is no more alien or distant from me than from him, for God cannot give a little: He must give either everything or nothing (Quint 1958: 77; English translation: Walshe 2009: 104).

This passage declares the perfect equality between Christ and myself with regard to human nature. Eckhart even says, more radically than the condemned article, that God meant it [= what the Father gave to His Son] more for me, and loved me more, that is, than Christ. This can be interpreted as a strong and yet paradoxical affirmation of Gods will to save human beings who are in need of salvation. Hereby, the understanding of the concept of human nature needs to be focused. The identity of the human nature between Christ and the other human beings has been obviously the most fundamental dogma since early Christianity. At the ecumenical Council of Chalcedon in 451, the common human nature between Christ and other human beings was officially defined in the creed (See Denzinger & Schnmetzer 1976: n. 301). The Church Fathers, who were playing important roles in creating this formula, strongly claimed, rejecting docetism and monophysitism, that Christ was, as human, perfectly equal to us. What motivated the Church Fathers was primarily the
73

soteriological concern for the salvation of the whole of humankind through participation into the unity between the divine and human natures of Christ. However, when Eckhart says, as shown above, that I except nothing, neither union nor the holiness of the Godhead, he seems to step further than the Church doctrine. In the following quote he even says: human nature became God:
The masters declare that human nature has nothing to do with time, being wholly unshakable and much more inward and close to a man than he is to himself. That is why God took on human nature and united it with his own Person. Then human nature became God, for he put on bare human nature and not any man. Therefore, if you want to be the same Christ and God, go out of all that which the eternal Word did not assume (Quint 1958: 420; Walshe 2009: 450).

By giving such a high status to human nature, Eckhart seems to suggest that the human being can climb up beyond the creaturely state and come to the same state of Christ through the way that Christ opened up from above.4 Even if the approach is different, one can reach (or one should reach) the same place where Christ is in terms of not only His humanity but also His divinity.

existentialistic understanding of Christs incarnation

The background of Eckharts radical understanding of human nature is the existentialistic concern for the transformation of each human person into the divinity. This is in stark contrast, for instance, to the words of the Greek Church Father, Cyril of Alexandria: if He [= Christ] was not consubstantial with human beings, there would be no profit in His coming to them (Cyril 1863: 1288. See also Dalmais 1957: 1384. English translation is mine). Nine centuries later, Eckhart states in his Latin treatise, the Commentary on Johns Gospel, as follows:
. . . note that the first fruit of the Incarnation of the Word, who is the natural Son of God, is that we should be Gods sons through adoption. It would be of little value for me that the Word was made flesh for man in Christ as a person distinct from me unless he was also made flesh in me personally (personaliter) so that I too might be Gods son (Zimmermann & Sturlese 1994: 101-102; Colledge & McGinn 1981: 167).

The incarnation of the Word which took place in Christ cannot be meaningful unless it takes place also in each individual through adoption, personally. In a rather paradoxical way, Eckhart tries to maintain the significance of Christs incarnation, which happened once and for all in the history, in its continuous repetition. The following quote reveals such an existentialistic stance of Eckhart more clearly:
People think God only became man there, but that is not true, for God became man here as well as there, and the reason why He became man was that He might bear you as His only-begotten Son, no less (Quint 1971: 98; Walshe 2009: 134).
4 S. Ueda points out that what Eckhart says about human nature is similar to what he says about God Himself (see Ueda 1965: 47).

74

This passage is again in a stark contrast to the well-known expression of another Greek Church Father, Athanasius of Alexandria: Why He Himself became a man, that is because we may become God (Athanasius 1973: 458. English translation is mine).5 In Eckhart, the presence of Jesus Christ now and here in each person is emphasized more than Christs historical role as incarnated at a certain moment in the past. Remarkably, Eckhart even states here that God became man so that He might bear you as His only-begotten Son. It goes without saying that the only-begotten Son is the title given to Christ in the divine personhood, in which both the divine nature and human nature consist (See Denzinger & Schnmetzer 1976: n. 302). Although this hypostatic union was traditionally understood as the foundation for all Christian soteriology, this union as such is not said to take place in any human being other than Christ. While not explicitly, Eckharts statement on the only-begotten Son seems to imply such a conclusion. In fact, this peculiar understanding of the sonship corresponds to his understanding of the human nature which is said to become God.

soteriological role of Christ as a messenger

Thus, Eckharts claim of the perfect equality to Christ leads to the following statement on Christ as a messenger:
Now you might ask me, since I have everything in this (human) nature that Christ can perform according to his humanity, why then do we praise and magnify Christ as our Lord and our God? That is because he was a messenger (ein bote) from God to us and has brought our blessedness to us. The blessedness he brought us was our own (Quint 1958: 87; Walshe 2009: 108).

This statement does not intend to underestimate Christs deity.6 Rather, this should be interpreted as an exemplary understanding of Christs soteriological role. Christs mediator-ship between God and the human being is indeed meant for communicating the good news to the whole of humankind; yet each individual is expected to respond to His message. Christs incarnation is not only the historical event far away from us, but is the living exemplar of our own incarnation. Seen from another perspective, Eckharts statement also implies that the form of religious experience in individuals is actually shaped by the foregoing history. When one claims to have a direct relationship with God, he or she is in fact following the example that Christ manifested in the past.7 The religious experience of each human person is not only directed vertically towards God, but also always determined horizontally by history, even if one might forget it at the moment of the experience.
5 6 Compare also the statement of Eckhart in his German Sermon 29: Why did God become man? That I might be born God Himself (Quint 1971: 84; Walshe 2009, 126). Eckhart clearly bore the word of Athanasius in his mind. To describe Christs role as a messenger reminds us of the doctrine of the Gnostic heresies. They believe that Christ is one of the angels who came into the world to save our angelic souls imprisoned in human bodies (Jonas 1992: c. 3). Eckharts intention was, however, not to give a position of angel to Christ, since he presents Christs status of a messenger as the very reason why we praise Him as our Lord and our God. In the Commentary on Johns Gospel, Eckhart states, borrowing words from Beda, that human beings should be able to become the second Christ (see Zimmermann & Sturlese 1994: 241). The second Christ presupposes the first Christ. 75

Conclusion
A unique feature of Christian faith throughout the centuries tradition is that Christians gave the highest possible position to the man Jesus Christ, namely, the only-begotten Son of God. Many other religions also have proper crucial figures in their history (such as Buddha and Mohamed), who all the later generations are supposed to follow as an example. However, unlike other religions, such as Buddhism, which admits theoretically the existence of countless Buddhas, Christian faith claims that the absolute example appeared in Christ once and for all in history. In the period of religious enthusiasm in the later Middle Ages, this Christology seemed to be questioned by those who insisted on the possibility of perfect equality to Christ. In the midst of this tension, Eckhart was in a way trying to find a delicate balance between the historicity of Christ, on the one hand, and the direct experience of God, on the other. Although his attempt resulted in the papal condemnation at that time, he offers an interesting point of discussion for us today regarding tradition and experience within the Christian faith, and also regarding how the absolute uniqueness of Christ, which maintains the identity of Christian faith, can find reconciliation with other religions.

Bibliography
Athanasius. 1973. Athanase DAlexandrie : Sur LIncarnation du Verbe. Sources chrtiennes 199. Paris: Cerf. Cyril. 1863. Cyrillus Alexandrinus: Quod unus sit Christus. In Jacques-Paul Migne (Ed.), Patrologiae cursus completus. Series Graeca 75: 1254-1362. Colledge, E., & McGinn, B. (Eds.). 1981. Meister Eckhart: the Essential Sermons, Commentaries, Treatises, and Defense. Mahwah, NJ: Paulist. Dalmais, I-H. 1957. Divinisation: II. Patristique Grecque. Dictionaire de spiritualit 3: 13761389. Davies, O. 1990. Why were Eckharts propositions condemned? New Blackfriars 71: 433-445. De Guibert, J. 1931. Documenta Ecclesiastica Christianae Perfectionis Studium Spectantia. Rome: Pontificia Universitas Gregoriana. Denzinger, H., & Schnmetzer, A. (Eds.). 1976. Enchiridion Symbolorum: Definitionum et declarationum de rebus fidei et morum. 36th ed. Freiburg: Herder. Jonas, H. 1992. The Gnostic Religion: The Message of the Alien God and the Beginning of Christianity. 2nd ed. London: Routledge. Quint, J. (Ed.). 1958. Meister Eckhart: die deutschen Werke, Band 1. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Quint, J. (Ed.). 1971. Meister Eckhart: die deutschen Werke, Band 2. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Ueda, S. 1965. Die Gottesgeburt in der Seele und Durchbruch zur Gottheit: Die mystische Anthropologie Meister Eckharts und ihre Konfrontation mit der Mystik des ZenBuddhismus. Studien zu Religion, Geschichte und Geisteswissenschaft, Band. 3. Gtersloh: Gerd Mohn. Walshe, M. OC. (Ed.). McGinn, B. (Rev.). 2009. The Complete Mystical Works of Meister Eckhart. Crossroad: New York.
76

Zimmermann, A., & Sturlese, L. (Eds.). 1994. Meister Eckhart: die lateinischen Werke, Band 3. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Zimmermann, A., & Sturlese, L. (Eds.). 2006. Meister Eckhart: die lateinischen Werke, Band 5. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Satoshi KiKuCHi, Faculty of Theology and Religious Studies, Catholic University of Leuven, Belgium. Area of scientific interest: medieval mystical literature.

Seeing and Believing in Resurrection Narratives

Valdas MACKELA

A bst ra ct In resurrection narratives of New Testament disciples after seeing an empty tomb finally come to belief that Jesus is risen from the dead. Among the resurrection narratives the episode of doubting Thomas in Gospel of John is very characteristic in this aspect. The exceptionality of appearance of the risen Jesus to Thomas lies in the fact that it presents the relation between seeing and believing. More specifically, it shows the significance of believing after, or because of, having seen the risen Christ, and believing without having seen him. But in apocryphal gospel that bears his name, Thomas is presented not as doubting or unbelieving, but the one who understands Jesus and his teaching better than the rest of apostles. Recent theory presents gospels according to Thomas and John as gospels in conflict advocating respectively vision mysticism and faith mysticism. In my paper plan to examine issues of experience and tradition in the way how orthodox tradition of apostolic witness of risen Jesus Christ is related to heterodox tradition of visio dei that comes via esoteric understanding of Jesus teaching.
valdas MaCkELa, lecturer at the Faculty of Catholic Theology, Vytautas Magnus University, Lithuania. Area of scientific interest: gnosticism, Church Fathers.

Tradition of the Genre in the Age of Intertextuality. Wojciech Kilars Te Deum

Anna WIECZOREK

A bst ra ct Various approaches function in the 20th- and 21st-century music to tradition and to that which is deep-rooted in tradition: genres, types, and assumed patterns. On one hand we witness a return to tradition, whereas on the other composers distance themselves from everything that was written in history as prescribed in
77

advance, genre-specific. Carl Dahlhaus perceives a decline or weakening of types and genres (Dahlhaus 2007: XI) in new music; he observes a process of emancipation from type resulting in a composition which has to rely on itself, to some extent, without a backbone from any pattern that would provide its frames or support (Dahlhaus 2007: 110). Herman Danuser also presents the phenomenon of musical genre disintegration, at the same time noticing a reverse tendency, i.e. a return to the genre category (Danuser 1984: 400). In 2008 Wojciech Kilar composed his Te Deum for solo voices, chorus and orchestra to a Latin text of a Medieval hymn Te Deum laudamus. The hymn of Te Deum, as a genre, is a poetic and musical composition intended for group singing, whose primary function is that of a cult, liturgy. Hymns are presumed to have an eulogic and suppliant nature; thus its dominant expressive category is solemn, ceremonial, dignified, festive, pompous, beseeching and contemplative tone. Kilars composition fulfils the basic objectives of a hymn written in the history of the genre in many respects. The composer refers to tradition numerous times: by using authentic Medieval Latin and cantata-oratory performance cast, by archaizing manipulations and the use of quotes from Polish church songs. However, at the same time the composition may be included most definitely into the circle of intertextual culture, combining many centuries of tradition with the 20th-century composers technique and a clear reference to his contemporary composers. Kilars Te Deum constitutes a contemporary example of a return to traditional religious music filled with the spirit of prayer, contemplation and meditation. keywords: tradition, genre, hymn, Kilar, Te Deum True tradition is not a testimony to the past. It is a living force which invigorates and shapes the present. Igor Stravinsky Igor Stravinsky, a composer who also wrote about music a lot, included in Poetique musicale his own position towards tradition. In his opinion tradition is the result of a conscious and thought-out acceptance (Stravinsky 1980: 42). He also writes, that tradition suggests the reality of what lasts, and is a familiar commodity, a heritage which you receive providing you render it productive (...). Tradition is referred to in order to create something new. Thus we owe tradition for the continuity of art. Following Stravinskys concept tradition invigorates and shapes the present, at the same time allowing an artist to create something new (Stravinsky 1980: 43).

1. the genre category

Especially in the music of the 20th and 21st centuries, we witness, on one hand, a return to tradition, whereas on the other composers distance themselves from everything that was written in history as prescribed in advance, genre-specific. Carl Dahlhaus notices atrophy or remission of types and genres (Dahlhaus 2007: XI) in new music; observes a process of emancipation from type resulting in a composition which has to rely on itself, to some extent, without a backbone
78

from any pattern that would provide its frames or support (Dahlhaus 2007: 110). Herman Danuser also presents the phenomenon of musical genre disintegration, at the same time noticing a reverse tendency, i.e. a return to the genre category (Danuser 1984: 400). In Micha Gowiskis opinion, the age and traditionalism of genre make it so obvious, and so deeply rooted into out cultural consciousness, that it is enough to accept it, that is acknowledge its existence a priori (Gowiski 1983: 79). Such an approach allows above all to correctly classify a composition, and this in turn guarantees, in Adam Kulawiks opinion, its correct understanding (Kulawik 1997: 156). There is a conviction in the theory of literature that a genre possesses its own inner memory, which allows it to continuously reform while at the same time maintaining memories of its past (Gowiski 1983: 105). Mikhail Bakhtin claims that, a genre continues to regenerate and restore itself [...] in each individual composition of a given genre. Further on he states that a genre lives in the present but always remembers its past, its beginning (Gowiski 1983: 105).

2. Kilars Te Deum
Te Deum by Wojciech Kilar (born in 1933) for solo voices, choir and orchestra was written in 2008 to a Latin text of a medieval hymn, as a composition dedicated to the composers wife, Barbara, who died a year before. The composition is made up of five parts creating a series-reprise form. The sound material is typical for Kilars work from his recent years: dominated by diatonics, a material both tonal as well as modal. The general principal of forming sound matter is a concept of repetitiveness: single tones, motifs, phrases. The compositions tonal frame constitutes of C-major key. It is maintained in a slow and only slightly moderate tempo and in loud and very loud dynamics (between mf and ff), with a majority of duple metre. Amongst the expressive marks there are, among others: maestoso, misterioso, dolce e cantabile, dolce e sereno. The hymn of Te Deum laudamus is firmly and strongly rooted in the tradition of the Christian Church. Its history reaches back to the 14th century. Until this day, the author of this most famous and popular medieval hymn is unknown1. Te Deum laudamus is a breviary hymn for Sunday and holiday Lauds. In time it emancipated from the Liturgy of the Hours and became an independent basis for many monumental compositions written for especially grand church and state ceremonies by composers of many epochs (Czajkowski 1998: 30, 31). The hymn of Te Deum, as a genre, is a poetic and musical composition intended for group singing, whose primary function is that of a liturgy. Hymns are presumed to have an eulogic and suppliant nature, they are a solemn praise of God. Thus, its dominant expressive category is solemn, ceremonial, dignified, festive, pompous, beseeching and contemplative tone.
1 Although Saint Ambrose, the Bishop of Milan is considered to be the author of most of the first medieval Latin hymns, it is most probable that Saint Nicetas, the Bishop of Remesiana wrote the hymn of Te Deum laudamus (Remesiana is the antique name of the present-day Bela Palanka, Serbian town), and not by Saint Ambrose, as it was thought for centuries. However, this version has not yet been confirmed. 79

3. Tradition of the genre in Kilars Te Deum

The reference to tradition of Kilars Te Deum may be indicated in at least two aspects: in the sphere of genre references to the characteristic qualities of a medieval hymn, as well as in the area of a widely understood intertextual dependencies.

3.1
One of the most visible and obvious displays of references to tradition in Kilars composition is the original, Medieval Latin which the composer used not omitting even one word from the 14th-century text of the hymn. Following the manycentury tradition, hymns were intended for group singing performed by the whole community. Thus, it is no surprise that the composer used the full sound of a symphonic orchestra, choir and soloists for his 21st-century work. The cantataoratory cast is characteristic after all for many other compositions of this genre mainly from the 19th and 20th centuries. The composer achieved the solemn, eulogic nature typical for hymns by, inter alia, using appropriate instruments. The triumphant fanfares of brass instruments and timpani opening the composition introduce an air of unusual celebration initiating a melody which is then repeated by choir sopranos. Kettledrums are the only percussion instruments Kilar applied. They emphasise the solemn mood from the very first bars of Te Deum resounding tremolo at a forte dynamic; whereas in the further course of the composition, they support the correct organisation of musical time.

Example 1. W. Kilar, te Deum, part I, bars 1-8

The works eulogic nature is completed by expressive designations entered in the score, such as maestoso (appearing three times in the compositions), misterioso (four times), dolce e cantabile or dolce e sereno. These designations point to the most essential qualities of the composition, such as majesty and mystery, melodiousness and sweetness, brightness and radiance. The tonal frames of the composition consisting of the C major key also emphasise the characteristic air of Kilars hymn. The authors application of this key is firmly justified by musical tradition, because the C major key is associated, among others, with grandeur /Hennig
80

1897/, religious feelings and innocence /Pauer 1877/, and most of all with power and majesty /Mller 1830/ (Mianowski 2000: 44). Apart from the eulogic tone solemn and festive suppliant and prayerful tones are also typical for a hymn. These are favoured by the positioning of accents on words that are particularly significant in a suppliant prayer, such as for example the invocation of Christe. The composer highlights it with melisma figure which is extremely rare in his work on one hand paying homage to the divine name, whereas on the other attempting to ensure that the words of his prayer are heard out. It is distinctive that this invocation to God particularly emphasised in the composition is delegated to the bass solo part, which evokes the liturgical, melodious prayer of a priest.

Example 2. W. Kilar, Te Deum, part II, bars 1-16

The litany-like Miserere from the last part of the composition is a fragment of an exceptionally expressive suppliant nature. A regular pulse in an even metre, the rhythmic ostinato unisono of strings and grand piano and the words of a beseeching have mercy upon us evoke the pace of a funeral procession. Its pleading nature is increased by the sounds of a melancholy, cruel and dark /Lavignac 1895/ B minor key, although also associated with peaceful anticipation and patient hope /Pauer 1877/ (Mianowski 2000: 44). The semantics of this key clearly adds to the prayers sense, while bestowing upon it a tone of deep sorrow, also lending it hope for being heard out, mercy and salvation.

81

Example 3. W. Kilar, Te Deum, part V, bars 20-30

The composer touches many times upon tradition also through references to idioms characteristic for the music of other periods applying, among others, archaisations as well as using quotations and alluding to church songs. There are also distinct references to certain qualities of other composers styles. The nature of typical archaisation referring to the style of the old epochs is visible in the first part: Te gloriosus apostolorus chorus, which is dominated by the sound of perfect fifths in a six-voice a capella choir texture, associated with medieval organum.

Example 4. W. Kilar, Te Deum, part I, bars 73-79

The beginning of the composition is an example of quoting fragments of other works in Kilars Te Deum. The melody which the composer uses comes from the Graduale Simplex collection and constitutes a song of Halleluiah popular in the Catholic church and intended for the so-called Ordinary Time. The composers deformation of the melody consists of, in fact, keeping only its incipit, that is the first six notes, while the rhythm and intervals are slightly changed in its further course.
82

Example 5. Initial theme of Kilars Te Deum

Example 6. Halleluiah from Graduale Simplex (Ordinary Time Mass I, Verse in Mode VIII c)

Using one of the most popular melodies of Halleluiah, in the face of the composers dedication of the composition and the difficult times in Kilars life preceding the creation of this work (death of his wife), subtly symbolises faith in resurrection and the Christian hope for life after death. Kilars Te Deum contains visible references to stylistic qualities of the music of other composers, and most distinctly to Henryk Mikoaj Greckis (1933-2010) music. Kilar seems to refer to Greckis specific composers technique and the characteristic manner of developing sound matter. Greckis typical technique of chord manipulation in string quintet parts also appears in Kilars Te Deum. It consist of a major second fluctuation of tetrads known if only from Beatus Vir or Symphony no. 3 of Sorrowful Songs.

Example 7. W. Kilar, Te Deum, part III, bars 75-83

83

Example 8. H. M. Grecki, Symphony no. 3 of Sorrowful Songs, part III

While discussing Greckis music, it is worth pointing out another characteristic quality, i.e. a specific role of a grand piano and a harp in his music. For Grecki, both of these instruments, first of all in connection with strings, played a significant expressive role, for example in Ad Matrem or Symphony no. 3 of Sorrowful Songs. In Teresa Maleckas opinion, the grand piano in Greckis music is of key significance, and its sound is an inseparable element of that music, co-creating its specific sound aura, lending it, one might say, an outright individual brand (Malecka 2012: 315). The grand piano and the harp also appear in Kilars Te Deum. The grand piano usually doubles the vocal and instrumental sounds, or fills up the timbre space in long freely resounding single sounds and chords.

84

Example 9. W. Kilar, Te Deum, part II, bars 1-27

Composers purposeful references to fragments of other compositions and including them into their own works make Kilars Te Deum most definitely a part of intertextual culture which combines the many centuries of tradition with the 20thcentury composers technique. Kilars composition fulfils the basic objectives of a hymn written in the history of the genre in many respects, constituting a modern example of returning to the traditions of religious music, full of spirit of prayer, contemplation and meditation. Most definitely, Te Deum is not Wojciech Kilars last word on the subject. As the composer admits himself that there is nothing else that would influence art, especially music and painting, than an inspiration from religion, faith and holy texts. This is the most powerful and most significant area of music. So many trends have passed, so many forms have died, whereas the inspiration with holy texts is unfailing (Dowd na istnienie... 2000).

85

Bibliography
Czajkowski, S. 1998. Hymn. Od psalmu i hymnu do songu i Liedu. Muzyka i liryka. Zagadnienia genologiczne: rodzaj gatunek utwr. Krakw: Akademia Muzyczna. Dahlhaus, C. 2007. Estetyka muzyki. Warszawa: Wydawnictwa Uniwersytetu Warszawskiego. Danuser, H. 1984. Die Musik des 20. Jahrhunderts. Neues Handbuch der Musikwissenschaft. Vol 7. Ed. Carl Dahlhaus. Laaber: Laaber-Verlag. Dowd na istnienie Boga. O muzyce sakralnej dla Gocia Niedzielnego mwi Wojciech Kilar. 2000. Warszawa: Go Niedzielny no. 47. Gowiski, M. 1983. Gatunek literacki i problemy poetyki historycznej. Genologia polska. Wybr tekstw. Warszawa: PWN. Kulawik, A. 1997. Poetyka. Wstp do teorii dziea literackiego. Krakw: Wydawnictwo Antykwa. Malecka, T. 2012. On the Peculiar Role of the Piano in the Oevre o Henryk Mikoaj Grecki. Beethoven (5). Studien und Interpretationen. Natur und Kultur. Krakw: Akademia Muzyczna. Mianowski, J. 2000. Semantyka tonacji w niemieckich dzieach operowych XVIII-XIX wieku. Toru: Wydawnictwo Adam Marszaek. Stravinsky, I. 1980. Poetyka muzyczna. Krakw: PWM. anna WiECzOREK, PhD student of the Academy of Music in Krakow, Poland. Area of scientific interest: contemporary music founded on religious basement.

86

Session III B
Bonds and Memories in the Sacred Space
orsolya GYNGYSSY

In theological point of view, church (as a building) is a place where Heaven connects to the Earth, where the important turning points of lifetime became consecrated and socially legitimated, where the sacred dynamism of the year denoted on every feast and mass. For art historians, non-believers and tourists church is a memento of the bygone past, basically an interesting, mystical spectacle and historical-aesthetical factum. For local communities the Church of Ours is the source of collective identity, a place what we are proud of. Church/Churches of Ours represents the unbroken chain with the ancestors even for those who are not the member of the church community but living in the same settlement. I presume that the holy space, the church inside is not homogene in the individuals point of view. There are several factors which could shape our subjective bonds to different altars and sculptures in the church we are attending, such as aesthetical reasons, memories, beloved cults, saints and so on. This statement is also valid regarding the seats in the church. Beside these ultra-subjective determinants we also have to count with local and family traditions and other objective circumstances (e.g. temperature, acoustic). In my experimental study I attempt to analyze the cognitive maps of the female members of a Roman Catholic family. This case study emphasizes the more and more fragmented nature of personal religiosity which reduces the common platform of family bonds and the viability of narrative heritage.
orsolya GynGyssy, scientific assistant, museologist, ethnographer; Museum Directorate of Veszprm County, Veszprm, Hungary.

Via Margaritarum, the Revitalized Cult of St. Margaret of Hungary and the Spirit of Penance
Gbor BARNA

St. Margaret of Hungary was the 7th child of the Hungarian King Bla IV. During the Mongolian invasion (1241-1242) she was offered up by her parents as penance for the eliberation of the Hungarian Kingdom. She became Dominican none and was living in the Dominican monastery on the Rabit-island of the Danube (today Margaret-island). She died very early and was buried in the chapel of the monastery, which is now ruined. In the last century there were archeological excavation here. Her calendar feast is on 18th January.
87

She was venerated as Beata (Blessed, 1276) during the centuries. Her canonization process went up very slowly and at least she was sanctified only in 1943, during the WW II as a result of a nationwide spiritual co-operation of the clergy and laic people with the Pope Pius XII. The Soviet occupation and communist political turn just after the WWII pressed her veneration back. Societies were dissolved, journals were banned which served in the previous decades her veneration and cult. A huge mass movement among Hungarian Catholics rapidly disappeared. Small sign of the reweakening of her cult is that since 21st of January 1979 there are Holy Masses at the ruins ont he Margaret-island pontificated allways by the archbishop of Esztergom which collect people mostly from Budapest. There are also Holy Masses in other places of the country. Interpreting the pilgrimages as tools of penance and atonement, in 2006 a via Margaritarum was opened between two important places of pilgrimage Mtraverebly-Szentkt (official national shrine in Hungary) and Mariazell (Austria which was functioning practically as national shrine of Hungarians till the political turn in 1990). Organizers in this way combine the personal penance of St. Margaret and that of the long distance pilgrimage, comparing the situation in the 13th century with actual everyday life of the country, offering troubles to atonement for mistakes and sins of the contemporary Hungarian society.
Gbor barna, professor, Department of Ethnology and Cultural Anthropology, University of Szeged, Hungary. Area of scientific interest: pilgrimage, religious movements.

Al-Andalus and Java: Still a Sanctuary for Interconnecting Religions and Traditions?
Hee sook LEE-NIINIOJA

Al-Andalus refers to a period (711-1492) between the initiation of Umayyad Governors and the Catholic Monarchs victory. Abd al-Rahman I made Cordoba his capital as a crowing achievement of Islam, but Christians and Jews adapted themselves to the new situation without major problems, due to the Muslim rulers tolerance. This continued under the Christian rule after Alfonso VIs capture of Toledo (1085). Muslim artisans constructed sacred buildings, and vegetal motifs in Santa Maria La Blanca Synagogue (1250) prove how ornamental strategies in Islamic buildings beautified a Jewish temple beyond ideological boundaries. In Java, Islam became the dominant religion (16C), but the basic patterns of ancestral, mythical belief and Hindu-Buddhism were integrated within Sufi Islam. Sufi precept of universal toleration could negotiate with pre-Islamic culture to affirm oneness of God. Sufis believed mosques to be sacred, thus pre-Islamic ornamentation became a means for Islamisation, combining indigenous and Islamic ideas and forms. keywords: Al-Andalus, Java, Hindu-Buddhism and Islam, Intercultural, Traditions
88

Intercultural Communication
The term intercultural defines between or among people of different cultures. Originally referring to comparative studies on statistical compilations of cultural data, this term began to achieve a sense of cultural interactivity: how people from dissimilar cultures, religions, and traditions behave, communicate and perceive the world around them. Intercultural communication was put into practice as old as mankind, initiated to practical contacts between different tribal cultures when they met at the first time. History has full stories of peoples willing to learn and understand other languages and cultures through a variety of means such as travel, trade, pilgrimage, colonization, etc. However, it was the latter half of the 20th century that intercultural communication became a field of systematic study, due to recognition of cultural diversity as a decisive factor in communication. The famous anthropologist Clifford Geertz (1973) claims that culture is a historically transmitted pattern of meaning embodied in symbols, a system of inherited conceptions expressed in symbolic forms by means of which men communicate, perpetuate, and develop their knowledge about and attitudes toward life. Culture can be regarded as a set of social rules, supplying a framework that gives meaning to events, objects, and people. And through these rules, we can make sense of our environments, decreasing uncertainty of the social circumstance. Therefore culture is (1) learned, (2) transmitted to inter-generations, (3) symbolic, (4) dynamic, and (5) ethnocentric. Culture allows us to engage in several forms of social intercourse needed for constructing and conveying culture (Samovar, Porter and McDaniel 2009).

La Convivencia of toledo in Al-Andalus (711-1492)

Toledo is a municipality located in central Spain, 70 km south of Madrid. The city was declared by UNESCO in 1986 a World Heritage Site as a place of coexistence of Christian, Jewish and Moorish cultures. Under the Caliphate of Cordoba, Toledo had a golden age known as La Convivencia (the co-existence of Christians, Jews and Muslims). It was again the capital of the rich Taifa Muslim kingdoms as a struggling point between the Muslims and Christians. Three main religious groups existed: Christians, Muslims and Jews. The Muslims, united on the religious level, had several ethnic divisions; the main being the distinction between the Berbers and the Arabs. Mozarabs were Christians who lived under the Muslim rule and adopted some Arabic customs, art and words, keeping their Christian rituals and Romance languages. And due to the tolerance of Muslim rulers, Christians and Jews adapted themselves to the new situation without major problems. Each community inhabited distinct neighbourhoods in the cities, but in the 10th century a massive conversion of Christians took place, thus muladies (Christians who converted to Islam after the arrival of the Moors) comprised the majority of the population of al-Andalus by the centurys end. In 1085, Alfonso VI of Castile conquered Toledo and set up direct personal control. This was the first concrete Reconquest taken by Christian Leon-Castile kingdoms, and in the 13th century, the city became a major cultural centre under the guidance of Alfonso X, called El Sabio (the Wise) for his love of learning. The program of
89

translations began under Archbishop Raymond of Toledo and brought vast knowledge of academic and philosophical works in Arabic into Latin to Europe. Moreover large communities of Muslims and Jews built their religious monuments, such as Santa Maria la Blanca and El Transito synagogues, Cristo de la Luz mosque before their expulsion from Spain in 1492. Privileges were offered to Christians and Jews, but Mudejar architecture was created by Muslim artisans (mudejar) who were working for them in this Christian territory. Particularly, at Santa Maria la Blanca, Muslim artisans served a vibrant Jewish community according to its need for a worship place.

santa Maria la Blanca

Santa Maria La Blanca is originally known as the Ibn Shushan Synagogue. As the congregational synagogue of Toledo, it currently serves as museum. Erected in 1180 and rebuilt in 1350 on the side of an earlier structure, it is disputably the oldest, still standing synagogue building in Europe. The interior has a basilical structure with five narrow naves stretching from east to west; the central one being higher than the rest and separated by arcades with large circular horseshoe arches, hinting a Christian Mozarabic influence. The arcade is supported on octagonal columns of brick with a tiled plinth, which is rendered in plaster. It is characteristic of Mudejar building technique, while the ultra-semicircular arcade is another attribute of Mudejar taste. In fact, the Mudejar style is a symbiosis of techniques and ways of understanding architecture resulting from Islamic and Christian cultures living side by side on the Iberian Peninsula in the 12th century. As it reinterpreted of Western cultural styles through Islamic influences, the dominant geometrical character is distinctively Islamic.

Islamic Almohad pine motif in santa Maria La Blanca (1180)

Noticeably, the capitals using vegetal ornament of Islamic Almohad pine cones witness how ornamental strategies often seen in Islamic buildings can serve a Jewish temple, in order to add beauty without religious conflicts. Adapting Almohad architectural tradition to a non-Muslim context, the synagogue represents Mudejar architecture, developed out of the complex interaction between the Islamic, Christian, and Jewish cultures. The use of the multi-lobular blind arcade shows how common ornamental elements in Islamic buildings of al-Andalus could be
90

incorporated into a Jewish building. The intercultural communications in Toledo is an outstanding example of interconnecting religions and traditions.

A regional Approach to Islamic Culture in Java, Indonesia

During the introduction of Islam into the Malay Peninsular around the 13th century, Islam not only changed local cultural landscapes, but also created a unique regional heritage with areas which they came into contact, to comply with its religious and philosophical ideas. The expression of faith in art and architecture articulated the creed of Islam and produced complexity of regional variations. First, living in a spirit of tolerance, flexibility, and openness, the Malay people were able to accept changes through careful selection, reflection, and modification without discarding their wealthy cultural traditions. They witnessed Hindu-Buddhist, Chinese, Islamic and western cultures through their lifestyle. Second, the appearance of Islam to the Archipelago coincided with an era of zealous spiritualism in the Islamic world. Appeared in Persia, Sufi mysticism followed the Mongol seizure of Baghdad (1258) and rapidly spread through international trade routes. Local artists drew inspiration from a diverse heritage and selected to transform existing symbolism in accordance with Islam. Moreover, the close relationship between the rulers and Islam was spatially symbolized by placing kings palaces adjacent to the grand mosque and the towns centre. In the case of Java, Islam replaced Hinduism and Buddhism by the end of the 16th century, but the Islamic Mataram kingdom patterned itself after the Hindu Majapahit, and practised mystic animism, Hindu-Buddhism, European pomp, and Islamic circumstance. The common heritage in mosques reflects the close political relationship between Muslim rulers in different regions. Until the late 19th century, mosques were constructed in a vernacular style with a Hindu-Buddhist multi-tiered roof, using mostly wood to accommodate local conditions. The persistence of indigenous buildings had to take into account the local profusion of natural resources and variable climates, resulting in exuberant and diverse architectural styles. Elements associated with Islamic architecture, such as the dome and geometric ornament, do not feature in these traditions.

Agung Demak, Demak, Central Java (1479)

91

Despite the influence of pre-Islamic beliefs and art forms on the pattern of life, a bond between Islam and local culture has been firm, because existing forms encouraged Javanese to accept the Islamic ideologies. The idea of Godliness of their ancestors and the primary aesthetics of cosmological belief in Malay were penetrated into Islamic cosmology in a form of syncretic culture. The three-tiered roof of the mosque symbolizes the mystical paths to God as well. It is known that the avoidance of figurative representation differentiates Islamic art from Hindu-Buddhist aesthetic style, but here Islamic art needed reconciliation of the ambivalent relationship between the two religions, caused by the rulers indigenous belief of the magic in art. Accordingly, the depiction of non-Islamic images, to name a few, the Hindu deity Ganesha or zoomorphic and anthropomorphic symbols combined by Koranic calligraphy was to be understood in the context of the earlier animism.

Lotus Buds in Javanese Muslims Imagination

Islamic poets describe the flower as a book, where one can study the knowledge about God. And Hindu-Buddhist lotus is likely to be the most influential in Islamic buildings. Hindu mythology says that the world consists of atman (the soul) and maya (illusion), and its creation was symbolized by the growth of lotus. As the primordial lotus grew from the waters of eternity, bringing Brahma, god of creation, and all other creations, it became a dominant motif in representing creation and sanctity. In Hindu-Buddhist temples of Central Java, the lotus in a form of bud or flower was extensively used for wall decoration, signifying ideal beauty and integrating natural forms and supernatural power. The identity of the primeval lotus and Dharma (mystical doctrine) is fundamental in Mahayanist (Great Vehicle) Buddhism. As creator and supporter of the Cosmic Tree, the lotus became the pattern for the abstract notions of Dharma, preached by the Buddha.

Prambanan Hindu temple (8-9C), Kalasan Buddhist temple (9C), Astana Mantingan Mosque (1559), Menar Kp Melayu Mosque (1820)

Of course, Javanese Muslims wished to continue this motif, proved on the golden lotus bud at Menar Kp Melayu mosque (1820) which reminds of the sacred golden lotus buds in temples. A lotus bud of Hindu Prambanan temple held by a hand
92

of a goddess was transferred to an Islamic one at the entrance of Astana Mantingan mosque (1559). The symbolic life of Hindu-Buddhist lotus buds in Javanese mosques displayed the continuity with a variety of influence across time and space. Why so? Are (1) a tolerant attitude between incoming Islam and Javanese acceptance of it, and (2) strong conscience of keeping their tradition among the population? It is that the sacredness of the lotus, rooted deeply in sacred Javanese temples, was extended to mosques by mystic Sufis. As Javanese mosques were sacred (Isnaeni 1996), any motif in ornamentation became sacred and symbolic too. Javanese Muslims underline the significance of sacred Hindu-Buddhist ornaments, trying to connect them with Islam. A symbolic tree from the Garden of Eden, created by God, continued as an Islamic concept, and Javanese Muslims linked this with the Tree of Life of Hindu-Buddhism. Islamic art became an extension, rather than a change from earlier aesthetic traditions, caused by the inspiration of the Javanese, creating a regional Islamic culture and identity.

remarks
Javanese term of Bhinneka Tunggal Ika (unity in diversity) stresses the Javanese identity and culture. Java was the centre where animism, Hindu-Buddhism and Islam coexisted, moving toward a syncretic Islamic religion. Living in peace, tradition and cultures are the first to be considered than faiths and religions. According to an interview held in 2005 with Tjandrasasmita, a distinguished Indonesian scholar in Islamic archaeology, he claimed that Javanese Islam has a few distinct characteristics. Javanese Muslims are greatly conscious of continuity of their cultural heritage which was created by the local genius across centuries. Returning to al-Andalus in the Iberian Peninsular, Menocal (2002) argued that tolerance was an inherent aspect of Andalusian society. In her view, the Jewish and Christian believers living under the Caliphate, despite fewer rights than Muslims, were better than those in other parts of Christian Europe. Jews (5% of the population) who were emigrated to Al-Andalus were treated with dignity, being a key centre of Jewish life during the early Middle Ages. We know that for individuals, religious toleration is the condition of accepting or permitting others religious beliefs and practices which disagree with ones own. In this regard, we can link to a comment expressed by the German linguist Karlfried Knapp (1999): Intercultural communication can...be defined as the interpersonal interaction between members of different groups, which differ from each other in respect of the knowledge shared by their members and in respect of their linguistic forms of symbolic behaviour. Based on the investigation of al-Andalus and Java as well as all the arguments, the both places were once a sanctuary for interconnecting religions and traditions. A question arises. Is this atmosphere still valid and intact in these areas? Whatever it is, it seems to me that when there appears intercultural communication on cultural heritages, the idea of tolerance can take place towards any forms of religions and traditions, either common or uncommon between them, preparing a safe haven for interconnecting them.

93

Bibliography
Bennett, James. 2005. Crescent Moon - Islamic Art and Civilization in Southeast Asia. Art Gallery of South Australia. Curtis, William. 1985. Regional Architecture. In Robert Powell (Ed.), Regionalism in Architecture. Singapore: Concept Media. Dodds, Jerrilynn Denise (Ed.). 1992. Al-Andalus, the Art of Islamic Spain. New York: The Metropolitan Museum of Art. Dodds, Jerrilynn Denise, Maria Rosa Menocal and Abigail Krasner Balbale. 2008. The Arts of Intimacy: Christians, Jews, and Muslims in the Making of Castilian Culture. New Haven: Yale University Press. Frishman, M and Hasan Khan (Eds.). 1994. The Mosque: Historical, Architectural Development and Regional Diversity. London: Thames & Hudson. Geertz, Clifford. 1973. The Interpretation of Cultures. New York: Basic Books. Isnaeni, Hendrajaya. 1996.The Javanese Mosque, a Regional Interpretation of Form and Mystical Concepts. [PhD thesis], University of Melbourne. Knapp, Karlfried. 1999. Meeting the Intercultural Challenge: Effective Approaches in Research, Education, Training and Business. Sternenfels: Wissenschaft & Praxis. Koentjaraningrat, R.M.1990. Javanese Culture. Singapore: Oxford University Press.. Leur, Jacob Cornelis van. 1960. Indonesian Trade and Society: Essays in Asian Social and Economic History. The Hague and Bandung: W. van Hoeve Ltd. Menocal, Maria Rosa. 2002. The Ornament of the World: How Muslims, Jews and Christians Created a Culture of Tolerance in Medieval Spain. Boston: Little, Brown and Company. Prijotomo, Josef. 1992. Ideas Forms of Javanese Architecture. Yogyakarta: Gadjah Mada University Press. Rogers, J. M. 2005. The Timeline History of Islamic Art and Architecture. Hertfordshire: Worth Press Ltd. Samovar, Larry A, Richard E. Porter and Edwin R. McDaniel. 2009. Intercultural Communication, A Reader. Boston: Wadsworth Cengage Learning. Subarna, Abay D. 1982. Contribution a lEtude de lArt et de lArchitecture de la Premiere Periode DIslamisation en Indonesie. [PhD thesis], University of Paris in Pantheon Sorbonne. Sudradjat, Iwan. 1991. A Study of Indonesian Architectural History. [PhD thesis], University of Sydney. Tjahjono, Gunawan. 1998. Architecture: Indonesian Heritage. Singapore: Archipelago Press. Tjandrasasmita, Uka. 1985. Le Role de lArchitecture et des Arts Decoratifs dans lIslamisation de lIndonesie.. Archipel. No 29: 29-35. Yatin, Othman. 2005. Malay Arts: Viewing the Dimensions of Creative Expression. In James Bennett (Ed.), Crescent Moon - Islamic Art and Civilization in Southeast Asia. Art Gallery of South Australia. hee Sook lEE-niiniOJa, PhD. As a pioneer student in Scandinavia in 1970s, Dr. Hee Sook Lee-Niinioja is specialized on Text-Image and Hindu-Buddhist/Christian/Islamic architectural ornamentation. She studied journalism, visual communication, art and architecture, as well as religion, culture and language across the globe. She volunteered humanitarian work and teaching, hoping to enhance dialogues between religions. She is engaged with ICICH-ICOMOS.
94

Stabat Mater Sequence in the Works of Italian18th-Century composers

renata BOROWIECKA

A bst ra ct The Stabat Mater poem grew into the liturgy of the Church as a sequence and a hymn. It has also become one of the universal themes in art. It inspired composers of various epochs and creative centres and it was expressed in many numerous musical interpretations. From among ca 380 compositions which set the text of the sequence to music, a large proportion are 18th-century works of Italian provenience. Musical interpretations of Stabat Mater by Italian composers were usually intended for liturgical or para-liturgical use, although others may also be found that functioned outside the church liturgy and entered into the mainstream of religious concert music. The compositions function repeatedly influenced its final shape, although it was not always a determining factor. The music of the Settecento remained in close dependence from social and cultural life. Popular tastes infiltrated the church walls, the expression of which was, for example, religious music. In the 18th-century sacral works conservative elements were combined with a new musical language which resulted from the role of the church standing at that time particularly close to man and his earthly problems. Thus, it seems interesting to view Italian musical interpretations of Stabat Mater from the perspective of their performance purpose and to indicate to what extent it influenced the forces, genre, style or the character of a given work. The analysis of the issue will allow to isolate aspects limiting the subjective interpretation of artists and to show their cultural and historical community expressed in references to similar musical solutions and means as well as to emphasise what is personal, idiolectic. keywords: sequence; Stabat Mater; Italy;18th-century composers; sacrum; profanum The death of Christ, the very centre of the Christian faith, has been unceasingly revisited in countless transcendental meditations to rediscover the sense of Redemption. The image of the Saviour dying on the cross has not only shaped the European spirituality for centuries, but has also taken a unique place in art. The mystery of the redemptive suffering of Christ is irrevocably mingled with His Mother, who in the hour of death of Her Only-begotten shared His suffering at the foot of the cross. The worship of Mater dolorosa was particularly vividly expressed in the medieval poem Stabat Mater dolorosa. The text has grown into the liturgy of the Church as a sequence and hymn, and has expressively built into the world of musical arts, giving an incessant inspiration to creativity of composers across various centres and ages.

95

1. stabat Mater the word

The genesis of the text
The text of Stabat Mater originated from the late 18th century in Franciscan circles, and Jacopone da Todi (1306) is most frequently assumed to be the author. To quote Umberto Eco: In Middle Ages man lived in a world populated with meanings, references, hidden senses, signs from God in things and nature (Eco 2006: 75), while by Juan Cirlot the middle ages are considered as one of the epochs, where a symbol was lived and loved the most and understood the best (Cirlot 2006: 23). As Johan Huizinga underlines Christ and the cross completely dominated the medieval mentality (Huizinga 1967: 30). References to the Holy Bible are clearly traceable in the poem of Stabat Mater. Words that strongly resonated in the Stabat Mater text can be found in the accounts of the two Evangelists, namely Saint Luke and Saint John, who both wrote about Simeons prophecy and the scene under the cross. Clearly, references to the symbolism of the Cross as the centre of the world are made there. The quoted Evangelic lines also reveal that Mary will suffer at the side of the dying Saviour, and by Her faithful vigil at Her Sons cross, she would become a member to the eschatic family of Jesus and the Mother of all people (Adamiak 2003; John Paul II 1995). It was, however, the Christian cult of Mary as Mater Dolorosa, reflected so distinctively in the spirit of the Franciscan school, that directly contributed to the creation of the text to Stabat Mater. It gained gravity at the end of 11th century, when the presence of Mary at Golgotha tended to be frequently emphasised and Her road of anguish was willingly followed (Siudy 2001, no. 3: 124). Stabat Mater is also rooted in presentations of passions, performed widely over the 12th and 13th centuries, of which the culminating points were Marian lamentations. The Liturgical drama presenting the suffering of Christ and the anguish of His Mother under the cross appealed stronger to the recipients due to clearly human emotions. Undoubtedly, mystical and repentant nature of religious fervour of late medieval Europe has contributed greatly to the creation of the text as well as to the degree of its later popularity. Pilgrims wandering in processions sang hymns glorifying the suffering of Christ and His Mother, and over the years the poem Stabat Mater became the most favourite of texts. Around 1390 it was already well known all over the continent (Sharp 1978: 17).

The function of the text

Stabat Mater served primarily as a rhymed prayer to say at quiet, private services, hence many forms of direct reference in the singular first person, are observed. In the long history of the poem, year 1727 appears to be important, when as observed by Paul-Gerhard Nohl the liturgy has met and accepted the massive popularity of the text (Nohl 1997: 97). Numerous sources, available today, which reveal diverse versions of both chorale melodies and verbal variants of the poem, its supplements, and transformations, as well as imitations with the most widely known one of Stabat Mater speciosa (Sharp 1978; Faravelli 1983 no. 1), prove how
96

widely popular Stabat Mater has become. Interestingly, even the liturgy of the Lent such as Polish Gorzkie ale (Gorzkie ale 2007: 83) bears some resemblance to the poem (texts composed in 1707).

The structure and content

In the long text of Stabat Mater, a few coherent parts may be identified, two of which are most distinct. Namely, the lamentation (stanzas 1-8), which depicts human experiences of Mary a divine person (such an innovative perception that was popular in Franciscan circles), and the suppliant part (stanzas 9-20), where the prayer of man acquires an almost ecstatic tone. The key element of the content is compassio empathising with Marys suffering, although another thought is also articulated here that salvation, which came through the Cross, may be shared by the faithful by merging in pain with Christ and Mary. Those who pray, entrust themselves to God selflessly and absolutely.

2. stabat Mater the music. 18th-century interpretations by Italian composers.

The repertoire of musical interpretations of Stabat Mater is quite abundant. It includes approximately 380 compositions (Blume 1992), with the highest number of works adapting this text (approximately 70) originating from the 18th century Italian circle. The following interpreters of Stabat Mater must be named as the most important of the Settecento era: Agostino Steffani (16541728), Alessandro Scarlatti (1660 1725), Antonio Caldara (ca 16701736), Antonio Maria Bononcini (16771726), Antonio Vivaldi (16781741), Emanuele dAstorga (16801757), Domenico Scarlatti (16851757), Giovanni Battista Pergolesi (17101736), Antonio Ferradini (?17181779), Tommaso Traetta (17271779) and Luigi Boccherini (17431805). All the selected works have been marked as significant achievements in the history of polyphonic musical interpretations of the poem, still it shall be noted that Stabat Mater by Pergolesi, played an extraordinary role; it was famous all over Europe within a few years following the authors death, and it has enjoyed the reputation of a unique work ever since.

The function of composition

The 18th-century compositions to the text of the sequence were applied mainly in liturgy. It is distinct in the ordered works by Vivaldi, as well as A. Scarlatti and Pergolesi. Interestingly, Vivaldi interpreted only the first 10 stanzas of the text. Michael Talbot reminds that these stanzas are to be sang as a hymn at vespers during two celebrations to the memory of Our Lady of Sorrows (i.e. on 15th September, and on Friday preceding Good Friday) (Talbot 1988: 184-5). Stabat Mater by Vivaldi was supposedly sung during the vesper liturgy on the Feast of Our Lady of the Seven Sorrows during Lent (in 1712 the feast fell on 18th March). It could be supposed then that also Stabat Mater by D. Scarlatti functioned as a liturgical work, as it was written when the composer was active in Vatican, and the casting corresponds to Cappella Giulia. It should be noted, however, that religious
97

music also rang at the papal court, so the supposition on applications other than liturgical cannot be disregarded. Another musical interpretation by Caldara with the casting increased by trombones, typical for Viennese religious music of requiem nature, belong to the Stabat Mater solemne group, performed regularly on Holy Saturday by the emperors ensemble. New tendencies towards the so-called sacral music concerts, immensely popular since the middle of the 18th century especially in transalpine countries, were heralded with Stabat Mater by Steffani. It was composed for a secular institution, i.e. the London Academy of Vocal Music, which was to be known further as the Academy of Ancient Music, that promoted performances outside churches. The interpretations by Boccherini and Ferradini most likely also functioned beyond liturgy. The first one was ordered by a patron unrelated to church. The second, quite extensive and full of inter-references to the oratory genre, definitely crossed the liturgical boundaries.

Forces, genre and style

The function of specific composition did not always govern the forces, genre or style. On the contrary, with time it remained a secondary matter more often. Firstly, the choice of both vocals and instruments was determined by the specific centre the composition was ordered for, and thus, by its traditions and forces capabilities. Secondly, tendencies dominant in theatre music, along with the predilection to solo casting and clear voice timbre, gained significance. M. Talbot (Talbot 1995: 73) observed that from the end of 17th century, a motet of new type, i.e. for solo voices and a continuo accompaniment or a group of instruments, had become dominant in the religious music, and it could be in fact termed as sacred cantata. Such cantata provenience (cantata spirituale) is typical for the highest number of the discussed Stabat Mater compositions, though some references to the early baroque motet, church concert, or oratorio bearing already some features of opera sacra are made. Alike, the style of particular Stabat Mater remains widely diversified. To highlight the religious character of their works, the authors reached for the expression typical for the Renaissance or the early Baroque. On the other hand though, following the secular spirit of the time, they tend to break the established canons by introducing, frequently quite innovative, opera elements. Thus, one musical work was either dominated by, or diffused with diverse styles.

Main content plots versus nodal points of the works

All the composers of Stabat Mater clearly highlighted the important moments of the scene at the cross. They considered the following to be the nodal points of the compositions: - exordium as drafting the dramatic scene and introducing the main expressive tone for the musical work (stanza 1); - the moment Christ dies on the cross (stanza 8) as an emphatic closure to a greater thematic and expressive unit;
98

- conclusio (final stanzas) constituting the finale (often of a culminate nature), bringing the memory of death, but also expressing hope for the glory of the Paradise. Many artists, such as dAstorga, Caldara, Bononcini, Traetta, Ferradini, wrote these parts of their compositions for choirs and with polyphonic structures, such as a linear counterpoint, or a newer type of fugato or fugue, thus remaining within the proclaimed rules for sacral music of those times, that required music to be choral and polyphonic; it is worth remembering here Matthesons classification into theatrical, chamber and sacral style. Interpretations by Vivaldi and Pergolesi present extraordinary opening gestures of an illustrative and symbolic nature. The composers referred the musical rhetoric convention, but managed to introduce highly individual solutions within that convention. In Vivaldis composition it is the sign of the cross (imaginatio crucis) and a ninth interval (saltus duriusculus) introduced in violin parts, and then transformed in solo vocal parts. In Pergolesis work major second dissonances filled with excruciating pain in the duet for soprano and alto, and further on sevenths. The words describing Christs death were usually distinguished with figures such as descensus or suspiratio. Some composers used major chords within the cadence, even as distant as e.g. F sharp major triad in a C minor Stabat Mater by D. Scarlatti (tritone relation!). An original solution was proposed in the work by A. Steffani, where a solo bass, whose melodic line takes deep low registers nearly crossing the voice scale, is accompanied by bright sounding strings providing a specific symbol of holiness of Jesus. The musical progression surmounted with a major chord sounds much like a herald of Resurrection. The closing parts of lamentations in Stabat Mater by composers of Settecento era seem to carry the message, which in the 20th century was expressed by Mircea Eliade: It is through the Cross (=Centre) that it is possible to establish a connection with heaven and thanks to this the whole World is <redeemed> (Eliade 2009: 226). The finales of Stabat Mater are reminiscent of death Quando corpus, but express also hope for the glory of the Paradise - paradisi Gloria. It is here that the idea of chiaro-scuro is expressed to its fullest. The Opposition between death and eternal life is showed either by the contrasting tempos (slow-fast) or structure (homophonic-polyphonic). Musical interpretations by D. Scarlatti and A. Steffani provide a fascinating approach towards time and space. The text of quando corpus morietur has been rendered by the same type of melodic and rhythmic movement, by maintaining the narrative within the same registers and gradually expanding or limiting the ambitus of the melody. Such interpretation evokes an impression of frozen time, of being immersed in contemplation, and may as well seem to facilitate the evocation and manifestation of sacrum (compare Strewski 1989: 23-37). It has become traditional to finish musical works with polyphonic forms following Amen, and the tradition continued into the following centuries. The finale of D. Scarlattis composition presents an unusual combination of the old and new musical language. It should be noted here, that the old style prevails over nearly the entire piece. Nevertheless, stile antico is broken with elements of contemporary composers technique. D. Scarlatti liberates the melodics from strict linearism.
99

He applies a double fugue in the final phase, interlacing extensive figurations in vocal parts, which bring to mind a recital technique or solo-tutti arrangements resembling the concert style or concerti grossi. Such innovative measures, similarly as in works by Pergolesi dated several years later, suggestively implicate associations to secular music. Profanum has trespassed sacrum. Musical interpretations of Stabat Mater focus also on the sword piercing Marys soul (including iambic rhythms, altered narrative recitative blending into arioso), and on the vision of the final judgment day (iambic rhythms, contrasts, e.g. solo-tutti, tirata). At last, prayers and pleas are brought forwards, which vary in their emotional intensity and are of an individual nature: from a sorrowful plea (i.e. minor Siciliana in Vivaldis work), through either gentle or mild, or even serene supplications (as no. 8 the serenade-like aria in Stabat Mater by Boccherini), to an ecstatic prayer, a fervent, sometimes dramatic cry (Pergolesi Fac ut portem by means of allunisono). It should be stressed that specific imploring emotions are not correlated to a specific stanza, but are solely dependable on the composers invention, which gives their interpretations a subjective perspective.

Pergolesi case
Stabat Mater by Pergolesi was a piece destined for liturgy. Nevertheless, it contained features typical for secular musical language, such as numerous ornaments, figurations, melismas, lively harmonic progress, or specific rhythmic formulas. Overall, the interpretation is dominated by aria-like narrative, with instrumental parts gaining significance at places. The manifestations of earthly, secular elements in religious music, and specifically liturgical, raised waves of delight and criticism alike. Selected parts of the composition, like Quae moerebat, Eia Mater, Inflammatus, were even considered as musically inadequate to the content of the stanza. The polemic between the defender of the old religious musical style, Padre Martini and Antonio Eximeno, younger by one generation, raised on the encyclopaedic culture, made history. While the former reproached Pergolesi for turning towards opera, which consequently meant prophanising ecclesiastical music, the latter defended the composer stating that music does not make choices between subjects [religious or secular] but stirs passions; where subjects are sacral, so is the music; where secular aspects are concerned, the music is secular (Stefani 1970, no. 3: 479). To quote a 20th-century monographer of the composer, Giuseppe Radiciotti: Pergolesis Stabat Mater cannot be termed as sacral music under the exact definition. It is unrelated to liturgical singing. It is a lamentation of the Virgin, a mothers cry; thus, it is inspired by a profoundly human emotion (Radiciotti 1910: 188). Although Eximeno and Radiciotti lived nearly 200 years apart, both focus not so much on the function of the composition, as on the emotions it evokes. Certainly, the Pergolesi case is a perfect illustration of the character of 18th-century ecclesiastical music, and shows how it balances between conventions and individual styles, the religious and the secular.

100

Conclusions
Concluding the deliberations on Stabat Mater interpretations by Italian composers of the Settecento era, it seems adequate to point to the causes for such blending of religious music with the atmosphere of secular music. Most certainly, it has originated from the social life of those times. Michael Talbot reminds that in the 18th century liturgical observance became a mandatory part of everyday life, and covered all environments, and a popular taste permeated the church walls (Talbot 1995: 82). Adelmo Damerini wrote: For Italy it was time, when human soul was unable to immerse in impersonal contemplation, or mystical abstraction, but it felt the desire to express earthly passions in religious feelings (Damerini 1934 nr 3: 189). The major music trends of the epoch also had their influence. The authors of Stabat Mater remained under the sway of Italian and foreign towns such as Venice, Rome, Naples, Vienna, Prague and others, where dynamic development of vocal and instrumental genres and significant stylistic transformations were observed. Opera seria was the leading genre, where expressive function dominated the performance. Its dramaturgy principles to follow were: variet diversification and contrast of passions, chiaroscuro alternating indistinct and distinct passions, intreccio tension generated between passions (Strohm 1976: 242-244). According to Johannes Mattheson apart from simplicity, candidness and indulgence (Mattheson 1713), evoking and expressing passions constituted the main value of the music of the time. Another one of the other major genres was the cantata, which was, as accurately observed by Carl Dalhaus (Dahlhaus 1985: 84), an experimental ground for opera and oratorio evolving towards opera and cantata over the 18th century, and thus frequently termed as opera sacra. All of these genres significantly influenced the language of sacral music, thus also the forms of the musical interpretations of Stabat Mater. To conclude, we need to return to the starting point, to the surprisingly high number of 18th-century musical interpretations of Stabat Mater. The considerations have led to the following conclusions. The text of the sequence expressed various shades of sorrows, and in the second part reflected also different prayerful emotions. The opera composers noticed this and therefore they willingly addressed Stabat Mater, attempting to transfer an opera-like style of shaping dramaturgy and the manner of expressing emotions onto the foundation of a religious composition. The tendency was especially distinct in Naples, the cradle of a new opera style. Thus, it is not surprising to see that the age of hegemony of the Italian opera has resulted in numerous Stabat Mater interpretations in the achievements of composers who cultivated this genre. The centuries-long popularity of the text, the incessant cult of the Cross and Mater dolorosa, strongly expressed in the words of the sequence aspect of human compassion and prophanised religiousness, rooted in the spirit of the epoch all this contributes to the final success of the text. All of these factors coexisted together in one place and time and resulted in so numerous musical interpretations of the medieval poem. All these aspects are so strongly interrelated that any attempt to separate them or name the most critical are deemed vain. Undoubtedly, the conglomerate of all of them has given rise to the 18th-century phenomenon of Stabat Mater.
101

Bibliography:
Adamiak, E. 2003. Mariologia. Pozna: UAM. Blume, J. 1992. Geschichte der mehrstimmigen Stabat-mater-Vertonungen, MnchenSalzburg: Musikverlag Emil Katzbichler. Caldwell, J., & Boyd, M. 2001. Stabat Mater dolorosa. The New Grove Dictionary of Music and Musicians, (ed.) Sadie S. & Tyrrell J., second ed., vol. 24. London: Macmillan. Cirlot, J. E. 2006. Sownik symboli, (translation) Kania, I. Krakow: Wydawnictwo Znak. Damerini, A. 1934. Lo spirito della musica religiosa nel settecento italiano. La Rassegna Musicale 3: 186-197 Die Musik des 18.Jahrhunderts, (hrsg.) Dahlhaus, C. 1985. Laaber: Laaber-Verlag (= Neues Handbuch der Musikwissenschaft, Bd. 5). Eco, U. 2006. Sztuka i pikno w redniowieczu, (translation) Kimula, M.& Olszewski, M. Krakow: Wydawnictwo Znak. Eliade, M. 2009. Obrazy i symbole, (translation) Rodak M.&P. Warsaw: Wydawnictwo Aletheia. Faravelli, D. 1983. Stabat Mater: poesia e musica. Rivista Internazionale di Musica Sacra 1: 9-43 Hugh, T. H., & Masiclat, P.-D. (2003). Stabat Mater dolorosa. The Catholic Encyclopedia. http://www.newadvent.org. Huizinga, J. 1967. Jesie redniowiecza, (translation) Brzostowski, T. vol. II. Warsaw: PIW. John Paul II. 1995. Redemptoris Mater. Wrocaw: Tum. Rev. Kaamarz, W. (ed.) 2007. Gorzkie ale. Krakow: WTKM. Mattheson, J. 1713. Das Neu-Erffnete Orchestre. Hamburg. Mearns, J. 81907. Stabat Mater. A Dictionary of Hymnology, (ed.) Julian, J. London. Nohl, P.-G. 1997. Das Stabat Mater. Musik und Kirche 67: 97-106. Radiciotti, G. 1910. G.B.Pergolesi. Vita, opere ed influenza su larte. Roma: Edizione Musica. Schlagen, K-H., & Marx-Weber, M. 1998. Stabat Mater. Die Musik in Geschichte und Gegenwart (hrsg.) Finscher L., Sachteil, vol. 8. Kassel-Stuttgart: Brenreiter-Metzler. Sharp, A.T. 1978. A Descriptive Catalog of Selected, Published Eighteenth- through Twentieth-Century Stabat Mater Settings for Mixed Voices with a Discussion of the History of the Text. [Ph.D. Thesis], University of Iowa. Siudy, T. 2001. Wkad Maryi w ewangeli cierpienia. Salvatoris Mater 3, 121-128. Stefani, G. 1970. Padre Martini e lEximeno: bilancio di una celebra polemica sulla musica di chiesa. Nuova rivista musicale italiana 3. Strohm, R. 1976. Italienische Opernarien des frhen Settecento. Analecta Musicologica 16: 242-244. Strewski, W. 1989. O moliwoci sacrum w sztuce. (ed.) Cieliska N. Sacrum i sztuka (pp. 23-37), Krakow: Wydawnictwo Znak. Talbot, M. 1988. Vivaldi, (translation) Dunicz-Niwiska, H. Krakow: PWM. Talbot, M. 1995. The Sacred Vocal Music of Antonio Vivaldi. Firenze: Leo S. Olschki. renata BOROWiECKa, Academy of Music in Krakw, Poland. Area of scientific interest: secular Italian music of the turn of the 16th and 17th centuries (madrigals); religious Italian music of the 18th century; polish contemporary religious music.

102

Session III C
Synaesthetical Theology Sinestezin teologija
salomja JASTRUMSKYT

A bst ra ct Synesthesia phenomenon occupies a special place in cultural history, aesthetics and art processes. However, it should be noted that this phenomenon is one of the most urgent and the most striking manifestations since time immemorial has recorded a transcendent experience in context. Synesthesia, on a very general definition of the currently accepted meaning is that of the transfer of one senses modalities to the other senses modality, the phenomenon in the XIX - XX of art on its flow considered as endemic, comes from an unlikely, but historically and phenomenologically real intersection of religion, and medicine. Synesthesia is a physical task, religious practices in one way or the other body systems. The nineteenth century was widely argued, that synaesthesia is a sensory experience of the highest degree, and so bring it close to the human body and mind to transcendence. Surprisingly, however, that the unity of the senses and sensations, which directs the numinosum and we can detect it not only in almost every religious law, prophets, teachers tuition, and visions of saints, but also find it reflected and crystallized out in their texts: scriptures, hermeneutic maze, hagiography, in rigid theological systems and so on. While this report confines ourselves only to a rather abstract model of Christian theology, but the basis upon which it is clear that participation in religious experience synesthesia is immediate, pervasive, and so in some cases it is necessary and legitimized as defined in the religious world view is. From mortifying the senses (anesthesia) to the synaesthetical vortex which lifts the divine realm - in all these cases there is a unity of the senses, the indivisibility of the sensorium, which in one way or another attempt to settle or tilt in favor of a particular religious practice. S a nt ra uka Sinestezijos fenomenas uim ypating viet kultros istorijoje, estetikos ir meno procesuose. Taiau reikia pastebti, jog io fenomeno aktualiausios ir rykiausios apraikos jau nuo neatmenam laik yra registruojamos transcendentinio patyrimo plotmje. Sinestezija, bendriausiu iuo metu priimtu apibrimu reikianti vienos jusls modalumo perklim kitai juslei, XIXXX a. meno sraut kaip keistas jos endemas, ateina i netiktinos, bet istorikai ir fenomenologikai apiuopiamos religijos ir medicinos sankirtos. Sinestezija yra kno duotis, religins praktikos vienaip ar kitaip yra kno reimai. XIX a. tapo plaiai teigiama, jog sinestezija yra aukiausias sensorinio patyrimo laipsnis ir todl jis labiau priartina mogaus kn ir smon prie transcendencijos. Taiau nuostabiausia, kad jusli ir
103

poji vienov, kreipiani numinozin srit, galime aptikti ne tik kone kiekvienoje religinje praktikoje, prana, mokytoj ir ventj vizijose, bet taip pat rasti j reflektuot isikristalizavusiuose j tekstuose: ventraiuose, hermeneutiniuose labirintuose, hagiografijoje, grietose teologinse sistemose ir kt. Nors iame praneime apsiribosime tik gana abstrakiu krikionikosios teologijos pavyzdiu, taiau juo remiantis tampa akivaizdu, kad sinestezijos dalyvavimas religiniame patyrime yra betarpikas, persmelkiantis, ir todl atskirais atvejais legitimuojamas kaip btina ir apibrta religins pasauliros dalis. Nuo jusli marinimo (anestezijos) iki j sinestezinio skurio, pakelianio dievikj plotm visais iais atvejais susiduriama su jusli vienovs, j nedalumo problema, kuri vienaip ar kitaip mginama isprsti ar palenkti naudai konkreioje religinje praktikoje.
salomja JastRuMsKyt, graduated from the University of iauliai, obtained a Masters (art history) degree. Vilnius Academy of Arts student. She is a junior research fellow at the Culture, Philosophy and Art Institute. Vilnius Academy of Arts lecturer. Lithuanian Artists Association. Area of scientific interest: philosophy of art, aesthetics, culturology, visual culture studies, visual anthropology.

Believe God or Believe in God Tikti Diev ar tikti Diev

Bron GUDAITYT

A bst ra ct A man gives a sense to his earthly existence in various ways with regard to Buddhist, Islamic or Christian culture. Each religious system containing a certain characteristic ethical and metaphysical structure serves as a common basis for an individual project of existence designed by a man. It is possible to say, although it is not always a rule, that a man living in Western culture gives a sense to his existence, or at least he should, with regard to the way which is essentially characteristic to this culture, in other words, through the perspective of Christian faith. However, what does the ethical and metaphysical basis of Christian faith perspective consist of and what does it mean to give a sense to existence through faith? It was hard to answer these questions during the first ages of Christianity and it is not so easy to do nowadays, firstly, with regard to difficulties arising from the complex content of the word faith. Western Christian tradition from the first Church Fathers, such as St. Augustine, to the great medieval theologians, such as Thomas Aquinas, has constantly been declaring essential difference between the two forms of faith: believe God (credere Deum) and believe in God (credere in Deum). Nowadays this relation reveals a specific posture of a believer with regard to God: believe God (Christ) means to acknowledge the fact of Gods existence; [...] believe in God (Christ) means to turn to God, enter and integrate within Christ, become a member of his mystic Body and completely accept Christian faith. The faith is not only an action of mind since it requires a presence of will as well as
104

commitment of the whole creation to God. When a man believes God (credere Deum), he only theoretically acknowledges Gods existence while when he believes in God (credere in Deum) he confesses God by his whole life. A man could know a lot about God and consider himself as a believer. Such believers are likely to be observed by social surveys. However, who could count those who are silent in order to listen to a secret heart vibration which teaches unconditionally trust unseen God who refreshes time of earthly existence by giving generous gifts. From the first ages Western Christian tradition considered this form of believing in God (credere in Deum) as a basis when through a secret heart vibration a man is able to listen to the word of God and devote his whole life to Him. The secret heart vibration characteristic to this form of faith, referring to Thomas Merton, could be called primary intuition. When a man believes in God, he relies on his primary intuition which is an initial deeper feeling of Pure and Absolute mystery of being a basis for human relative and conditional existence. It is not knowing about Absolute being but a thing about its experience. The aforementioned faith aspects of believe God as a theoretical one and believe in God as a practical one could be distinguished in the statement of unbelief. On one hand, a faithless man could deny God relying on scientific or philosophical arguments, in other words, to solve the question of faith (unbelief) in the plane of knowing and still live as if God exists. On the other hand, a man could theoretically acknowledge God but he could deny Him by his human life, in other words, to solve the question of faith (unbelief) in the plane of life. Contrary to the pathos of rationalism in Modern Times, nowadays, referring to Girnius, the question of faith or unbelief is not expressed in the form of faith and knowing but rather in the form of conflict between faith and life. At present unbelief is not expressed through theoretical denial of God dwelling on logical arguments but rather through practical denial of God in life itself. Jean Paul Sartre (1905-1980) and Albert Camus (1913-1960), who are traditionally considered to be representatives of atheist existentialism, in their literary works (Nausea (1938) and The Words (1964) by Sartre, Stranger (1942) and Plague (1947) by Camus, etc.) described the statement of unbelief containing bigger or smaller deserts of a human heart. The aforementioned thinkers, referring to Herbert Spiegelberg, expressed a mood of despair in French and the whole European thinking at the time relating their ontological existentialism with phenomenological philosophy. The philosophy rejects theoretical speculations and provides a description of meditative relation of consciousness with reality of being. Sartre and Camus showed this in their literary works evolving problematicity of possibility to believe or disbelieve. Referring to Sartre, it is possible to state as follows: statement of unbelief is an inner disorder accepted by a man who lives in it as if it is a special order. In other words, a faithless man lives in the inner disorder and he considers it to be a real order. Nowadays this special inner disorder provided by the statement of unbelief is considered to be a natural and undisputed norm of life. A man looking for God is considered to be an original or a weirdo who does not fit in a size of a frame. We live in Western Christian culture. However, the majority of people consciously or unconsciously do not relate themselves with Christian tradition. In times of sensualism, scientism, pragmatism, liberalism, etc. Christian values do not play
105

a fatal role in personal, public, political or cultural life. These spheres of life have obviously become secular. This phenomenon is called by Girnius as a phenomenon of public dechristianization. Referring to the aforementioned philosopher, roots of the phenomenon should not be searched in outer things but rather in human hearts, in other words, in their inner remoteness from Christianity. The inner remoteness, which is a certain disorder of a heart vibration, determines forms of personal and public life in various ways. In an objective way reality is the same for a believer and a non-believer. However, a believer and a non-believer differently experience a relationship with reality of the world. It divides the same reality into different worlds, in other words, into a world of meaning and a world of absurdity. Declaring his fiat with love and faith, a Christian accepts the world as a gift, whereas faithless consciousness does not accept the world as a gift. The world remains strange for it and it becomes strange for the world. All created things reflect their Creator for a believer who attempts to defeat his unreal and false self of the consciousness and in such a way to educate the inner order. These things become traces of God testifying Gods passing without showing His Face. This is the sphere of the aforementioned expression believe in God (credere in Deum) as life in presence of living God. A man directing his existence towards the sphere encounters God as now and then Being. His visible traces (a piece of amber or a face of the loved) do not show but rather hide Him implying eternity. Human conversion and re-orientation of his consciousness from false to true self and from inactive habits of thinking about God as a center of united meaning of life happen through this daily reading of Gods traces. Referring to Merton, in this life a believer is not converted once and forever. He converts many times and this infinite amount of big and small conversions eventually changes him in Christ. In time of absurdity, moral chaos, value relativism, nihilism and cynicism a man who longs to get back the lost ability to believe, referring to Frankl, firstly should attempt to hear ten thousands of laws encoded in ten thousands of situations provided by life. Then his present life will again become meaningful (meaning full of tasks) and he himself will be immunized against conformism and totalitarianism since now only awake consciousness allows resisting and living in faith, hope and love. S a nt ra uka Savo emikj egzistencij mogus prasmina vairiais bdais vienaip budistinje, kitaip islamikoje, dar kitaip krikionikoje kultroje. Viena ar kita religijos sistema su jai bdinga etine ir metafizine struktra yra tas bendras pamatas, ant kurio asmuo kuria savo individual egzistencijos projekt. Tad galima sakyti, nors ne visuomet taip ir yra, kad Vakar kultroje gyvenantis mogus savo egzistencij prasmina ar bent turt prasminti iai kultrai esmikai bdingu bdu, t. y. krikioniko tikjimo perspektyva. Taiau kas sudaro ios krikionikos tikjimo perspektyvos etin metafizin pagrind? Ir k gi reikia egzistencij prasminti tikjimu? Kaip ir pirmaisiais krikionybs amiais, iandien atsakyti iuos klausimus nra lengva. Kaip anuomet, taip ir dabar sunkum vis pirma kyla dl odio tikjimas turinio sudtingumo. Vakar krikionikoji tradicija, pradedant pirmaisiais Banyios Tvais (v. Augustinu) iki didij Vidurami teolog (Tomo
106

Akvinieio), nuolat kalba apie esmin skirtum tarp dviej tikjimo form tikti Diev (credere Deum) ir tikti Diev (credere in Deum). Ms dienomis is santykis atskleidia konkrei tikiniojo laikysen Dievo atvilgiu: tikti Diev (Krist) reikia pripainti fakt, jog Dievas yra; [...] tikti Diev (Krist) reikia visa btybe kilti Diev, sijungti Krist, tapti jo mistinio Kno nariu, visa prasme priimti krikionikj tikjim. Toksai tikjimas nra vien tik proto veiksmas, bet jis reikalauja ir valios sijungimo, viso mogaus Dievui atsidavimo. Tikdamas Diev (credere Deum), mogus tik teorikai pripasta, kad Dievas yra. O tikdamas Diev (credere in Deum), visu savo gyvenimu J ipasta. mogus gali bti daug apie Diev girdjs ir laikyti save tikjimo mogumi. Tokius tikiniuosius, ko gero, ir fiksuoja sociologins apklausos. Bet kas ir kaip suskaiiuos tuos, kurie nutilo, idant tyloje klausytsi slapto irdies virpesio, mokanio beslygikai pasitikti neregimuoju Dievu, dosniomis dovanomis gaivinaniu srvant emikos egzistencijos laik. Nuo pat pirmj ami Vakar krikionikoji tradicija pamatine laik i slaptu irdies virpesiu Dievo od igirstani ir visu gyvenimu Jam atsiduodani tikjimo Diev (credere in Deum) form. iai tikjimo formai esmikai bding slapt irdies virpes, sekant Thomu Mertonu, galima pavadinti pirmine intuicija. Tikdamas Diev mogus pasikliauja pirmine intuicija pirmuoju, gilesniu pajautimu Grynos ir Absoliuios bties slpinio, kuris ir yra mogaus santykins ir slygikos egzistencijos pagrindas. Tai ne inojimo apie Absoliui bt, o netarpiko jos patyrimo dalykas. Anksiau aptartus tikti Diev kaip teorin ir tikti Diev kaip praktin tikjimo aspektus galima skirti ir netikjimo nuostatoje. Netikiniu save laikantis mogus, viena vertus, gali moksliniais ar filosofiniais argumentais neigti Diev, t. y. (ne)tikjimo klausim sprsti inojimo plotmje, bet gyventi taip, lyg Dievas bt. Kita vertus, mogus gali teorikai Diev pripainti, bet paiu gyvenimu J neigti, t. y. (ne)tikjimo klausim isprsti gyvenimo plotmje. Kitaip negu Naujaisiais laikais su jiems bdingo racionalizmo patosu, iandien, Girniaus pastebjimu, tikjimo ir netikjimo klausimas reikiasi nebe tikjimo ir inojimo, o tikjimo ir gyvenimo konflikto forma. iandieninis netikjimas reikiasi nebe teoriniu Dievo neigimu loginiais argumentais, o praktiniu Dievo paneigimu paiame gyvenime. Btent Jeanas Paulis Sartreas (19051980) ir Albertas Camus (19131960), tradicikai vardijami kaip ateistinio egzistencializmo atstovai, savo literatriniuose kriniuose (Sartreas romanuose leiktulys (1938), odiai (1964), Camus Svetimas (1942), Maras (1947) ir kt.) apra netikjimo nuostat ir toje nuostatoje atsivrusias didesnes ar maesnes mogaus irdies dykumas. Minti mstytojai, Herberto Spiegelbergo teigimu, ireik ne tik to meto prancz, bet ir vis europin mstym apmusias nevilties nuotaikas, savj ontologin egzistencializm siedami su fenomenologiniu filosofavimu. is filosofavimas atmeta teorines spekuliacijas ir imasi meditatyvaus smons netarpiko ryio su btikja tikrove apraymo. Sartreas ir Camus taigiai tai daro savo literatrine kryba, joje apmstom tem rat traukdami ir galimybs tikti bei netikti problematik. Remiantis Sartreu, galima teigti: netikjimo nuostata tai vidin netvarka, kuri pats asmuo priima ir gyvena kaip ypating tvark. Kitaip sakant, netikjimo mogus gyvena ypatingoje vidinje netvarkoje, kuri mano esant tikra tvarka. iandien i netikjimo nuostatos ypatinga vidin netvarka laikoma savaime suprantama ir
107

nediskutuotina gyvenimo norma. Ir prieingai: Dievo iekantj linkstama irti kaip gyvenimo rmus netelpant original ar isiokl. Gyvename krikionikoje Vakar kultroje, taiau dauguma dabarties moni smoningai ar nesmoningai savs nebesieja su krikionikja tradicija. iais sensualizmo, scientizmo, pragmatizmo, liberalizmo ir kt. laikais krikionikos vertybs nebevaidina lemiamo vaidmens asmeniniame, visuomeniniame, politiniame ar kultriniame gyvenime. ios gyvenimo sritys yra akivaizdiai supasauljusios. Tai reikinys, kur Girnius vardija kaip visuotiniu tampant dekristianizacijos reikin. Minto filosofo teigimu, io reikinio akn pirmiausia reikt iekoti ne kokiuose nors ioriniuose dalykuose, o pai moni irdyse, t. y. vidiniame j nutolime nuo krikionybs. Btent is vidinis nutolimas tam tikra irdies virpesi netvarka vairiais bdais lemia ir asmeninio, ir vieojo gyvenimo formas. Ir tikiniam, ir netikiniam mogui objektyviai tikrov yra ta pati. Taiau subjektyviai tikintis ir netikintis mogus savo ry su pasaulio tikrove igyvena skirtingai. Tai ir suskaldo t pai tikrov skirtingus pasaulius prasms pasaul ir absurdo pasaul. Tikinia meile tardamas savj fiat, krikionis pasaul priima kaip dovan. Tuo tarpu netikinti smon pasaulio kaip dovanos nepriima. Pasaulis jai lieka svetimas, kaip ir ji pasauliui. Tikiniam mogui, siekianiam veikti netikr, melaging savo smons A ir taip ugdyti vidin tvark, visi sukurti daiktai atspindi savj Krj. Jie tampa Dievo pdsakais, liudijaniais, jog Dievas ia prajo, bet taip ir neparod savojo Veido. Tai jau minto tikjimo Diev (credere in Deum) kaip gyvenimo gyvojo Dievo akivaizdoje sfera. i sfer savo egzistencij projektuojantis mogus Diev sutinka kaip ia ir dabar Esantj. Kaip T, kurio regimi pdsakai (ruio gaballis, jros oimas ar mylimo mogaus veidas) Jo neparodo, bet slepia, leisdami nujausti aminyb. Per kasdien Dievo pdsak skaitym ir vyksta mogaus atsivertimas, jo smons perorientavimas nuo melagingojo tikrj A, nuo inertik mstymo proi Diev kaip vieningos gyvenimo prasms centr. Mertono teigimu, iame gyvenime tikjimo mogus nra atsiverts kart ir visam laikui, bet atsiveria daugyb kart, ir i begalin eil dideli ir ma atsivertim galiausiai perkeiia j Kristuje. Beprasmybs jausmo, moralinio chaoso, vertybinio reliatyvizmo, nihilizmo ir cinizmo epochoje, kurioje gyvename, nordamas atgauti prarast sugebjim tikti, mogus, Franklio pastebjimu, pirmiausia turt siekti igirsti deimtis tkstani sakym, ukoduot deimtyse tkstani situacij, kurias jam pateikia gyvenimas. Tada ne tik is jo gyvenimas vl taps prasmingas (prasmingas , vadinasi kupinas uduoi), bet ir pats mogus bus imunizuotas prie konformizm ir totalitarizm, nes tik budri sin leidia mogui atsispirti ir gyventi tikjimu, viltimi ir meile jau dabar.
Bron Gudaityt, PhD, lecturer in the Departament of Philosophy at the Faculty of Humanities, Vytautas Magnus University, Lithuania. Area of scientific interest: philosophy of religion, mysticism, philosophy of music.

108

Martin Heidegger: from Religious Experience to a Hymn to Holiness Martinas Heideggeris: nuo religins patirties iki himno ventybei
Povilas ALEKSANDRAVIIUS

A bst ra ct The development of Martin Heideggers philosophy, in essence, is related to religious experience. This experience, phenomenologically researched by St. Paul, St. Augustine, mystics of the Middle Ages and works of Luther, is at the core of the very first Heideggers lecture, read at the University of Freiburg between 19181923. Upon publication of almost all of the works by Heidegger (Gesamtausgabe) in the last three decades, it becomes clear to the reader that these lectures are the key to all of his reasoning. It is precisely there that one discovers what Heidegger calls facticity (Factizitt) which somewhat later becomes Dasein a notion meaning not only transformations of human existence in the face of death, but also a mystery with which the philosopher will wrestle for the rest of his life. Such wrestling is the question of being, forgotten for centuries and considered only from the perspective of time. However, it is precisely in the lectures mentioned above that we encounter a stunning assertion more than on one occasion: Christian facticity is time as such. The paper aims to reveal the importance of religious experience in the genesis of Heideggers thought as well as the reason due to which one of the most prominent thinkers of our times will adamantly refuse to talk about religious experience from around 1923. In Being and Time we will not find a slightest hint about the issue of religion or God. The notion of religious experience will be forgotten by Heidegger for all times as if, having guided to the question of being, it would become inappropriate or even obstructing further journey. Nevertheless, what was already felt in the notion of facticity from 1930s, drawing inspiration from Hlderlins poetry, will burst open in the philosophy of Heidegger as a hymn to holiness, accompanying his quests till his death. Maybe, pondering upon Heideggers reasoning captured as a whole, we can claim today that this experience of holiness is a pure religious experience, cleansed from unreal thoughts and concepts? Maybe. S a nt ra uka Martino Heideggerio filosofijos raida yra i esms susijusi su religine patirtimi. i patirtis fenomenologikai tiriama vento Pauliaus, vento Augustino, Vidurami mistik ar Liuterio darbuose yra paioje pirmj Heideggerio paskait, skaityt Freiburgo universitete nuo 1918 iki 1923 met, erdyje. Per pastaruosius tris deimtmeius pasirodius jau beveik visiems Heideggerio tekstams (Gesamtausgabe), j skaitytojui tampa aiku, kad ios paskaitos yra viso jo mstymo raktas. Btent jose yra atrandama tai, k Heideggeris pavadino fakticikumu (Factizitt), kiek vliau tapusiu Dasein, svoka, reikianti ne vien laikikuosius mogikojo buvimo virsmus mirties akivaizdoje, bet ir paslapt, su kuria filosofas galinsis vis savo gyvenim. ios imtyns tai ilgus imtmeius pamirtas bties klausimas, svarstomas tik laiko horizonte. O juk btent mintose paskaitose ne kart skaitome stulbinant tvirtinim: Krikionikasis fakticikumas yra laikas kaip toks.
109

Praneimas sieks atskleisti religins patirties svarb Heideggerio minties genezei, kaip ir prieast, dl kurios vienas giliausi ms laik mstytoj madaug nuo 1923 met grietai atsisakys kalbti apie religin patirt. Btyje ir laike nerasime n menkiausios uuominos apie religijos ar Dievo klausim. Religins patirties svoka Heideggerio bus pamirta visiems laikams, lyg, privedusi prie bties klausimo, ji bt tapusi netinkama, netgi trukdiusi keliauti toliau. Vis dlto tai, kas buvo uiuopta fakticikume, jau nuo IV deimtmeio, Holderlyno poezijai kvpiant, Heideggerio filosofijoje prasiver kaip himnas ventybei, lydjs jo iekojimus iki pat mirties. Galbt, sigilin Heideggerio mstym jo visumoje, iandien mes galime teigti, kad btent i ventybs patirtis yra gryna, apvalyta nuo netikr mini ir koncept, religin patirtis? Galbt.
Povilas alEKsandRaviius, PhD in humanities (philosophy), an associate professor in the department of Philosophy of the Humanities Institute at the Mykolas Romeris University. Area of scientific interest: metaphysics, philosophy of religion, ethics, political philosophy.

Aporia of Verbalization and Textualization of Religious Experience Religins patirties verbalizavimo ir tekstualizavimo aporija
rimantas VIEDRYNAITIS

A bst ra ct The paper discusses the problems that appear when we try to answer the question how can we verbalize and textualize religious experience so that it would remain a meaningful discourse. Although it seems that there is no any essential difference between verbal explication of religious experience and its textualization, the difference appears if we draw our attention to the person of narrator. A religious narrative in an oral tradition cannot be separated from the very narrator, and his religious experience is directly communicated as a witness. It seems that textuality release language from its author the narrator becomes irrelevant. In some respects, religious text is made inpersonal, and it turns it equal to any other kind of texts (advertisements, cooking recipes or scientific articles). Religious philosophy also often manifests itself as a text, which is often close to losing sense (or meaning). Despite the fact that a philosophical text is very important for understanding philosophy, it is obvious that a text as such is not a philosophy. The same goes for textualization of religious experience a text offers a riddle, but the answer to the riddle does not make us any closer to the very religious experience. Another problem highlighted in this presentation discusses an ambivalence of religious language as a presentation. On the one hand, an informative aspect of religious language is rather weak. Religious language as telling informs only to a such extent that a participant of this act of speech can recognize or recollect his own religious experience. On the other hand, religious language tells only that what it tells only the understanding is needed for its understanding. Even though religious texts manifest lots of instances of a seemingly poetic language, they actually do
110

not express anything poetic (when observed more carefully). Religious language functions as a non-informative, but performative narrative, which always strives to escape his own narrativeness. Such attempts can be successful in so far as it is possible to restore the lost unity of religious experience, narrator and narration. keywords: textualization, religious experience, religious language, verbalization. Ikifilosofins religins patirties verbalizacijos praktikos visuomet turjo gana aikius tikslus: socialinio saito krimas ir isaugojimas, tradicijos, pamatini bendruomens vertybi kristalizavimas ir perdavimas, vairi draudim, perspjim pagrindimas. Galima tokiu teiginiu suabejoti, nes, i pirmo vilgsnio, minti tikslai ir religin patirtis atrodo visikai nebendramaiai ventybs pasirodymas visuomet yra konkretaus mogaus gyvenimo vykis, o socialini, bendruomenini interes sritis danai yra anonimika, neretai prieika to konkretaus mogaus autonomijos atvilgiu. Taiau taip gali pasirodyti tik tada, kai nepaisome vienos reikmingos aplinkybs: verbalizacijos procesas i amorfikos, beads patirties leidia kilti ir aktualizuotis bendramogikai suvokiamai reikmei. Religinis naratyvas yra ypa reikminga, isaugojimo ir perdavimo kiekvienai ateinaniai moni kartai reikalaujanti, pasaulio pagrindo suvokimo struktra. Svarbu pastebti ir tai, kad ypa buvo stengiamasi isaugoti pirmin religinio naratyvo form, nieko nepraleisti ir nieko nepridti nuo savs. Naratyvo audinys ir kiekvienas to audinio elementas (odis) turjo kuo tiksliau atlikti savo udavin reikmingai perduoti tai, kas i esms negali bti perduota: pai religins patirties esm, jos neturining turin. Religinio naratyvo grietumas ir stabilumas atrodyt yra akivaizdi opozicija kasdiens kalbos arbitralumui ir konvencionalumui, bet galbt ios opozicijos akivaizdumas tra tik pragmatika konvencija, leidianti klasifikuoti, atskirti skirtingus naratyvus? Tokiai abejonei prietarauja religinio naratyvo beslygikas reikmingumas, juk kasdiens itarms pasirodo ne kaip paios savaime reikmingos, bet yra tik tiek reikmingos, kiek sugeba atlikti komunikacin funkcij perduoti informatyv praneim komunikacijos partneriams. Religinio naratyvo komunikacin funkcija yra menkai tesusijusi su informacijos perdavimu, nes religinis naratyvas ne tiek pasakoja, kiek sutelkia yra pati tikriausia Komunija. odi sakytojai ir odi klausytojai, bdami ir sakaniais, ir klausaniais tuo paiu metu, aktyviai dalyvauja tokiame bendrume, kuris pats yra vykis ne i praeities ir apie praeit, bet tik ia ir dabar. Prieingu atveju visi religiniai naratyvai turt bti diskvalifikuoti, kaip labiau arba maiau tiktinos pasakos. Vis dlto, ilieka klausimas, kodl apskritai reikalinga ventybs pasirodymo verbalizacija, juk suprasti ir dalyvauti ventame bendrume gali tik tas, kuriam atpastama neverbalin io vykio prigimtis. Treiame amiuje gyvens filosofas Plotinas, kurio traktatuose koncentravosi Antikos religin mintis, o Viduramiais ie traktatai tapo vienu i svarbiausi altini krikionikai filosofijai, gana imperatyviai kalba apie btinyb perduoti religin patirt: Vadinasi, palikdama visus iors dalykus, siela turi visikai atsigrti vid, nekrypti jok iors dalyk, bet nepastant nieko, pirma bsenos, o dabar ir pavidal, n savs nebepastant, reikia panirti jo regjim ir, su juo suartjus ir pakankamai tarsi pabendravus, ateiti ir kitiems, jeigu pajgt, paskelbti apie an suartjim. (Plotinas, 2011: 5, p. 65).
111

Taigi, pirmiausia religins patirties slyga yra sielos sugebjimas nusirengti visus iorybs, paintinio mstymo ir refleksijos rbus, nevykdius ios slygos nemanoma ir pati religin patirtis, suartjimas ir pabendravimas. Antrasis svarbus momentas pateiktoje citatoje tai priesakas perduoti patirt kitiems, nebent tas, kuris j igyveno, nepajgia to padaryti. Kitaip tariant, religins patirties igyvenimas nra pakankama slyga tam, kad i patirtis galt bti perduota kitiems. Tad k gi reikia Plotino minimas pajgumas? Ar i galia perteikti religin patirt kitiems yra kalbins iraikos galia, ar ji susijusi su retorinio taigumo technik valdymu, o gal tai galia, kuri apskritai daro manomu pat intersubjektyvios komunikacijos vyk? Jeigu tarsime, kad viskas priklauso nuo kalbins iraikos arba retorins galios, tuomet verbalizacijos problema galt bti nesunkiai isprendiama vien retorikos pratybomis, psichologikai paveikios kalbos konstrukcij sisavinimu. Taiau, kad ir kaip patraukliai atrodyt toks paaikinimas, jis kelia abejoni. Kad ir koks taigus bt kalbjimas, jis greiiau sukuria klausaniojo pasitikjim kalbaniuoju, bet nra supratimo slyga, o Plotino minimas pajgumas ir yra ne kas kita, kaip gebjimas komunikuoti supratim, gebjimas dalintis bendrumu per paties igyvento religinio bendrumo reaktualizavim. Iki iol buvo kalbama apie verbalin religins patirties perdavim, kai tai, kas perduodama, turi bti nuolatos prisimenama ir kartojama tol, kol tampa sakytojo savastimi. Tik tokiu atveju jis yra visikai atsakingas u savo pasakytus odius ir jau nebra vien transformatoriaus vaidmen atliekantis anonimas. is persikeitimas yra lemtingas, nes paprastas istorij pasakotojas persikeiia ir jau nebepasakoja, bet liudija savimi, savja egzistencija. Toks persikeitimas tai perjimas i kontingencijos, arba galimybs, btinybs, arba tikrovs srit. Kas atsitinka, kai liudijimas virsta tekstu, kai atsiejamas liudytojas nuo liudijimo, kai uraytas liudijimas pradeda savarankik gyvenim, palaidojs savo autori? Tekstas universali kultrins, intelektins raikos perdavimo, paties mogaus kultrinio buvimo kristalizuota forma. i kristalin forma egzistuoja suspaustu bdu, kaip nuoroda anapus jos egzistuojani tikrov, kaip arbitraliai pasirinkta tiktina tikrovs reprezentacija. Uraytame odyje randame galimos sinonimikos, alternatyvi odi koncentrat. Hipertekstinis mokslini tekst pobdis itisus tekstus suspaudia vieno enklo nuorod, ir tai parodo paradoksal pagarb kelianios tekstins ekstencijos butaforikum, bet tuo paiu galime pastebti dar vien, ne maiau okiruojant dalyk: tar, kad anapus teksto, kaip prasm neanio audinio, nebra jokios j konstituojanios tikrovs, kuri pasirodyt ms protui kaip btinybs sritis, reikt tarti, kad tekstas i ties yra ta tikrov, neivengiama ir btina kaip pati tikriausia tikrov. Bet ar nra taip, kad paioje tekstualumo prigimtyje atsiskleidia galjimas bti, bet ne privaljimas bti? Potencialumas visada yra ma maiausiai dviprasmikas: vienu atveju galima manyti, kad i galjimo bti aktualizacijos keliu tveriama pati tikrov, bet, antra vertus (o tai atrodo kur kas labiau tiktina), tekstin potencijos aktualizacija sunaikina pai potencij, tuo paiu sukurdama negaljimo bti aklaviet. Tekstas sukuria kreiv veidrodi tikrov, kurioje vienintelis tikrai tikras dalykas yra galimyb painti ikreipt form vairov, kuri, savo ruotu, taip pat gali bti gana domaus empirinio tyrinjimo objektu. Taiau akivaizdu, kad toks empirizmas nuudo pai empirik, kur pati filosofija tampa gdiu aisti arba kakokia kova
112

su eliais (shadowboxing) (Kaufmann, 1978: 3, p. 34). Kad ir kaip bt, kova su eliais ms nepriartina prie religijos supratimo, nepakeiia prasms ilgesio ir gyvo rpesio. Dar daugiau tekstas ne tik negali io rpesio ireikti, bet dargi j ugoia, pakeisdamas konkret, autentik gyvo mogaus rpest tekstinio ego rpesio abstrakcija. (Sodeika, 2010: 7, p. 174). Paaikja, kad tekstas visuomet tik substitutas, neadekvatus pakaitalas, priveriantis nusigrti nuo tikrovs, kuri manimi ir per mane srva prasms srautu. Religijos mogus, buvodamas tame sraute, buvoja jame smoningai, vis pirma suvokdamas savo atsakomyb, taiau pabgimo pagunda, kuri maitina tikrovs nesvetingumas, visada yra didel, gal net pernelyg didel, kad bt galima jai atsispirti. Toki mogaus situacij Albertas Camus nusako kaip radikaliausi pabgimo ar nusigrimo nuo prasms form saviudyb. Taiau ji nesprendiama atsitraukus nuo savs paties, galbt apskritai jos isprsti nemanoma, manomas tik veiksmas, neisitenkantis kasdieninje praktikoje: Koks gi yra tas neimatuojamas jausmas, atimantis proto gyvybei reikaling mieg? Pasaulis, kur galima paaikinti, tegu ir netikusiais argumentais, yra mums prastas pasaulis. Ir prieingai, pasaulyje, kuriame mai isisklaido iliuzijos ir viesos blyksniai, mogus pasijunta svetimas. Toji tremtis be prieglobsio, nes joje nra prarastos tvyns prisiminim ar paadtosios ems vilties. Btent ita nedarna tarp mogaus ir jo gyvenimo, tarp aktoriaus ir j supani dekoracij ir yra absurdo jausmas. Kadangi visi sveiki mons kada nors yra galvoj apie saviudyb, galima be tolesni aikinim pripainti, jog tarp to jausmo ir nebties siekimo yra tiesioginis ryys (Camus, 1997: 1, p. 11). Teksto teikiama prasm visada yra iliuzin, kaip sapnas, pasirodantis proto gyvybei reikalingo miego metu. Tikjimas nepriklauso nuo pastangos j turti, todl jis persunktas tampos, tikiniojo beprotybs malda kreiptis Diev taip, kad nelikt nieko anapus io kreipinio. Kreipinys negali sitekti tekstualume, net ir tokiame, kuris, atrodyt, ardo prasto tekstualumo rmus. Nepriklausomai nuo to, kok verdikt religijai ir gyvenimui prieis mogaus protas, vis tiek jo laikysena ilieka religin. Apsisprendimas (jeigu tokio apskritai esama) nebti nra nebties siekimas, mogus negali siekti to, ko nra, bet jis gali siekti nebti, siekti to, kas yra, nebuvimo. Taiau neatsitiktinai Camus pasinaudoja aktoriaus ir teatro dekoracij metafora, nes tik tada, kai gyvenimas virsta teatru, o pats mogus aktoriumi, nebelieka jokios galimybs isilaikyti nors ir netvarioje, bet prasmingoje, anapustekstinje tikrovje, tik tada vieninteliu gyvai patiriamu tikrumu lieka absurdas ir jo sunkiai artikuliuojamas brutalumas. Kita vertus, Camus vardintas svetimumas pasauliui atskleidia pamatin religijos mogaus nesaugumo situacij, subyrjus visai tekstualinei, plaiausia prasme, jo savisaugos gynybinei architektrai. Peteris Wustas aptardamas mogaus akistat su mirtimi teigia: galbt mogaus insecuritas situacija pasiekia aukiausi tak mogaus mirties valand todl, kad mirtis jam kaip religinei btybei yra ir paskutin ribin situacija. Kadangi mirtis, kaip metafizinis religinis reikinys, mogaus egzistencij temdo nuolat, o ne tik t akimirk, kai ji i tikrj prasideda (juk danai mirtis uklumpa mog netiktai), tai kaip tik mirties tos nepaliaujamai prie mogaus artjanios metafizins lemties rizikos situacija aikiausiai parodo, kad mogus btent kaip religin btyb neivengiamai yra insecuritas dsningumo aukiausiame take (Wust, 2000: 9, p. 124). Atrodyt, kad Wustas kalba apie mirties artjim nejausdamas tos egzistencins tampos, su kuria mus prabyla Camus, taiau galiausiai abu jie usimena apie t
113

pat sukreiant ir mus itinkant tikrovs nutikrovinim, tik Wustas neutralizuoja i tamp tekstine dsningumo figra. Teisingumo dlei reikt pripainti, kad paradoksaliai ir Camus absurdo svoka atlieka panai funkcij. Kas gali bti baisiau u absurd, kas gali labiau sukrsti mogik prot, pripratus prie racionalios steigties saugumo? Tad religin kalba, atrodyt, visikai isitenka prasto kalbjimo rmuose, net ir odiai, kuriais perduodama radikali tikrovs patirtis, niekuo nesiskiria nuo prasto enkl rinkinio. Bet ar nra taip, kad tok suvokim mums diktuoja sisavintas ir valdytas menas skaityti tekst taip, tarsi anapus jo jau nieko nebebt? Nesunku sitikinti, kad net ir pats baisiausias tekstas yra saugi uuovja protui, o saugu todl, kad protas turi k veikti gliaudyti grafem kiaukutuose tnanias reikmes. Taiau tas pats tekstas gali bti perskaitytas visikai kitaip pabudus i racionalaus sapno, kurio niekada neprisimename nubud. Peteris Donovanas, ikls sau tiksl filosofikai suprasti kaip religin kalba yra naudojama (Donovan, 1976: 2, p. 15), pastebi, kad paprastai ji nra metaforika, bet prieingai j reikia suprasti paodiui kaip informatyvi ir siekiani paadinti (evocative) (Donovan, 1976: 2, p. 614). Koki informacij gali perduoti religinis tekstas? Tik t, kuri plevena enkl referencijose. Lemiamas pasikeitimas, kuris nuo tekstini referencij mus grint prie religinio teiginio turinio, vyksta tik per nubudim, arba, Camus odiais, isisklaidius iliuzijoms. Tik tuomet gali paaikti antroji religini teigini informatyvumo pus. Religinis tekstas tampa kak sakaniu tik atitinkamai, adekvaiai save perkeitus. Platonas mus spja apie tui kalb pavoj, pateikdamas poeto pavyzd: odiais ir vairiais posakiais jis perteikia tik vien ar kit men ir amat atspalvius, nors pats nieko daugiau nemoka, kaip tik pamgdioti, o tokiems pat neimanliams monms jo odiai sudaro spd, kad tai labai gerai pasakyta nesvarbu, ar, pasitelks metr, ritm ir harmonij, poetas kalbt apie batsiuvio amat, ar apie karo ygius, ar dar apie k nors: tok didel gimt aves turi visos tos puomenos. Bet, jeigu i poet krini atimsime visas dailij men spalvas ir paliksime juos be t puomen, a manau, tu gali sivaizduoti, kaip jie atrodys, be abejo, ir pats esi tai pastebjs (Platonas, 1981: 4, p. 346). Svarbu atkreipti dmes tai, kad svarbus ne pasakymas, jo forma, ar netgi turinys, svarbus yra tas, kuris kalba. Nra abejoni, kad neretai religinis tekstas, paliktas vienas, be savo autoriaus, yra pasmerktas bti skaitomas neadekvaiai, bet i esms situacijos tai nekeiia, nes tuomet svarbus yra tas kuris skaito, o skaitydamas taria tuos odius. inoma, informatyvumas, suprastas ini kaupimo ir j klasifikacij papildymu, iuo atveju, atrodyt kaip nesusipratimas, nes tuomet seniai bt uaugintas dievikas Porfyrijaus medis, ir visi religijos filosofai galt pakankamai saugiai jaustis susisuk lizdus jo akose. Kadangi taip nra, tai jau pakankamas pagrindas manyti, kad turimas galvoje informatyvumas yra visikai kito pobdio. Religiniame kalbjime is pobdis, kaip jau minta, talpinamas liudijimo svokoje, kuri kaip svoka neisitenka apibrtos konstatacijos rmuose, bet visuomet nurodo veiksm, kitaip tariant, yra performatyvi. is performatyvumas realizuojamas dvejopai: kaip verbalin iraika ir kaip anamnetinis liudijimo klausytojo atsigrimas ypating transcendencijos, arba ventybs, kitonikumo igyvenim. Taigi, galima teigti, kad religin kalba kaip sakymas informuoja tik tiek, kiek ios kalbos dalyvis pats sugeba joje atpainti arba prisiminti. Sakymas arba liudijimas religine prasme visuomet yra dialogikas,
114

realizuojamas asmens asmeniui jo veido akivaizdoje. Taiau tokiu atveju religijos filosofija lieka nereikalingo treio situacijoje, i kurios, atrodyt, nra jokios pozityvios ieities, nes stebjimas, arba kontempliacija, neivengiamai yra buvimas nuoalje. Svokos, kurias taikome sau ir mus supaniam pasauliui, gali bti taikomos Dievui, taiau gali bti taikomos tik tada, jei jos taikomos kitaip negu daiktams. Kiekviena Dievui taikoma ms svoka byloja mums apie Diev tiek, kiek ji mums k nors apie Diev pasako. Taiau tuo paiu pasakymu ji mums nurodo ir tai, kas Dievas nra, mat kiekvienas ms pasakymas Diev apriboja. Todl bet koks kalbjimas apie Diev yra prietaringas, jis drauge ir teigia, ir neigia (Sodeika, 1997: 6, p. 20). Religinis kalbjimas ne in-formuoja kalbant ir jo klausant, bet greiiau i-formuoja, ilaisvina nuo svokos kontingentikumo. Religijos filosofijos kalbjimas, kitaip negu religinis liudijimas, tarsi turt virsti sau pakankama kalbjimo forma, nereikalaujania angauoto dalyvavimo. Nors filosofinis tekstas pats savaime negali perengti kalbos gramatikos taisykli, kurias galima vadinti arbitraliomis, jeigu tuo reikia pasakyti, kad gramatikos tikslas yra ne kas kita, o kalbos tikslas (Vitgenteinas, 1995: 8, p. 286), taiau esmikai baigtin religin smon nuolatos stengiasi save perengti ir kalbiniai prietaravimai atrodo neivengiami. Visgi gramatikos taisykls numato ir kreipin kit kaip kalbos tiksl, kuris nemanomas arbitralaus objektyvi dalyk atspindjimo atveju. Kreipinys perkeiia nesuinteresuot kalbos savaime pakankamum suinteresuotu pasiadjimu atsakyti kreipin. Religijos filosofija galima kaip atsakymas Dievo kreipin, prieingu atveju, pasilikdama patenkinta savimi, ji vis dar lieka kalbjimu, taiau tik kalbjimu apie niek.

Literatra
Camus, A. 1997. Szifo mitas. Vilnius: Baltos lankos. Donovan, P. 1976. Religious Language. New York: Hawthorn Books, INC. Kaufmann, W. 1978. Critique of Religion and Philosophy. Princeton: Princeton University Press. Platonas, 1981. Valstyb. Vinius: Mintis. Plotinas, 2011. Apie Gr arba Vien. In Plotinas, Apie Gr arba Vien. Apie tai, kas yra blog air i kur kyla (pp. 36-83). Vilnius:Aidai. Sodeika, T. 1997. Dievas palieia siel tamsoje. In Merton, T. Gyvenimas ir ventumas (pp. 5-20). Vilnius: Katalik pasaulis. Sodeika, T. 2010. Filosofija ir tekstas. Kaunas: Technologija. Vitgenteinas, L. 1995. Filosofiniai tyrinjimai. In Vitgenteinas, L. Rinktiniai ratai (pp. 113-394).Vilnius: Mintis. Wust, P. 2000. Netikryb ir rizika. Vilnius: Aidai. rimantas viEdRynaitis, a lecturer at the Department of Philosophy at Vytautas Magnus University. He received BA in Philosophy in 2000, and MA in Practical Philosophy in 2002. He lectures on Philosophical methodology, History of Lithuanian Philosophy, Sources of Ancient and Medieval Philosophy, Sources of Modern Philosophy. Area of scientific interest: Russian philosophy, philosophy of religion, Lithuanian philosophy, philosophy of methodology and postmodern philosophy.

115

Poster presentations
The Theme of Religion in the British Metaphysical Poetry of the 20th Century (Poetry of the New Apocalypse, 1939-1941)
tetiana RIAZANTSEVA

The paper analyzes the transformation of the themes, poetics and stylistics of metaphysical poetry in the works of H. Treece, J. F. Hendry, N. Moore, T. Scott et al. associated with the Apocalyptic Movement in British literature. The material for the analysis is taken from their second anthology, The White Horseman, published in 1941. The poetry of the New Apocalypse is considered in comparison with the works of British and continental metaphysical poets of the 17th, 19th and 20th centuries (R. Crashaw, F. de Quevedo, G. M. Hopkins, et al). The main focus is on the theme of religion. The paper aims to demonstrate the fractal nature of the theme structure of metaphysical poetry. It explains the new configuration of its traditional key themes (Religion, Death and Time, Love) in the works of the 20th century poets, and shows new details in their interpretation of the relations between God and man. The research concentrates on the development of certain motifs such as the death of God (a motif known since Victorian times), and demonstrates several new accents brought to traditional issues within the theme of religion (e.g. the desolation of human being). The paper also considers the new developments in the field of traditional poetics and stylistics of metaphysical poetry. The author analyzes the use of gospel paraphrases, polysemantic words and expressions, examples or wordplay, etc. in the religious poetry of the Apocalyptic Movement. key words: religion; metaphysical poetry; Apocalyptic Movement; fractal structure.
tetiana M. RiazantsEva, Cand. Sc., Senior Research Associate, Department of Comparative Literature, T. Shevchenko Institute of Literature, National Academy of Sciences of Ukraine. Areas of scientific interest: Comparative Literature, European and Ukrainian metaphysical poetry, Hispanic studies.

How Did the Prophets Know They Had Received Divine Revelation?
Berel Dov LERNER

Within the Jewish tradition, someones knowing whether or not they had received an authentic divine revelation could be a matter of life and death. Deuteronomy 18:20 states: But any prophet who presumes to speak in My name an oracle which I did not commanded him to utter, or who speaks in the name of other gods
116

- that prophet shall die.1 In addition, the Torah offers clear criteria for the determination of the authenticity of prophecy: a prophet advocating idolatry is immediately disqualified (Deut. 13:2-6), while one proclaiming more conventional messages is required to correctly predict future events (Deut. 18:22). 2 Given the obvious danger involved in proclaiming prophecy, it is somewhat surprising that the Torah gives no indication of how the prophet himself (or herself - I will use the male singular for convenience sake) is to judge the authenticity of his revelation before subjecting himself to the perils of making it public. How does a prophet gain enough confidence to risk announcing predictions which would entail his death if proved false? If we assume the universality of Jeremiahs plight: But [His word] was like a raging fire in my heart, shut up in my bones; I could not hold it in, I was helpless. (Jeremiah 20:9), the question becomes completely academic. The decision not to proclaim prophecy would be psychologically unviable. Yet the classic Medieval Jewish philosophers did believe that the prophets possessed the means to evaluate the validity of their own experience. The study of their views has relevance to modern philosophical discussions of religious experience, and especially to the thought of the great twentieth century philosopher, Ludwig Wittgenstein. Saadia Gaon (882-942) was the first Jewish philosopher to directly confront the issue under discussion. In his Book of Beliefs and Opinions he writes:
I also considered the question of how the prophet could be sure that the message he had heard came from God before ascribing it to his Lord in the presence of his people, and I arrived at the conclusion that this was effected by means of some sign that would appear to him at the beginning of the colloquy and remain until its termination. This sign could take the form of a pillar of fire or a pillar of cloud or a light that did not emanate from ordinary luminaries. When, then, the prophet saw such a sign, he was certain that the message came from God.3

In order to buttress the reliability of such a sign, Saadia adds that it was often visible to others. His description of the peoples reaction to Moses prophetic experiences transforms the Children of Israel into a nation of empirical meteorologists:
When he would come back to them, therefore, bringing his message, they would say: Thou hast spoken truly. We noticed how clear the atmosphere was before thy arrival at the scene of the revelation and how the pillar of cloud made its descent at the time of thy arrival there. Also, the time of its sojourn corresponds to the time which it took for thee to hear this communication which thou hast delivered unto us. (Ibid)
1 2 All biblical quotations are from the New Jewish Publication Society translation. Jeremiah 28:9 seems to restrict this rule to prophecies regarding Gods future benevolence, while Jeremiah 18:7-10 allows for the overturning of any divine pronouncement in reaction to changes in peoples behavior, for better or worse. Traditional commentaries interpret Part II, Chapter Eight of Maimonides Guide of the Perplexed as suggesting the theophany of Ezekiel Chapter I to be astronomically inaccurate. This criticism of the Maaseh Merkabah (Work of the Chariot), one of the two esoteric biblical texts central for Jewish mystical thought, would seem to undermine a criterion of prophetic authenticity requiring the factual truth of prophecys discursive content. Saadia Gaon, The Book of Beliefs and Opinions, trans. Samuel Rosenblatt (New Haven:Yale University Press,1948), p.151, Treatise III, chapter 5. All further references will be cited in the body of the text according to treatise and chapter. 117

Before criticizing Saadias account, two points are worth making. Saadia does succeed in describing a mode of prophecy so open and public in nature that even hard-headed skeptics would be convinced of its validity. By radically extending the public nature of prophecy, Saadia essentially dissolves the question he is addressing. Often, as in Moses case, the prophet need not concern himself about whether his prophecy will pass a later public test of validity. Both the prophet and his audience become simultaneously convinced of the divine origin of his message. Saadias account suffers on two grounds. Firstly, it is difficult to reconcile with Scripture. The bible gives no indication that (outside of Moses case) revelation was regularly accompanied by publicly observable divine signs such as pillars of cloud or fire. Secondly, Moses was unique in receiving prophecy while fully awake. Other prophets depended on revelatory dreams. Thus, God tells Aaron and Miriam: When the Lord speaks through one of you, I make Myself known to him in a vision, I speak with him in a dream. (Numbers 12:6) If, on the one hand, the pillar of cloud which accompanied such a prophetic experience was a genuine meteorological phenomenon, how was the sleeping prophet to become aware of it? On the other hand, if the pillar of cloud appeared to the prophet as part of a dream, what was to keep the prophets unconscious from inserting its image into non-prophetic dreams? This is precisely the problem raised by Hasdai Crescas (d. 1412) in his philosophical magnum opus, Or Adonai. There he describes a person who though graced with the occassional prophetic dream still continues to have dreams of the mundane type:
When the prophet receives prophecy through a dream ... how can the prophet come to know he is prophesizing? That is, how can he depend on the sign that he is prophesizing, who knows, what is to keep the sign from appearing in a [normal] dream?4

As a critic of Saadia, Crescas is much to the point. Given that a prophet continues to have normal dreams, and considering the universal human experience that practically anything can be seen in a dream, what is to keep the prophet from seeing a pillar of cloud or fire even in a non-revelatory dream? If so, Saadiahs criterion becomes inapplicable to a wide category of prophetic experience. Maimonides view on our question is the mirror image of Saadias. Saadia devalues the epistemological value of prophecy relative to that of publicly observable miracles; publicly observable signs convince the prophet of the authenticity of his own, private, prophetic experience. Maimonides, in contrast, holds that the authenticity of genuine prophecy is profoundly self-evident to those who experience it. After all, if Abraham had born the slightest doubt as to the authenticity of his revelation, he would never have set off to execute Gods command to sacrifice Isaac:
For if a dream of prophecy had been obscure for the prophets, or if they had doubts or incertitude concerning what they apprehended in a vision of prophecy, they would not have hastened to do that which is repugnant to nature, and [Abrahams] soul would not have consented to accomplish an act of so great an importance if there had been a doubt about it. (Guide of the Perplexed III: 24 pp. 501-2)
4 Hasdai Crescas, Or Adonai, Treatise II, Rule IV, Chapter 4, as appears in Dov Rapels HaNevuah (Prophecy) (Jerusalem: Amana Publishers, 1971), p.144. I have translated from the original Hebrew.

118

The remainder of this paper will treat the theory of prophecy expounded by the great poet and philosopher, Judah Halevi (circa 1075-1141). At first glance it appears that Judah Halevi accepts Saadias theory of the validation of prophecy while merely extending the list of dependable signs of true revelation. In Part IV, Section three of his Sefer HaKuzari he writes:
The pick of mankind enters into connection with Him, viewing Him through intermediaries called Glory, Shekhinah, Dominion, fire, cloud, likeness, form, appearance of the rainbow, etc., all proving to them that He had spoken to them.5

Israel Halevis (1700 - 1772) Kuzari Commentary Otzar Nehmad relates the above passage directly to the question at hand:
When revelation came to a prophet he might have thought it merely seemed so to him in his imagination.... But since he would actually see one of the aforementioned visions [and since] no proof is greater than seeing, he will know clearly that God speaks with him.6

To properly appreciate the difference between Saadia and Halevi on this point, it is necessary to attend briefly to the different roles played by the prophets in their respective systems. For Saadia prophecy is merely a means of divine communication to mankind. In the chapter of his Book of Beliefs And Opinions dealing with the purpose of prophecy, he states clearly:
I found there was a considerable need for the dispatch of messengers to Gods creatures, not merely in order that they might be informed by them about the revealed [ritual] laws, but also on account of the rational precepts [which could be arrived at independently by human reason] (III:3).

While agreeing that prophecy was necessary as a means of ascertaining Gods commands,7 Halevi adds to it the notion that prophecy marks the pinnacle of human perfection:
His most perfect creatures on earth, the prophets, whose souls are transparent and susceptible to His light, which penetrates them as sunlight penetrates crystal and ruby. These souls take their origin from Adam, as has been explained before; his pick and heart are transmitted from generation to generation, from age to age; besides it the large mass of mankind is like husks, leaves, resins, etc. (Kuzari IV:15).

Typically, when Halevi describes the ideal human, he mentions how such a person might achieve a degree just below that of prophecy through their own
5 My quotations from the Kuzari are derived from an amalgam combining Heinemanns incomplete translation appearing in H. Lewy, A. Altman & I. Heinemann, Three Jewish Philosophers (New York: Atheneum, 1976) and H. Slominskys inaccurate The Kuzari, (New York: Schocken Books, 1964), with my own minor corrections. Quotations from the Kuzari will be cited in the body of the text according to the traditional divisions of parts and sections. As appears in the traditional Vilna edition of the Kuzari. Kuzari III:53: The approach to God is only possible through the medium of Gods command, and there is no road to the knowledge of the commands of God except by way of prophecy, but not by means of speculation and reasoning. 119

6 7

efforts (Kuzari III:11). Contrastingly, in the final treatise of Saadias Book of Beliefs And Opinions [Concerning How It Is Most Proper For Man To Conduct Himself In This World], no mention is made of the achievement of prophecy as an indication of human perfection. Halevi goes out of his way to stress the unique qualities of the prophet:
a man who walks into the fire without hurt, or abstains from food for some time without starving, on whose face a light shines which the eye cannot bear, who is never ill, nor ages. (Kuzari I:41)

Saadia, in contrast, states openly that God did not guarantee to the prophets perpetual health of body or great wealth or posterity and so on. So too, did God not nourish them without food and drink (Saadia III:4). While Halevi sees the superhuman qualities of the prophets as proofs of their authenticity, Saadia is worried that if the prophets were thought to possess exceptional powers, people might attribute the power to perform miracles to the prophets themselves rather than directly to God. The most important superhuman ability ascribed by Halevi to the prophets involves the inner eye. This special faculty allowed the prophets to perceive the essential nature of objects directly, unlike normal people who must deduce the essences of things from their external accidental appearances. More importantly, it was through the inner eye that the prophets experienced the spiritual world. Although Halevi does not describe the spiritual world in detail, it seems to mainly consist of the angels, Gods throne, and other elements appearing in biblical theophany. Professor Eliezer Schweid goes so far as to claim that for Halevi, earthly geography follows the geography of the spiritual world, each with its own Land of Israel, Jerusalem, etc.8 Prophecy for Halevi consists of the experience of the spiritual world, (including meaningful symbolic displays and divine speech) by way of the special prophetic faculty or inner eye. For Saadia, who insists on the human normalcy of the prophet, such a doctrine would be unacceptable. Now we can return to Halevis statement that
the pick of mankind enters into communication with Him, viewing through intermediaries called `Glory, Shekhinah, Dominion, fire, cloud, likeness, form, appearance of the rainbow , etc., all proving to them that He had spoken to them. (Kuzari IV:3)

Rather than existing solely for the sake of validating prophecy, as do Saadias pillars of cloud and fire, the items mentioned in Halevis list are simply typical examples of objects belonging to the spiritual world which may be perceived only in the state of prophecy.9 The situation of the prophet may be compared to that of a tourist visiting Jerusalem. For Saadia, the pillar of cloud is like a sign which reads Welcome to Jerusalem. The cloud itself is not an integral part of the content of revelation,
8 9 Eliezer Schweid, Homeland and a Land of Promise (Moledet VeEretz Yeudah) (Tel Aviv: Am Oved, 1979), p. 62. The discussion in Kuzari IV:3 about the permanence or impermanence of the objects viewed in prophecy would seem to weaken my interpretation, but see my footnote 13.

120

which consists only of discursive messages sent from God to humanity. For Halevi, the pillar of cloud is like the Tower of David, a prominent element in the cityscape itself which helps the tourist remember where she is. The cloud is an integral and typical element in the prophetic experience. By replacing a rather limited set of valid signs of prophecy with a whole spiritual world, Halevi manages to avoid the scripturally based criticism made against Saadia. Saadia would be hard pressed to make a scriptural case for the presence of his designated signs of prophecy in even a minority of biblical prophecies. Halevis theory of prophecy as the perception of the spiritual world turns every experience of prophetic visual imagery into a demonstration of prophetic validity. It also makes more reasonable the claim that such visions accompanied prophecies even when no imagery is mentioned in the biblical account. One might further ask of Saadia how the prophets come to know of the signs of prophecy and their validity. For Halevi this becomes the question of how the prophets came to recognize valid visions of the spiritual world. Halevis answer is included in his argument for the validity of the Israelite prophetic tradition in general. Dr.Yonah Ben Sasson summarizes Halevis position in these words: There is a history to revelation; revelation is a fact of historical duration whose factual truth cannot be questioned.10 For Halevi the prophet is not alone in his experience of revelation. Rather, he is part of a vast spiritual enterprise starting with Adam and continuing to the beginning of the Second Temple period. Out of these accumulated prophetic experiences (and Halevi assumes the existence of thousands of prophets not mentioned in Scripture),11 a consensus developed regarding the nature and description of the spiritual world. For Halevi the very existence of this consensus among the prophets is the supreme proof of their validity:
The best proof of its [the inner eyes] truth is the harmony prevailing among the whole of this species and those sights. By this I mean the prophets. For they witnessed things which one described to the others as we do with things we have seen. (Ibid)12

Paradoxically, the consensus which validates the tradition of prophecy also defines what constitutes prophecy. Not only do all the prophets agree as to the nature and description of the spiritual world, but any vision not coinciding with that consensus is by definition not prophetic: We testify to the sweetness of honey and the bitterness of the coloquinth and if anyone contradicts us we say that he has abandoned normal perception (Ibid). Similarly, a valid prophecy must be in accord with the description of the spiritual world which is the heritage of the prophetic community as a whole. For Halevi, a prophets perplexity over whether he had indeed received prophecy would be similar to our tourist asking herself whether she had actually visited
10 Yonah Ben Sasson, Mishnato HaHistorit Shel RIHaL (Judah Halevis Historical Doctrine) in Mishnato HaHagotit Shel Rabbi Yehuda Halevi (Rabbi Judah Halevis Philosophical Doctrine) (Jerusalem: Ministry of Education and Culture, 1978), p. 153. 11 Kuzari I:11: I believe in the God ... who sent Moses with His law, and subsequently thousands of prophets, who continued His law ... 12 Halevis insistence on the existence of a consensus among the prophets regarding the content of their visions would seem to require that the contents of the spiritual world remain more or less stable. 121

Jerusalem. A thousand details of the spiritual worlds geography and populace, all well known to the prophet from his previous prophecies and from the historical experience of the community of prophets, would validate his experience. On the other hand, it may be inferred from Halevis theory that anyone living outside such a prophetic community would find the validation of his revelations practically impossible. We are now almost ready to consider how Halevi could deal with Crescas problem, but first we must examine Crescas own solution. Crescas replaces Saadias sign of prophecy with a criterion of vividness. Just as wakeful experience is more vivid than dreamed experience, so too prophetic dreams are qualitatively different from normal dreams. Crescas seems to imply that a principal element of the vividness of a prophetic dream is the clarity of its recollection by the prophet after he awakens.13 Vividness may serve to distinguish between prophetic and normal dreams. However, it cannot be used as a sole criterion of prophecy, since vividness is a quality shared by both normal (wakeful) experience and revelation. The biblical story of the young Samuel (I Samuel: chapt. 3) offers a case in point. We are told that Samuel lay sleeping in the tabernacle. Each time God called upon him, he would run to the High Priest Eli thinking it was he who had called for him. This story seems to support Crescas. The divine call was in fact so vividly experienced that Samuel mistook it for the physical voice of Eli. While Samuel did not react to the prophetic call as if it were a mere dream, he was unable to distinguish it from an event of normal wakeful experience. At this point Halevis theory helps explains the course of events described. The story of Samuels first prophecy begins with the statement: In those days the word of the Lord was rare; prophecy was not widespread (Ibid 3:1). The community of prophecy was substantially weakened and the particulars of prophetic experience not widely known. It was only the aged Eli who properly interpreted Samuels experience and instructed him in the ways of prophecy. The ideas of Halevi and Crescas also mesh together well at a deeper level. It will be recalled that Crescas assigned importance to the clarity of a prophetic dreams recollection as an element of its vividness. Surely the prophet who is able to assimilate his experience in terms of a well established frame of reference (such as Halevis spiritual world) will be better equipped to remember his revelation later. It is exactly those experiences which we cannot grasp in terms of culturally predefined concepts which we tend to find dreamlike, unreal and difficult to remember clearly. Consider the case of two spectators at a football match. One of them is a European, well acquainted with the rules and strategy of the game, the other a member of a newly discovered Amazonian people, who have never heard of team sports. Who will better recall the course of the days play? In a similar fashion, the Israelite prophet, well versed in the ways of the spiritual world, will better recall his prophetic visions. Just as natural dreams are marked by a lack of coherence
13 Symcha Bunem Urbach, Amudei HaMachshava Ha Yisraelit:Mishnato Ha Filosofit Shel Rabbi Hasdai Crescas (Pillars of Jewish Thought:Philosophical Teachings of Rabbi Hasdai Crescas) (Jerusalem: World Zionist Organization, 1961), p. 259 footnote. 122

in terms of our experience of the normal wakeful world (noticing that I am flying like a bird, I become aware that I am merely dreaming), normal dreams will be distinguishable from prophetic dreams thanks to their incoherence in terms of the community of prophets normative experience of the self-consistent spiritual world. An incoherent normal dream will thus be more difficult to remember than a coherent prophetic dream. While Crescas solution might conceivably be adapted to a defense of Saadias position, it now appears as a quite natural extension of Halevis theory of prophecy. Indeed, Halevis conceptual framework actually bolsters Crescas solution. In conclusion, I will briefly make good my promise to relate the above discussion to the philosophy of Ludwig Wittgenstein. Two well known doctrines of Wittgensteins later philosophy14 insist that both the certainty of our knowledge as well as our ability to use language are rooted in our participation in established social practices. Given languages intrinsically social nature, the idea of a private language a language expressing intrinsically personal experiences that can never be understood by other people becomes impossible for Wittgenstein. Halevis claim that a well- established prophetic tradition can determine the validity of prophetic experience foreshadows Wittgensteins doctrine of certainty. The prophet can be certain of the authenticity of his prophetic experience insofar as it fulfills criteria of authenticity rooted in the social practice of Israelite prophecy. As for the social nature of language, it may be seen to parallel a peculiarity of Israelite prophecy as a religious experience. While many mystics of the worlds religions proclaim their visions to be verbally indescribable,15 the Israelite prophet is never at a loss for words. Even as he relates his most astounding vision (Ezekiel, Chapter 1), the prophet Ezekiel never falters. The communal tradition of Israelite prophecy insures that the words and expressions needed to describe Ezekiels vision have already been developed and assimilated into the vocabulary of the prophets. The social practice of prophecy creates a language in which the experience of prophecy may be shared.
berel dov LErnEr studied philosophy and the social sciences at Johns Hopkins and the University of Chicago, and Judaism at Yeshivat Ha-Kibbutz Ha-Dati in Israel. Berel received his PhD in philosophy from Tel Aviv University, and currently teaches philosophy at the Western Galilee Academic College. Area of scientific interest: philosophy of the social and behavioral sciences, philosophy of religion, Jewish thought, and the Hebrew Scriptures.

14 See, especially, Ludwig Wittgenstein, Philosophical Investigations (G.E.M. Anscombe, trans.) (New York: MacMillan, 1968) and On Certainty (G.E.M. Anscombe and D. Paul, trans.) (New York: Harper&Row, 1972). 15 In his essay Understanding Religious Experience in Steven Katzs anthology Mysticism and Philosophical Analysis (New York: Oxford University Press, 1978), p. 17 Ninian Smart states: Frequently, perhaps universally, mystics refer to their experiences as ineffable or, at any rate, to the `object of their experiences as ineffable. His further remarks, however, do not accord with the uniqueness of Jewish prophetic tradition. 123

Saturday, May 12, 2012 Session IV

From Experience to Tradition The Hard Path Backward
Marcello NERI

A bst ra ct I would like to deal with the topic of the conference (religious experience and tradition) approaching it under a Christian theological point of view. Behind the complex body of Christian Tradition there are a variety of religious experiences both individual and collective that have been condensed in different forms (Scripture, dogmatic doctrine, moral teaching, pastoral instructions, and so on) building up what is called tradition. While experience is generally held as subjective, tradition is usually understood as objective and regulative. There is something true in this distinction, but the relationship between experience and tradition in matters of religion is quite more complex than an easy divide like subjective-objective or existential-regulative. Without the uncertainity of experience there wouldnt be any religious tradition in Christian sense; and without a tradition it wouldnt be possible both to share our personal experience with other people and to have some criteria of truth as to faith experience. But once tradition has been shaped, then it tends to detach itself from experience asserting its role of faiths rule without regard to the existential level of the religious experience it is born of. Doing that, tradition runs the risk of drying out losing every actual impact on the faiths experience it want to discipline. In this sense tradition can be able to exercise its function only if it results into a concrete and personal experience. As Blondel pointed out the actuality of faiths experience is the only possible implementation of (dogmatic) tradition, but the path backward from tradition to experience is a very difficult one because it has to deal with an innate resistance of tradition to open its certainity towards the pliability of actual existing. In my paper I would like to address deeper some of most sensible issue regarding the relationship of experience and tradition that here I could just outline very shortly.
Marcello nERi, Senior Fellow and Visiting Professor, University of Graz, Austria.

124

Religious Experience without Religious Tradition and vice versa

olga BRESKAYA

A bst ra ct From the Varieties of W. James the theme of personal religion and unique individual religious experience appeared in the Study of Religion somehow contrasting the issues of organized religious tradition with stable collective forms of worshipping. The work that came 10 years later by E. Durkheim examined that interaction from the other side. If individual religious experience is not spreading or not partaken by many the very religious tradition is weakening and losing its collective dimension, which supports and enriches the individual experience. Situation that we observe in modern societies of Western and partly Eastern Europe individualization of religious life approves the consequences, described by E. Durkheim: faith as a warmth and life for the individual doesnt exist in a form of personal religion only, but is in need for integration with tradition. Otherwise, we found out the individual religious experience without religious tradition in variety of its modern forms which are complicated to transmit, or that the process of coming inside the tradition through the individual religious experience becomes morbid and traumatic. What happens with the individual who is seeking for the transcendent experience, but has weak relationship with definite religious tradition? Some examples of individual religious experience in correlation to different levels of belonging to the religious tradition will be presented in this report, based on historical documents, literary sources and interviews, conducted by the author. These examples will demonstrate the stages and modes of personal integration/disintegration with religious tradition, and problematize the concept staying in tradition.
Olga brESkaYa, assoc. prof. in the Department of Social and Political Sciences, European Humanities University, Vilnius; University of Brest. Area of scientific interest: sociology of religion, parish sociology, education in Religious Studies.

125

Session V A
An Ethnographic Approach to the Psychology of Religion Doing Research in the Field of Experience and Tradition
tuija HOVI

A bst ra ct The mainstream of the psychology of religion is characteristically quantitative. The most of the empirical studies are based on questionnaires and established interpretative scales using methods that measure quantitative dimensions and correlations of selected variables in religiosity. As results, quantitative studies offer generalizations. Alongside with this trend in the psychology of religion, there is also the gradually rising qualitative methodology for the study of religious experience. In addition to the narrative study, the ethnographic approach widely used in the anthropology aims at revealing what religion means to people and how it is used for personal purposes. However, ethnography is not a mere implementation of regional fieldwork for collecting material. It is also a point of view, a selection of methods and a process for helping to understand the other social reality than that of a researchers own by cross-reading a variety of different types of material. Thus, in practice, ethnography functions as cultural contextualization of the narrative interview material. The larger objective of my present research is focused on the forms and functions of the global trends of Neo-charismatic Christianity in the Nordic context. Experiential dimensions of religiosity and traditions that emphasise an individuals personal experience of the transcendence alongside with conservative teaching, such as various forms of Pentecostal-Charismatic Christianity, have aroused increasing interest both outside and inside the mainline Evangelical-Lutheran church in Finland. The situation indicates that all Charismatic Christian activities are not organized conventionally as congregations but also as various practices prayer communities, spiritual coaching services and evangelizing associations. Outside the conventions of the congregational field and within these rather situational practices mentioned above, the borderlines between communities or membership rates do not seem to mean as much as personal interpretations of tradition and individualistic pursuit of religious experience in everyday life. In the proposed paper, I will discuss, in the context of the Healing Rooms prayer service organization as a case, how ethnographic approach benefits the study of post-secular religiosity, the field that is mostly investigated by quantitative methods, so far. Nevertheless, the research theme in this study is socialpsychological, concerning the relationship between tradition, collective participation and personal religious experience. This relationship is crucially linked to the on-going discussion on the questions of believing, belonging, bonding and practicing as manifestations of religiosity. The material for this study is partly compiled
126

by ethnographic methods. It includes thematic interviews of the active members of local HR-communities who take care of the prayer service, as well as notes of participant observation. Furthermore, the material includes a questionnaire that was directed to the visitors of the prayer clinics, and the Healing Rooms and some other Christian websites and magazines. Cross-reading these different types of material gives information about the interaction, interpretation, identity and agency that this particular form of religious practice produces and how it reflects the needs and motivations of those involved.
Tuija HOvi, PhD, post-doctoral researcher, Academy of Finland/bo Akademi University, Finland. Area of scientific interest: charismatic movements, psychogy of religion.

The Phenomenon of Christian Conversion in the Prison: Convicts Converts Religious Experiences
sandra KRATAVIIT

Introduction. The phenomenon of religious conversion is one of the most interesting object of the humane and social science and, undoubtedly one of the most strongly religious experiences in the humans life, especially in the life of imprisoned person. In this article by using a theoretical literature review method and empirical qualitative research (Participatory Action Research) method there is a focus on phenomenon of Christian conversion in the prison by revealing convicts converts religious experiences. The objective of this article is to reveal and interpret convicts converts religious experiences after the discovery of God and to show the application opportunities of existentialist paradigm in social work with the imprisoned. Moreover, I aim to reveal the significance of conversion and faith to people who are in prison as well as to show the relations of discovered faith in God with imprisoned peoples experiences of hope and the meaning of life. Furthermore, I aim to reveal the significance of learning about other peoples success stories and their witnesses about their personal faith and life for imprisoned peoples experiences of hope and the meaning of life and their motivation for reintegration into society. Methodology of research. The research data has been collected by applying partially the interview guide focus group approach. The data has been analyzed by using interpretation phenomenology. The research participants have been chosen applying criterion sampling. There have been seven prisoners who correspond the following criteria: convicted, imprisoned in X prison, in 2009 2010 they participated in the social rehabilitation project Alpha course for prisoners, organized by Catholic Church, non-government organization LITHUANIAS CARITAS; convicts who have experienced Christian conversion and found faith in God. Qualitative research in the penitentiary: convicts perspective. In this paper article there is focus on philosophical nature and scientific meaning of a qualitative research, which is carried out with the convicts in the penitentiary. The qualitative
127

research, based on Insiders View sociological principle (Oyserman, Swim, 2001), reveals the perspective of a convicted person who experiences social stigma (Goffman, 1963) and allows us to know his subjective experience - personal religious experience. Therefore, such a research, focused on human religious experience recognition, is based on social constructionism and theological essentialism ontology and phenomenological episthemology. The research object is convicts converts religious experiences after the discovery of God. The research aim is to reveal and interpret convicts converts religious experiences after the discovery of God. In the article it is talking about the logic of Participatory Action Research, its scientific value and practical meaning for the convicts in the penitentiary. Participatory Action Research is based on the principles of social involvement, empowerment and change, when the research participants, the convicts themselves, become active characters who solve their own social problems (Kidd, Kral, 2005). Participatory Action Research, increasing the research participants/convicts consciousness, makes an opportunity for them to generate the ideas of social change in a team and create together the strategy which could improve their situation (Rukus, Maeikis, 2007). In the qualitative research an informant/convict is perceived as an important participant of a research process, expressing subjective meanings of a religious experience and social reality; therefore, he is valued as an investigator of social world phenomena and as the best expert of his own experience and life (Young, 2005). The qualitative research validity in order to guarantee the reliability of the conclusions has been achieved by using member checking, i.e. involving informants as active participants into the analysis of the obtained data and the process of creating research results (Bitinas irk t., 2008). The results of research: Distinction between non-religious and religious life. Research has found, that participants of the research before a conversion to Christianity felt an existential anxiety, Gods desire and spiritual thirst, but they didnt have a personal relationship with God or any religious practice. Participants of the research also indicate a strong qualitative distinction between their life without faith and life with God. Converts prisoners clearly separate these two periods of their lives period of non-religious life and period of religious life. Religious life is a absolutely different from non-religious, its a new life. Research showed, that discovered faith and theistic approach give prisoners a new transcendent or metaphysical perspective of the life. Prison as an experience of existential crisis and limitary statement of life. An experience of imprisonment participants of the research is defined as existential and ontological crisis of life. An imprisonment meant the end of all, what was important for person, what he had and what he loved. In other words, an imprisonment meant the end of the whole life (Frankl, 2008). Participants of the research indicate, that prison is time of crisis, and this crisis is inner crisis a crisis of hope and the meaning of life. Moreover, participants of research in prison have experienced much destructive emotions, such a shame, guilt, fear, loneliness (loss of social relationships) and hopelessness. These negative emotions brought a psychological pain (Gilligan, 2007). This spiritual pain is much deeper than physical, therefore in that difficult statement as imprisonment for person could help a closeness to God.
128

Relationship between conversion to Christianity and imprisonment. All participants of the research discovered faith in God, when they got into prison. Until imprisonment participants of the research didnt have any religious experience or practice and, moreover, they didnt have any need of God, therefore in prison experienced conversion to Christianity was absolutely radically. For participants of the research, the prison became place of first personally meeting with God. An imprisonment, as experience of existential crisis, prisoners motivated to call for Gods help and to open to transcendence. In this sense, we can see that crisis can give a new perspective for humans life. Crisis of imprisonment can be seen as significant factor of persons and his life transformation, because crisis can lead person to God (Wagner, 2010). When people experience extreme stress and have difficulty coping, they may undergoing a religious conversion. After traumatic events of life persons become more religious, may feel closer to God or more sure in their faith (Park, 2005). Research has found, that prisoners conversion to Christianity is related to other Christian believers witnesses of faith: God is experienced and met while listening to other peoples (ex-prisoners, ex-addicted persons and et al.) success stories and their witnesses about their personal faith. These witnesses of faith are authentic motivation for prisoners personally to accept Gods grace and love in their hearts and lives (Bgait, 2004). Relationship between conversion and penance. Results of the research showed, that penance is the main characteristic of religious conversion. In other words, conversion is related with persons sincerely penance for his personal sins. When imprisoned person discovers faith and in spiritual way meet God, he clearly realize, that he is a sinner and he needs Gods forgiveness and mercy. An inner penance is a radical reorientation of the whole humans life. A conversion of heart is real just then, when human turn back on sin and evil (Katalik Banyio Katekizmas, 1431, 1996). Therefore, it cant be conversion without penance for sins. Prisoners senses of faith. The research has found that, in prisoners mind faith is perceived as a grace of God and as a costly value. On the other hand, participants of research faith definite not only as metaphysical Gods action or Gods initiative, but also as a free and personal humans response to Gods grace. From that interaction rise the faith. In other words, converts prisoners faith is defined as humans personal relationship with God. This relationship is a very unique and subjective humans experience (Berger, Luckmann, 1999). For participants of the research a faith in God is much costly value even than physical freedom, because believed human can feel free in his inside, even if he is in prison. This correlation between faith and inner freedom is a very significant and important, because for prisoners the real freedom is God, who gives a spiritual freedom. This theistic freedom is experienced as a freedom from sin and evil. By talking about prisoners, Haysom (2007) indicates one of the greatest paradoxes of Christian faith: God is able transform humans experience a prisoner of criminal justice system can become free in his spirit and, as the apostle Paul stated, to be a prisoner of Christ. Research has found also a correlation between faith and happiness. A faith in God create an experience of happiness. Faith and relationship with God is a fundamental condition to be happy. Also, after conversion to Christianity is noticed
129

a radical cognitive change in prisoners mind. A conversion have a power to change humans mind - it gives a new direction to humans thinking. A religious conversion also transforms humans approach into a many things. A convert perceives newly the reality: he become able to see life, world, people, his own past, relationships between humans in a new perspective, in a religious view. A convert starts to see a world and people positive and he starts to value other things. Research showed, that after conversion to Christianity prisoners started to value spiritual things more than material. Therefore, according Dajczer (2010), a religious conversion firstly is a conversion of the thinking. Research has found two main senses of the Christian conversion: hope experience and meaning of life experience. Relationship between faith and hope. Participants of research indicate relationship between religious conversion (or Christian faith) and hope. According converts prisoners, hope is the result of the conversion, and it is the most strongly experienced in the context of faith. Without a faith there isnt hope (Moltmann, 1939). Participants of research talk about religious nature of the hope. Ng & Shek (2001) researches also confirm this correlation between faith and hope: the respondents, who were experienced Christian conversion, showed a decrease in depressive symptoms and feelings of hopelessness, whereas upon conversion purpose of life increased; converts became free from depression and discovered meaning and purpose in life. Research showed, that converts prisoners hope is based on God, moreover, a resource of hope is God. Also, hope is associated with Gods love, mercy, forgiveness and faithfulness. Hope is experienced in Jesus, who walks with human even when he is going in the wrong direction (the Emmaus story, Luke 24), even when he go into a far country and squander all (the Prodigal Son story, Luke 15), and even when he arrange to have someone killed (King David, 2 Sam 11). God is God of hope in our countless even whens (Pounder, 2008). Christian message is a message of theistic hope. God in Jesus comes bringing healing and forgiveness to the sinners, welcome to the marginalized, and give freedom for the oppressed, because Jesus died for all people, for our sins (Howard, 2009). Christian hope can be seen on the cross of Christ. Faith-based hope includes redemption from sin on the cross of Christ, Gods unconditional love, forgiveness and abiding presence. According converts prisoners, the cross means, that God comes to me, suffer for me, forgives me, and is with me in my brokenness, guilt, shame, loneliness, and powerlessness. The cross of Christ tells for prisoners of Gods forgiveness and unconditional love, how they are free from sin and death, and liberated, no matter what their circumstances, including imprisonment. Christian hope, grounded firmly in the incarnation, crucifixion and resurrection of Jesus of Nazareth, is a statement about God believing humankind is worth dying for (Puonder, 2008). Research reveled two types of hope: transcendental-eschatological hope and social hope. Transcendental-eschatological hope. The results of the research reveled, that participants of the research, who have experienced a conversion to Christianity and personally discovered faith in God, hope relate with after-death life and eternity. For converts prisoners a main goal of the life is to be with God after death, it means, to reach the salvation. In this sense, faith provides the hope, that humans
130

life on the earth is not end. Christian message does not end here; Christian hope transcends this reality and invites person to live after the death, to live in the presents of God (Howard, 2009). Hope is related with after-death life, because it opens humans life to transcendence (Bgait, 2005). According Moltmanns (1936), hope is an eschatological experience, and it is based on belief of Gods promise, of promise of is eternal life. Moltmanns Theology of Hope indicates an eschatological perspective of hope and always directs human to the future. Research showed, that participants of the research have hope of the redemption of their souls, because Christ provides forgiveness and salvation for everyone, who believes in him. According Moltmanns Theology of hope, faith in God, witch gives hope, helps to see the world with a new eyes. Although oppression and imprisonment sadly remain, the situation in no longer hopeless. Seeing the world from the cross of Christ everyone imprisoned person can experience salvation and hope (Moltmann, 1936). Results of the research showed, that until an event of Christian conversion, participants of research diidnt have this conception of transcendental-eschatological hope. Social hope. Results of research revealed, that in prison discovered faith in God have strong influence to prisoners resocialization and reintegration to the society. For prisoners faith is like an inner empowerment to feel and to be a part of society. Research showed, that an experience of inner and personal faith motivate prisoners to change a criminal behavior to the social responsible lifestyle. Religious conversion for prisoners is has been found as a strong motive in the future to live a new life according Christian morality. Also, discovered faith those prisoners, who have addictions, motivates from inside and helps to make a decision to dont use alcohol or drug any more and turn the life to the positive direction . In this sense, research revealed, that faith have a strong motivated power. Theistic hope for prisoners is related with aspirations of the future, and it can be definite as an inner motive and stimulation to live a new and responsible life (Miceli & Caltelfranchi, 2010). Research showed, that the effect of a conversion experience has been found to be positive, bringing about a new direction and helping to motivate prisoners to live socially (Ng, Shek, 2001). In addition, research also revealed, that convicts prisoners identify themselves with Christ arrested, suffering, oppressed, humiliated, tried, convicted and executed God, who became solidary with everyone, who have such a experiences (Pounder, 2008). Such a social similarity with Christ for prisoners have a possibility to experience, that God is very close to their lives and he really can to understand their situation. Research revealed, that the experience of imprisonment and subsequent existential crisis can become significant factors, which encourage convicts to religious conversion and motivate them to experience a change in their personal lives, refusing delinquent behaviour and deciding for living according to Christian morality. It means, that in prison discovered faith in God generates prisoners motivation of reintegration into society. Relationship between faith and meaning of life. For converts prisoners the meaning of life and the primary goal in life is to be happy, but happiness, according participants of research, is founded just in personal relationship with God.
131

It means, that meaning comes from God: God is the one meaning of the life and the ultimate purpose of the life. Research has found, that converts prisoners meaning of life is based on religious faith. The event of Christian conversion has power to create a humans experience of the meaning. According Howard (2009), God invites us into life. We respond by faith. God responds to our response. Meaning is created from that interaction. Participants of research indicate, that a conversion and discovered faith in God is related with discovery of purpose of life: converts prisoners had found purpose of life in relation to religious conversion. This purpose, firstly, is spiritual always to live in relationship with God, to grow in the faith, to evangelize and to help other peoples to find Jesus (altruistic-missionary aspirations), and, finally, to reach a salvation of the soul the Kingdom of God. That is the main converts prisoners purpose of life. According Emmons (2005), spiritual striving refer to goals, that are oriented toward the sacred. They are those personal goals, that are concerned with ultimate purpose, ethics, commitment to God, and a seeking of the divine in daily experience. In other words, spiritual striving are strivings, that reflect a desire to transcendent the self (self-transcendence is one of the main category of life meaning), that reflect an integration of the individual with larger and more complex units and relationship with God. Ng & Shek (2001) indicate, that converts have a higher grade of purpose in life as compared to the non-converts. Faith - stress and difficulties coping strategy. Results of he research revealed, that converts prisoners a faith experienced as a resource of a spiritual power and a significant help in psychological and social difficult situations, in this a case, by being in a prison. Research showed, that faith in God helps prisoners to cope with negative emotions. Hollis et al. (2007) also supports this finding of the research. According Hollis et al. (2007), spirituality and faith can help person to cope with destructive emotions. Brink (1993) researches also indicate a strong correlation between spirituality and stress coping. According Brink (1993), religion can to show positive aspects of stressful situations and encourage person dont lose a hope. Religion has a power to transform the meaning of events. Religious people are able to see the stressful event as the will of a loving God, even if human dont understand this Gods will at this time. Also, religious people are able to see the event as a spiritual opportunity to grow in faith. Religion may be particularly important, when people confront stressful life experiences, for example, imprisonment (Park, 2005). Nedderman et al. (2010) also indicate, that transcendent spiritual belief is significant factor of prisoners quality of life. Spirituality is a key resource in helping prisoners cope a negative emotions and find internal strength and hope. Finally, by talking about results of this research, we can surely to say, that in prison discovered faith prisoners brings new life, new identity, new family, Gods grace and forgiveness, and radically transforms their hearts and lives.

Bibliography
Berger, P. L., Luckmann, T. (1999). Socialinis tikrovs konstravimas. inojimo sociologijos traktatas. Vilnius: Pradai. Bitinas, B., Rupien, L., ydinait, V. (2008). Kokybini tyrim metodologija: vadovlis vadybos ir administravimo studentams. Klaipda: S. Jokuio leidykla-spaustuv.
132

Brink, T. L. (1993). Depression and Spiritual Formalion. Studies in Formative Spirituality, 14. Bgait, E. (2004). Tikjimo liudijimas kaip autentika motyvacija. Soter: Religijos mokslo urnalas, 13 (41). Kaunas: Vytauto Didiojo universitetas. Bgait, E. (2005). Viltis laisvs enklas. Hermeneutins fenomenologijos naas. Soter: Religijos mokslo urnalas, 15 (43). Kaunas: Vytauto Didiojo universitetas. Dajczer, T. (2010). Tikjimo valgos: Dvasingumo teologijos klausimai. Vilnius: Katalik pasaulio leidiniai. Emmons, R. A. (2005). Striving for the Sacred: Personal Gools, Life Meaning, and Religion. Journal of Social Issues, 61 (4). Frankl, V. E. (2008). mogus ieko prasms. Vilnius: Katalik pasaulio leidiniai. Gilligan, J. (2007). Smurtas: Apmstymai apie nacionalin epidemij. Vilnius: Vaga. Goffman, E. (1963). Stigma: Notes on the Management of Spoiled Identity. Englewood Cliffs, N. J. USA: Prentice-Hall, NNC. Haysom, E. (2007). Prisons Door to Freedom. Dialog: A Journal of Theology, 46 (2). Hollis, V., Massey, K., Jevne, R. (2007). An Introduction to the Intentional Use of Hope. Journal of Allied Health, 36. Howard, E. B. (2009). Spiritual Formation and the Meaning of Life. Common Ground Journal, 7 (1). Young, J. (2005). On Insiders (Emic) and Outsiders (Etic): Views of Self, and Othering. Systemic Practice and Action Research, 18 (2). Katalik Banyios Katekizmas. (1996). Kaunas: Tarpdiecezin katechetikos komisijos leidykla. Kidd, S. A., Kral, M. J. (2005). Practicing Participatory Action Research. Journal of Counseling Psychology, 52 (2). American Psychological Association. Miceli, M., Castelfranchi, C. (2010). Hope: The Power of Wish and Possibility. Theory & Psychology, 20 (2). Sage Publications. Moltmann, J. (1939). Theology of Hope. Philadelphia. Mineapol. Nedderman, A. B., Underwood, L. A., Hardy, V. L. (2010). Spirituality Group With Female Prisoners: Impacting Hope. Journal of Correctional Health Care, 16 (2). Sage Publications. Ng, H. Y., Shek, D. T. (2001). Religion and Therapy: Religious Conversion and the Mental Health of Chronic Heroin Addicted Persons. Journal of Religion and Health, 40 (4). Oyserman, D., Swim, J. K. (2001). Stigma: An Insiders View. Journal of Social Issues, 57 (1). Park, C. L. (2005). Religijon as Meaning Making Framework in Coping with Life Stress. Journal of Social Issues, 61. (4). Pounder, S. (2008). Prison Theology: A Theology of Liberation, Hope and Justice. Dialog: A Journal of Theology, 47 (3). Rukus, J., Maeikis, G. (2007). Negalumas ir socialinis dalyvavimas. Kritin patirties ir galimybi Lietuvoje refleksija: monografija. iauliai: iauli universitetas. Wagner, H. (2010). Gyvenimo prasms paiekos aspektai socialinio darbo kontekste. Acta Paedagogica Vilnensia, 24. Vilnius: Vilniaus universitetas. Sandra KRataviit, Lithuanian Caritas, coordinator of rehabilitation project Alpha course for prisoners in Lithuania. Area of scientific interest: Christianity, conversion, sociology of religion.

133

The Place and Role of the Religious Experience in the Context of Contemporary Religiosity in Lithuania
Milda ALIAUSKIEN

A bst ra ct Sociologists of religion usually prescribe to the phenomenon of religion such aspects like religious community, religious belief, religious practices and religious experience. Although first three aspects of religion and their manifestation receive much attention by scholars of religion, religious experience remains on the margins of social scientific research of religion. Lithuania is not an exception, thus author of this presentation raise the question what is the place and role of religious experience within contemporary religiosity in Lithuania. The presentation focuses on new religious phenomena and research conducted in various new religious groups like Art of Living, Brahma Kumaris, Sahadza Yoga and among believers in extraordinary powers of Merkin pyramid. Basing oneself on the data from in-depth interviews with members of contemporary religious phenomena in Lithuania author of this presentation states that religious experience is the aspect of religion which is also influenced by changes in particular social context. The data allows to state that religious experience within contemporary religious phenomena in Lithuania has particular aspects like the need of informants to explain it by scientific terms which maybe explained as the influence of scientism to religion in our society. S a nt ra uka Religijos sociologai religijos socialiniam reikiniui priskiria vairius aspektus, tokius kaip religin bendruomen, religinis tikjimas, religins apeigos ir religin patirtis. Nors pirmieji trys religijos aspektai ir j raika sulaukia pakankamai dmesio i iuolaikini religijos tyrj, taiau religin patirtis danai lieka i tyrim paribiuose. Kokia religins patirties vieta ir vaidmuo iuolaikinio relingumo kontekste Lietuvoje? Praneime, siekiant atsakyti ikelt klausim pasitelkiami jo autors empiriniai tyrimai iuolaikinio religingumo reikini ir grupi, toki kaip Merkins piramids sekj sjdis, Gyvenimo menas, Brahma Kumaris ir kt. Daroma ivada, jog nepaisant spariai kintanio socialinio konteksto, kuris veikia daugel religijos reikinio aspekt, religin patirtis yra maiausiai paveikus religijos aspektas. Taiau empiriniai duomenys leidia manyti, kad vienas i religins patirties sampratos pokyi iuolaikins visuomens kontekste atsiskleidia informant poreikyje i patirt paaikinti mokslikai. Tokie duomenys leidia kalbti apie kintani religins patirties viet ir vaidmen iuolaikinio religingumo kontekste.
Milda aliausKiEn, PhD, a postdoctoral fellow in the Centre for Oriental Studies at Vilnius, assoc. prof. in the Department of Sociology, Vytautas Magnus University, Lithuania. Area of scientific interest: sociology of religion, new religious movements.

134

From Religious Participation to Political Participation: The Engagement of Young People in Theosophy
Anita STASULANE

The proposed paper examines the engagement of young people in Theosophy, and it is based on the data collected in the EU Seventh Framework Programme research project Memory, Youth, Political Legacy and Civic Engagement. The historical roots of the political activity of contemporary theosophists stretch into the political aspirations of Nicholas Roerich who strived to establish the kingdom of Shambhala on the earth, that would extend from Tibet to South Siberia comprising the territories governed by China, Mongolia, Tibet and the USSR. In Latvia, interference of esotericism and politics became apparent already in the 1930s, when the soviet regime successfully made use of Roerichs adherents propagating the communist ideology in the independent Republic of Latvia. With the collapse of the soviet regime, Roerichs followers in Latvia became legal in 1988 when the Latvian Roerich Society was restored which soon split up in three groups: Latvian Roerich Society, Latvian Department of the International Centre of the Roerichs, and Aivars Garda group. Garda who has fused nationalistic ideas with Theosophy focuses specifically on young people who are particularly vulnerable to radical political agendas. The objective of the presentation is to analyze the interference between religion and politics paying special attention to political participation of young generation theosophists in Latvia. The presentation is aimed (1) at providing an overview of a growing theosophical network extended in Latvia; (2) at discussing the dynamics of religious participation in contemporary Theosophical groups in Latvia; (3) at examining political involvement of young generation of theosophists in Latvia.
anita STaSULanE, PhD in Theology, professor of history of religions at Daugavpils University, Latvia. Area of scientific interest: history of religions, theosophy.

135

Session V B
Music as a Religious Experience According to Karlheinz Stockhausen
Agnieszka DRAUS

A bst ra ct Karlheinz Stockhausen: a German composer and conductor, a contemporary model of erudition and a philosopher of music, a creator of the most modern musical hybrids, controversial, praised by some and scorned by others does he deserve the title of spectacular genius or greatest swindler of his times? He is certainly a personality so complex and controversial that it would be difficult to pass him by indifferently. He seems to be undoubtedly the most outstanding modern German composer. He is the author of over 360 compositions: minor and monumental, vocal and instrumental, including all forms and genres. He is mainly associated with the avant-garde of the Darmstadt school as well as with the experiments in organizing musical material, sound, formal continuum, and note writing. Recently, he astonished many by his statements positioning God in the centre, indicating His influence on men, on a composer, on everything around us... In that context the last almost 30-hour long stage masterpiece, Licht, finished in 2004, is a monumental apotheosis of the Creator. Since I was able to think, I have been grateful to God for my life, for His care, my talent, for the example of His nature, the composer admitted in 1997. During his courses in August 2005 he added: I havent changed much: I always tried to praise God with my compositions. These words as well as the sacralisation phenomenon of Stockhausens life by his own doing inspire to search for the connections of his work with the mysterious sphere of sacrum. keywords: Stockhausen, sacrum, cosmos, contemporary music, theatre Karlheinz Stockhausen is undoubtedly the most outstanding modern German composer. His achievements include over 360 works, minor and monumental, vocal and instrumental, covering various forms and genres. He is mainly associated with the avant-garde of the Darmstadt School, with the experiments in the field of musical material organization, sound, formal continuum, and notation. However, the most recent works regarding Stockhausens output show it from a different perspective. They emphasize the significance of these works message, their inspiration deriving from outside the music, their religious content, the concept of process ritualisation and specific experiences accompanying their performance and reception. Stockhausen himself often defined his work as spiritual music: geistliche musik, sharing it in an exceptional way by mystically co-celebrating it. Every year between July and August in Krten near Cologne Stockhausen Music Summer Courses were organised for composers, theoreticians and performers of his compositions all in all about 130 participants. Stockhausen always played a role of an
136

minence grise in the community of Krten, which, during the period of the courses, conformed the life of the town to the ritual of the event. This specific ritual of learning about Stockhausens complex personality and work had its strictly defined goal and motto, for example the one from 2005: Lernen am Werk learning through work, studying the work of art its notation, composers ideas and above all its function. The composer defined this function as follows: the music of the future, which must be spiritual music, dedicated to God, that will be a perpetual prayer, but only in the form of a Catholic mass but also in other forms of worship from all over our planet, thus integrating the religious symbolism of the whole world (Stockhausen 2005). These words as well as the phenomenon of sacralisation of Stockhausens own life inspire to search for connections between his work and the mysterious sphere of sacrum. Sacrum as a phenomenon and not an ontological entity is most often defined by showing a number of universal qualities of its presence in music; unequivocal and equivocal qualities, of which both the former and the latter are present in Stockhausens music. The following should be listed among the universal unequivocal values: religious texts for compositions: liturgical and Biblical generally religious subjects in secular texts the compositions reference to various events of religious life hierophanies, i.e. mystical motifs, symbols and significant objects. (Eliade 1996) The bellow should be named among universal equivocal qualities: evoking numinous experiences such as misterium tremendum et fascinorum (Otto 1999) affiliation to the category of otherness or strangeness compliance of the aesthetics and a level of a given compositions complexity with the perceptive capabilities of a listener Stockhausens compositions demonstrating unequivocal qualities of the presence of sacrum are, most generally speaking, of religious subject-matter belonging to three cultural circles, quite often representing all three simultaneously. These are: Christian culture, Far East culture and the culture of African tribes and both Americas. The composer wrote: Until 1960, I was a man who related to the cosmos and God through Catholicism, a very particular religion that I chose for myself almost as a way of opposing the post-war Sartrean nihilistic attitudes of the established intellectuals. And then I began to float because I got in touch with many other religions. In Japan I prayed many times to Buddhas just as Ive prayed to the Christian God before. And then to the gods of the Mayas and the Aztecs in Mexico. I lived for short periods in Bali, Ceylon, and India and felt that the religions were all part of the face of a multifaceted universal spirit, of the total spirit (Cott 1973). The belief in God of all cultures and religions resulted in compositions referring to ritual forms other than mass and combining the traditions of European forms of worship with the exotic ones. The cycle of 12 Indian songs written in 1972 in the style of minimal music titled Am Himmel wandre ich... (In the sky I am walking...) is a musical equivalent of Indian tribal situations of both Americas. It contains motifs characteristic for Indian beliefs such as animalism attributing souls to animals, plants, phenomena as well as to inanimate nature and objects, and most of all shamanism. The cycle seems to refer
137

to a shamans life story from the moment of his spiritual birth to discovering the final initiation. The next songs, the shamans initiation stages, belong to the three spheres distinguished in Indian worship: the sphere of heaven, the sphere of earth and the sphere of the underworld. The shaman, following his destiny, oscillates between the aforementioned spheres. The texts authenticity is increased by references to mythical and historical characters of ancient Indian tribes, such as the Aztec god Quetzalcoatl the god of nature and prosperity but also a protector of artists, sculptors and goldsmiths, of the Aztec chief and philosopher Nezahualcoyotl who lived in the years 1403-1473. Apart from poetry, Stockhausen introduces other elements referring to the vibrant tradition of tribal cults. He supplements Indian poems with onomatopoeic sounds of bird song, wind, crying, whispers, with improvised calls and texts of romantic and fairy-tale subject-matter as well as the sound of finger snapping, clapping and stomping. In the cycles sheet music, Stockhausen also introduces instructions regarding strictly defined postures to be adopted while performing the songs, postures that clearly refer to the authentic prayer postures of ancient peoples. Every movement is exactly notated from the rhythm of the eyelids to the ecstatic dance, Stockhausen writes in the introduction to his sheet music (Stockhausen 1992). The texts of poems, improvised additional texts, all kinds of sounds, gestures and a reduction of musical means to a minimum are there to assist the performers to enter the role of a shaman and help the audience to experience his story. A few years later Stockhausen used the tested idea of combining music, words, acoustic effects and gesture in another composition, a choir opera titled Atmen gibt das Leben (Breathing Gives Life). This three-part composition has 4 types of texts of religious content: texts written by the composer himself, Japanese Haiku poetry, quotes from Socrates and Master Eckhart and a fragment from the apocryphal Gospel of Thomas. Thus, next to theological motifs there are also plots of Eastern philosophy and cosmology, next to semantic words phonemic words, a characteristic language created Stockhausen inspired by his dreams of other extraterrestrial civilisations and resembling meditative mantra practices (similar sound effects may be heard in Stimmung written in 1968, whose text, consisting of names of various deities and gods, becomes a starting point to create sound permutation of particular vowels). The composers two musical prayers are also worth noting here: the exotic Inori (Japanese word for prayer) from 1974 and the seemingly European Litanei from 1997. The former one is written for dancer-mimes and orchestra. The texts prayer stratum was substituted here by a language of gestures created by Stockhausen. God is identified with a mysterious sound of HU. In his introduction to the prayer, or the so-called Lecture on HU, the composer writes: Hu is the most holy of all sounds; Hu is the hidden spirit of all sounds, words, like a soul in a body. Hu does not belong to any language, but every language belongs to it. Hu is the name of the most supreme being, the only true name of God, a name which does not belong to any religion. Inori is a musical prayer to Hu (Stockhausen 1974). The uniqueness of the latter prayer, Litanei, is embedded in its text which is not liturgical but comes from the composer and is his artistic Credo. Four lines of the litany is the authors attempt of auto-presentation and his function in the God-Man relationship. I do not make my music, we read between the lines of the composition, but only relay the vibrations I receive; that I function like a translator, that I am a radio (Stockhausen 1999).
138

The ritualisation of narration referring to Christian tradition of worship is given to the composition by the choir cast, a specific layout and movement of performers on the stage and a responsive form of composing subsequent stanzas (the relation between cantor and choir). The Eastern tradition element is the introduction of the sound of Japanese rin, signalling the beginning of each phase of the ritual. Stockhausens compositions which possess equivocal qualities of the presence of sacrum are those that include secular motifs but due to the type of the subjectmatter interpretation refer to symbolic sphere of sanctity. From the point of view of a topic, two dominant plots may be listed here: a plot of so-called spiritualisation of cosmos, its relation with philosophy and religion and a plot of intuition as the only possible journey, a journey into oneself. Composing for me is as if discovering a new planet. A musical composition is like a small universe containing the spirit of cosmos, the composer admitted. Astrological motif fascinating Stockhausen became the basis of an open-air composition titled Sternklang (Star Sound) from 1971 written for 5 groups of musicians. It is the first of his works manifesting the composers dreams and longings for other outer space civilization developing parallel with ours and his faith in the unusual functions and abilities granted to musicians as a result of comic energy radiation. Robin Maconie (2005) considered Sternklang as an expression of tribute Stockhausen paid to his master, Igor Stravinsky after his death. A tribute manifesting not in the reference to The Rite of Spring composers technique but in a message his name brings: IGOR STRAVINSKY STAR VIGOR IN SKY In this composition Stockhausen once again uses the phonemic language, incorporating names of individual constellations into it. And thus, star constellations are represented by sound constellations, similarly to the compositions written in the years 1975-77: Sirius electronic music accompanies by voices and instruments as well as the cycle Tierkreis existing in many casting versions although written for music boxes. Stockhausen used intuition, on the other hand, as the means to create music in cooperation with performers. Nothing is written here, the composer wrote, musicians only have the text I provided them with. It does not describe music; its purpose is to propel performers into a state in which they are able to concentrate on a specific number of points. Thus, a certain system of internal infiltrations may arise between performers(Skowron 1989). This concept of a creative process became the basis of many compositions classified as the so-called intuitive music: Alphabet fr Lige, Aus dem sieben Tagen, or Fr kommende Zeiten. The above-mentioned examples of Stockhausens compositions allow us to distinguish in his work, apart from the universal qualities of the presence of sacrum, also qualities that are individual and idiomatic for the author of Hymnen. These qualities from the perspective of contents will be as follows: combining religious subjects of various cultural circles combining the sphere of the highest values with the sphere of the surrounding macrocosm as well as mans internal microcosm introducing texts in various languages in order to increase message clarity. From the perspective of music, these qualities are the following: vocal casting referring to the ritual practices of singing of all religions and instrumental casting, often exceeding convention
139

next to the traditional production of sound, introducing acoustic sounds, effects referring to meditation practices and invocation, onomatopoeic sounds, and various noises using electronic sounds The audible layer of text and music is also supplemented with a visual layer: a system of gestures and stage movements, which may be found in worship manifestations of many religions and beliefs. The 30-hour opera cycle Licht completed after 25 years of work is a great synthesis of all enumerated manifestations of sacrum in Karlheinz Stockhausens music. The cycle includes 7 parts referring to the 7 days of the week. Every subsequent part has its own characters, its own subject and content as well as individual attributes, symbols and colours. An element integrating the parts are the three main, symbolic heroes appearing in every link of the cycle: Michael, the Archangel descending to Earth (his mission similar to that of Christs), Eve, symbolising a woman, the loved one, the mother or the guardian angel and Lucifer, the incarnation of Evil. The three characters are presented in three strata: instrumental (trumpet, trombone, basset horn), vocal (tenor, bass, soprano) and stage (dancers). There are also allegorical characters present in the cycle: senses, elements, animals, days of the week, fragrances. In his cycle Licht Stockhausen uses a concept of forming musical material out of one primary structure, the so-called super-formula (a combination of three formulas-melodies of the compositions three heroes). The composer emphasised many times that he perceives his monumental piece outside any existing genre denominations; as an attempt to combine the distant traditions of the West and the East, both in the subject he selected as well as the formal solutions in the theatre. One of the operas heroes, Michael speaks characteristic words, which seem to be the authors introspection: I became a human To see myself and God the Father As a human vision To bring celestial music to humans And human music to the celestial beings So that Man may listen to God And God may hear His children. Thus, Stockhausens last completed masterpiece also has the most significant function: it operates as a medium between man and his God, whereas the composer himself would like to pay back his debt to Fate with his service. From the moment I was able to think, I am thankful to God for my life, His protection, my talent, for the example of His nature, the composer admitted in 1997 (Stockhausen 2000). During his courses in August that year he added: I did not change much, I have always tried to praise God with my composition(Stockhausen 2005).

Bibliography
Cott J., Stockhausen. Conversations with the Composer. Simon and Schuster, New York 1973. Maconie R., Other planets. The Music of Karlheinz Stockhausen. The Scarecrow Press, Inc., Lanham, Maryland, Toronto, Oxford, 2005.
140

Otto R., wito. Elementy irracjonalne w pojciu bstwa i stosunek do elementw racjonalnych. Wydawnictwo KR, Warsaw 1999. Skowron Z., Teoria i estetyka awangardy muzycznej drugiej poowy XX wieku. Wydawnictwo Uniwersytetu Warszawskiego, Warsaw 1989. Stockhausen K., Vortrag ber HU, Stockhausen-Verlag Werk Nr .: 38,5, Krten 1974. Stockhausen K., Am Himmel wandre ich..., Stockhausen-Verlag CD 20, Krten 1992. Stockhausen K., Litanei 97 fr Chor und Dirigent 1997, Stockhausen-Verlag Werk Nr.: 74, Krten 1999. Stockhausen K., Litanei 97 Kurzwellen, Stockhausen-Verlag CD 61, Krten 2000. Stockhausen K., a statement closing the 8th Summer Courses in Krten 2005. agnieszka draUS, PhD Academy of Music in Krakow, a member of the Division of Musicologists of the Polish Composers Union. Area of scientific interest: sacred music, Krzysztof Penderecki, Karlheinz Stockhausen.

Catechesis of the Youth Groups of Liturgical Music

Vida DAUGIRDIEN

A bst ra ct Music, which joins material world with human soul, evokes prayer in the heart and helps to participate in Christian liturgy. Thus, such music can be called liturgical music. Liturgical music does not mean a particular musical style, but rather a form of music suitable for liturgy - a form that can influence the content. Christian folk music, which is most popular with young people, should be understood as new folk singing which fills the gaps in post-Soviet Lithuanian Church music. The rise of this style of songs as well as coinage of the term a worship group, characterizing a group of young people singing during the Holy Mass, evidence a certain shift that can be described as a quest of new forms to express faith. However, it can also denote unreflecting about an appropriate musical repertoire suitable for the Mystery of the Holy Mass and using genres which make no reckoning of the meaning of the liturgy, the parts of the rite and the liturgical year. This is why there is an urge of an appropriate liturgical catechesis of young people. The results of the Survey on the Status of the Youth Groups of Liturgical Music in Kaunas 1st Deanery maintain that the young people who are singing in the churches of Kaunas dissociate Holy Mass from other moments as they consider their chant to be a moment of prayer at the same time sometimes feeling some need to be silent and quiet. They pay attention to the words of the hymns and their correspondence to the parts of the Holy Mass. It is important for them to be joined by the liturgical assembly, and they like being appraised for their singing. Another significant moment is that they enjoy live music, and they have need of singing hymns in the native language. However, only less than half of the respondents are involved in the catechesis of their parishes; most of those who take an active part in it have already received the holy sacraments or are not preparing for them yet.
141

Therefore, even though the liturgical catechesis must be pursued after the initial coming to believe and conversion, young people should receive this catechesis in an appropriate manner. S a nt ra uka Muzika, jungianti material pasaul su mogaus siela, gali skatinti maldos nuotaik ir padti dalyvauti krikionikoje liturgijoje. Pastaruoju atveju ji gali bti vadinama liturgine muzika. Liturgin muzika nereikia muzikinio stiliaus, o daugiau (tinkam liturgijai) form. Taiau forma gali daryti tak turiniui. Tarp jaunimo labiausiai paplitusi krikionika folk muzika suprastina kaip naujasis liaudikasis giedojimas, upildo posovietins Lietuvos banytins muzikos paveldo spragas. io stiliaus giesmi bei lovinimo grups termino tarp v. Miiose giedanio jaunimo atsiradimas liudija tam tikr slinkt, galini reikti tiek nauj tikjimo iraikos form iekojim, tiek ir nesusimstym apie v. Mii slpiniui deram muzikin repertuar bei naudojim anr, neatsivelgiani liturgijos prasm, apeig dalis, liturginius metus. Tinkamos liturgins jaunimo katechezs uduotis atliepti iuos ikius. Apibendrinant atlikto Kauno I dekanato jaunimo liturgins muzikos grupi katechezs bkls tyrimo rezultatus, teigiamu reikiniu galima laikyti, kad Kauno banyiose giedantis jaunimas atskiria Miias nuo kit moment, kad giedojim jose patiria kaip maldos moment, tuo paiu kartais jausdami poreik ir nutilti, nurimti. Jiems svarbs giesmi odiai ir j atitikimas v. Mii dalims. Taip pat jiems svarbus ir kit liturgins asambljos nari sijungimas giedojim bei vertinimas. Vilties teikia jaunimo mgstamas gyvas muzikavimas bei jauiamas gimtosios kalbos poreikis giedant. Taiau maiau negu pus respondent yra traukti parapijos katechez, o i trauktj dauguma greiiausiai jau prim sakramentus arba iuo metu jiems nesiruoia. Todl, nors liturgin katechez turi vykti po pirminio tikjimo ir atsivertimo, jaunimui reikia jiems tinkamu bdu pateiktos ios katechezs.
vida dauGiRdiEn, PhD in Education Sciences, assoc. prof. in the Department of Religious Study, Vytautas Magnus University, Lithuania. Area of scientific interest: Christianity, liturgical music, catechesis.

New Music for New (?) Religious Experiences

Kinga POVEDK

A bst ra ct Music is an important if not the most important form of expression in religious rituals, probably the most expressive and multi-faceted form of artistic expression regarding religious experience. As Gordon Lynch articulates Music has, in the past, been an important cultural resource and practice for religious communities [] music has served a number of functions, such as reinforcing religious identities, establishing a sense of collectivity within religious groups [] and serving as a focus and stimulus of religious experience and sentiment.
142

With time and modernity religions and musical forms go through a significant change as well, consequently changing religious expressions. In late modernity we observe the process of removing centuries old musical traditions and inventing new religious musical genres integrating popular music with religious texts and traditions. There are many connections and interrelations of religion and popular culture, which are all important for the understanding of contemporary religion. The emergence of popular music in traditional churches has not been the subject of much research and it gives a wonderful insight into the changing religious expressions and vernacular religiosity of young believers. Throughout my ethnographic research among young Catholics in Hungary I tried to find implications why traditional religious musical expressions do not seem to be meaningful for them. Is this novel musical language is the plausibility structure for younger generations in the 21st century? In this paper I will discuss why some find older forms of musical traditions not attractive anymore in their vernacular religiosity. What is the spiritual/religious/ psychological need for the formulation of a significantly distinctive musical language for the expressions of religious experience?
Kinga POvEdaK, assistant research fellow in the Department of Ethnology and Cultural Anthropology, University of Szeged, Hungary.

Religious Experience Through Music: Contemporary Lithuanian Compositions Religin patirtis per muzik: iuolaikin lietuvi kryba
Danut KALAVINSKAIT

A bst ra ct Religious experience can be expressed (as well as perceived) through art too. The words musica sacra used to name church music specify not only its purpose but also a certain sacred quality. Researchers into religious creation try to discover the peculiarities of the principles of composition and impact on the listener that determine this sacredness primarily in the early church monody. In the history of Christianity, chant like any other artistic expression has become, with time, part of catechesis as well as the benchmark for spiritual inspiration. This is an important reason why contemporary composers are urged to study Gregorian chant as the liturgical singing characteristic of the Roman Catholic Church. It is not a question of imitating Gregorian chant but rather of ensuring that new compositions are imbued with the same spirit that inspired and little by little came to shape it (John Paul II, Chirograph on Sacred Music, 2003, 12). On the other hand, since old times, theologians have considered beauty as an expression of divinity (Augustine of Hippo, Thomas Aquinas, M. Luther et al.); they also see this evangelical message in secular compositions (e.g., K. Barth, H. U. von Balthasar, H. Kng about Mozarts music). After Lithuania regained independence in 1990, artists as part of the nation underwent change in religious experience the first stage of which was the enthusiasm for faith and search for artistic expression that exceed the Catholic tradition impoverished during the Soviet time. It is impossible to determine by analysing
143

musical works alone how much of it arise from the composers authentic religious experience and how much of it is the wish to play, stylise, imitate earlier church music or try something new. Therefore the paper discusses the issue of what religious experience, what image or understanding of God (the Kingdom of God) contemporary religious music by professional Lithuanian composers can open (or opens). Firstly the focus is on the genres of church music independently of the purpose of the compositions (liturgical or concert) because by choosing musical genres that developed from the requirements for the liturgy and canonical texts the composers clearly declared that they belong to the Christian tradition. Famous composers of contemporary religious music assert that their aim is to discover and disclose in their works the immeasurable magnificence, simplicity, and magisterial beauty and power that emanates from God, Who is the Source of Everything (J. Tavener, also A. Prt); to authentically express the eternal values through music as an expression of faith (K. Penderecki), to create an unusual space and time through which the good magic of music is expressed (O. Messiaen), and so on. Mystical minimalism is used, the collapse of time into the eternity is attempted, or the composition is formed as a maximally authentic ritual event. Contemporary Lithuanian composers also employ rather suggestively many means of expression that were created in the history of church music (e.g., the texture and formation of monody, modes, polyphony, certain euphonies of harmony). Several Lithuanian composers who testify to religious truths with their works can be mentioned (Jeronimas Kainskas, Kristina Vasiliauskait, Alvidas Remesa, Algirdas Martinaitis). Most often, their musical language does not shock or disturb and can be understood not only by professional musicians. However, in contemporary Lithuanian culture with its language of church music that is still forming successful musical hierophanies (that are more impressive than the quiet music) sparkle: the greatness of merciful God in Vidmantas Bartulis Te Deum; Gods indescribable glory and the presence of his holiness (as much at the present moment as on Judgement Day) in Viktoras Miniotas Messa da camera; the image of the Lamb of God that exceeds the cosmic greatness of the rocks, flowers, constellations and all saints (i.e., the Triumphant Church) in Onut Narbutaits Vlini giedojimas (Chant to All Souls Day: Lapides, flores, nomina et sidera); the miracle of the (self-)liberation of the musical hero (the transformation of a hostile attitude to God into tender and trusting) in Feliksas Bajoras Missa in musica; the spilling into a smooth flow of an interrupted as though stuck prayer in Vidmantas Bartulis Vrinys Marijai (String of Beads for the Virgin Mary), etc. The composers experience or insights expressed through musical structures that are forming the language of contemporary Lithuanian religious music can also be experienced by the audiences as religious revelations. S a nt ra uka Religin patirtis gali bti ireikiama (bei igyvenama) ir per men. Banytins muzikos pavadinimas musica sacra nurodo ne tik paskirt, bet ir tam tikr vent kokyb muzikos ventum lemianius muzikos darybos principus bei poveikio klausytojams ypatumus religins krybos tyrintojai pirmiausia bando atrasti senojoje banytinje monodijoje. Krikionybs istorijoje giesm, kaip ir kita menin raika, ilgainiui tapo katechezs dalimi ir dvasinio kvpimo etalonu. Antai iuolaikiniai kompozitoriai yra raginami painti grigalikj choral kaip Romos katalik Banyiai bding liturgin
144

giedojim ne tam, kad j pamgdiot, bet kad naujos kompozicijos bt kvptos tos paios dvasios, kuri j kvp ir pamau suformavo (pop. Jono Pauliaus II chirografas minint Tra le sollecitudini imtmet, 2003, 12). Kita vertus, teologai nuo seno gro vertina kaip dievikumo apraik (Augustinas, Tomas Akvinietis, Liuteris ir kt.), evangelin ini girdi ir pasaulietinje kryboje (pvz., K. Barthas, H. U. von Balthasaras, H. Kngas apie Mozarto muzik). Lietuviams XX a. pabaigoj ikovojus laisv ir nepriklausomyb, tiek tauta, tiek meno krjai (kaip jos nariai) igyveno religini potyri dinamik, kurios pirmasis etapas sovietmeiu nuskurdintos katalikikos tradicijos rmus netelpantys tikjimo entuziazmas bei menins iraikos iekojimai. Kiek ie iekojimai kyla i autentikos religins patirties, kiek i noro aisti, stilizuoti, mgdioti banytin praeities kryb ar ibandyti nauja, vien analizuojant krinius nustatyti nemanoma. Todl praneime bus gvildenamas klausimas: koki religin patirt, Dievo (Dangaus karalysts) vaizdin arba samprat klausytojams gali atverti (atveria) iuolaikin religin lietuvi kompozitori profesional kryba. Pirmiausia bus remiamasi banytiniais anrais (nepriklausomai nuo krini paskirties liturgins, koncertins), kadangi pasirinkdami muzikos anrus, iaugusius i liturgijos poreiki, ir kanoninius tekstus, kompozitoriai nedviprasmikai deklaravo priklausantys krikionikosios tradicijos erdvei. yms iuolaikiniai religins muzikos krjai teigia savo kryba siekiantys rasti ir atskleisti neimatuojam didingum, paprastum, autoriteting gro ir gali, kuri sklinda i Dievo, visa ko altinio (J. Taveneras, t. p. A. Prtas), per muzik kaip tikjimo ipainim autentikai ireikti aminas vertybes (K. Pendereckis), sukurti neprast erdvlaik, per kur pasireikt muzikos geroji magija (O. Messiaenas) ir pan. Kuriamas mistinis minimalizmas, pasiekiamas laiko kolapsas aminyb ar krinys formuojamas kaip maksimaliai tikras (autentikas) ritualinis vykis. iuolaikiniai lietuvi kompozitoriai taip pat daugma taigiai disponuoja daugeliu banytins muzikos istorijoje susiklosiusi muzikos iraikos priemoni (pvz., monodijos faktra ir daryba, dermmis, polifonikumu, tam tikromis harmonijos eufonijomis). I lietuvi autori galime iskirti kelis kompozitorius, kurie anapusin tikrov liudija savo krybos visuma (Jeronimas Kainskas, Kristina Vasiliauskait, Alvidas Remesa, Algirdas Martinaitis) j raika daniausiai rami, neokiruojanti, suprantama ne vien muzikams profesionalams. Taiau banytins muzikos kalb tik formuojanioje kultroje daug spdingiau sublyksi atskiros skmingos muzikins hierofanijos, kaip antai gailestingojo Dievo didyb Vidmanto Bartulio Te Deum, neapsakoma Dievo lov ir Jo ventumo akivaizda (dabarties akimirkoj tiek pat, kiek Paskutiniojo Teismo dien) Viktoro Minioto Missa da camera, kosmin akmenyn, ied, vaigdyn ir vis ventj (Triumfuojanios Banyios) didyb pranokstantis Dievo Avinlio vaizdinys Onuts Narbutaits Vlini vainike, muzikos herojaus i(si)laisvinimo stebuklas (prieiko santykio su Dievu perkeitimas veln, patikl Felikso Bajoro Missa in musica ar trkiojanios, tarsi strigusios, maldos isiliejimas sklandia tkme Vidmanto Bartulio Vrinyje Marijai) ir kt. ios per muzikos struktras garsintos kompozitori patirtys ar valgos, formuojanios iuolaikins lietuvi religins muzikos odyn, gali bti ir klausytoj igyvenamos kaip religinis vykis.
danut KalavinsKait, PhD, musicologist and church organist, assoc. prof. in the Department of Theory of Music, Lithuanian Academy of Music and Theatre, Lithuania. Area of scientific interest: works of F. Bajoras, sacred music, contemporary Church music of Lithuanian composers, the role of music in the Catholic Church, liturgical rites and art.
145

Session V C
Expression of Religious Experiences in Lithuanian Folklore Narratives
Aura KAIRAITYT

A bst ra ct We are intending to discuss the personal religious experiences, stated in the Lithuanian folklore narratives. The main question of the discussion is: in what forms religious experiences are most commonly expressed and what are the key-moments of the meeting of the human and transcendence in narratives of folklore? For more detailed analysis narratives that portray the human person and the sacred meeting were depicted. In Lithuanian folklore the religious experiences often reveals in dream stories. Human encounters Jesus Christ, Virgin Mary, and many other saints. In dreams person is encouraged to return to the faith and the loyalty to the holy person. The hero of the dream experiences a miraculous cure. Sometimes the places where the Virgin Mary appeared are dreamed. The storytellers perceive the dreams as prophetic. It is pointed out that prophetic and other dreams about holy remain in memory for a lifetime. The content of the dreams in many cases is related to the strengthening and promoting the Catholic faith. If the person carries out the will of Mother of God or other holy person he has a great possibility to prevent the danger, cure illnesses and preserve his own or his family members life. Lithuanian folklore narratives of human encounter with the supernatural world reveal the fundamental religious values. The event of impact of human and Deity radically changes the religious feelings and the religious beliefs: the godless person becomes religious, non-believer begins to believe, and the religiousness of doubting person increases. Religious experiences can be revealed not only in the dream stories, but also in stories of visions and incurred miracles. The experience of visions and miracles is mysterious, extraordinary and unusual event. Personal contact with the holy man gives a special status to the personage in the whole community. The oral folk art of dreams, apparitions and miracles is an area of folk piety, which discloses a very individual and personal human dialogue with the Divinity. This kind narrative analysis of religious experience leads us to the better understanding of traditional folk religion as well as its place in contemporary world. keywords: religious experiences, folklore narratives, dreams, visions, miracles.

vadas
Praneime ketinama aptarti asmens religines patirtis, vaizduojamas liaudies odinje kryboje. Tyrim objektas lietuvi folkloro naratyvai, kuriose kalbama apie mogaus ir Dievybs / ventojo asmens susitikim. Tikslas aptarti pagrindines religini patiri raikos formas, aptinkamas lietuvi folkloro naratyvuose. Udaviniai:
146

1) nustatyti, kokio pobdio patirtys aplanko mog susitikime su transcendencija; 2) ianalizuoti mogaus ir Dievybs susitikimo turin, jo vyksm; 3) atskleisti pagrindines religines vertybes, irykjanias mogaus bendravime su anapusybe. Metodai: interpretacijos, apraomasis, analitinis. Tyrim altiniai: tyrimui naudoti publikuoti ir nepublikuoti lietuvi folkloro altiniai. Didiausi dmes kreipsime legendas, religinius ir oneirins tematikos bei asmens patirties pasakojimus, kitus naratyvus, kuriuose tos patirtys vaizduojamos.

sapno patirtis
Sapn naratyvuose religins patirtys atsiskleidia susitikime su ventuoju asmeniu. Sapnuose gali bti regima v. Mergel Marija, Jzus Kristus, Dievas, ventieji ar liaudyje ventaisiais laikomi asmenys, kaip Barbora Umiastauskait agariet, palaimintasis Jurgis Matulaitis ir kiti. Svarbus sapn motyvas, kuriuose pasirodo ventieji, siejasi su mogaus stebuklingu pagijimu. Sapne paprastai yra nurodoma, kaip reikt elgtis, norint pasveikti: liepiama nuvykti tam tikr viet ir pasimelsti prie v. Mergels Marijos koplytls (Lietuvi literatros ir tautosakos instituto Lietuvi tautosakos rankratynas, LTR 850/39); patariama aplankyti konkret asmen (Rainait-Pauuolien 2008: 151); o nuvykus tam tikr viet pasiadti, pavyzdiui, v. Mergelei Marijai (LTR 811/458); udegti vakes (Buraas 1996: 114); pastatyti kryi (Buraas 1930: 485) arba v. Elbietos statul (Buraas 1996: 115). Sapn, susijusi su mogaus pagijimu, siuete yra labai svarbus rezultatas. Paprastai asmuo, padedamas ventojo ar kito ypatingo asmens, pagyja. Galima pastebti, kad religins patirtys, aplankanios mog sapnuose, yra susijusios su tam tikru religiniu elgesiu, o religinio elgesio perteikimo bdas, iuo atveju sapn naratyvai, utikrina religins tradicijos tstinum. Sapnai, kuriuose vaizduojamas mogaus susidrimas su anapusybe, gali bti suvokiami kaip pranaiki, o sapno turinys kaip ateit nusakantis vykis: moteris Auros Vart Marijos atvaizd susapnavusi juodame danguje prie pat Antrj Pasaulin kar (Vytauto Didiojo universiteto Etnologijos ir folkloristikos katedros rankratynas, VDU ER 2070/50); motina, praradusi dukter, sapne prao Marijos grinti j. Taiau Marija atsako, kad to negalinti padaryti, bet vietoje mirusios dukters ji duos dar dvi. Taip ir nutinka (VDU ER 2070/55); sapnuose pasirodiusi nepastama moteris spja apie tykant pavoj. mogus, klauss nurodym, lieka gyvas. Tik vliau paaikja, kad sapne galjo bti pasirodiusi Marija (VDU ER 2070/51). Pranaiki sapnai aplanko lemtingu gyvenimo momentu tiek moter, tiek vyr (Bgien 2007: 6667). mons labai vairiai link interpretuoti neva pranaiko sapno turin. Kartais net kreipiamasi tam tikrus asmenis, praant sapn paaikinti (Ivanauskait 2007b: 281). Vitos Ivanauskaits pastebjimu, noras pasipasakoti regtus sapnus yra slygotas ne vien tik poreikio isiaikinti regtus vaizdinius, bet ir tapdavo svarbiu komunikaciniu momentu tradicins bendruomens aplinkoje (Ivanauskait 2007a: 88). Tuo tarpu sapno interpretacija yra laisvas, krybinis mogaus veiksmas (Viinskait 2006: 188). Sapno realybje patirti igyvenimai, sapno turinys, susitikimas su ventuoju asmeniu palieka itin rykius, ilgam simenamus prisiminimus sapn sapnavusiam asmeniui. moment pateikjai yra link akcentuoti (VDU ER 2070/52; 2070/56 ir kt.).
147

Religinio turinio sapnai suteikia teigiam jausm antpld. Moteris, bdama eiolikos met, sapnavusi Jz Krist. Didj ketvirtadien suklaup mons jo buiuoti Kristui rankos: kai tik mogus prieina Kristus pakelia rank vir. Moteris isigsta, kad ir jai taip nutiks. Taiau Kristus leidia jai pabuiuoti delno vidur. Moteris tiek sapno metu, tiek pabudusi pasijunta labai laiminga. Pateikjos, sapnavusios simintin sapn, sitikinimu, Kristus atleido visas jaunysts nuodmes ir lydjo j vis gyvenim (Ivanauskait 2007b: 279280). Neretai sapnas, kuriame asmuo susitiko su sakralaus pasaulio atstovais, padaro itin didel poveik mogaus religiniam gyvenimui. Oneiriniuose naratyvuose, kuriuose regima v. Mergel Marija, skatinama grti tikjim. Vyras sapnuoja banyioje atgijus Marijos paveiksl. Marija itiesia rank ir kviei j daniau lankytis joje: Tu nebijuok ateiti. Nesi nusidiejs. Tu ateik daugiau, tankiau banyi. Tau bus geriau (Ivanauskait 2007b: 281). Pateikjo komentaras rodo, kad is sapnas paveik jo religinio gyvenimo proius: I dabar a bany kad einu, a visumet einu pri Marijas. Puoterius kalbu (Ivanauskait 2007b: 281). Sapnas yra svarbus asmens religins patirties raikos bdas. Religinio sapno turinys informuoja kaip reikt tinkamai pasielgti norint pasveikti. Tokio pobdio sapnai nurodo tam tikras religinio elgesio taisykles. Kitu atveju religinio turinio sapnas regimas kritiniu gyvenimo momentu. Tokie sapnai gali tapti pranaiki, perspti apie nelaim. Diev, Jz Krist, kitus sakralaus pasaulio atstovus susapnavs mogus pasijunta ypatingu, i kit isiskirianiu, kartu formuojama religin asmens tapatyb. Sapnai, kuriuose vaizduojamas io ir anapusinio pasaulio susidrimas, atlieka savotik religijos sklaidos funkcij, kuomet mogaus religin patirtis perteikiama kitiems visuomens nariams, formuojant liaudies religin pasaulir.

regjimo patirtis
Lietuvi folklore religins asmens patirtys gali bti perteikiamos ne vien tik oneirins tematikos kriniais, bet ir pasakojimais ar legendomis apie privaius apsireikimus, regjimus. Lietuvi legendose vaizduojamas mogaus susidrimas su ypatingu transcendentinio pasaulio atstovu, ventuoju asmeniu, pasakojami nepaprasti vykiai, igyvenimai. Legendose, pasakojimuose apie regjimuose pasirodo krikioni religijos atstovai (v. Mergel Marija, Jzus Kristus ir kt.). Regjimuose, panaiai kaip ir sapno metu, pasirods ventasis asmuo perteikia tam tikrus nurodymus, informacij kaip reikt elgtis. Moteris regi Palaimintj Jurg, kuris pataria: Mylk vent rat ir vadovaukis juo, ir gyvenk pagal j, nes tai yra pagrindin knyga, pagal kuri gyvenime turi vadovautis (VDU ER 2070/25). Pasakojimuose apie regjimus susipina mogaus religin patirtis ir anapusinio pasaulio atstov suteikiama informacija. Regjimuose, kuriuose pasirodo v. Mergel Marij, perteikiamas koks nors praymas, pavyzdiui, tam tikroje erdvje pastatyti kryi, maldos namus, kartu Dievo Motina skatina melstis, skelbti jos odius tikintiesiems, palaiminti mones (r. Kairaityt 2008). Vyrauja sitikinimas, kad regti transcendentinio pasaulio atstovus gali tik venti asmenys: Nenusipelniau da tiek, ka ma pasirodyt. Reikia bt ventam, sako, tik [tada] pasirodo (VDU ER 2070/41), o regjim maius mog liaudis yra linkusi traktuoti kaip ventj (LTR 4551/124).
148

Lietuvi folkloro naratyvuose mogaus ir anapusybs susitikimas gali bti apipintas simboliniais vaizdiniais, pavyzdiui, viename pasakojime apie nepaprastus regjimus moteris ivysta link jos skrendant baland (VDU ER 2070/16). Balandis krikioni simbolikoje, pirmiausia religiniame mene, suvokiamas kaip ventosios Dvasios simbolis (Becker 1995: 33). Lygiai taip ir asmens religins patirties pasakojime balandis suprantamas kaip simbolinis ventosios Dvasios vaizdinys, kuris suteikia dovanas: religin imint, supratim, o moteris, patyrusi nekasdienin vyk, pajauia meil Dievui (VDU ER 2070/16).

stebuklo patirtis
Legendose, pasakojimuose, kituose folkloro naratyvuose galima aptikti vyki, kuriuos mons traktuoja kaip stebuklus, ar objekt, kuriuos liaudis laiko stebuklingais. Stebukl liaudis suvokia kaip jam nesuprantam, netiktin ar nepaaikinam vyk, kuriam gali bti suteikiama tam tikra religin prasm. Religinis stebuklo kontekstas siejamas su Dievu, ventaisiais, kartais su religiniais simboliais ar kitais religiniais vaizdiniais. Folkloro naratyvuose, kuriuose vaizduojami stebuklingi vykiai, asmuo tikisi stebuklo. iuo atveju yra atliekami tam tikri veiksmai, pavyzdiui, meldiama pagalbos. Balio Burao pateiktame pasakojime apie emaii koplytles ventojo pagalba, nutikus nelaimei, traktuojama kaip stebuklas: pasibaidius arkliui, isigands raitelis meld v. Rok pagalbos, kad jam gyvyb igelbt. Stebuklas vyko. Pribgs akmenis, arklys suklupo, ir raitelis tuo metu isilaisvino (Buraas 1996: 117118). Stebukl patyrs mogus atsidkoja: I to didelio diaugsmo mogelis padars apadus toje vietoje pastatyti didel ir gra mro kryi. T savo pasiadjim netrukus ir itesjs (Buraas 1996: 118). Folkloro naratyvuose gali bti tiesiogiai isakomas noras pamatyti stebukl. Legendoje pasakojama apie moter, kuri nori pamatyti stebukl agars banyioje. Pamaiusi stebukl apsidiaugia (Lietuvi mokslo draugijos tautosakos rankraiai Lietuvi literatros ir tautosakos instituto Lietuvi tautosakos rankratyne, LMD I 909/8). Tiek jau mintuose pasakojimuose apie sapnus, tiek legendose bei religinio pobdio pasakojimuose svarbi tema yra mogaus pagijimas, kuris, liaudies supratimu, yra suvokiamas kaip stebuklas. Stebuklingi pagijimai daniausiai siejami su stebuklingomis vietomis bei ventaisiais asmenimis. Veiksmingas bdas pasveikti yra pasiaukojimas ar pasiadjimas prie vent bei stebuklingais pagijimais garsjani v. Mergels Marijos paveiksl, kabani katalik banyiose visoje Lietuvoje. Vieni j yra pripainti Banyios, kitus stebuklingais laiko pati liaudis. Vienoje legendoje teigiama, kad moteris, melsdamasi Palaimintosios Mergels atvaizdui, kabaniam Vilniuje, Jzuit kolegijos v. Jono parapinje banyioje, prao igelbti mirtant vaik. Motinai besimeldiant, balsas i vento Dievo Motinos paveikslo puss pranea, jog vaikas nemirs, nes pavojaus ir mirties jau yra ivengs. Moteris, nordama parodyti savo dkingum, altoriuje pakabina dovan (Sauka 1997: 241). Yra siuet, kuriuose vaizduojamas netinkamas elgesys, o nederamus poelgius tenka taisyti: Barboros agariets utarimu vykusi stebukl registracijos knygoje 1861 m. gegus 29 d. uraytame paliudijime moteris pasiaukoja Palaimintajai Barborai Senojoje agarje ir pus met kamavs sutinimas atslgsta. Taiau ji
149

norjusi atsisakyti atlikti ad, tuoj pat ant kojos iaugusi votis (Boruta et al. 2000: 457). Kitame liudijime teigiama: 1865 met gegus 12 dien Domicel Toliuyt i Karkln filijos, Pails parapijos, Raseini apskrities, Kauno gubernijos, kentjo nepakeliam dant skausm. Davus ad Palaimintajai Barborai, skausmai tuoj pat liovsi. Po to sugalvojo pati ado neatlikti, bet per kit asmen. Vl pradjo skaudti. Atvykusi atlikti dvigubo ado (Boruta et al. 2000: 459460). Pateikti raai rodo, kad nesilaikant tam tikr taisykli galima netekti suteiktos malons.

Ivados
Religins patirtys lietuvi folklore aptinkamos pasakojimuose apie sapnus, regjimus, patirtus stebuklus (ypa apie stebuklingus igijimus). Asmens religins patirties pasakojimuose atsiskleidia individualios ios patirties interpretacijos, jos prasms ir reikms, nekasdieninio religinio vykio refleksijos, o kartu mogaus religinis identitetas. Religin patirtis gali tapti svarbia mogaus religinio gyvenimo dalimi. Asmens patirties pasakojimuose irykja religins vertybs, susijusios su tikjimo stiprinimu, religini jausm raika. Religins patirties pasakojimai yra reikmingi ne tik individui, bet ir bendruomenei, kurioje jis gyvena. Asmuo, patyrs nekasdienikus religinius vykius, siekia ia patirtimi pasidalinti, papasakoti kitiems. Viena i pagrindini paskiri, irykjani religiniuose patiri pasakojimuose, yra susijusi su religinio bei kultrinio elgesio normomis bei pasaulira.

Literatra
Becker, U. 1995. Simboli odynas. Vilnius: Vaga. Boruta, J., Katilien, I., Katilius, A. 2000. Barboros agariets stebukl knyg suradus. LKMA metratis 16: 443525. Bgien, L. 2007. Pasakojamoji tautosaka skirting kart emaii lpose: kelios pastabos apie Viekni apylinki pasakojimus. Tautosakos darbai 33: 5671. Buraas, B. 1930. Pilies kryi kalnas. Trimitas 24. Buraas, B. 1996. Pasakojimai ir padavimai. Vilnius: Mintis. Ivanauskait, V. 2007a. emaii sapnai: tekst folklorikumas ir kontekst reikm. Tautosakos darbai 34: 7996. Ivanauskait, V. 2007b. Ddel grai sapn eso sapnavosi.... Tautosakos darbai 34: 277293. Kairaityt, A. 2008. Mergels Marijos apsireikim traktuot lietuvi folklore. Soter 28 (56): 155165. Rainait-Pauuolien, R. 2008. Religiniai pasakojimai ir legendos apie Barbor Umiastauskait-agariet. Tautosakos darbai 35: 117133. Sauka, L. 1997. Lietuvikos legendos. Tautosakos darbai 67 (1314): 238239. Viinskait, A. 2006. Individualumas ir tradicija pasakojimuose apie sapnus. Tautosakos darbai 31: 183189. aura KaiRaityt, PhD. Centre for Cultural Studies, Vytautas Magnus University, Lithuania. Area of scientific interest: folk religiosity, folk Christianity, the images of Christian saints in the folklore.
150

New Jesuit Saints and their Meaning for the Religiosity of the 17-18th Century: Context of GLD Poetics and Poetry Nauji Jzuit ventieji ir j reikm XVIIXVIII a. religingumui: pagal LDK poetikos ir poezijos kontekst
ivil NEDZINSKAIT

A bst ra ct In the epoch of baroque there blossomed new forms of piety. One of the reasons is reformation movement in Europe and Association of Jesus, established in 1540 as a balance and opposite to it. The statute of this monkhood declared that its main objective is piety which can be reached and spread in various ways. One of them is education. For this purpose, colleges and universities were established. Thus, in the 17th century, Jesuits created a solid educational system the activity of which was regulated by the set of provisions Ratio studiorum (1599). The important place here was given to rhetoric which then became the basis of education. The section about the duties of the rhetoric professor (Regulae professoris rhetoricae) gives attention to three main things related to the teaching of rhetoric. First, language rules (praecepta dicendi) should be stated, then, rhetoric style is assimilated and developed, and finally, knowledge of various natures is provided necessary for revealing a comprehensive talent of the orator. This knowledge is called eruditiones facts from history, geography, heraldry, law, psychology, archaeology, politics, ethics, soldiership, biographies, religions, customs, mythology, etc. Later, it was recommended that a student, after choosing any author he/she likes, should try to write something similar to the authors work. Thus, in teaching of rhetoric, as in all Jesuit educational system, there emerged three main layers: theoretical, practical and expertise. Especially important in learning rhetoric (in modern terms we could name it as theory and practice of literature) became the work of the Jesuit Anthony Possevin Tractatio de poesi et pictura (About poetry and art), in which it is explained how to connect the image, word and symbol into one allegoric work, how to create Christian poetry by imitating the antique authors. Possevins formulated principles were followed in all scholastic institutions of the Jesuits while reading and interpreting the texts of antique authors. One of the most important things in the rhetoric of the 17th century became the problem of imitation. Although it was interpreted in different ways, most theorists agreed (this is demonstrated by many synonyms of the term imitate (imitare): consider (considerare), observe (observare), perceive (intelligere), evaluate (expendere), restrict (aemulari)), that imitation should be the expression of the main idea of the imitated work, different, more relevant repetition and depiction of the most important things represented in the work. It was emphasized that during the imitation it is necessary to follow two main rules: to understand and analyze the creation of the followed author, and to write something similar to the chosen work not following it blindly, but trying to render the wisdom lying in it. Following the aforementioned principles, in GDL of the 17-18th century, literature in Latin was created. Interestingly, in the 17th century, one can notice the introduction of new Jesuits (Aloysius Gonzaga, Francis Ksaver, Francis Borga, three
151

Jesuit monks Paul Mike, John Got, Jacob Kizaj martyrs in Japan) into the literary works. For these saints poems were written by well-known poets (Mathew Kazimieras Sarbievijus), as well as college lecturers and students. One example, as the epigram of the famous poet, became the imitative example for the student who wrote about the Japanese martyrs. The parody of the epigram of the famous GDL poet, who wrote in Latin, M. K. Sarbievijus Christs on the cross word: I desire (Christi in cruce vox: Sitio) was written by the student of the course of rhetoric, Jonas Wayskis (Joannes Waynski, Jan Wayski, 16331661), who later studied theology in Collegium Romanum, worked in Czech province and taught philosophy in Poznan. The summary presents only Latin texts written by both poets, and these texts will be analyzed in detail in the paper. The last lines of the epigram, written individually by the student, were distinguished. Epigram of Sarbievijus: Ah! Sitio, clamas, princeps pulcherrime rerum: Non habeo pro te dulcia vina: siti. Tu tamen, Ah, sitio, clamas; dabo pocula, Sponse: Heu mihi! Sed misto pocula felle dabo. Haec, mi Sponse, bibe: quaeris cui forte propines? Ad me pro mundi, Christe, salute bibe.
[Oh! I desire, call, the master of the most beautiful things; / I dont have any sweet wine: agonize in thirst. / But you call: oh, I desire; I will give the glass, Fianc: / oh dear! But I will give a glass of drink, dilutes with bile. / This, my Fianc, drink: do you look for anyone with whom you will drink? / Drink for me for the saviour of the world, Christ] Epigram of Jan Wayski:

Ah sitio clamas, Princeps pulcherrime rerum, Non habeo pro te, dulcia vina: siti. Tu tamen ah sitio clamas, sed pocula desunt, Heu mihi quid faciam, quae dabo vina tibi. Sed cur tam tristes gemitus de pectore fundo, Cur longo quaero tempore vina Deo. In Cruce tres botri pendent, hos carpito Christe Transfixi telis, absque labore bibes.
[Oh! I desire, call, the master of the most beautiful things; / I havent got any sweet wine for you: agonize in thirst. / But you call: Oh, I desire, but there is no glass, / oh dear, what will I do, what wine will I give you. / But why do pour such sad moans from my chest, / why do I look for wine for God so long. / Three grapes hang on the Cross, stabbed by spears, / take them, Christ, you will drink readily.]

New Jesuit saints in the 17-18th c. became spiritual and moral examples which were recommended to follow for not only the one who chose the way of the priest but also for the one living worldly life. key words: Jesuits, religiosity of the 17-18th Century, poetry

152

Jzuit ordino svarba LDK edukacijai

Baroko epochoje (Lietuvoje XVIIXVIII a.) suklestjo naujos pamaldumo formos. Viena i jas skatinusi ir inspiravusi prieasi reformacijos judjimas Europoje ir kaip atsvara bei prieinimasis jam 1540 m. Paryiuje Ignaco Lojolos (Injigo Lopess de Onjass i Lojola, 14911556) kurta Jzaus Draugija. ios vienuolijos statai skelb, kad pagrindinis jos tikslas yra pamaldumas, kuris gali bti pasiekiamas ir skleidiamas vairiais bdais. Ordino krjas ra: mogus sukurtas lovinti, garbinti ir tarnauti Dievui, ms Viepaiui, ir per tai igelbti savo siel; kiti dalykai sukurti dl mogaus, kad jam padt siekti tikslo, dl kurio jis sukurtas. [...] Vadinasi, mogus tiek jais turi naudotis, kiek jie padeda siekti jo tikslo, ir tiek j atsisakyti, kiek jie tam trukdo.1 Vienu ir bene svarbiausiu i bd, padedaniu siekti pamaldumo, jzuit laikyta edukacija, kurios gaires taip pat nuymjo I. Lojola Konstitucij (Constitutiones Societatis Iesu: cum earum declarationibus, 1558) IV dalyje. Todl visoje Europoje imtos steigti kolegijos ir universitetai. 1548 m. pradjo veikti kolegija Sicilijos mieste Mesinoje, o 1551 m. Romoje atidaryta svarbiausia Jzaus Draugijos vietimo staiga Collegium Romanum, kuri ir tapo pavyzdiu kitoms jzuit mokykloms. Pirmasis ios vienuolijos universitetas taip pat atsirado tuojau po jos steigimo 1544 m. jis buvo atidarytas Gandijoje, Ispanijos Valensijos provincijoje. Labai greitai jzuit kolegij ir universitet tinklas padeng vis Europ, o XVII a. jie jau buvo sukr vientis edukacin sistem, kurios pagrind sudar humanistini disciplin mokymas (t. y. klasikini kalb lotyn, graik ir i dalies hebraj studijos, poetika, retorika, vliau filisofija ir teologija). Vis edukacins sistemos veikl reglamentavo Romoje ileistas nuostat rinkinys Ratio studiorum (1599 m.), sudarytas ordino generolo Klaudijaus Acquavivos (Claudio Aquaviva, Acquaviva, 15811615). Nurodymuose isamiai aptartos vis klasi magistr teiss, pareigos ir mokymo metodai, paskait tvarka, vadovliai. Ratio studiorum buvo sudarytas, orientuojantis kelis pagrindinius dalykus. Akcentuota, kad jzuit vietimo tikslas yra dvasinis, padedantis giliau pajusti Dievo meil ir ugdantis nusiteikim tarnauti artimui (christianitas et pietas). Perteikiant inias ir krikionikas dorybes pabriama metodikumo svarba: siekiama, kad mokiniai pirmiausia gyt tvirtus pagrindus, tik po to tam tikra tvarka bt pateikiama vis sudtingesn mokymo mediaga. Taip pat rekomenduota ne tik suteikti ini, bet ir tobulinti mokini charakter, lavinti mstymo gdius, siekti, kad jie patys aktyviai dalyvaut mokymo procese. Pageidauta, kad bendr mokytojo ir mokinio pastang rezultat vainikuot eloquentia perfecta (tobula ikalba), kuri buvo suprantama kaip kritinio mstymo ir gebjimo aikiai, tikinamai, laisvai reikti savo mintis odiu ir ratu sintez. Todl labai svarbi vieta ia buvo skirta retorikai. Skyriuje apie retorikos profesoriaus pareigas (Regulae professoris rhetoricae)2 atkreipiamas dmesys tris pagrindinius su retorikos mokymu susijusius dalykus. Pirmiausia turt bti idstomos ikalbos taisykls (praecepta dicendi), paskui sisavinamas ir tobulinamas retorinis stilius, kurio geriausias pavyzdys yra Ciceronas (stylus [...] ex uno fere Cicerone su-

1 2

Ignacas Lojola, Autobiografija. Dvasins pratybos, i ispan k. vert kun. Lionginas Virbalas SJ, Vilnius: Aidai, 1998, p. 25. Ratio atque institutio studiorum Societatis Jesu, Turnoni: Apud Claudium Michaelem Typographum Universitatis, 1603, p. 133142. 153

mendus est3), o galiausiai suteikiama vairaus pobdio ini, reikaling visapusiam oratoriaus talentui atskleisti. ios inios vadinamos eruditiones faktai i istorijos, geografijos, heraldikos, teiss, psichologijos, archeologijos, politikos, etikos, karybos, biografistikos, religijos, paproi, mitologijos ir pan. Perspjama, kad tokios inios bt pasitelkiamos saikingai (eruditio modice usurpetur). Pagrindiniai retorikos mokymo baz sudarantys altiniai buvo garsiausi ios srities Antikos kriniai: Aristotelio Ars rhetorica, neinomo romn autoriaus Rhetorica ad Herennium, Cicerono veikalai De inventione, Partitiones oratoriae, De oratore, Brutus, Orator, Kvintiliano Institutio oratoria. Taigi retorikos mokyme, kaip ir visoje jzuit edukacijos sistemoje, irykjo trys pagrindiniai sluoksniai: teorinis, praktinis ir erudicinis. Retorikos mokym sudar tarsi dvi dalys: Antikos autori krini skaitymas bei analiz ir savarankikas vairi anr krini raymas imituojant perskaitytus ar pasirinktus krinius. Ratio studiorum yra pateikta tokia standartin bet kokio krinio analizs schema. Pagal j, mokytojas pirmiausia turt iaikinti krinio prasm ir pateikti galimus interpretacijos variantus, paskui reikt aptarti krinio kompozicij ir menins iraikos bdus, taip pat pateikti pavyzdi, kaip kr kiti autoriai, vartodami panaias menines priemones. Be to, analizuojamo krinio idjas vertt patvirtinti kit autori mintimis ir sentencijomis. Paskiausiai rekomenduojama paaikinti krinio realijas, susijusias su istorija, mitologija, geografija ar pan., atkreipti dmes atskir odi, posaki savitum. Vliau turt bti nurodytos praktins uduotys parayti kokio nors anro krin, imituojant perskaityto autoriaus stili4. Auktesn pakopa, paprastai praktikuota tik retorikos klasje, buvo savarankika mokini literatrin kryba, kuri ne tik parodydavo teorini ini sisavinim, bet danai atskleisdavo ne vieno studento poetinius ar prozinius gabumus. Jzuit kolegij mokiniams taip pat buvo keliami aukti reikalavimai. Jie turdavo ne tik puikiai imokti taisykles, bet ir pritaikyti jas savo individualioje kryboje. Todl retorikos paskaitose daug dmesio skirta raymo gdiams lavinti, parinktam ar pasirinktam Antikos autoriui imituoti, prozos tekstui perrayti eilmis ir atvirkiai, poezijos kriniams duota tema, nurodyta tam tikro anro taisykl. Vyravo nuostata, kad mokinys privalo imokti parayti lotynikai eiliuot ar prozos tekst, skirt bet kuriai progai ir bet kuria tema. XVII a. mokant poetikos ir retorikos taisykli, LDK kolegijose jau buvo remiamasi ne tik garsiausiais Antikos autori kriniais, bet ir ymiausiais savo krato raytojais. Kaip sektini imitavimo pavyzdiai mokykliniuose paskait konspektuose pateikiami Jono Kochanowskio (Jan Kochanowski, 15301584), Motiejaus Kazimiero Sarbievijaus (Mathias Casimirus Sarbievius, 15951640), Samuelio Twardowskio (Samuel Twardowski, 16001661) ir kit autori kriniai.

A. Possevino veikalo reikm jzuit mokymo sistemoje

Ypa reikmingas jzuit edukacijos sistemoje buvo milinikas (2 tomai, 18 knyg) jzuito Antonijaus Possevino veikalas Bibliotheca selecta de ratione studiorum (Rinktin biblioteka apie studij metod), kuris buvo perleistas net tris kartus (Roma, 1593; Venecija, 1603; Kelnas, 1607). Iskirtinio dmesio is veikalas sulauk todl, kad btent jis geriausiai atspindjo Tridento Banyios Susirinkimo
3 4 154 Ibid., p. 133. Ibid., p. 141142.

(15451563) nuostat dl antikins literatros ir meno alegorinio interpretavimo metodikos. Possevino knyga yra tarsi bibliografinis informatorius ir pagalbininkas po Antikos pasaul, taiau kartu joje pateikiami ir aikiai suformuluoti praktiniai Antikos autori alegorins interpretacijos metodai. Possevino veikalas tapo svarbiu jzuit Ratio studiorum nuostat papildymu, nurodaniu, kaip mokytojas, j laikydamasis, vadovaudamasis pamaldumu (pietas) ir atmindamas kontrreformacijos tikslus, turt juos pritaikyti praktikoje5. Mokantis retorikos (dabartiniais terminais j galtume vardyti kaip literatros teorij ir praktik), buvo remiamasi viena i minto Possevino veikalo dali Tractatio de poesi et pictura (Apie poezij ir dail), kurioje aikinama, kaip sujungti vaizd, od ir simbol vien alegorin krin, kaip imituojant antikinius autorius kurti krikionik poezij. Possevinas tvirtino, kad poezijos ir meno tikslas yra padaryti mog religingesn, besilaikant krikionik morals norm. Remdamasis ia nuostata, visus meno ir poezijos krinius jis suskirst dvi grupes: morals normas atitinkanius ir j neatitinkanius, vedanius nuodm. Pagal toki krini skirstymo sistem beveik visi Antikos autori veikalai atsidr antroje grupje. Taiau Possevinas rado ieit jis pasil bd, kaip skaityti tokius Antikos autorius: reikt eliminuoti i krinio erotinius fragmentus, vietoje pagoniko romn vartojamo dii (dievai) rayti krikionik jo atitikmen Deus (Dievas), o mitologija paremtus krinius aikinti alegorikai. Be to, publikuojant Antikos krinius, prie j turt bti pridedamos religinio turinio angos (sanctissima prolegomena) ir komentarai, alegorikai aikinantys tekstus. Kai kuriuos Antikos autori krinius Possevinas sil skaityti ne itisus, o paliekant tik geriausius j fragmentus ar sentencijas. Vis dlto i Antikos autori primygtinai buvo siloma perimti eildaros sistem, odyn ir topik6. Possevino suformuluot princip buvo laikomasi visose jzuit mokymo staigose skaitant ir aikinant Antikos autori tekstus.

Imitacijos problema reorikos mokyme

Viena svarbiausi XVII a. retorikoje ir ypa susijusi su personaline kryba tapo imitacijos problema. is terminas apm kelet dalyk: puik tam tikro anro istorijos bei raidos imanym; darn kompozicijos element perteikim; sudting poetini komponent panaudojim; tem, idj, siuet perkrim ir pritaikym t dien aktualijoms. ymiausi XVIXVII a. literatros teoretik veikaluose, kurie buvo laikomi pagrindiniais studijuojant poetikos ir retorikos mokslus Europos universitetuose, imitacija aikinta kaip nuolatinis tobuljimo procesas, besivystantis pakopomis, o tikru poetiniu meistrikumu laikytas ne aklas kokio nors autoriaus stiliaus ar leksikos pamgdiojimas, bet idjos ir krinyje atskleist potyri originali interpretacija ar gerokai nuo originalo nutolusi, savarankika to paties motyvo versija. Dauguma LDK jzuit kolegij dstytoj imitacij siejo ne su paodiniu pasirinkto autoriaus frazi komponavimu krin, bet su idjos, ireiktos mgstamo
5 Tadeusz Biekowski, Bibliotheca selecta de ratione studiorum Possevina jako teorityczny fundament kultury kontrreformacji, in: Wiek XVII. Kontrreformacja. Barok. Prace z historii kultury (Studia staropolskie, t. XXIX), pod redakcj Janusza Pelca, Wrocaw-Warszawa-Krakw: Zakad Narodowy im. Ossoliskich, 1970, p. 291294. Tadeusz Biekowski, op. cit., p. 303305. 155

autoriaus veikale, savita, danai nauja interpretacija. Tai rodo ir daugyb termino imituoti (imitari) sinonim: apgalvoti (considerare), rodinti (observare), suvokti (intelligere), vertinti (expendere), varytis (aemulari). Neinomas 1734 m. Krai kolegijoje poetik dsts profesorius pabr, kad imituoti autorius reikia ne vis j krin tarsi pavogus sau priskirti, pakeitus vos kelet detali, bet, remiantis pavyzdiniu kriniu, visk savaip pavaizduoti (imitari authores non est totum illorum opus furtivo modo sibi adscribere, vix aliquibus mutatis, sed totum proprio Marte ad instar alterius elucubrare)7. Profesorius Juozapas Rimgaila 1684 m. skaitytame retorikos kurse aikino, kad imituojant btina atsivelgti tris dalykus: imitacija turt bti nuosaiki ir protinga (ut moderata sit), imitacijai isirenkamas tikrai puikus oratorius (ut praestantissimum aliquem nobis oratorem proponamus imitandum), imituotini tik patys geriausi pasirinkto autoriaus krini momentai (ut minutiora quaeque non imitemur, sed tantum selectissima et optima)8. Kartais retorikos dstytojai, aikindami imitacijos esm, pasitelkdavo vaizdi analogij su kita meno sritimi tapyba. Jie teig, kad imitacija panai nutapyt paveiksl. Mat dailininkas tarsi atkartoja pasirinkt gyvenimo tikrovs ar gamtos moment, taiau perteikia j savais potpiais ir savomis spalvomis. Todl jo sukurtas atvaizdas ar vaizdas, nors ir panaus original, vis dlto visikai jo neatkartoja. Panaiai nutink ir su literatrine imitacija9. XVII a. LDK profesori retorikos paskait konspektuose imitacija lyginta ir su trimis mogaus gyvenimo tarpsniais. Imituodamas kok nors autori ar krin, poetas taip pat tarsi pereina tris gyvenimo ir krybos etapus: vaikyst, jaunyst, brand. Atitinkamai ir imitacija esanti paodin, arba vaikika (incipiens seu puerilis), turinti savo poir imituojamus dalykus, arba jaunatvika (crescens), ir tokia, kai isirenkama sekti tuo, kas geriausia arba brandu (adulta)10. Taigi nors imitacija buvo aikinama skirtingai, dauguma teoretik sutiko, kad ji turt bti imituojamo krinio pagrindins minties iraika, kitoks, aktualesnis svarbiausi krinyje vaizduojam dalyk pakartojimas ir atvaizdavimas. Pabrta, kad imituojant btina laikytis dviej pagrindini taisykli: suprasti bei ianalizuoti autoriaus, kuriuo norima sekti, kryb ir parayti kak panaaus pasirinkt krin aklai nesekant juo, bet bandant perteikti jame gldini imint.

Kriniai naujiems jzuit ventiesiems

Laikantis mint princip (jzuit edukacins sistemos ugdomi gebjimai, Possevino suformuluoti principai, imitacijos supratimas), XVIIXVIII a. LDK buvo kuriama literatra lotyn kalba. domu, kad XVII a. pastebimas nauj jzuit ventj (Aloyzas Gonzaga, Prancikus Ksaveras, Prancikus Borda, trys jzuit vienuoliai Paulius Mikis, Jonas Gotas, Jokbas Kizajas nukankinti Japonijoje) atsiradimas lotynikuose literatros kriniuose. iems ventiesiems eiles kr ir pripainti poetai (Motiejus Kazimieras Sarbievijus), ir kolegij dstytojai bei studentai. Tad
7 8 9 10 VUB RS F 3938, p. 60. VUB RS F 32076, p. 3. VUB RS F 3938, p. 60; VUB RS F 31392, p. 7. Eugenija Ulinait, Sarbiewski w retorykach XVIIXVIII w. na Litwie, in: Prace historycznoliterackie. Owiecenie: kultura myl, t. 17, pod redakcj Juliana Platta, Gdask: Uniwersytet Gdaski, 1995, p. 200.

156

remdamasi vienu pavyzdiu parodysiu, kaip pasitelkiant tam tikr krybos model, nauji ventieji buvo vedami literatrin apyvart. Mokykliniuose poetikos ir retorikos kursuose idstytos imitacijos taisykls ir bdai neliko vien teoriniai aikinimai, bet kvp jzuit kolegij mokinius savarankikai krybai. Tai rodo rankraiais lik poezijos rinkiniai, parayti kokia nors simintina proga ar tiesiog liudijantys pastangas, o gal ir ambicijas pritaikyti teorin mediag ir ibandyti savo jgas Apolono bei mz valdomoje srityje. iuo poiriu domus 1651 m. rankratis11, kur sudaro student poezija vairiais metrais lotyn bei graik kalbomis Vilniuje ir Nesvyiuje parayti kriniai. Imitacijos teorij puikiai iliustruoja iame rinkinyje esantys sekimai Sarbievijaus epigramomis, vadinami parodijomis12. Sarbievijaus 110 epigramos Kristaus ant kryiaus odis: troktu (Christi in cruce vox: Sitio) parodij para tuo metu dar tik retorikos kurso studentas Jonas Wayskis (Joannes Waynski, Jan Wayski, 16331661), vliau studijavs teologij Romos Collegium Romanum, dirbs ekijos provincijoje ir dsts filosofij Poznanje. Sarbievijaus epigrama parayta remiantis Evangelijos pagal Jon pasakojimu apie Jzaus mirt:
Postea sciens Iesus, quia iam omnia consummata sunt, ut consummaretur scriptura, dixit: Sitio. Vas ergo positum erat aceto penum. Illi autem spongiam plenam aceto, hyssop circumponentes, obtulerunt ori eius. Cum ergo accepisset Iesus acetum, dixit: Consummatum est, et inclinator capite tradidit spiritum (Jn 19, 2830). [Tada, inodamas, jog viskas vykdyta, ir kad isipildyt Ratas, Jzus tar: Troktu! Tenai stovjo indas, pilnas perrgusio vyno. Jie pakl ant yzopo vytels kempin, pamirkyt vyne, ir prine prie jo lp. Paragavs to vyno, Jzus tar: Atlikta! Ir nuleids galv atidav dvasi13.]

Epigramoje is v. Rato epizodas ipltojamas ir pateikiama poetin jo interpretacija: Ah! Sitio, clamas, princeps pulcherrime rerum: Non habeo pro te dulcia vina: siti. Tu tamen, Ah, sitio, clamas; dabo pocula, Sponse: Heu mihi! Sed misto pocula felle dabo. Haec, mi Sponse, bibe: quaeris cui forte propines? Ad me pro mundi, Christe, salute bibe.
[Ak! Troktu, auki, graiausias dalyk valdove; / neturiu tau saldaus vyno: kankinkis i trokulio. / Taiau tu auki: ak, troktu; duosiu taur, Suadtini: / o varge! Bet duosiu taur grimo, atmieto tulimi. / it, mano Suadtini, gerk: iekai, su kuo kartu igersi? / mane u pasaulio iganym, Kristau, gerk]
11 VUB RS F 368. 12 Parodija tuo metu neturjo dabartins komikumo ar pajuokimo prasms, o buvo tiesiog poetin parafraz kito teksto motyvais. 13 Cituojama i: ventasis ratas. Naujasis Testamentas, i graik kalbos vert kun. eslovas Kavaliauskas, Vilnius: Vaga, 1992, p. 262. 157

Kristaus kani ant kryiaus Sarbievijus perteikia pasitelkdamas dialog. Jis gali bti suprantamas kaip pokalbis tarp Suadtinio Kristaus ir numanomos Suadtins epigramos veikianiojo subjekto, galbt jzuito. Kristus prao atsigerti, bet jo panekovas neturi saldaus vyno, kuris numalint kenianio trokul. Vynas yra tarsi gyvybs eliksyras, nemirtingumo grimas, simbolizuojantis isigelbjim, diaugsm ir pilnatv14. Igirds pakartotin Kristaus auksm: Troktu, antrasis epigramos veikjas rytasi jam duoti taur grimo, atmieto tulimi. Paskutinse epigramos eilutse pateikiama dialog apibendrinanti mintis: numalinti Kristaus trokul, t. y. iganyti sielas ir igelbti pasaul, galima tik igrus kani taur, kuri ir simbolizuoja Kristui prie mirt paduota vyno, atmieto tulimi, taur. Btent i ios taurs po Kristaus pasiada gerti ir epigramos veikiantysis subjektas, taip tarsi nordamas pasidalyti Kristaus kani ir prisidti ne tik prie savosios sielos, bet ir viso pasaulio igelbjimo. Wayskis savo epigram pavadino Apie palaimintuosius Jzaus Draugijos kankinius (De B. Martyribus Soc. Iesu) ir Sarbievijaus tekst interpretavo savaip: Ah sitio clamas, Princeps pulcherrime rerum, Non habeo pro te, dulcia vina: siti. Tu tamen ah sitio clamas, sed pocula desunt, Heu mihi quid faciam, quae dabo vina tibi. Sed cur tam tristes gemitus de pectore fundo, Cur longo quaero tempore vina Deo. In Cruce tres botri pendent, hos carpito Christe Transfixi telis, absque labore bibes.
[Ak! Trok tu, auki, graiausi dalyk valdove; / neturiu tau saldaus vyno: kankinkis i trokulio. / Taiau tu auki: Ak, troktu, bet nra taurs, / o varge, k darysiu, kokio vyno tau duosiu. / Bet kodl tokias lidnas dejones i krtins lieju, / kodl ilgai iekau vyno Dievui. / Ant Kryiaus trys vynuogs kabo, persmeigtos ietimis, / jas imk, Kristau, be vargo igersi.]

Wayskio epigrama 8 eilui (Sarbievijaus 6). Krinio uuomazga tiksliai perraytos dvi pirmosios Sarbievijaus epigramos eiluts. 34 eiluts nedaug nutolusios nuo Sarbievijaus eilraio, taiau pakeiiant kelis odius kitaip sudliojami prasminiai pasakojimo akcentai. 3 eilutje vietoje Sarbievijaus odi dabo pocula, Sponse (duosiu taur, Suadtini) Wayskis ra sed pocula desunt (bet nra taurs). 4 eilutje po ekspresyvaus suukimo Heu mihi (o varge) Sarbievijaus odius Sed misto pocula felle dabo (bet duosiu taur grimo, atmieto tulimi) Wayskis pakeit quid faciam, quae dabo vina tibi (k darysiu, kokio vyno tau duosiu). 56 eiluts pridtos retorikos studento, o pabaigoje (78 eil.) autorius vl grta prie Sarbievijaus epigramoje nuskambjusio kani taurs motyvo, iek tiek j modifikuoja priderindamas prie savo pasirinktos temos ir pabaigia epigram tuo paiu kaip Sarbievijus odiu (bibe ir bibes). i Wayskio epigrama greiiausiai skirta trims jzuit misionieriams, kurie po Prancikaus Ksavero apatalavimo Japonijoje ts jo pradt darb. Tai 33 met brolis Paulius Mikis, rengsis tapti kunigu ir daug pamokslavs savo alyje, 1814 Udo Becker, Simboli odynas, Vilnius: Vaga, 1996, p. 306. 158

metis Jonas Gotas ir 64 met brolis Jokbas Kizajas (Kizayemon). Imperatoriaus sakymu ie trys vienuoliai buvo suimti Meake ir per iem veiojami po Japonijos miestus. Taiau ta kelion tapo ne iniekinimu, bet garbe Kristaus tikjimui, nes jie vis dar atvertinjo mones krikionyb. Galiausiai 1597 m. Nagasakyje visi trys jzuitai buvo nukryiuoti ir perverti ietimis kartu su 23 prancikonais15. Popieius Urbonas VIII paskelb juos palaimintaisiais, o Pijus IX 1862 m. kanonizavo. Jaunas jzuitas tarsi aukoja Kristui savo Draugijos broli kankinyst, kartu ireikdamas ir pasiryim pats t kankinyst priimti. Epigramos pabaigoje ie kankiniai simbolikai vaizduojami kaip trys vynuogs. Kryius yra tarsi medis, Kristus aplink j apsivijs vynmedis, kurio gyvybingas kamienas palaiko tikiniuosius to vynmedio akeles. Vadinasi, ir jzuit kankiniai yra tarsi to medio, ant kurio buvo nukryiuotas Kristus, atakos, taip prisijungianios prie jo kanios ir aukos u pasaulio igelbjim. Kankiniai kaip ir Kristus yra persmeigiami ietimis, o i j aizd tekantis kraujas tarsi pagirdo ir atgaivina Krist. Wayskis 110 Sarbievijaus epigram imituoja gana talentingai. 34 eilui prasminiai pakeitimai koreliuoja su naujai komponuot 56 eilui retoriniais klausimais. Krinio pabaiga isaugo Sarbievijaus epigramoje perteikiam krikionybs ini ir jzuitik usidegim iganymo darbe. Wayskio epigramos koncept irading prieybi jungt (concors discordia) sudaro paskutins eiluts, kuriose kankini kraujas atiduodamas pagirdyti Kristui per kani jie prisijungia prie pasaulio igelbjimo. Nauji jzuit ventieji XVIIXVIII a. tapo dvasiniais ir moraliniais pavyzdiais, kuriais buvo rekomenduojama sekti ne tik dvasiniko keli pasirinkusiam, bet ir pasaulietuin gyvenim gyvenaniam mogui.
ivil nEdzinsKait, PhD, Institute of Lithuanian Literature and Folklore, Mykolas Romeris University. Area of scientific interest: poetics, retorics, Baroque literature.

Literary Expression of the Sermons of Vaigantas Vaiganto pamoksl literatrin raika

Ilona IUAUSKAIT

A bst ra ct Thus far, mostly the so-called literary or occasional sermons of Vaigantas, which were read during the burial of any outstanding characters of the Lithuanian culture or during his participation in celebrations, were published. There were not many sermons published in which purely religious topics were examined. After browsing the sermons of Vaigantas, kept in Maironis Lithuanian Literature Museum and in the Department of Manuscripts of the library of Vilnius University, there are no doubts that they are rather attributed to the so-called thematic sermons, closer to the worldly literature than to homilies.
15 Encyklopedia katolicka, Lublin: Towarzystwo Naukowe KatolickiegoUniversytetu Lubelskiego, 1973 2006. 159

In the sermons there predominate the topics of morality and politics, ideals of positiveness and sociability of the persons everyday activity are implemented. The report attempts to take a glance at the literary expression of the unpublished sermons of Vaigantas, to emphasize beginnings of rhetoric which were invoked and followed by Vaigantas, to reveal the possibilities of classical rhetoric and biblical stylistics (allegorical depiction, parallelism). S a nt ra uka Iki iol daugiausia buvo skelbta vadinamj literatrini arba progini Vaiganto pamoksl, jo sakyt laidojant kur nors ikil Lietuvos kultros veikj arba jam dalyvaujant ikilminguose minjimuose. Pamoksl, kuriuose bt gvildenamos grynai religins temos, publikuota nedaug. Pavarius Maironio lietuvi literatros muziejuje ir Vilniaus universiteto bibliotekos Rankrai skyriuje saugomus Vaiganto pamokslus neabejotina, kad jie veikiau priskiriami vadinamiesiems teminiams pamokslams, artimesniems pasaulietinei literatrai nei homilijoms. Juose vyrauja morals ir politikos klausimai, diegiami mogaus kasdiens veiklos pozityvumo ir visuomenikumo idealai. Praneime siekiama pavelgti nepublikuot Vaiganto pamoksl literatrin raik, akcentuoti retorikos itakas, kuriomis rmsi ir kurias ipaino Vaigantas, atskleisti klasikins retorikos ir biblins stilistikos (alegorinio vaizdavimo, paralelizmo) galimybes.
ilona iuausKait, PhD, Institute of Lithuanian Literature and Folklore, Mykolas Romeris University, Lithuania. Area of scientific interest: textology, Lituanian literature.

Eduardas Mieelaitiss Meditative Fragments Laments and Reflections, with the Medieval Anchorite Grigor Narekatsi, upon the Fate of Man and the Poets Creative Context Eduardo Mieelaiio meditaciniai fragmentai Raudos, apmsius kartu su vidurami anachoretu Grigoru Narekaci mogaus likim ir poeto krybos kontekstas
elena BALIUTYT

A bst ra ct Eduardas Mieelaitiss series of meditative fragments Laments and Reflections upon the Fate of Man, Following the Medieval Anchorite Grigor Narekatsi, published in his 1971 collection Antakalnis Baroque, offers an antipode to the poets atheistic conception as expressed in Man. It is surprising to read such lines in a book by Mieelaitis, the great defender of materialism and optimistic creator of a homocentric system. It is also surprising given that they are fragments of a free translation of the masterpiece of Blessed Grigor Narekatsi, a medieval Armenian Catholic saint.
160

This review explores why these Christian prayer texts may have appealed to Mieelaitis. In both their formal affinity and their absolutely contrary content, these translations of Narekatsis prayers to God can be read as the poets repentance for his creative production, or as a deconstruction of his work Man. Of course, in presenting the Laments in the prose essay Restless Like a Bach Chorale, Mieelaitis is cautious. He avoids mentioning God or that these texts are prayers, stressing instead their essayistic, philosophical nature; though the words Being, Fate, and Universe are capitalized, we can interpret them as paraphrasing God. It is hard to say whether this was an attempt by Mieelaitis to protect himself from possible ideological attacks, or his true position. There would probably be more arguments for the latter, and that makes it all the more surprising to read these fragments of prayer in the context of Mieelaitiss oeuvre. Today we have Sigitas Gedas full and excellent 1999 translation of the Book of Lamentations. keywords: Eduardas Mieelaitis, poetry, essay, Prometheus. io praneimo pirminis akstinas nuostaba, aptikus 1971 metais ileistoje Mieelaiio knygoje Antakalnio barokas tekst Raudos, apmsius kartu su vidurami anachoretu Grigoru Narekaci mogaus likim. ie meditaciniai apmstymai buvo paskelbti mogaus antikomentaro, kur sudaro eios knygos, penktoje dalyje ir savo dvasia jie buvo visikai prieingi Mieelaiio knygos mogus koncepcijai1. Lenino premij laimjus mog (1961) ir Raud... fragmentus skiria deimtmetis, per kur daug kas buvo pakit ir visuomens, ir poeto smonje. T savimons pokyi punktyr galima nesunkiai pasekti eseistiniuose Mieelaiio tekstuose, bet kad poeto knygoje konservatyviausiu sovietmeiu atsirast toks tekstas, radikaliai prieingas jo materialistinei, antropocentrinei, gamtinio optimizmo pasaulirai, lieka beveik nepaaikinama. io praneimo tikslas yra, pasitelkus poeto krybos kontekst, bandyti suprasti ir aikintis io teksto atsiradimo galimyb ir aplinkybes. Skeptikiau (ar kritikiau) nusiteiks klausytojas/skaitytojas galt, inoma, kiek sumainti intrig primindamas, kad tai yra ne paties Mieelaiio tekstas, o Armnijos katalik Palaimintojo Grigoro Narekieio Vidurami poezijos edevro laisvo vertimo fragmentai. inoma, taip, bet kad imtsi j operatyviai versti, turjo bti ypa paveiktas, sujaudintas; iai raudai jo smon jau turjo bti pasiruousi. Juk ir teksto antrat Raudos, apmsius kartu su vidurami anachoretu Grigoru Narekaci mogaus likim pabria, kad tai ne tik objektyvus kito teksto vertimas, bet kartu ir jo krimas, asmeninis jo autorysts prisimimas. K apie io teksto atsiradim yra ras pats poetas? Prie Raudas... einanioje es Neramus tarsi Bacho choralas pasakojama susitikimo su iuo tekstu istorija. Poetui vieint Armnijoje (tai turjo bti 1969 metai), vienas skaitytojas padovanojs jam nedidel, kukliai ileist eili knygel. Pradjs skaityti, liko be amo. Toji knygel tai 1969 metais profesoriaus Levono Mkrtiano iniciatyva publikuoti, Naumo
1 Plaiau apie tai r.: Rimantas Kmita, Eduardo Mieelaiio mogus kaip politins religijos tekstas, Literatra, 49(1), 2007, p. 39-57. 161

Grebniovo iversti rus kalb, penki Grigoro Narekaci Sielvarting giedojim knygos skyriai: 1, 23, 30, 55, 80. Mieelaitis i jos ivert 23, 30, 55 skyri fragmentus (Sigito Gedos vertime j yra 95). Mieelaitis es pradeda nuo nuostabos, j itikusios paskaiius knygels tekstus: apie tai jis rao su bdingu savo stiliui hiperbolizmu, dar patykintu taikantis prie rytietikos odio ornamentikos. Bet kartis, su kuriuo apie tai raoma, priveria patikti, kad tai ne tik retorika. Jis akcentuoja minties didyb, filosofin santykio su pasauliu umoj, asmenybs mast ir apibendrina: Tada, ilojo Ararato papdje, atrod tarsi biau pateks nauj, man neinom erdv ir didel pasaul. poetins minties pasaul, kurio seniai iekojau ir pagaliau atradau.[...] Pajutau kovojani, besiblakani, keniani mogaus siel. Pajutau dramatik nerim, kur patiria mogus, norintis aprpti ir suvokti vis paslapting Bt, Likim, Visat. (Mieelaitis 1971: 170). Poetas, lyg ubgdamas u aki galimiems oficialiosios kritikos priekaitams, argumentuoja, kodl toji vidurami poezija turi rpti iandieniniam mogui:
Mes labai klystume, manydami, jog savikritika, kuklumas ir nusieminimas prie Visatos didyb buvo reikalingi vidurami anachoretui, tamsuoliui, fanatikui ir tapo nebereikalingu anachronizmu naujam mogui. Gamta, inoma, idav mogui stamb veksel, ir pasaulio statyboje jis gali operuoti stambiomis sumomis [...]. (Mieelaitis 1971: 171).

domu, kaip ios raudos atrod tuometiniam skaitytojui? Knygos recenzentai (Vitas Areka, Jrat Sprindyt) jas iskyr kaip labiausiai emocionalius ir taigius tekstus. Kaip ir autorius mintoje es, taip ir abu recenzentai, tarsi numanydami galimus priekaitus, panaiai teisino i tekst pesimizm. Taigi kodl ie krikionikieji mald tekstai ateistui Mieelaiiui padar tok spd? Pirmiausia, inoma, jis turjo bti sukrstas estetins j jgos. Patetikajam Mieelaiiui biblinis, monumentalus raud stilius turjo bti itin artimas. domu, kad Jonas Aistis, usistodamas ieivijos spaudoje kritikuojam Mieelait (jo kelions JAV 1959 metais proga), ra: Man keista, kad iki iol nei vienas nepastebjo, jog Mieelaitis yra vienas i rykiausi ir itikimiausi Bernardo Brazdionio mokini (Aistis 1959.10.31: 3). Savo ruotu, kai sovietinje Lietuvoje buvo pradta puolimo kampanija prie Aist ir Brazdion, Mieelaitis um gynjo pozicij:
Lktais straipsniais ia nelaimsime nieko. [] Poezijoje vienintel kovos priemon gera poezija. [] Abudu jie didiai talentingi, tikri poetai. Ir nors ideologij jie ireikia atsiliekani nuo dinamikos dabarties, nuo verlaus ir toli nujusio ms amiaus monijos gyvenimo, skaitytojo akyse jie vis dlto lieka poetais (Mieelaitis 1966: 28).

Vis dlto, manytume, kad ne tik monumentalus raud stilius prikaust Mieelaiio dmes: keliau hipotez, kad Dievo atleidimo praanio vidurami vienuolio maldoje poetas galjo ivysti savo prometjikojo mogaus dvasin dvyn tos paios vertikals apverstj variant. Sugretinus abu tekstus (mog ir Raudas) stebina raikos giminingumas ir absoliuti turinio prieyb ir tai iki toki atitikmen, kad Narekaci mald Diev vertimus skaitai kaip asmenik poeto atgail dl savo krybos, arba kaip prometjikojo mogaus dekonstrukcij.
162

Besiskubindamas priek klimpau dar giliau pelk. / Besivalgydamas didelio a praradau ma. / Berakydamas vaigdes pamirau ems pd. / Pasikls Pauki Tak nusiritau bedugn. / [...]Dabar mane silpn vis / Didi nuodmi belaisv, / Gali tik tu ivaduoti. // Meldiu, padk mano / Myriop pasmerktai sielai. / Amen. (Mieelaitis 1971: 180).

Versdamas raud tekstus Mieelaitis vartojo savo poezijai bdingus vaizdius, frazes, mgstam absoliutaus kontrasto poetik ir tai dar sustiprina abiej tekst tiesioginio dialogo spd. Palyginus Mieelaiio vertimus su Gedos t pai fragment vertimais, akivaizdu, kad antruoju atveju dialogo spdis bt silpnesnis. Meditacijose vyrauja kania ir atgaila dl mogaus nuodmingumo, silpnumo, dl kankinamos abejoni sielos, kno aistr, dl to, kad jo veiklos rezultatai prieingi ketinimams, tuiai ipustyti gabumai, plepus lieuvis ir ididuols lpos... Tai tarsi prometjikos dvasios mogaus, turjusio pretenzij tapti gamtos ir visatos valdovu, didinga, biblinio masto antifraz. Keletas pastebjim apie tai, kuo Mieelaiio prometjikasis mogus skiriasi nuo kit jo literatrini pavidal. Prometjo temos kriniuose vyksta maitingas dialogas su Dievu, ar su Demonu (Aischilo Prikaltasis Prometjas, Johanno Wolfgango Goethes Faustas, od Prometjas, Adomo Mickeviiaus Vlins), daroma didinga nuodm, suvokiant savo kalt ir prisiimant atsakomyb u maiting veiksm vardan kit. Mieelaiiui Dievas, kaip dialogo narys, neegzistuoja, nors Dievas, kaip moralin vertyb, jo smonje tebra - apie tai galima sprsti kad ir i toki imperatyv: Poezija turi tapti dievu, o raomasis stalas altorium [] (Mieelaitis 1966: 94); kitur jis cituoja Franco Kafkos Dienoraius, kur is raymo proces yra pavadins savotika maldos forma (Mieelaitis 1966: 148). Mieelaiio maitas yra vietins reikms, nukreiptas prie konservatyviai mstanius savo kolegas, prie biurokrat dogmatizm, prie Stalino kult ir pan. Jis i esms ir negaljo rasti bdo, kaip maitauti prie Diev jam pakeitusi Didij Gamt, kurios dalimi buvo pats. Hansas-Georgas Gadameris straipsnyje Prometjas ir kultros tragedija rao, kad naujaisiais laikais Prometjo mitas tapo ne tik mogaus krjo manifestacija, bet ir prieinimu krikionikajai smonei. Kaip rykiausias pavyzdys minima Goethes od Prometjas. Goethe yra vienas daniausiai Mieelaiio eseistikoje cituojam autori, o jo Prometj, pateiks originalo kalba, taip komentuoja: Protestanto pozicija. Jokio absoliuto. Jokio kulto. Visk savo rankomis. Prometjas Olimpo demokratas, revoliucionierius, humanistas. Jis prie sustingusi konservatyvi harmonij. (Mieelaitis 1969: 354). Prometjo mite Mieelaitis tradicikai aktualizuoja mogaus krybikumo tem. Bet dievikos krybos galios, kurios romantik buvo priskirtos tik poetams ir kit sfer menininkams, Mieelaiio suteiktos apskritai mogui, ikeliant jo krybikum bet kurioje meno, mokslo, technikos ir t.t sferoje. Taip dingsta individualus, asmeninis herojaus iskirtinumas, aukos grois ir kania, nuodm visa, kas sudaro prometjizmo erd. Mieelaiio mogus nebeturi veiksmo programos, save jis suvokia kaip mediag, materijos ts, paklstani mes kiekybei, o tai i principo eliminuoja bet kok dramatizm ar dinamizm. Cikle t patvirtina ne tik deklaracijos, bet ir mogaus kno paralels su neorganine gamta, tapusios ne vieno eilraio struktros pagrindu. Apie knyg vaigdi papd (1959), kurioje pirm kart buvo paskelbta dauguma bsimo mogaus ciklo eilrai, raoma: A pasirinkau eksperimentin mogikosios mediagos painimo bd. Iekau nauj tos mediagos element. Man
163

rpi painti mogikosios mediagos struktr. (Mieelaitis 1964: 240). Kaip ir buvo galima tiktis i racionaliai sumanyto projekto, ateities mogus pasirod primityviai paprastas, aikus ir nuobodus. Atrodo, poetas pats tai jaut, be to, ir literatrin bendruomen (kritika, kolegos raytojai, skaitytojai) siunt aikius signalus, kad tai tra ideologinis konstruktas. Pasipyl naujojo mogaus parodijos, arai, kuluariniai komentarai. I pradi Mieelaitis man tsis savo mogaus projekt jo gaivinimo, sumoginimo linkme apie tai jis daug ra pirmose dviejose mogaus antikomentaro knygose (Lyriniuose etiuduose, 1964 ir Naktiniuose drugiuose, 1966):
[...] ne i karto i idja buvo suprasta. Teko igirsti net cinik pastab. A, tiesa, pasirinkau tok bd: suskaldiau mog atskiras dalis (gal i ties panaiai ir dar kubistai). [...] Dabar reikia engti tolimesn ingsn. Nortsi ileisti didesn, stambesn knyg apie mog, kur bt ne tik skulptrinis mogaus portretas, bet ir vidinis jo portretas, gal ir visa aplinka. (Mieelaitis 1966: 184).

Taiau, kaip galima sprsti i gausi samprotavim ia tema, Mieelaitis, atrodo, nelabai inojo, k toliau daryti su tuo sukurtuoju apoloniko kno monstru ir kaip pavaizduoti vidin mog. I pradi gyns naujj mog, vliau poetas rezignavo, isikvp, nes keitsi laiko atmosfera: prometjikj , herojin savijaut keit donkichotikumo savivaizdis. Tarsi paklusdamas aplinkos spaudimui (7-ojo deimtmeio lietuvi poezijoje avangardin stili keit paprastumo estetika), Mieelaitis taip pat band vaizduoti kasdienybs mog, jo eilse stiprjo socialinis kriticizmas, atsirado ironijos, satyros ton, nukreipt prie visuomens miesionjim, vartotojikas tendencijas, buitikum, ideal stok ir t.t. Bet, kaip galima sprsti i ciklo Infliacija, publikuoto paskutinje, etoje, antikomentaro knygoje Iliuzijos boktas (1973), romantinei poeto pasauljautai, barokikai ornamentuotam stiliui tai buvo visikai svetimas kelias. Dabartis prometjikj nuostat mogui i principo yra nesvarbi, nes visas jo dmesys nukreiptas ateit, siekiam ideal. Dl to Mieelaiiui priimtinesnis atrodo Immanuelio Kanto ar Pierreo Teilhardo de Chardino tobuljanio mogaus modelis nei marksisto Herberto Marcuses sociologin mogaus traktuot (Mieelaitis 1969: 375). Eseistikoje vis grdamas prie prometjikosios maito temos ir iame kontekste mindamas Goethes Faust, Heinricho Heins satyras, Georgeo Byrono Don uan, Vladimir Majakovsk, Mieelaitis jiems prieino savojo laiko poet miesionik konformizm. Labai nusibodo lktas optimizmas (visur kur laiminga ieitis ir baigtis) Jis pakirto ir ivijo psichologin dramatizm, gilesn tragikos situacijos pajautim, herojik mogaus kov su paiu savim, kov tarp grio ir blogio (Mieelaitis: 1969: 32). Ir tai atsitiktinai poetui akis pakliva Vidurami vienuolio tekstai, savo bibliniu stiliumi, pasijiniu sijautimu, filosofiniu minties umoju turj jam pasirodyti artimi. Tik raikos turinys visikai prieingas keniantis, nelaimingas, atgailaujantis, nusiemins, Dievo gailestingumo meldiantis, nuodmingas mogus. Mieelaiiui tai galjo atrodyti kaip apolonikojo mogaus papildymas Kaino ir Dioniso dvasia, sujungiant kani ir kryb, mait ir nusieminim. Vliau, Atgimimo pradioje, paraytoje poemoje Mitai (1986-1987, ispausdinta 1996), kai Mieelaitis sapne periri vis monijos istorij, jis prieina prie ivados, kad blogis yra neivengiamas istorijos variklis. Panaiai kaip jo skaitytas ir cituojamas Friedrichas Nietzsche
164

Tragedijos gimime i muzikos dvasios teigs, kad dionisikasis pradas yra pokyi altinis, btinas apolonikj epoch palydovas. Racionalaus romantiko Mieelaiio optimistinei pasauljautai dramatizmas yra svetimas. Gyvenimo dialektikoje jis pabria konfliktik skiri sintez. Ar tai galt sujungti vidurami vienuolio mald su XX a. komunisto beatifikacija? Nebent prieinimo ryiu.

Literatra
Aistis, Jonas, Ar ne per daug usipuolama?, Draugas, 1959 spalio 31. Mieelaitis, Eduardas, Lyriniai etiudai, Vilnius: Vaga, 1964. Mieelaitis, Eduardas, Naktiniai drugiai, Vilnius: Vaga, 1966. Mieelaitis, Eduardas, Montaai, Vilnius: Vaga, 1969. Mieelaitis, Eduardas, Antakalnio barokas, Vilnius: Vaga, 1971.

Elena Baliutyt, PhD, Institute of Lithuanian Literature and Folklore, Mykolas Ro-

meris University. Area of scientific interest: contemporary Lithuanian literature, Soviet literature, critique of literature.

165

Session VI A
Hans Urs von Balthasars Third Way of Love: The Spiritual-Corporeal Encounter of Religious Experience
stephen M. GARRETT

A bst ra ct Contemporary renderings of religious experience tend to comport with William Jamess four-fold solipsistic criteria for identifying a mystical experience that is congruent across religious traditions. Contrary to such notions, the prominent 20th century Swiss Catholic theologian, Hans Urs von Balthasar, roots his understanding of religious experience in the dialogical, spiritual-corporeal I-Thou-We encounter with the other, particularly in loving ones neighbor. All such creaturely I-ThouWe encounters ultimately, Balthasar maintains, have their basis in the divine IThou-We as the Son interprets the Father through the Holy Spirit as divine love. This spiritual-corporeal reality, initiated by the triune God, occurs concretely in the communal life of faith. Religious experience is not an isolated individual experience but rather a tradition dependent one located particularly, for the Christian, within the context of the Church. Balthasar, therefore, makes a unique contribution as he inextricably includes a corporeal aspect to religious experience that is mediated through the irreducible spiritual-corporeal encounter found in the interlocution between self and other. key Words: Hans Urs von Balthasar, I-Thou-We, corporeal, religious experience, tradition
Stephen M. GaRREtt, PhD, Lecturer/Researcher of Public Theology and the Philosophy of Religion, Social Communications Institute, Lithuania University of Educational Sciences.

Native or Christian: Interaction of Traditions in Peyote Religion

Benas ULEVIIUS

A bst ra ct Native American Church is an unique religion, in which Native and Christian contents and forms are combined, yet various researchers do not agree on the extent and importance of these two doctrinal, ethical and ceremonial layers in Peyote Religion. To some researchers Christian content in Peyote Religion seems superficial and accidental (e.g. W. La Barre). Others are convinced that Christian worldview and ethics can be found at the very core of Peyote Religion, especially in so called
166

Cross Fire version of Peyotism (e.g. J. S. Slotkin, O. C. Stewart). So how Christian Peyote Religion really is? The answer to this question is complex one. It must be based on the scrutiny of historical facts, social dynamics, and personal testimonies; it must be free of institutionalized anti-Christian trend, which has been influencing anthropology till recently (Hann 2007:384); moreover, we cannot hope to answer this question without consulting the Christian theology, which should be seen as the provider of initial theoretic criteria for evaluation of anything Christian. The theological inquiry of early conversion experiences, prayers, songs, and doctrines of peyotists can help us to evaluate the character of interaction of Native and Christian religious traditions that took place at the end of the 19th century in formation of unique ceremonial complex called the Peyote Religion. keywords: Peyote, Christianity, inculturation, Native American Church, religion. Native American Church (thereinafter NAC) or Peyote religion is a common title for the fastest growing Native American religion in the United States and Canada. The uniqueness of NAC is based on usage of small spineless cactus lophophora williamsii peyote by its adherents. Peyote is ingested as a sacrament during night long ceremonies. Because of its healing and mild hallucinogenic properties it is valued as teacher and medicine in the broadest sense of the word (Shultes 1938).1 NAC ceremonial complex as it is known today, formed in the United States towards the end of the 19th century. It spread rapidly through the country and reached Canada in the beginning of 20th century.2 For at least 10 000 years peyote was used for different purposes (ceremonial and not) by Natives in territory of Mexico, where most of its natural habitat is found (the rest of peyote growing area is in Southern Texas) (Stewart 1987:17). Today NAC unites a number of officially incorporated religious organizations3, and counts up to 300 000 adherents (Maroukis 2010:5). Use of peyote for ceremonial purposes is allowed for Native Americans by the US legislature. Various studies had shown that ceremonial use of peyote does not form the habit, does not impair physical or mental abilities of peyotists, and is not harmful in any way (Maroukis 2010:6; Halpern et al. 2005). It is commonly admitted that Native and Christian elements are combined in NAC beliefs and ceremonies, yet various researchers do not agree on the extent and importance of these two doctrinal, ethical and ceremonial layers in Peyote Religion. To some researchers Christian content in Peyote Religion seems superficial and accidental (e.g. W. La Barre). Others are convinced that Christian worldview and ethics can be found at the very core of Peyote Religion, especially in so called Cross Fire version of Peyotism (e.g. J. S. Slotkin, O. C. Stewart). It is undeniable fact that essential elements of NAC ceremony are of Native origin: earthen altar is constructed on the ground; drum, gourd rattles, feathers, eagle bone whistle are used in prayers; smudging of sacred objects is done by throwing cedar needles on hot coals and holding ceremonial objects in the smoke or drawing smoke to the
1 2 3 On the chemistry of peyote: Anderson 1996. There exist quite few accounts about the spread of Peyote religion (La Barre 1988; Slotkin 1956; Stewart 1987; Maroukis 2010; Hultkrantz 1997). The largest NAC organizations are: NAC of North America, NAC of Navajoland, NAC of Oklahoma, NAC of South Dakota (Anderson 1996:48; Maroukis 2010:208). 167

objects or people, using feathers; sage is used for purification; in many ceremonies tobacco may be used in prayer; participants sit on the ground; musically hymns are unmistakably Native; number four is important in ceremonial procedures, and so on.4 Yet, while comparing old Mexican peyote complex with its later United States development (i.e. NAC), Stewart notices that the peyote ceremony in Oklahoma was different from earlier Mexican peyote ceremonies. There was no bloodletting; there was almost never any dancing; people sat as in the meeting; there were no drunken stupors. It was an affair of family and friends, with singing and praying, and for all its strangeness to outsiders, to its participants it carried a high moral tone, such as might characterize a mission service. While no Christian symbol, with the possible exception of the cross, can be found in early peyote ceremonies, they might be said to have had a certain Christian ambience (Stewart 52). So how Christian Peyote Religion really is? The answer to this question is complex one. It must be based on the scrutiny of historical facts, social dynamics, and personal testimonies; it must be free of institutionalized anti-Christian trend, which has been influencing anthropology till recently (Hann 2007:384); moreover, we cannot hope to answer this question without consulting the Christian theology, which should be seen as the provider of initial theoretic criteria for evaluation of anything Christian. The theological inquiry of early conversion experiences, prayers, songs, and doctrines of peyotists can help us to evaluate the character of interaction of Native and Christian religious traditions that took place at the end of the 19th century in formation of unique ceremonial complex called the Peyote Religion. In this article some initial remarks which could be of use to those who deal with above mentioned questions in more detail will be provided. This research is based on the analysis of materials, nonformal interviews, personal correspondence and participant observation.5 It is undeniable fact that many early peyotists were well acquainted with elements of Christian doctrine. With missionaries actively proselytizing on reservations, Christianity being indispensable part of curricula in governmental and missionary schools (also in war camps, where many personal friendships and connections among future peyotists were made), Christian doctrine and visual expressions were well known by Native American population in the second part of the 19th century.6 This applies even more to active proselytizers of peyotism, who in most cases were educated, politically or/and religiously engaged members of their communities. This is definitely the case with two most prominent peyote leaders of the 19th century Quanah Parker and John Wilson. Both were of mixed native white ancestry; both crystallized and propagated two different versions of peyote ceremony. Quanah Parker, the great chief of Comanche, was a gifted politician and businessman. Respected by tribesmen, white agents and missionaries alike Quanah was attracted by possibilities white world had to offer. His view of Christianity was positive, even though having three wives according to the tribal customs was one of the reasons he did not join any of Christian denominations (Stewart 1987:70-72). One of the famous photographs of the great chief shows him at home sitting by the painting of Sacred
4 5 6 168 Stewart provides the detailed list of ritual elements and their interpretations in different NAC ceremonies (Stewart 1987:339-375) More than dozen NAC ceremonies, conducted by Lakota, Dine, Ponca roadmen were attended in 1999 2012 by author of this article. On the importance of boarding schools for the spread of peyotism see: Maroukis 34.

Heart of Jesus (Swan 1999:7). It seems that the famous saying of Quanah the white man goes into his church and talks about Jesus; the Indian goes into his tipi and talks with Jesus reveals his conviction about the methodological differences of Churches or possibly spiritual deficiency of white Christian churches, yet it does not play down the importance of Christ or Christianity as such. Similarly John Wilson, religious leader of Caddo tribe, though never involved with worldly politics, was always on the front lines of religious life on the reservation. Member of Catholic church, active leader of Ghost dance, and prominent peyote leader, Wilson created a version of peyotism. His ceremony was called Big Moon because of an altar shape, which was different from Quanahs Little Moon altar (more often called Half Moon). In Big Moon peyotism basic elements of peyote ceremony and modifications introduced by Wilson were interpreted from strong Christocentric perspective. Doctrines of death, resurrection and ascension of Christ to heaven were put at the centre of the ceremonial symbolism (Stewart 1987:86-92). Other most important personalities in the development of Peyote religion were two Winnebago Indians John Rave and Albert Hensley, who adopted and modified Big Moon ceremony into what was called Cross Fire peyotism. Rave and Hensley were well acquainted with Christianity.7 It was Hensley, who introduced regular Bible reading at the ceremonies and added Bible to set of ceremonial paraphernalia.8 John Rave was sympathetic to these additions. Being illiterate, he exhorted Bible reading by younger educated members at the ceremonies (Radin 1990:373). Sometimes it is claimed that these and other early peyote leaders used Christianity as a shield against governmental and religious bodies that strived to ban peyotism on reservations. Thus embracing Christianity (or some aspects of it) is seen as political step, lacking sincerity. Such statement has very little historical evidence if at all. Surely Christianess of peyotism could be used as a proof to authorities that NAC is just another Christian church. Such policy is possible, yet it may easily coexist together with sincere love of Christian beliefs and imagery (Maroukis 2010:125).9 Numerous examples and testimonies reveal attitude of peyotists to Christianity ranging from getting along with to active interest. In the late 19th century Christianity was not new or alien phenomena on reservations. Many peyotists were raised by families who already were practicing Christians. Others, like Quanah Parker, developed friendly relationships with missionaries. The situation of one of the most influential Sioux peyote leader Jim Blue Bird is close to typical. Jim inherited love to Bible from his father who was Episcopal minister. When Jim became peyotist, his father did not attempt to dissuade him, recognizing that in the Cross Fire church one prayed to Jesus Christ and preached clean living (Stewart 1987:180). Another famous peyote leader Jonathan Koshiway of Sac and Fox tribe was unusually curious about religion. He went to Bible school, acquainted himself with Jehovahs witnesses, became missionary for the Church of
7 8 9 About Hensleys positive experiences at Carlisle boarding school and interactions with Episcopalians see: Radin 1990:350. Also there is a possibility that before introducing peyotism to Winnebago, John Rave saw Bible being used at the Oto peyote ceremonies, which he attended in Oklahoma (Maroukis 38). Maroukis provides typical example of such reasoning, even though later he admits sincerety as an important motive for the inclusion of Christian elements into peyote ceremonies (Maroukis 2010:123). 169

Jesus Christ of Latter Day Saints, and later became Presbyterian minister (Stewart 1987:167). Active interest in Christian doctrine by many peyotists is well documented. To give just one example, Sioux Indians Sam Kills Crow Indian and Charles Spotted Eagle were friends. They studied mail-order Bible course, read Bible and attended peyote ceremonies together (Stewart 1987:182). Moreover, it was always quite common for peyotists to belong to one or more Christian denominations besides the membership in NAC. There are plenty examples. Some of them are conspicuous. For instance, Sac and Fox George Butler was peyote roadman (i. e. ceremonial leader) and Baptist minister at the same time. He would conduct peyote ceremonies on Saturday night, and then preside over Baptist prayer services on Sunday morning, after which he would return and eat together with peyote community (Stewart 1987:123).10 Alongside these examples there is also a testimony, provided by art, customs and peyote ceremony itself. Decorations of ceremonial objects, church buildings and living places with crucifixes, crosses, images of Jesus and angels, inscriptions with Bible quotes are so abundant in both Half Moon and Big Moon/Cross Fire traditions, that distrust about sincerity of such visual confessions seems untenable. The same stands true when we explore Christian jargon, adopted by Peyote religion (e.g. Heavenly Father, church, sacrament, narrow road, everlasting life, baptism, blessing, faith, hope, charity and the like).11 While some researchers tend to stigmatize such borrowings as alien additions, most members of NAC seem to use them with pride.12 It has become routine statement in general descriptions of NAC that Half Moon peyotism is more native or traditional while Big Moon and/or Cross Fire peyotism is later Christianized version of Peyote religion. I am convinced that it is misleading to call one of aforementioned versions of peyotism more traditional than other. Both versions differ significantly from so called Mexican peyote complex, and from the phenomenological viewpoint seem more related to each other than to their Mexican predecessor.13 Both versions were born within rather insignificant time interval. Both are considered traditional by adherents. More should be said about Half Moon tradition being less Christianized version of peyotism. There are definitely native elements in Half Moon peyotism, which are absent from Cross Fire ceremonies, use of tobacco being one of most important. It is also true, that Bible is not used at Half Moon ceremony, and references to it in prayers and explanations are relatively fewer than in Cross Fire tradition. Still love for biblical idiom is present in Half Moon tradition and biblical expressions are frequent enough to put aforesaid statement under suspicion. In reality there were always Half Moon communities, where biblical interpretation of ceremony was in the prime. Winnebago Jese Clays explanation of Half Moon ceremony is an exceptional example
10 There are numerous evidences of peyotists who were members of Christian churches and at the same time held leadership positions in traditional tribal religious activities. To mention just one example: Kills Enemy, a traditional Sioux holy man, was also devout Catholic and a supporter of the Native American Church (Maroukis 2004:275). 11 Some of these words are used with meanings that not necessarily coincidence with Christian equivalents. For instance to baptize himself may mean an act of touching head or body with ceremonial water or water from ceremonial water drum. 12 For instance, member of Half Moon tradition can explain why he stays with shoes at the home ceremony: we stay in shoes because this is a Church meeting. 13 Of course, basic material elements can be traced to Mexican peyote celebrations. 170

(Radin 1990:367-371). Abundance of Christian visual expressions present at Half Moon ceremonies was already mentioned. It is also important to notice the frequent invocation of Jesus name in songs and prayers, often with additions Only Savior, the Only Way, the Only One and so forth.14 We know that even back in Quanahs Parker ceremony Jesus was mentioned in prayers and songs (Stewart 1987:77) . It is really hard to believe that all mentioned elements would find their way into the ceremonies if significant part of early members would express any uneasiness about them. Moreover, it seems near to impossible to believe that all these elements were introduced just for being politically useful as it is claimed quite often. Even though biblical idioms in Peyote religion do not necessarily prove an orthodox Christian worldview being at work, they reveal attitude of comfortable closeness at least, and loving enthusiasm at most. We also should not ignore the fact that in case of both Half Moon and Cross Fire traditions, peyotism most often was understood as new religion, which called for discontinuing tribal believes.15 It is interesting to notice, that despite the sharp opposition to peyotism from both traditional tribal religions and Christianity, it is traditional medicine bundles that were disposed of (Swan 1998; Radin 1990:349; DAzevedo 2006).16 More positive attitude of peyotists to traditional tribal believes (and vice verse) started gradually gaining the ground in the sixties, as a result of rising interest in tribal religions by white society and promotion of tribal beliefs and traditions. Former suspicions and hostilities are more and more transforming into mutual encouragement and exchange. In this mood of tolerance, values and attitudes mingle and understanding of dissimilarities seems to be weakened. Aberlees comparison between the ethics, prayers and spirituality of Navajo traditionalists on one hand, and peyotists on the other, is very enlighting in this respect (Aberlee 1991: 195-198). These observations are rather concise. Yet they are enough to question statements about superficiality of layer of Christianity in Peyote religion, and refute claims about political circumstances being the main and strongest motive for including Christian elements into peyote ceremonies. Of course, the main obstacle for the task of evaluation to what extent Christian beliefs and ethics were included into Peyote religion remains the absence of strict uniformity in peyote communities. For this reason it is impossible to indicate precise percentage of Christian influence in Peyote religion. Yet it seems clear that there exists another problem, often neglected by those who seek answers to aforesaid questions. It is impossible to detect the precise amount of Christian elements in religion, which is transmitted almost exclusively in a way of oral tradition. In such religion views and values dont live on through carefully articulated concepts but through the transmission of vocabularies, attitudes, practices and ethical rules in the ceremonial setting. If Peyote religion is Christian in any way, its peculiar Christianity is not defined by special NAC catechism or dogmatic treatise. Christianity of peyote religion (any amount of it) lives in songs, prayers, ceremonies, visual expressions, and ethical attitudes. In
14 This observation is based on more than 100 audio records scrutinized and life meetings observed. 15 On the general view that the elements of traditional tribal religions should not mix with peyote see: Stewart 1987:315. 16 Such actions were related with theological and ethical views. For instance, Winnebago older shamans were much opposed to Peyote religion, because peyotists denied the doctrine of reincarnation (Radin 1990:378). 171

the world of written Christianity, were doctrines are understood first of all as written definitions, such form of Christianity is classified as folk piety, and is usually seen with slight suspicion. Yet it always exists with its colorful ritual dynamics and lack of conceptual definition. It seems that this distinction between oral and written transmission of religious beliefs and ethics helps us to reveal the true meaning of Quanahs Parker words: the white man goes into his church and talks about Jesus; the Indian man goes into his teepee and talks with Jesus. Peyote religion can be viewed as inculturation of Christianity. Yet this inculturation in itself means new life and adaptation of Christian message.17 It immerses Christian doctrine into different setting and provides it with new methods. Such Christianity appears too undefined (and actually unrecognizable) to Western mind that is accustomed to precise definitions which can be written down and explained in conceptual terms.

Bibliography
Aberlee, D. F. 1991. The Peyote Religion Among the Navaho. Norman and London: University of Oklahoma Press. Anderson, E. F. 1996. Peyote: the Divine Cactus. Tucson: The University of Arizona Press. DAzevedo, W. L. 2006. Straight With the Medicine; Narratives of Washoe Followers of the Tipi Way. Berkeley: Heyday Books. Halpern, J. H., Sherwood, A. R., Hudson, J. I., Todd D. Y., Pope Jr., H. G. 2005. Psychological and Cognitive Effects of Long-Term peyote Use Among Native Americans. Biol Psychiatry, 58, pp. 624-631. Hann, C. 2007. The Anthropology of Christianity per se. European Journal of Sociology, 48/3, pp. 383-410. Hultkrantz, A. 1997. The Attraction of Peyote: an Inquiry into Basic Conditions for the Diffusion of the Peyote Religion in North America. Stockholm: Almqvist & Wiksell International. La Barre, W. 1988. The Peyote Cult. Crescent Moon. Maroukis, T.C. 2004. Peyote and the Yankton Sioux. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press. Maroukis, T. C. 2010. The Peyote Road: Religious Freedom and the Native American Church. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press. Radin, P. 1990. The Winnebago Tribe. First Bison Book. Schultes, R. E. 1938. The Appeal of Peyote (Lophophora Williamsii) as a Medicine. American Anthropologist, October-December. New series 40(4/1), pp. 698-715. Stewart, O. C. 1987. Peyote Religion: a History. Norman and London : University of Oklahoma Press. wan, D. 1998. Early Osage Peyotism. Plains Anthropologist, 43 (163), pp. 51-71. Swan, D. C. 1999. Peyote Religious Art: Symbols of Faith and Belief. Jackson: University Press of Mississippi. benas ulEviius, PhD, assoc. professor at Vytautas Magnus University, Lithuania. Area of scientific interest: liturgical anthropology, liturgical theology, systematic theology, Native American Church.
17 Testimonies of NAC members show us, how selective such adaptation can be (DAzevedo 2006). 172

Conversion as a Personal Experience in Relation to the Meaning of Life Events and Religious Tradition Atsivertimas kaip asmenikas patyrimas gyvenimo vyki ir tradicijos kontekste (konvertitai skirtingose krikioni bendruomense)
Irena egl LAUMENSKAIT

a bst rac t Conversion is a reality of every religion at all times, but in a period of great social change it becomes a more widespread phenomenon. Converts realize the religious identity not through traditional belonging to a definite religion or denomination, but through a personal religious experience, which transforms ones system of meaning that has an impact on further life preferences and social activity. What is a conversion as religious experience? What is it as a reality in Christian experience? Does this experience and interpretation correspond to the frame of concrete religious tradition and practice? How the personal conversion as experience did happen and how was it perceived personally and accepted by the others? How was it influenced by the former and the latter social experience? How did the converts attitudes, personal and social relations as well social activity change? The study was based on two different but simultaneously used methods: biographical method (oral history of the religious experience from childhood to the stage after the conversion) and semi-structured questionnaire on social situation, circumstances of conversion and its social consequences. The object of study was young converts in three religious communities three different Christian denominations (Catholic and two new evangelical Protestant). The study gave the possibility to encompass all four levels of religious experience (J. Paul Williams), including those which usually are not shared with the others. It also allowed to discover in what aspect the reflection and value judgment of personal conversion is interconnected with theological interpretation and practice of religious tradition, and in what it is not. The personal narration of deep religious experience in the context of successive life events gave the possibility to reassess the accidentals in the personal course of life, and to look into the phenomenon of conversion from different theoretical perspectives. key words: conversion, religious experience, Christian experience, interpretation, religious tradition Atsivertimas laikomas kiekvienos religijos ir kiekvieno laikmeio tikrove, bet vykstant radikaliems visuomens pokyiams jis tampa platesniu reikiniu. Atsivertimo atveju religin tapatyb kristalizuojasi ne perimant tradicin priklausym konkreiai religijai ar denominacijai, bet asmeniko religinio patyrimo kaip gyvenimo vykio pagrindu. Tai perkeiia asmens vertybines nuostatas ir turi poveik jo tolesniems gyvenimo orientyrams bei socialiniams sprendimams. Kas yra atsivertimas kaip religinis patyrimas ir patirtis? Ar krikionikasis atsivertimas skiriasi nuo kit? Ar krikionys atsivertimo patirtimi skiriasi ir tarpusavyje?
173

Jei taip, kas tuos skirtumus slygoja? Kaip vyksta atsivertimas ir kaip jis susietas su praeities bei tolesnio gyvenimo vykiais? ie klausimai buvo keliami rengiant konvertit tyrim tuoj po Nepriklausomybs atkrimo Lietuvoje, kai atsirado laisv ne tik asmenikai praktikuoti, bet ir liudyti tikjim. Kiekybinis ir kokybinis tyrimas 1994 m. vyko VU Religijos studij ir tyrim centro iniciatyva Vilniaus v. Jono Kriktytojo ir v. Jono Evangelisto (katalik) bendruomenje , Tikjimo odio (Pilnos evangelijos protestant) bendruomenje ir Emanuelio (protestant nedenominacinje) bendruomenje ( dabar Vilniaus Vynuogynas). Kokybiniam tyrimui taikytas biografinis1 metodas leido atskleisti pat atsivertim kaip asmenikai patirt vyk, j galimai parengusias gyvenimo aplinkybes bei gyvenimo pokyius, vykusius jau po atsivertimo. Tuo bdu tyrimas galino atpainti visus keturis J. Paul Williams iskirtus religinio patyrimo lygmenis2, tame tarpe ir tuos, kuriais kaip intymiais ir mistiniais igyvenimais paprastai nra dalinamasi su kitais. Tyrimo metodas savo ruotu leido pamatyti atsivertim ir kaip kompleksin reikin viso gyvenimo kontekste kaip religin patirt, kuri rekiasi ne tiesiogiai, bet per kitus gyvenimo vykius ir ne religinius patyrimus. Tai atskleid ir atsivertimo kaip religinio patyrimo, kuris palieia vis asmen, dalini lygmen (intelektualinio, emocinio, moralinio ir net socialinio-politinio lygmens) ssajas3. Religinis atsivertimas gali bti aptariamas jo kaip tikrovs skirtingais aspektais. Angl kalba visais atvejais vartojamam vienam odiui experience lietuvikai gali bti naudojami skirtingi trys: potyris, patyrimas ir patirtis. Dmesys individo potyriams (igyvenimams), kas jau tapo iuolaikins Vakar kultros orientyru, irykjo XX amiaus pradioje su Rudolfo Otto ventybs pasirodymu. Tuo pat metu William James ireik domjimsi ne religiniais ritualais ir net ne idjomis, bet paskiro mogaus jausmais, veiksmais bei potyriais atvilgiu to, kas vadinama dieviku4. Jo takoje Abraham Maslow individo religinius igyvenimus jau vardija kaip maksimalius, kulminacinius (peak-experiences), priskirdamas juos bendramogikosios egzistencijos psichologiniams reikiniams.5 Tyrimo metu pagrindinis dmesys buvo skiriamas atsivertimui kaip svarbiam gyvenimo vykiui religiniam patyrimui, kuriam vardinti reikia atitinkam svok ir konteksto. Tam filosofin kalba nra pakankama, nes Dievas sutinkamas kaip ia ir dabar Esantysis kaip asmenikai kalbinantis, palieiantis Jzus Kristus, arba bent kaip juntamai esanti, veikianti Dievo Dvasia. To susitikimo-vykio dka tiriamieji stipriau ar silpniau igyveno savs viso perkeitim ir atsivrim Dievui (Metanoia), pirmiausia patirdami tai kaip leidim Dievui juos atversti, kaip uol tam tikr neini pasitikint Juo. Dalis j patyr ir aikius savo elgesio pokyius santykiuose su kitais, su savimi, atsiradusi laisv nuo juos varginusios priklausomybs (rkymo, alkoholio) t, kas vardijama epistrophe, t.y. ioriniais veiksmais regimu atsivertimu. Beveik visais atvejais is vykis reik ne tik atsigrim Diev, bet ir atsigrim save (con-versio), kas skleidsi kaip saviina, Dievo vilgsnyje priimant save tok/ toki koks jis/ ji yra.
1 2 3 4 5 174 Kiekvienoje mint bendruomeni buvo apklausta po 10 konvertit; kiekvienas pokalbis truko nuo vienos iki trij valand. r. J.Paul Williams. r. Donald L. Gelpi, Committed Worship: Adult conversion and initiation, Liturgical Press, 1993. James, W., The Varieties of Religious Experience. 1902 (V, 31) Religions, Values and Peak-Experiences. Penguin Arkana, 1994.

Buvo aiku, kad konvertitai patyr ne vien kakok ypating igyvenim, bet susitikim su Esaniuoju kaip Asmeniu. Btent tai j patyrim apibria kaip krikionikj patyrim ir atsivertim. Kaip sako Hans Urs von Balthasar, nra tokio krikionikojo Dievo patyrimo, kuris nebt savivals veikos ar bent pasiryimo tokiai veikai vaisius. Prie tokios savivals reikt priskirti ir visus savavalikus mogaus bandymus savo paties iniciatyva ir savo metodais bei priemonmis suadinti religinius patyrimus. Tik atsiadjus bet kokio dalinio patyrimo mums atsiduoda bties visetas. Akivaizdu, kad to vykio suvokimui, o juo labiau komunikavimui ir prasminimui btina ir tam tikra kalba bei svok visuma. Nors kiekvienas atsivertimo pasakojimas liudijo to vykio asmenikum ir unikalum, bendra buvo tai, kad tai buvo egzistencinis patyrimas, atsidrus akivaizdoje To, kas virija ne ik ms pojius, bet, kaip sako J.Ratzingeris, ir mus paius.6 Didiausi ik kl tai, jog btina buvo priimti ir nepatirties patyrim, nes tik jis veda nauj lygmen. Taiau is tyrimas atskleid ir tai, kad pat atsivertimo kaip patyrimo vyk skirting krikioni denominacij konvertitai vardijo skirtingai. Ir tie skirtumai atitiko atsivertimo bei tikjimo samprat skirtumus katalik ir protestant teologijoje. Jei katalik poiriu atsivertimas ontologikai perkeiia mog Dievo malons dka, tai protestantai labiau pabria iorin malons suteikim, kuris reikiasi momentiniu, konvertito emocikai stipriai igyvenamu Dvasios nuengimu. Btent teologin atsivertimo samprata galjo slygoti ir atsivertimo kaip patyrimo interpretacij: protestantik bendruomeni nariai pirmiausia pasakojo apie savo atsivertim kaip vienkartin vyk, o katalikai j mat labiau kaip keli etap proces, nepabrdami to vykio kaip vienintelio. Taiau vliau, pasakodami apie atsivertim viso gyvenimo kontekste (apie gyvenimo patirtis, kurios buvo iki tol ir gyvenim bei sprendimus po to simintino atsivertimo vykio), protestantikos bendruomens konvertitai patys atpaindavo jo tstinum, t.y. tai, jog atsivertimas vis tik yra procesas, vidin viso gyvenimo kelion. Jos vykiai, tiesa, nra vienodai ryks ir simintini, bet jie vienas kit slygoja ar nukreipia. Kitaip tariant, iame tyrime atsivertimas buvo atpaintas ir kaip religin patirtis. Religin patirtis yra netiesioginis patyrimas, kuris atsiskleidia kitose ms patirtyse, su jomis ar po jomis. Tai ne vienas i daugelio ms patyrim, bet pamatin patirtis, esanti visuose patyrimuose, prasiskverbianti ir valdanti visus kitus. Individuals patyrimai, kuri metu mums atsiveria kakas daugiau (pvz. ,,staiga tampa skaidri visa mano gyvenimo patirtis) yra vadinami atverties situacijomis. Jos gali bti vairios, netiktai ,,akumuliuojanios ankstesnius patyrimus, kurie vienaip ar kitaip (netiesiogiai, paradoksaliai) enklino ilgalaik Dievo vedim ir glob. Tos pamatins patirties subjektu tampa slpinys, palaikantis i patirt. Bet prie Slpinio mogus gali ,,prisiliesti tik tada, jei Slpinys pats atsiveria ir leidiasi bti paintas. Jis turi save apreikti per enklus, simbolius, signalus, vykius. Taiau remiantis vien patyrimu, o juo labiau potyriu, negalima suvokti atsivertimo prasms, nes galima daugyb vard ir interpretacij bd (nekrikionik, teistini, panteistini ir pan.). Religins patirties, dviprasmiko mysterium patyrimo tikrj prasm atveria religin kalba ir u jos gldinti religin tradicija. Religin patirtis, kaip sako J. Ratzingeris, prasminama per j ir joje. Tik taip atsivertimas prasmina gyvenim ir nuvieia vis mogaus egzistencij. inia, visiems patyrimams
6 Plaiau r. Ratzinger, J. Tikjimas ir patyrimas. // Naujasis idinys. 175

vertinti ir prasminti krikionybje atskaitos taku ir matu yra ventasis Ratas ir Banyios Tradicija, su kuo tikjs krikionis susipasta ne i karto. Taigi, atsivertimo kaip religinio patyrimo skirting interpretacij katalik ir protestant bendruomense slygoja tai, jog ne iaip religinis, bet krikionikasis patyrimas, kaip viso gyvenimo pagal tikjim patyrimas, usimezga ir isiskleidia bendruomenins patirties kasdienybje, taiau savo kelyje remiasi istorinio patyrimo erdve ir patyrimo turtais (Banyios tradicija). Kelias virijim to, kas duota, savs virijim ir to interpretavim tampa manomas todl, kad tikjimo pasaulyje jau yra vyks virijimas. Todl krikionikasis patyrimas tampa realus ir vaisingas tik dalyvaujant Banyios gyvenime, kuriame, kaip pastebi J. Ratzingeris, nuo tikjimo i antr rank (nuo pasitikjimo tikinama gyvenimo forma) einama tikjim i ,,pirm rank, t.y. tikjim i asmeniko susitikimo su Viepaiu ir to liudijim kitiems visu savo gyvenimu. Taiau savo atsivertim kaip savs ir gyvenimo perkeitim visais lygmenimis (intelektualiniu, emociniu, moraliniu, o kai kuriais atvejais ir socialiniu-politiniu) konvertitai atpaino tik jungdami to vykio visum ir intymj (mistin) atsivertimo lygmen Dievo pneumos patyrim, kas yra vidinis ir svarbus tikjimo momentas. Jis galina asmen patikti Dievui savo gyvenim, bet nra prieinamas analitinei refleksijai, todl dl savo keisto, nerealaus ir emocikai pernelyg stipraus igyvenimo (potyrio) ar reakcijos tas mistinis patyrimas daniausiai yra nureikminamas ar nualinamas. Padedant j tolim stali, bdavo tarsi umirti ir to pradinio atsivertimo metu priimti apsisprendimai tam tikroje mogikojo patyrimo srityje (daniausiai moraliniuose sprendimuose, tarpusavio santykiuose) elgtis atsakingai. Ilgesnio pokalbio apie atsivertimo vyk dka vl grintas ir tuo paiu vl prasmintas to patyrimo metu igyventas mistinis susitikimas tarsi i naujo nuviesdavo konvertito igyvent atsiliepim ilaisvinani Dievo tikrov. Ji siejama su moralikai absoliuiais ir galutiniais reikalavimais, kurie reikia, jog visas gyvenimas, skaitant ir atsivertimus, turt bti pervertintas tos galutins tikrovs viesoje. Pokalbyje sugrus prie tarsi umirto ar net nuo savs pai slepiamo atsivertimo igyvenimo, visi paskesni konvertit pasirinkimai, drss apsisprendimai ar gyvenimo poskiai, kurie iki tol atrodydavo atsitiktiniai ar net nesuprantami, gaudavo prasm ir net logik. Bdavo atpastama, jog atsivertimo patyrimo viesoje visi iki jo ir po jo buv vykiai bei sprendimai sudaro prasming visum, kuri galima vardinti krikionikj patirtimi. Religinis atsivertimas yra gilus. Kalbant apie j kaip proces, btina skirti pradin atsivertim nuo tebesitsianio kasdienio. Savo ruotu atpastamas ir kitas atsivertimas atsivertimas vis i naujo gilinant krikionio tikjim, kuris vyksta labiau atsiveriant Dievui ir labiau pastant bei priimant save Jo akivaizdoje, t.y. per kasdien Dievo Artumo skaitym atsiveriant asmens perkeitimui Kristuje ir didesnei gyvenimo pilnatvei.
irena Egl lauMEnsKait, PhD in Sociology, assoc. professor at Vilnius University, Faculty of Philosophy, Lithuania. Area of scientific interests: theological anthropology, christian social teaching, sociology of culture, religious studies, sociology and anthropology of family, gender studies, sociology, anthropology and theology of body.

176

Session VI B
The Spread of the Apocalyptic Feelings in the Lithuanian Poetry of the Young Generation
silvija RAKUTIEN

A bst ra ct This study is the attempt to reveal the specifics of the devotional experience and the spread of the universal truths of the Bible in contemporary Lithuanian literature, researching the texts of the youngest poets generation for the symptoms of the apocalyptic feelings in order to reveal the organic (not intellectually designed) religious attitude of the modern man to the world. Apocalyptic world perception is characterized by the authors position of a prophet; symbolic numbers and images, taken from the Scriptures; duality of the space and time, containing the negative perception of the Present and perfect vision of the Future. The young Lithuanian poets processe distinctive apocalyptic images in the light of their experienced historical changes but they do not dare to take the open position of the prophet, because of a lack of true trust in God. The space and time is more abstract than concrete, the world is stagnated in the endless present. The lack of the meaning of the past and hope for the future makes the people look for the new paths to salvation, search for the new idols for adoration. The poets see the crisis of the values of the humanity, but they do not prophesy cataclysms and avoid an open declaration of faith. Instead of that they manifest the solicitude for the future of the humanity and using the drastic symbols try to awaken it, force it to understand the viciousness of the chosen path. keywords: Apocalypse, Lithuanian poetry, Scriptural.

significance of the scriptural to Lithuanian literature

The Bible is one of the most well-known and most widely read books in the world. Every reader is free to choose the way to accept it. The Bible can be read as the history of divine revelation, offering hope and approximating human to deity as much as it is possible. It can become a source of spiritual searching, allowing human being to look for at least some answers into the existential questions. The Bible can be accepted as a cultural value, literary work, embodying inside some of the most archaic and universal principles of mankind attitude to the world, as well. Research on the links of Lithuanian literature and Scripture is one of the most productive opportunities, because Lithuanian poetry externalizes much of the philosophical - religious elements. Lithuanian written language began with the spread of Christianity, the demand of religious writings in national language was a major impetus in triggering the formation of the general pattern of Lithuanian written culture, and creation (or at the beginning - just re-creation) of literary works.
177

For a long time folk songs have been the pinnacle of national poetry, based on the sounds of harmony because of genre tradition. Translation of the Bible fragments into Lithuanian language, which was still vulgar, agriculturally concrete and clear, was the best way of teaching to create the literature. Because of the increased need for abstractions the Lithuanian lexicon had to be innovated and expanded. The translation of the religious hymns, anthems and psalms gave rise to the fundamentals of the Lithuanian poetic language. There were many valuable literary translations of religious texts (by Mavydas B. Vilentas, J. Bretknas, M. Dauka, L. Rza, etc..), based on which Lithuanian poets M. Valanius, A. Strazdas, A. Baranauskas started the tradition of Lithuanian original hymns and psalms in the nineteenth century. Metaphysical feeling bursts in the works of many Lithuanian poets of the first half of the twentieth century (Maironis, M. Gustaitis, M. Vaitkus, V. Mykolaitis-Putinas, P. Vaiaitis, A. Vienaindis, B. Brazdionis, etc). In their poetry balanced Christian worldview becomes a poetic dimension (ioyt 1999). The twentieth century is marked by the intensifying tendencies of the individualism and subjectivism, this leads to the alienation of traditional biblical genres (prophecies, prayers, hymns, psalms...) from the canon. The transcendental feelings revealed with the help of artistic imagination and intuition, and realia reflected in the poems - alienation and unity, death and resurrection, Lost and Recovered Paradise - encourages to explore the Christian stratum of semantics of Lithuanian poetry, and to look for answers in the collision points of faith and literature. Historical periods full of changes always inflame anxiety in the society. These emotions are particularly felt in literature, and especially - in poetry. It reflects the emotional state of not only one direct individual, but of the society as a whole unit as well. The strong flow of frustration, desperation and anxiety about the future which broke through in the literature of the end of the twentieth-century, even extended in the twenty-first century. In poetry these emotions manifest very strong spread of the apocalyptic feelings, accentuation of the Doomsday signs, the change of the values with blistering speed, constant presence in the desperate state of searching for God, which is often culminated in a new idol-worship. This study is the attempt to reveal the specifics of the devotional experience and the spread of the universal truths of the Bible in contemporary Lithuanian literature, researching the texts of the youngest poets generation for the symptoms of the apocalyptic feelings. The youth poetry, published in three almanacs in 1999-2009, was chosen deliberately, because it was expected, that it will reveal the organic (not intellectually designed) religious attitude of the modern man to the world.

Apocalypse as a religious manifestation, and as a literary genre

The Apocalypse of John or The Book of Revelation is the final, culminating book of the Bible, which concentrates as much emotional tension, as it is possible to understand for the human being. There is declared the prophecy, which connects the extreme poles of the opposition: embodies the highest human fear and the hottest hope, describes the completion of Gods intentions in the world. This book summarizes and concludes prophecies of the Old and New Testaments, combines the dimensions of the Past and the Future, embodying in the Present the plan of the God powers entrenchment to every creature.
178

The Book of Revelation was written not only to encourage those, who are already suffering, but also to awaken the complacent Christian, in order to excite their strength for the testimony of God, and to strengthen their hearts facing the possible hardships and persecutions because of the faithful belief (Bauckham 2001). Apocalypse was written relating images and symbols to the situation of the first readers, but its relevance to the subsequent text perceivers lies in its universality - heavenly perspective for the future has the power to be associated with each situation in which the perfect world structure, conceived by God, seems to be demolished by Evil forces, perceived and conveyed in different ways. This book of the Bible is the most obscure and the most threatening, a large part of the text perceivers focus on the described horrors and forget the aim of all that - the destruction of the old world, using its foundations to build the eternal Gods Kingdom. In general, The Apocalypse of John was not the only apocalyptic book of that time, but it was the only, which was added to the New Testament. The genre of Jewish apocalypse was quite popular, the apocalypses were written in the heavy times of crisis. The main point of the apocalypses was to look through the evolution of human development in the historical perspective and to compare the real image to the ideal - the end of the world, when the Kingdom of God will bring peace and justice into the world (Alexander P.& Alexander D. 2001). The emotional power emitted by this duality was so powerful that a large number of Western writers of later times were trying to convey it in their works, taking the position of the prophet, and consciously or instinctively trying to repeat the genre of apocalypse. Their texts embodied the apocalyptic perception of the world, and tried to excite the imagination insights, using stylistics of the visions and symbolic imagery. After the research on different insights about the The Book of Revelation (Alexander D. & Alexander P., R. Bauckham, Rub ys A.), there were distinguished the features that are characteristic to apocalyptic world perception: 1. the position of the prophet / the visionary, which is held by the author; 2. the junction of the concreteness and the abstraction, which unfolds through the symbolism of the images; 3. the symbolism of the numbers; 4. the duality of the space-time: on the one hand, it is the authors local living space and concrete time, but on the other hand it is the whole world and all human civilization history. The space-time is imparting the following features: negative perception of the Present, especially emphasizing the alienation of the modern world from God; visions of the Future they are inspired by the Lord, and reveal the embodying of the magnificent final Gods intention; accent of necessity - the collapse of the modern world is logical and necessary, because on these foundations will be built the new perfect world, the Kingdom of God; 5. the new approach to the fragments of the Scripture, making them nearer to the present. Of course, it is hard to believe that the Lithuanian poets of the youngest generation will fully disclose the genre of apocalypse genre in their work. It is impossible not only for the reason that the authors have limited intellectual and emotional
179

experience (they are very young individuals, the students), but much more due to the fact that these authors did not intend to write an apocalypse, their poems were written in a critical time of the historic turning point, when being in the highly unstable world consciously and subconsciously forces to take the universal archetypes as a support. Young Lithuanian poets use the same layer of the archetypal images, like the old creators of apocalypses, in addition to that, the culture influences creation / re-creation of the post-modern texts, so some symbols can occur in the texts unwillingly, and can be perceived very differently. The extensive network of interpretations emerges during the time, and all points of the perception, belonging to the knowledge, insights and aims of the perceiver, are actualized in it.

the apocalyptic perception of the world in the Lithuanian poetry of the young generation
In the texts of the young Lithuanian poets there are many separate images and motifs, which refer to the stratum of Christian semantics (the thorn; gold, incense and myrrh; fish, the Ark of the Covenant, Saint Grail, forbidden fruit, etc.). Furthermore, some of the poets take the separate fragments of the Bible and rewrite them, adapting them to the perception formed by the modern times. There you can read a new understanding of Adam and Eve or world creation story, a new interpretation of the innocent conception. This literary courage gives the reason to the researcher to look for the aspects of the Christianity in their poetry. The young Lithuanian poets in their poems do not dare to take the open position of the prophet they look from a distance into the fussing world, but, unlike the biblical prophets, they do not feel calm and ensure about the future because of lack of believing and trust in God, lack of certainty of His faith and care. On the one hand they would like to see the collapse of an alienated, philistine, sinful world, but on the other hand they aware their own mortality and feel the lack of believing in revival. Not Gods revival but revival of Human. This is the strange and ironic situation of the modern Christian, who is thinking and doubting - the word of God is known, however, there is a lack of faith. The poems reflect the idea expressed by Pope Benedict XVI, while he still was a cardinal, that modern man feels as if he is tied to a cross, somehow hanging over the abyss (Ratzinger 1991). According to the philosopher T. de Boer, the separation between faith and knowledge in Christian culture is rather specific, because the knowledge of the believing is based on revelation, heavenly nature, and therefore faith has always the transcendental specifics (de Boer 2006). Thats why faith has a priority according to the knowledge in the religious conscious, which should be natural to the Homo credens1. But nowadays the society looks at the believing man a little bit indulgently, faith is understood as the denying of thinking. Trying to avoid a direct intersection with public opinion or a way of life promoted by the media, modern Christians are reluctant to express true faith, so they gradually recede from God. This tendency can be seen in the texts of young Lithuanian poets, where the images of wings, angels, birds express a longing for sincere faith, but there is often emphasized that they are lost in the mist:
1 180 (lot.) Believing man

Above my bed Vir mano guolio the face of the angel angelo veidas hair of the color of the sea jros spalvomis falling krintantys plaukai through pro the curtains uuolaidas so significantly taip prasmingai light up the cigarette usidega cigaret (third time quit smoking) (jau treikart mets rkyti) the face miglas sisups of the angel angelo wrapped in the mist veidas before-waking-up3 nu-bun-dant (Januait K. [vir mano guolio...], 2: 22)2 . The2modern3lyricists live in the impaired world, which can hardly obey to the divine order. They are extremely sensitive to the unconscious fluids of all humanity, so they see people, who are so far away from the divinity, they are loosing their flight, and dont understand Gods mission any more. These people soak themselves into the sin of pride, spiritual dirt, their souls are divided, tortured by their own fault perception. The word sin is used so often, that it is not dramatized any more, it remains an empty concept without internal content. The young poets are looking for another ways of expression, trying to awake the dozing conscience of the society using expressive symbolic images (e.g.: the fire-eyed Serpent, poisoning the water of the whole world): Galite ketviriuoti liniuoti You can quarter or lynch him Umuti Kill him gyv umuti kill him alive isineria jis i odos he sloughs off ir pasprunka and mizzles Karalius the King ali of the Serpents ugninm akim with the eyes of fire nuodinga irdim and poisonous heart nuodijania which empoisons viso pasaulio vandenis the water of the whole world Ir vl Once more lenkiuosi I bow down svaigdama drunk lenkiuos I bow down Atsigerti To drink (Guobyt E. [Galite ketviriuoti...], 2: 27). Disbelief and distrust in anything (government, society, strangers, loved ones, selves, even God) make people query the idea of humanity itself and search for new definitions of human existence in the world. Human dualism is refuted, but
2 3 These numbers indicate the number of the source and the page. The translations of the Lithuanian poems into English are made by the author of the article. 181

not for the reason that postmodern man is able to perceive himself as undivided unity. Conversely, the opposition of body and soul gets additional third dimension. The unity of the human being disintegrates into triad: body - emotions - mind. Various manifestations of emotions and feelings are monitored, recorded and analyzed in the poems. Pain and suffering are intertwined with each other and, opposing them to insensibility and alienation of the humanity, it becomes the only way to exist. Even a negative emotional experience is better than complete absence of feeling. In some texts the dimension of corporeality is treated as absolute, that it becomes the youthfully arrogant pose, which justifies even the drastic secularization of the eternal values Sninga plunksnomis, It is snowing with feathers, Nesusiformavusiais gemalais. With unformed embryos, Sninga angel spermatozoidais. It is snowing with spermatozoids of the angels. Sninga striai stog virni, It is snowing sidelong the peaks of the roots, Vertikaliai plieniniams dangiams. Upright the steel lids. Uklina u pravert balkon, Pakimba ant uuolaid krat. It scrapes against open balconies, Snags the borders of curtains.

mons myli ir kenia. People love and suffer Patys nebesugeba daugintis. They are not able to reproduce their kind. (Razumait J. [Sninga plunksnomis...], 2: 53). In extreme situations Homo sapiens4 separates from Homo sensibilis5, and the ratio (mind) in cold blood watches the flusters of the body, torn by windstorms of senses and feelings. It becomes difficult to find place in the world for Homo credens and even for Homo humanus6. The young Lithuanian poets offer some solutions - individual has to focus on his inner life, to create a world in himself: The jazzing rhythm Diazuojantis vjo ritmas of the wind And my discontinuous Ir mano trkiojantis rimas rhyme diagrama the diagram viso of all pasaulio world vis of all melodies melodij of all vis vidurnakio di strokes of the midnight in one viename manyje. in me. (Bilinait A. [Diazuojantis...], 2: 12)
4 5 6 182 (lot.) Wise man (lot.) Sensitive man (lot.) Humane man

Or he has to try to escape from the closed circle of the chaos. The true Christians should prefer the second option because it enables to respond to the voice of God. According to Scripture scholar A. Rub ys, the only path to the victory is firm loyalty to God, and the aim of the apocalyptic writings is waking those, who are asleep, warning those, who are hesitative, encouraging trust and witnessing true faith (Rub ys 1997). The texts of young Lithuanian poets revealed the deep perception of the crisis and common sense, which stimulate the action showing the drastic images they are trying to liven up the indifferent, materialistic society. The modern humanity understands how far it is departed from the original Christian values, so it is struggling to find a substitute for God, because it seems easier not to return to the true way, but to search for new paths to salvation. Into the place of God people put the Apocalypse Beast, who can symbolize very different things - it may be a person, organization, tangibles, anything what is deified. The searching for God gets the form of mixing together sacral ideas of various religions, because of the desperate attempt to find an object of adoration: <...> <...> Saulei aukoti maisto atliekas, To sacrifice the wastes of the food Ra ir Perknui. to the Sun, To Ra and Perknas. Saulei aukoti laios aakas, Vinui ir Budai. O Alache, Ko nevalgai lazdelmis persmeigtos uvies, pomidor padau upiltos, o Krina. Jzuli Jzuli, uvis i Nidos, tik itiesk rank ir pasiimk. (Peiulyt L. Laios valgymas I, 2: 20) To sacrifice the bones of the salmon to the Sun, To Vishnu and Buda. Oh, Allah, Why dont you eat the fish, pierced with sticks, Poured with the tomato sauce, Oh, Krishna. Sweet Jesus, sweet Jesus, the fish is from Nida just reach the hand and take it.

Surprised and scared young Lithuanian poets state the fact that there is not a simple change of the values, but real revolution: Yesterday a terrible idea visited me, / after some time the Spirituality / may become a crime. (Rastenyt B. Dienoratis, 2: 61). God do not even need to send plagues to the world - degenerate humanity becomes a penance for itself. The young Lithuanian poets do not prophesy cataclysms, the view of the sinful world is enough to understand - end of the world has already begun. The texts reveal a confrontation of faith and religion the church has to give the solace and the people desire not the cold anonymous ritual, but the pure, sincere faith, which is embodied by the picture of an old lady, praying in the ultimate stool of the church:
183

Ir vak virpteli tyloj suiaupuslpas senut pakabinta angel Viena. Maut. Susisukus klpo Su diaugsmo mazgeliu

The candle trembles in the silence the thin-lipped old lady hanged by the angels Knells alone. Small. Shrunken With the knot of joy

Sustingusi. Ryki. Sekund. Mirus Benumbed. Bright. Dead. Second Atsikvepia judjikuos klavyruos Respires in the Judaic clavier. (Striogait E. Banyioje paprast valand, 2: 17).) This painting is created with the kind of indulgent youthful derision, but the admiration and even envy bursts through it - an old man is able to believe without hesitation, without fear, without receiving anything in return. The ability to believe with no questions is accepted as a true beatitude, because it is an ideal of the real, inspired and faithful believer: todl diena ir naktis thats why day and night vaivorykts spalvos the colors of the rainbow todl balta ir juoda thats why black and white net pilka even grey kai traukinys vakare when the train in the evening lekia pro Kulpnus is moving through Kulpnai todl ros thats why roses raudonos geltonos red yellow ir tulps and tulips todl ruden Kalnikiuos thats why in autumn in Kalnikiai krenta lapai leaves are falling todl sniegas audra thats why snow, storm altis ir kartis freeze and heat todl Dievas ir velnias thats why God and devil tonas Satan todl tu thats why you todl ir tavo tvai thats why your parents todl in order you kad neklaustum not asking. (Sobeckis D. Todl, 2: 44). The Apocalypse of John was written as an invitation to be such a Christian, as an attempt to save the eschatological hope in the soul of the believers, but the modern man is able to see only the medieval Dies irae7, because he forgets the joyous anticipation of first Christians, looking for the worlds refinement. There are very few poems which show us the view of the harmonious, pure, perfect world. It is interesting, that pessimistic view of the modern times force the young Lithuanian poets to look for the harmony not in the future, as it was done by the writers of the Jewish apocalyptic texts, but in the past. Childhood memories
7 184 (lot.) Doomsday

of homeland gets the dimension of the Lost Paradise, love and prayer are named as the harmonizing force that can overcome chaotic collapse of the world which is sometimes perceived rather childish. However, the reality is still not out of a chaos, its just the saved memories, helping the person to survive: Ar girdi, kaip tvas malkas skaldo? Do you hear your father axing the wood? Sesyt krykia motinos skreite? Your sister crowing in your mothers hands? O tu toks basas, murzinas ir alkanas, And you so barefoot, dirty and hungry, But happy you are in your yard. Bet ir laimingas esi savam kieme. Old toys, broken legs of the dolls, Seni aislai, isukintos lli kojos, Tasty apple from the neighbors garden Gardus kaimyno sodo obuolys And the silently praying ploughman Ir tyliai mald nabdantis artojas Tai toks prisiminim vrinys... Thats the collar of my memories. (Tautkut I. [Ar girdi, kaip tvas malkas skaldo?], 1: 20).) In The Apocalypse of John the crisis of the end of the century is compared to the labor pain hope and perfect love come to the world through this pain. Apocalypse in the modern world is very painful because of the disappearance of the second component - inveterate doubt makes trust in God difficult for the modern man. He is stuck in the present, unconscious of past lessons and future glory is invisible for him. There is no understanding of the purpose, so the potentially meaningless suffering gets its priority. Probably this is one of the main reasons why the poetry of the young people is full of disorder and desperation - the process is going on, but there is no understanding of its meaning. The only poem from all studied texts revealed the understanding of necessity: arke ant suolelio in the park on the bench sdim we are sitting ir laukiam and waiting prometjo for the Prometheus atjo nujo came went off pamestas o gal dropped or may be pasiklyds sauls lost spindulys sunbeam rsys pilnas the basement is full praviesjusi galv of the clear minds apdujusiom akim they watch stebi virtualios realybs with stupefied eyes iracionali erdv the irrational space sklidin spalv gars of the virtual reality vizij full of colors sounds parke ant suolelio visions sdim in the park on the bench we sit ir laukiam and wait for the papreikimo revelation rimo nurimo the pulse of life gyvybs tvinksniai calmed down

185

gyslose prasideda kraujo kneli kristalizacija po to lsteli atrofija degeneracija ir mes parke ant suolelio sdim ir laukiam susiliejimo su krju (Juka L. [parke ant suolelio], 2: 55).

in the veins starts the kristalisation of the blood cells and then the atrophy degeneration of the cells and we in the park on the bench are sitting and waiting for the reunion with the creator.

The text of a young person send out an absolute certainty, the moment of the world transformation is extremely simple, it even looks like the vision of the drugged person. It was some kind of shock and surprise for the researcher. Perhaps the most dramatic in the text is a symbol of blood, which is so popular in the apocalyptic texts for its dualistic meaning. This symbol combines two opposite images - on the one hand, it is the redeeming, purifying blood of Christs crucifixion, on the other hand its the blood of His enemies, embodying the meaning of destruction, court and justice. Life and death, triumph and defeat, visions and the reality are taken with the equally meaningful Let there be, which can mean the full commitment to the Lords will.

Conclusions
The young Lithuanian poets processed distinctive apocalyptic images in the light of their experienced historical changes, the apocalyptic perception of the world emerges in their works as the natural moment caused by intersection of the centuries. Foreboding of the inexorable approximation of the Apocalypse occurs in the poetry of the young generation with the symbolism of the images the texts are full of visible and audible signs which, on the one hand, enhance anxiety and a need for any support, but on the other hand reveals the societies alienation and indifferent approach to everybody and everything. Sometimes the young poets perceive the worlds chaos a bit childish, but the emotional maturity of their poems is often equal to the poetry of the senior poets. The young poets see the crisis of the values of the humanity, but they do not prophesy cataclysms and avoid an open declaration of faith. Instead of that they manifest the solicitude for the future of the humanity and using the drastic symbols try to awaken it, force it to understand the viciousness of the chosen path. The space and time is more abstract than concrete, the world is stagnated in the endless present, in the poems there is the lack of the meaning of the past and hope for the future. The texts, filled with the details of the post-modern world, create original and fancy images, recreate reality many times, and make it a kind of virtual dimension where everything is at the same time realistic and ridiculous, durable and ephemeral.
186

sources
Jaunas vjas: Administravimo fakulteto Jaunj urnalist klubo nari krybos almanachas. 1999. Kaunas: Technologija. Ligonins priimamasis. Lietuvos auktj mokykl student krybos almanachas. 2002. Vilnius: Vilniaus universitetas. osm: Student krybos almanachas. 2009. Vilnius: Vilniaus pedagoginis universitetas.

Literature
Alexander, P.& Alexander, D. 2001. Apreikimas Jonui. In Biblijos inynas (pp. 763-775). Vilnius: Alma littera. Bauckham, R. 2001. Kaip suprasti Apreikim Jonui. In Biblijos inynas (pp. 771). Vilnius: Alma littera. ioyt, D. 1999. Biblija lietuvi literatroje. Vilnius: Lietuvi literatros ir tautosakos institutas. de Boer, T. 2006. Filosof Dievas ir Paskalio Dievas. Vilnius: Aidai. Ratzinger, J. card. 1991. Krikionybs vadas. Vilnius: Katalik pasaulis. Rubys, A. 1997. Raktas Naujj Testament. II dalis. Vilnius: Katalik pasaulis. Silvija RaKutiEn, PhD, the Department of Languages and Education, Lithuanian University of Health Sciences. Area of scientific interest: the modern Lithuanian literature, the links between Scriptural and literature.

Krzysztof Pendereckis Dies Irae Artistic Expression of Religious Tradition

Magdalena CHRENKOFF

A bst ra ct The Dies irae motive appears in many works of Krzysztof Penderecki, but the vision of ultimate doom that the composer evokes is shown from different perspectives and in different contexts. In Auschwitz oratorio Dies Irae the phrase Dies irae (incipit of the sequence text) was used as a significant title. Composer invokes the tradition of missa pro defunctis, somewhat suggesting that the oratorio can constitute one part of a funeral mass, but neither text nor melody of the sequence can be found in the work. However, the second movement of the work (Apocalypsis) brings an apocalyptical vision of evil: Penderecki applies all possible musical means in order to create a terrifying image of hell - they are used to depict chaos and destruction. But finally, in the third movement (Apotheosis), comes hope (absorbta est mors in Victoria), what seems to be the most important for the message of the work. By writing a work intended to be performed during at the unveiling ceremony of the International Monument to the Victims of Fascism in Auschwitz-Bierkenau

187

(Dies Irae), the composer attempted an artistic interpretation of the theme of historical experience of doom. As Penderecki said: Art should be a source of difficult hope.
Magdalena ChrEnkoFF, Academy of Music in Krakw, Poland.

Religious Experience as Expressed in Contemporary Visual Art

elena SAKALAUSKAIT

A bst ra ct Contemporary visual art is filled with various topics, all too often - controversial ones. There hadnt been any taboos about questioning all, what is happening around, and no boundary in expressing things. Undoubtedly, religion had been one of premiere objects of questioning and decomposition in visual art. Having lost its leading position, religion had become more marginal aspect of society. Therefore my paper aims at researching how religious experience is being shown in contemporary visual art for Lithuania of recent years. What artists are choosing such topic, how are they dealing with it, what is usually their approach and from what side of the viewer or the believer its being shown. How could the viewer percept it, what aspects of religion is being brought to light and what forms its gets into.
Elena saKalausKait, University of Vilnius, Lithuania.

188

Session VI C
Religious Poetry of B. Brazdionis: Rhetoric of Form B. Brazdionio religin poezija: formos retorika
rta BRZGIEN

A bst ra ct In poems of a Lithuanian poet Bernardas Brazdionis (1907-2002) there is plenty of church liturgy and other religious music images, also there are quite many motifs of classical music and musical folklore origin. The poets creation is distinguished by a rare musicality, which is usually based on syntactic structures, but also there are some poems of a more free form. Musical experience is one of the most inward and at the same time it is the deepest religious experience, opening the sensations of the sacral cosmic being through the structures of sound and semantic dynamics. Ontological principles of musical forms, their transformations, suggestibility of sound formation, sound structures, influence of rhythmic models, poetic rhetoric, archetypes of musical models and their analogues in poetry are not only one of the most important criteria of aesthetic value of the work, but also one of the depth formants of text sacrality. The aim of the article would be to analyze the nature of musicality of some religious poems of B. Brazdionis, to grope the most important features of their form, stylistics, aesthetic expression, to emphasize musical peculiarity of religious poems in general contexts of his creation. The concepts of Werner Wolf, Hermann Erpf, Vladimir Karbusitsky, Viktor Bobrowsky, Eero Tarasti, and others, will be used in the article and it will be referred to a comparative methodology. key words: Lithuanian poetry, Bernardas Brazdionis, religion experience, music, form, genre, archetypes introduction. Bernardas Brazdionis (1907-2002) a poet, editor, public character, at the same time one of the brightest creators of the Lithuanian religious poetry. His most important collections are Aminas ydas [The Eternal Jew], Krintanios vaigds [Shooting Stars], enklai ir stebuklai [Signs and Wonders], Kunigaiki miestas [The Town of The Dukes]. Their topics vary from biblical, liturgical symbolism to folklore, landscape or urban motifs. In these collections, one can notice also an authentic relation with being, based on religious experiences, there is also quite much declaration of religious truths; they are also characteristic of the variety of style and structural models. Collections of poems called aukiu a taut [Calling the Nation], I suduusio laivo [From the shipwreck], published during the World War II, are characteristic of severe experience of the nations destiny/survival. Their stylistic structures of melodious dynamics are mostly based on syntactic parallelism. Poetics of the post-war verses collections Svetimi kalnai [Alien Mountains],

189

iaurs pavaist [The Northern Lights], Didioji krykel [The Great Crossroad], Vidudienio sodai [The Midday Gardens], Po auktaisiais skliautais [Under the High Domes], that were written during the years of emigration, are characterized as being declarative, filled with pathos and pathetics, and focusing on motives of love for the homeland, nostalgia and other feelings. Aiming to highlight the topic of discussion, this paper is based on pre-war poem collections that demonstrate a more explicit form and originality of expressions of religion experience with perceptible models of dynamical - musical structures. Features of Brazdionis musical biography. In his childhood he loved to sing and play harmonica, and being a student he played the national Lithuanian musical instrument Panflute. Living in exile in the USA, he used to go to opera performances, cultivated close relationship with the composers Darius Lapinskas, and Bronius Budrinas, with singers and other artists, and collected Lithuanian music and other musical records. His verses were set to music more often than the verses of any other poet, by both Lithuanian-American composers in emigration, and by composers living in Lithuania (the National Library holds about 180 musical items that used poets texts). Songs composed after his verses aukiu a taut [Calling the Nation], A ia gyva [Im here alive] and performed by the famous singer Vytautas Kernagis, became musical anthems of the years of Lithuanian rebirth, which was named as The Singing Revolution (1988-1992). Such a large number of compositions most likely appeared because the poems contained not only syntactic structures convenient for singing, but also spacious semantics of words acting as dimensions of sacramental space. According to literature-researcher Juozapas Girdzijauskas, it incorporates everything that ever was, is or may be divine; God reveals himself as the Cosmos, infinite space, and the incessant flow of time, the whole of human history and culture, as well as the blowing of the wind, the blossom of daisy, and the scent of caraway (Girdzijauskas 2006). Cosmic consciousness created/opened by the sound paths sent by shamans/oracles is one of the cornerstones of Algis Micknas philosophical statements (Micknas 2010). Musicality of literary text. In general musicality of literary text based on the concept of intermediality reveals itself in a number of levels (Wolf 1999, 2002; Brzgien 2004). The first level is thematization, storytelling, use of musical imagery (textual, contextual, paratextual), the second is word music, the third analogues of musical forms and structures (micro and macro forms) become analogues of musical content). However, musicality of the text can be felt as a form and its transformation, as a feeling, which is consciously formed in discourse by linguistic, compositional, structural and other means. In this case a sense of the presence of music in the text is created, which becomes a common or specific designation, a real or imaginary reference. Thematization. Analysis of Brazdioniss poems in musical thematization level reveals that the musical images can be set into several groups (Brazdionis 1989). One is the nature based folklore images (rauda [lament], aurin igiedojo [the morning star has sung its song], dainuos vaigds [stars will sing], piemenli dainos [shepherds songs], etc.). Another group is based on classical music or everyday music (madrigalas [madrigal], valsas [waltz], romansas [romance], kantilena [cantilena], stygos [strings], gama [gamut], Strausso muzika [Strauss music], rockenrollas, [rock&roll], etc.). The third group will hold the images of Church and
190

liturgical music (psalm [Psalm], Osanna [Hosanna], Gloria, Kyrie Eleison, Dies irae, Sanctus, etc.). Analysis of the works of Brazdionis shows that the number of motives of church music and folklore can compete between themselves but very few images of classical and everyday music can be found. Such interaction of the motives draws the dominants in poets understanding of the world alongside reflecting the harmony of the pantheistic worldview of the old agrarian Baltic culture and Christianity so typical of Lithuanian culture. Word music. So-called word music phonics, rhythm, and rhyme creates a deeper impression than textual images or a paratextual musical level. A number of researchers mention a special musicality of Brazdionis. According to Vytautas Kubilius his verses continue the tradition of melodic intonation with repeated words and loud rhythmic gradation of sounds, subjected to tension raised by contrasting rhetorical pathos (Kubilius 1995). Juozapas Girdzijauskas, Tomas Venclova emphasizes repetition, variability of expansion, abundance of internal rhymes, alliteration, and organic rhythmics (Girdzijauskas 2006, Venclova 1995). Sometimes it is referred to his melody being monotonous, that sounds like repetitive polyphonic meditation or recurs in the style of rondo. Repetition and variance have been accepted as the basis for his main form creation. Analogues of form. In this paper it will be discuss the methodological research premises: the interaction between the ontological principles forms of music (according to Karbusitsky concept) and their analogues in literary text with the archetypal musical models and describe the principles of various modern forms creation. The interaction among passion, archetypal dynamics and archetypal models is also relevant. Religious musical genres has a long history of common development (ex.: psalm, hymn), therefore the rhetorical features of their forms should contain certain specific features. Dynamic nature of archetypes. When speaking about archetypes, narrativity, and text structure, it is important to consider not only their visual symbolic content but rather their dynamic-energetic nature based on intonation and rhythmic archetypical structures. They are perceived as symbols of images, as deep textual energy, as formants of textual dynamics and structure; major types of creators proposed in Carl Gustav Jungs conception are briefly discussed as the types that influence stylistic strategies of musical composition (Jung 1981). In Jungs view, the relations between the consciousness and the subconscious are bound up with process relations [my underliningR.B.] Thus, an archetype is not merely a passive form, but rather a specific energy. The psychodynamics of archetype is the link relating collective and individual subconscious with its musical expression. Jungs understanding of mental, creative energy, which is treated as value intensity, is especially important and is made relevant in music. Archetypes and passion. Passion, according to psychoanalysts, is a deep layer of psychic energy related to the presence of life energy, Love (Eros), and its lack, Death (Tanathos). In sacral works, passion is obviously expressed and is related to the most archetypical religious images: the manifestations of God and Demonism. Jung assesses the types of artists doubly, as psychological and visionary. The first is restricted by the phenomena existing in the surface life understood by consciousness. The visionary type of an artist penetrates through the surface layer of the conscious and touches upon the depths of the collective subconscious. Generally speaking, the tune
191

expression of the essential passions in classical European music might be perceived as major and minor, while in a literary work as pathos, euphoria, and dysphoria. Emotional colors in this type of music are defined by tonality. In a literary text, we could also metaphorically treat emotions as tonalities or moods. Thus, following Jungs understanding of the process of creative life (creative inspiration as fundamental archetypical energy), we can explain the phenomenon of music much more essentially, as well as understand the deep-layered musical movements of a literary work and the musical basis of an archetypical (and at the same time, literary) model formed by that movement (rondo, variations, one-part, twopart, three-part, sonata). The school of semiotics divides the passions according to another level, analyzing them from the object aspiration viewpoint; usually this is human emotional level; but sometimes they express the divine level when one breaks the divine laws (e.g., Antanas Vienuoliss legend_Ukeiktieji vienuoliai [Damned Monks]. Namely, when analyzing the level of existence of passion and emotions in a literary work and their movement, we can perceive the aesthetic value of a work, its sounding-musical form, the religion experience and philosophical depth. Ontological principles of musical form. The School of Semiotics classifies Passions at a different level, analyzing them according to their strivings for the object; usually it is expressed at the human emotional level, but sometimes they express the divine dimension, when a break of the divine laws happens (ex.: in Antanas Vienuolis Ukeiktieji vienuoliai [Cursed Monks]). Musical semiotic Vladimir Karbusitsky presents six existential musical modes which correspond to 6 archetypical universal principles of form formation (Karbusitsky 1997). The first one is silence, chaos, shapeless state. The second (I form) is and endless flow of time (variations, repetition and trance are formed); the third (II form) is a tectonic row of sound (imitation, heterophony, canon, fugue, fugato). The fourth principle (III form) is rotation by consistently coming back (moving in a circle; orgiastic dance; a ballad and rondo form in a cultural epoch). The basis of the fifth principle (IV form): baseline - mixing - return. This is ABA1 symmetry (thesis antithesis - synthesis). In cultural epoch, there formed Lied (ABA1 form), sonata form. The sixth principle (V form) is based on mythological quadruple which, according to Jung, is modified on the existential level. The first part expresses the present, the situation is ontologized and projected in dialectic plot. The second part meditates concern, pain, the past. In the third part the powers are given to the struggle with the present, and the last part reveals the beginning of the Utopian end - glowing future. In cultural evolution such structure was called the cycle of sonata. Thus, the correlations between religious experience and its music expression in creation of Brazdionis should be analyze in some aspects. First, to musical religious images are mentioned in the poems of Brazdionis, second, the spectrum of passions, third reflections of liturgical genres, fourth peculiarities of archetypical musical models and analogues of other musical forms.

Bibliography
Brazdionis, B. 1989. Poezijos pilnatis. Vilnius: Sietynas. Brzgien, R. 2004. Literatra ir muzika: paralels ir analogai. Vilnius: Lietuvi literatros ir tautosakos institutas.
192

Girdzijauskas, J. 2006. Lietuvi literatros vagoje. Vilnius: Lietuvi literatros ir tautosakos institutas, p. 582. Jung, C. G. 1981. The Archetypes and the Collective Unconscious. Collected Works. 2nd ed., Vol. 9, Part 1. Princeton, N.Y.: Bollingen. Kubilius, V. 1995. XX a. lietuvi literatra. Vilnius: Alma littera, p. 270. Karbusitsky, V. 1997. Antropologins ir gamtins universalijos muzikoje. Baltos lankos, Nr. 9. Vilnius: Baltos lankos. Micknas A. 2010. Pasaulio kryba ir mogaus krybikumas: tarpdalykiniai aspektai. Paskaita, skaityta Mykolo Romerio universitete m. 2010 spalio 7 d. Venclova, T. 1995. Bernardas Brazdionis. In: Lietuvi egzodo literatra 1945-1990. Vilnius: Vaga, p. 86. Wolf, W. 1999. The Musicalization of Fiction. A study in Theory and History of Intermediality. Amsterdam Atlanta: Rodopi. Wolf, W. 2002. Intermediality. Revisited Reflections on Word and Music Relations in the Context of General Typology of Intermediality. In: Suzanne M. Lodato, Suzanne Aspden, Walter Bernhard (eds.), Word and Music Studies, Vol. 4: Essays in Honor of Steven Paul Scher and on Cultural Identity and the Musical Stage. 1334. Amsterdam, New York: Rodopi. Rta BRzGiEn, PhD, assoc. professor at the Institute of Humanities, Mykolas Romeris University, Lithuania. Areas of scientific interest: comparative literature, relation between literature and music, theory of literature, religion, rhetoric.

The Experience of Tradition in the Giesm apie pasaulio med of S. Geda Tradicijos igyvenimas S. Gedos Giesmje apie pasaulio med
Paulius JEVSEJEVAS

A bst ra ct This paper is an attempt at a semiotic analysis of the poem Giesm apie pasaulio med (Hymn of the World Tree) by the Lithuanian poet Sigitas Geda. As a poet, Geda seems to be an exception to the rule of thumb that contemporary poetry has distanced itself from traditional religious experiences and is intended as a religious language on its own right. This goes for the poem analysed as well, which, on the surface level, is made evident already by its name. The analysis is intended to unravel the general segmentation of the text via uttering-utterance and enunciator-enunciatee relations. This is firstly done by analyzing the abundant deixes that are described as certain pivots, regulating the passages between different parts and levels of the text. This is supported by further semantic analysis. As a result, a general structure is revealed, that comprises shifts between an introductory narration of a singular experience, a parenthetical account of ancestral traditional life, a junction of the two via a medium-like conversation with the great cultural representatives of the tradition aspired to, and finally
193

a return to the speaking situation with a transition to a cosmologic vision and an incitement of a hopeful reunion of the people in themselves and the holy heights. Finally, several points of interrogation are identified: the appearance of religious experience as a singular event establishing a new knowledge; the relation of such events to tradition and transfering of what is traditional; the role of intersubjectivity in religious experience and tradition; the role of cosmology in conveying religious experience, tradition and their relation. kay words: Sigitas Geda, tradition, expression of tradition, religious experience, intersubjectivity.

anga
Skaitant S. Gedos Giesm apie pasaulio med, i pirmo vilgsnio akivaizdus eilraio ryys su tuo, kas religika tai parodo jau pavadinimas. Giesm lietuvi kalbos odyne (LK 2005) apibriama ir kaip giedojimas, giedamas dalykas, daina, ikilminga daina, poezijos krinys, ir kaip esanti banytinio, religinio turinio (beje, domu pastebti, kad dabartins lietuvi kalbos odyne paskutiniosios apibrties nra laikantis prielaidos apie krinio religikum, sociokritiniu poiriu tok odio parinkim jau galima laikyti strategiku). Pasaulio medis savo ruotu yra gerai inomas mitologinis-religinis vaizdis: stokodami mitologini ini ir vietos, platesn jo aptarim nesileisime, tik priminsime, kad paprastai jis laikomas visatos sandaros provaizdiu. Vis dlto ios apibrtys tai tik akivaizdybs persakymas; tuo tarpu kaip eilraio pavadinimas Giesm apie pasaulio med aprpia ir vardija 11 po juo idstyt posm, kurie savo ruotu laikytini jo isklaida, t. y. taip pat tam tikra apibrtimi. Dar galima pastebti, kad odiai giesm ir pasaulio medis tekste daugiau niekur neminimi. Tad kol kas visai neakivaizdu nei koks yra mintas krinio ryys su religikumu, nei kaip jame iskleidiamos pavadinimui parinktos leksemos.

teksto sandara ir deikss

Pereinant prie paties teksto ir mginant apibdinti j kaip vientis darin religins patirties ir tradicijos santyki atvilgiu, tinkamiausia atrodo aptarti visumin jo sandar. I pirmo vilgsnio giesm pasirodo kaip sakytojo patirto igyvenimo atpasakojimas, pereinantis pokalb, aukojimo, regjimo bei raginimo vaizdinius. Todl sandaros aptarimo pagrindu iuo atveju laikytina, kalbant semiotiniais terminais, sakytojo-skaitytojo bei sakymo-pasakymo (pastarieji daugma atitinka pasakojimo veiksm ir pasakojamus vykius; plaiau apie vartojamas svokas r. Greimas, Courts, 1993) santyki raika. Taip pat i anksto paymsime, kad vienas i pagrindini io santyki konstravimo dmen bent iuo atveju yra deiktins nuorodos. Tokiu pagrindu i karto galima nuo kit atskirti pirmj posm, kuriame kalbama apie tai, k galtume pavadinti ypatingu vykiu, ir kuris tampa anga tolesn eig. Tai, kad jis atsiskiria nuo kit, lemia reikmin struktra, nustatanti savit laiko, erdvs ir juose esani veikj raik. Pirmasis posmas (o tuo paiu ir visa
194

giesm) prasideda deiktine nuoroda T vakar. Ji laikytina ir atjungimu, ir jungimu (glaustai atjungim ir jungim galima apibdinti kaip sakytojo projektuojamos plotms ir jo buvimo plotms nesutapim ar sutapim; plaiau r. Greimas, Courts, 1993). Kaip atjungimas, i deiks veda atskaitin laikin a /tada/: /tas/ vs /is/ /tada/ vs /dabar/ Taigi tas vakaras tai u sakymo instancijos (pasakotojo) projektuojamas laikas, nesutampantis su pasakojimo laiku. Taiau i nuorod taip pat galima vertinti ir kaip jungim. /Tas/ vs /is/) nuorodo vakar kaip nutolus laiko-erdvs atvilgiu ir yra jungimas veikj plotmje: nutolimas numato iros tak ir tokiu bdu veikia kaip sakymo pdsakas tas nurodo ir vakar, ir rodantj, pasakotoj, kuris yra tame paiame lygmenyje kaip adresatas. Taip giesm nuo pat pradi tampa pokalbiu, /dabar/ vykstaniu pasakojimu apie /tada/. Dar galima pastebti, jog tas turi ir trei iskirtinumo sem: /tas, is/ vs /bet kuris/ /iskirtinis/ vs /prastas/, kuri ireikia vien i nari kategorijoje /pertrkis/ vs /tolydumas/. Taigi jau pirmja fraze ireikiamas pasakojamojo /tada/ ypatingumas, nurodantis pertrk prastos kasdienybs sraute. Visos ios pastabos reikalingos norint nusakyti bd, kuriuo steigiamas pasakotojo ir pasakojimo santykis. Jei tiksime A. J. Greimu, tai pasakojimo /dabar/ pavertimas atskaitos aimi yra subjektyvizavimo priemon. T matome ir ia: projektuodamas vyki laik sakytojas nurodo j nuotol nuo pasakojimo eigos ir taip kuria tarpsubjektinio santykio prasmin efekt. Taip nepasakojami neutrals vykiai, bet dalinamasi asmenine j patirtimi. T patvirtina ir likusi posmo dalis. Galima sakyti, kad visu iuo posmu atpasakojamas patirties vykis, steigiantis kalbant subjekt kaip to vykio dalyv ir taip patvirtinantis jo dvilypum tarp /dabar/ ir /tada/. Pradioje subjektas apibdinamas per /neveikim/ (besdint) ir jo matomas bei girdimas erdvs figras kopas, bangas, vj. Nors gali pasirodyti, kad erdvs figros yra veikjai (kopa slenka, bangos sibuoja, vjas kia), visos ios veiksmaodins konstrukcijos veikiau apibdina tam tikr subjekt apgaubianios (jis sdi /ant/ kopos, /po/ vju, /prieais/ marias) erdvs bkl. J galima apibdinti kaip visumin judjim: slinkimas vyksta /tiesiai/, sibavimas / onus/. Vjo kimas savo ruotu yra pratisas garsas, aidjimas, kur skleidia oro srov (DLK, 2011), taigi j galima laikyti savotika figrine nematomojo erdvs trio judjimo iraika. Toks erdvs judrumas tai iorikos daikt tvarkos nepastovumas, vedantis kognityvinio painimo negalimum (kako) ir per sav kn (irdis susopo) proprioceptyv santyk su pasauliu (pasijutau). Taip paneigiama kasdienybs tvarka (kaip niekad) ir steigiamas nauju inojimu apie savo santyk su pasauliu pagrstas subjektas mogus i Lietuvos (toks jo savitumas pabriamas ir padidintais tarpais tarp raidi). Prie einant toliau, ia galima ikelti bendr klausim, kiek toks keliais bruoais apmestas naujo subjekto steigimas bendras tam, k vadiname religiniu igyvenimu apskritai, ir kiek jis savitas S. Gedos atveju. Taip pat galima prisiminti, kad panaaus pobdio, tik daugiau estetinius, lius kasdienybje yra apras Greimas (Greimas, 2004). Kalbant apie antr posm, pradioje reikia paymti, kad juo pradedamas treiojo asmens pasakojimas apie protvius, kuris tsiasi iki atunto posmo. Pavirins
195

teksto sandaros atvilgiu is junginys tai intarpas, kuriame vystomas slyginai autonomikas pasakojimas. Tai, inoma, atjungimo padarinys. Kaip ir pirmasis, antras posmas pradedamas deiktinine (tik kart erdvine) nuoroda ia. Taiau, prieingai nei ankstesniu atveju, kart deiks liudija sutapim su atskaitos taku: /ia/ vs /ten/ /ten pat/ vs /kitur/ /sutapimas/ vs /skirtumas/, bet jis yra erdvinis ir nepanaikina ankstesniojo atjungimo. Taigi is atjungimas yra kitokio pobdio. Jei pirmuoju atveju atjungim galima laikyti loginiu (jis grstas pasakojimo ir pasakotojo laiko atskyrimu), tai iuo atveju jis veikiau semantinis. Juo pereinama nuo subjekyvizuotos inojimo patirties prie objektyvizuojanio jo ipltimo: Lietuva paveriama erdviniu vardijimu, o santykinai abstraktus mogus pakeiiamas vairiomis veikj figromis. Taip pat vedamas ir naujas pasakojimo laikas pereinama prie dar vieno, antrinio /tada/, kur, remdamiesi semantiniu protvi krviu, galtume pavadinti senove. Taip steigiamas erdvs, veikj ir laiko poiriu autonomikas pasakojimas. Vis dlto ia taip pat yra ir jungimas. Kaip minjome, i deiktin nuoroda liudija sutapim: tik sutampa ia ne pasakotojo /dabar/ ir pasakojam vyki /tada/, ir ne sakytojo bei adresato padtis, bet viso autonominio pasakojimo ir pasakotojo erdv. Taip senov per erdvs tapatum perkeliama sakymo viet, kuri, kaip matme, yra ir tarpsubjektinio santykio vieta. Taigi senov, o ne anksiau aptartas ypatingas igyvenimas, tampa ta tikrja patirtimi, kuria su adresatu dalinasi sakytojas. Tai savotikai patvirtina ir paskutin posmo eilut, kurioje per erdvin deiks Tenai parodoma sakytojo priklausomyb senovs erdvei, o per beveik tapat pakartojim mogum i Lietuvos semantikai sutvirtinamas naujo subjekto steigimo kaip formos ir senovs kaip turinio ryys taip ubaigiamas perjimas i nepastovios pirmo posmo erdvs pastov intarpo erdvlaik. Intarpo autonominis pasakojimas, kaip minjome, pltojamas iki septintojo posmo. Atsivelgiant tai, kas mus ia domina labiausiai, kaip pagrindinius struktrinius io pasakojimo bruous reikia iskirti dvejopus pakartojimus, kuriuos vardysime semantiniais ir sintaksiniais. Pirmaisiais vadiname savitas semantines struktras buvimo pasakymus (tokiais vadiname pasakymus, perteikianius semantin krv, bet ne jo pasikeitim), ireiktus veikimo figromis: tai tokie pasakymai kaip protviai klajojo, em ar, moterys irjo, karinai pilis ant kalno rent, melsdavosi giri gaudimui, jras plauk, linguodavo keliai ir t. t. Pavyzdiui, pasakym protviai klajojo, galima perrayti taip: Veikjas (protviai): Funkcija (klajoti) Funkcija (klajoti): Funkcija (keisti buvimo viet: V1->V2->Vn) Veikjas (protviai) Funkcija (klajoti): Funkcija (keisti buvimo viet: V1->V2->Vn) Matyti, kad klajojimas yra ne koki nors bsen kita pakeiiantis veiksmas, bet tam tikras buvimas, susidarantis i pakartotinio veikimo. Panaiai yra ir kit pasakym atveju, tik dar reikia paymti, kad didelje j dalyje tokio efekto pasiekiama derinant vienaskaitos ir daugiskaitos formas (t. y. jie em ar, jie ijodavo vent, jie jras plauk ir kt.). Visais iais atvejais daugybinis veikimas sudaro vien bkl arba atvirkiai, tam tikra bkl palaikoma ir sudaroma per pakartotin veikim. Toks buvimas veikime bent i dalies gana aikiai atitinka tai,
196

k prasta vadinti tradicija, kuri DLK apibria kaip paproi, apeig, vaizdini, idj, simboli ilaikym ir tai, kas ilaikoma (DLK, 2011). Taigi atrodo galima teigti, jog intarpas, kur vardijome senove, i tikrj skirtas ne tiek istorikai laike nutolusiems vykiams, kiek tradicijai kaip i kartos kart perduodamam buvimo bdui. Kita pakartojim ris posm ubaigos (vairs pasakymai, pasibaigiantys odiu Lietuvos). Pirmj j jau glaustai aptarme, bet kalbant apie j kartojim terptiniame pasakojime, taip pat ir u jo rib, svarbu atkreipti dmes tam tikrus to kartojimo eigoje vykstanius semantinius pokyius. Pirmuoju pasakymu tvirtinama sakytojo priklausomyb tam, k jau vardijome tradicija, o tolesni pasakymai kaito priklausomybs semantik atitinkamai su pasakojimo eiga. Matyti, kad treiajame posme priklausomyb per menamja kalba reikiam inojim priskiriama jiems, protviams; ketvirtajame, jau be menamosios kalbos (ir dargi prie tai paneigus nekjim jie nekartojo), ji per srvant krauj perkeliama knik vidujyb, o etajame priklausomyb jau reikiama tiesiogine j kalba. Toks perjimas atrodo stulbinaniai panaus tai, k matme pirmajame posme: nuo ioriko priklausomybs reikimo per skaud jos vidujinim pereinama prie kalbjimo. To atodairoje atrodo galima vertinti ir tai, jog tokios ubaigos nra penktajame posme. is posmas terptinio pasakojimo lygmenyje atkartoja to, kas prasta, griuvim, nepastovum, per proprioceptyvin suvokim (sakytojo pojt ia, atrodo, atitinka nuo praties apsauganios ems turjimas) vedant naujos kokybs smoningum. inoma, toks apraymas pernelyg skubotas ir neisamus, kad bt galima silyti galutines ivadas, bet toks atitikimas atrodo ma maiausiai tiktinas, juolab kad septintajame posme jis savotikai patvirtinamas aikiai ireiktu sakytojo ir tradicijos susitikimu. is susitikimas (Ir a buvau atjs) tai perjimas i neveiklios priklausomybs tradicijai (plg. ankstesn Tenai esu a buvs) veikl santyk. iuo atveju veikimas tai klausymas t, kuriuos pavadintumme istorinmis asmenybmis (Donelaiiu ir Baranausku). Taiau istorikumas ia, galima sakyti, ir neigiamas: Donelaitis ir Baranauskas yra ne istorijos, o tradicijos atstovai. Todl jie, gyven skirtingais imtmeiais, gali kartu dalyvauti viename pokalbyje, kuriame adresatas yra sakytojas. Tokio efekto pasiekiama sukryiavimu: (a) girdjau Donelait man Baranauskas sak, kuris atliekamas ir su vardais, ir semantikai, kai per sakytojo dalyvavim (a, man) apjungiamas aktyvus (girdjau) ir pasyvus (man sak) audityvumas. Taip sakytojas tampa ne kokio nors vieno ar kito asmens, o tradicijos perdavj apskritai adresatu. Dl to negalima jokiam konkreiam asmeniui priskirti ir po to einanios tiesiogins kalbos: tai veikiau tarpinimas, nuo kurio, galima sakyti, ir prasideda tikroji giesm (paymtinas ir progiesmis, kurio pokalbikum, intymum sutvirtina laipsnikumas, vedamas dalelyte vos vos). Nuo io tarpinimo grtama pradin tarpsubjektinio santykio situacij. Nuo tiesiogins kalbos atuntame posme pereinama prie liepiamosios nuosakos. Tai galima vertinti kaip minto visuotinio pokalbio pratsim bei grimo i terptinio pasakojimo ubaigim pasakojimas tampa kreipimusi, galutinai pasikeiia laikas, erdv (ia) ir veikjai (mes); sudaromos slygos pereiti prie tiesioginio sakytojo kreipimosi skaitytoj: pastarasis traukiamas prie tai pradt transistorin
197

daugiaasmenin pokalb ir aukojim, kuris savotikai jau ir skaitytoj perkelia pirmajame posme matyt susidrim su pasaulio judrumu. Deimtame posme tas judrumas perkeliamas iorikos visatos ir vidujik universalij (dangus ir em, virus ir apaia) plotm. Taip pasakojimas apie ypating vyk tampa pasakojimu apie visat, savotik pasaulio vykim. Galiausiai pereinama prie skaidraus (kas, atrodo, atitinka anksiau mint nauj inojim) regjimo, kuriame pasirodo nauja daikt tvarka medis, sujungiantis prie tai susiliejusius dang ir em. Visa tai tampa geidiamja nuosaka isakomu raginimu monms (kurie apima pradioje buvus mog ir ubaigiant terptin pasakojim tvirtintus mus) siekti auktybs. Aikja kas prasidjo kaip pasakojimas apie nepaprast vyk, galiausiai tampa regjimu ir kvietimu dalyvauti aistoriniame Lietuvos kaip priklausomybs erdvs ir priklausanij bendrijos gyvenime.

Ivados
Akivaizdu, kad tokio glausto aptarimo nepakanka norint patenkinamai iskleisti aptarto krinio reikmin sandar. Kaip minjome, iuo atveju svarbiausiu tos sandaros dmeniu laikome sakytojo-adresato ir sakymo-pasakymo raik. Nagrinjant ias struktras matyti, kad Giesmje apie pasaulio med pirmiausia kalbama apie prast pasaulio tvark griaunant asmenin savo priklausomybs tradicijai igyvenim ir tarpasmenin jos perdavim, giesm paveriant ne daina, o kreipimusi, raginimo bei geidimo iraika. Bendrai kalbant apie religins patirties ir tradicijos santyk S. Gedos kryboje ir apskritai, galima iskirti tokius klausimus kaip pastebjimus ir gaires tolesniems tyrimams: Kokiu laipsniu ir kokiu bdu skirtinguose tekstuose religinis igyvenimas pasirodo kaip ypatingas vykis, kuris griauna prast daikt tvark ir steigia nauj inojim? Kaip toks naujas inojimas skirtinguose tekstuose siejamas su tradicija, jos perteikimu, ir kokias tradicijos sampratas ireikia skirtingas io santykio vaizdavimas? Koks yra tarpsubjektyvumo vaidmuo religiniame igyvenime ir tradicijoje? Koks skirtinguose tekstuose yra kosmologijos vaidmuo perteikiant religin igyvenim, tradicij ir j santyk?

Bibliografija
Dabartins lietuvi kalbos odynas (2011). irta 2012 balandio 25 d., http://dz.lki.lt. Greimas, A. J. 2004. Apie netobulum. Vilnius: Baltos lankos. Greimas, A.J. ir Courts, J. 1993. Smiotique: dictionnaire raisonn de la thorie du langage. Paris: Hachette. Lietuvi kalbos odynas (2005). irta 2012 balandio 25 d., www.lkz.lt. Paulius JEvsEJEvas, PhD student in the a. J. Greimas Centre of Semiotics and Literary Theory, Faculty of Philology, Vilnius University. Area of scientific interest: semiotics, poetics, socio-semiotics, creation of S. Geda.

198

Sigitas Parulskiss Poetry: Deconstruction of Underlying Principles of Being or the Return of the Baroque? Sigito Parulskio poezija: pamatini kategorij dekonstrukcija ar barokinio pasaulvaizdio manifestacija?
Virginija CIBARAUSK

A bst ra ct The aim of my paper is to discuss forms of religious experience in the poetry of a Lithuanian writer Sigitas Parulskis (b. 1965). Parulskis is one of the most prominent voices of his generation, acclaimed by both literary critics (National Award, 2004) and readers. Literary critics claim that Parulskiss poetry marks exhaustion or, according to some, deconstruction of traditional poetical forms and experiences. This is achieved by exhibiting controversies, carnivalisation and aesthetics of decay. Another important device is intertextuality, actualized as multiple layers of quotations, allusions to other texts and especially to religious texts such as the Bible, the lives of saints, religious paintings etc. Religious experience and symbols are manifested in a non-conventional way. The borderline between sacrum and profanum is negated. For example, in the poem The Process, which main intertext is The Sacrifice by Matthias Grnewald, the sacrifice of Christ, that is of The Son, is compared to slaughtering of a pig, committed by The Father. Usually these aspects of Parulskiss poetry are related to postmodernism. I propose to take another point of view. The architectonics of Parulskiss poems, which consists of intertextuality, contrasts and controversies, carnivalisation, sensualization and aesthetics of decay, mark traces of the tradition of baroque. The relations between baroque and modernism as well as postmodernism have been conceptualized by Michel Foucault, Yuri Lotman, Gilles Deleuze, Gregg Lambert et al. Heinrich Wlfflin was the first to identify baroque as a universal stylistic category that appears in every epoch as a sign of exhaustion and a cry for renewal. According to Lambert (Wlfflin as well), the baroque returns every time when a tradition exhausts its own possibilities. Yuri Lotmans concept of cultural memory is based on the idea that the return of baroque (or any other aesthetical dialect related to historical epoch) is purely impossible. Yet, it is possible to reconstruct whatever was located in the cultural memory by the act of translation and interpretation. The need for reconstruction is related to changes in the sociocultural context. In the years of soviet occupation the baroque texts of the Grand Duchy of Lithuania (and studies of its history in general) were suspended, but once Lithuania reestablished independence, interest in the texts of the Grand Duchy of Lithuania and history rose. For Parulskis, interpreting the rhetoric of baroque enables the deconstruction of wornout, lifeless symbols and experiences, and transforms them into controversial metaphors. Still, the idea of transcendence remains constant. This leads to nostalgia; living without experiencing the transcendence turns into an endless mundane dying. key words: Sigitas Parulskis, cultural memory, Baroque, postmodernism, intertextualism.
199

Sigitas Parulskis (g. 1965) debiutuoja bei sarbiausius poezijos rinkinius Mirusij (Parulskis 1994) ir Mortui sepulti sint (Parulskis 1998) parao XX a. 10 deimtmeiu. XX a. pabaiga Lietuvoje neretai vadinama lio taku. Amiaus pabaiga sutampa su konkretaus istorinio periodo penkiasdeimt met trukusios soviet okupacijos pabaiga, Nepriklausomybs atkrimu ir persitvarkymo suirute. ie faktai siejami su, pasak vien, iki tol pamatinemis laikyt vertybi degradacija ar, pasak kit, neivengiama revizija perfrazuojant Vytaut Kubili, lio periodu mogus, itrauktas i istorijos rm, stovjo sumis (Kubilius 1997: 236). XX a. pab. Lietuvoje raytoje poezijoje pastebima iki tol dominavusi kultrini kod krikionybs, mito logika grindiamos agrarins pasauliros bei orientacijos auktj modernistin men kaip autentikos krybos galimyb dekonstrukcija. Parulskis neretai vadinamas vienu pagrindini jaunesniosios kartos dekonstruktori. Teigiama, kad Parulskio poezija provokatyvi, santykis su tradicija (vienas pagrindini jos dmen religin patirtis) ambivalentikas, vyrauja pabaigos, ribos patirtys, bjaurumo estetika. Rinkiniuose Mirusij ir Mortui sepulti sint itrinama (ar suprobleminama) skirtis tarp sacrum ir profanum sfer. Namai, mitiniame pasaulvaizdyje reprezentuojantys pasaulio centr, tampa iviete; vietoj prasto lietuvi poezijoje ems darb, ems apskritai sakralizavimo steigiamas antimitas; atgimimo-prisiklimo paradigm keiia mirties kaip pasaul vienijanio veiksnio tvirtinimas (Speiyt 2003: 185). Aptariant Parulskio eilrai architektonik svarbus, taiau menkai tyrintas aspektas intertekstualumas. Prasm kuriama per tiesiogines arba paslptas nuorodas kitus (nebtinai literatros) tekstus, meninius dialektus. Tarp daniausiai cituojam vlyvj vidurami stilistikai artimi ar j imituojantys dails kriniai (Hieronymus Boschas, Matthias Grnewaldas, Petras Repys, arnas Sauka), LDK baroko, antikos literatra. Pavyzdiui, ssajos su vlyvojo LDK baroko poeto Juozapo Bakos poetiniu pasaulvaizdiu, kurias galima atpainti struktros, motyv, poetins sintakss lygmenyse, yra aktualizuojamos treiajame rinkinio Mortui sepulti sint skyriuje (Parulskis 1998: 5367). Tame pat rinkinyje publikuotas eilratis Inara (Parulskis 1998: 59) yra Motiejaus Kazimiero Sarbievijaus ods Ilgisi dangikosios tvyns antifraz. Vyrauja specifin krikionikos simbolikos traktuot. Poetin Naujojo Testamento citat, krikionik figr (v. eima, Kristaus auka), ritual (v. Komunijos, v. Mii) interpretacija orientuota juslin suvokim: kalbama natralistin atspalv turiniais vaizdais, poetiniais paveikslais (ekfrazmis), o ne abstrakiomis svokomis. Eilrai veiksmas daniausiai vyksta kasdienybs plotmje, atpastamos lietuviko kaimo realijos. Kita vertus, ia gausu aliuzij sacrum sfer: profaniki darbai (burok rovimas, malk pjovimas) struktruojami pagal religini ritual princip, pagrindiniai veikiantieji asmenys (tvas, motina, snus) turi atitikmenis v. Trejybs koncepcijoje. Lietuvi poezijos kontekste tokia strategija religin simbolik naudoti vaizduojant emdirbio, kaimo mogaus kasdienyb nra nauja: vyresniosios kartos poet (Bernardo Brazdionio, Justino Marcinkeviiaus, Marcelijaus Martinaiio) kryboje krikionikoji ir emdirbikoji simbolika neretai sudaro vien. Parulskis skiriasi tuo, kad akcentuojamas ne vienio, o prietaros, kontrasto principas, neretai vedami grotesko elementai.
200

Pavyzdiui, eilratyje Procesas (Parulskis 1994: 3541), savo struktra primenaniame stacijas (eilrat sudaro 18 nuoseklia seka idstyt poetini paveikslli), Kristaus aukos ant kryiaus etapai pinasi su kiauls skerdimo, kur atlieka Tvas, etapais. Tvo vaizdinys konstruojamas pasitelkus realistin ir krikionikj kodus: tvas prilyginamas kunigui v. Mii metu, Izaok aukoti besirengianiam Abraomui, v. Jurgiui. Tokios traktuots galimyb legitimuojama nurodant Grnewaldo paveiksl Nukryiavimas (1515), jo specifin vaizdavimo manier: paveiksle, skirtingai nei prasta Renesanso dailje, Nukryiuotojo knas vaizduojamas mirties suniokotas, nagai primena nagas Knas.../pajuodusiu veidu//...nulaupyti Grnewaldo/Kristaus nagus. Eilratyje em vari (Parulskis 1994: 1314) burok rovimas sinchronizuojamas su v. Mii eiga: pars irmj palaimino/ tvas, klaupkim//klupom suklupom, burok/krvos...//alias geltonas dega/altorius, tirpsta kaip/vaks burok krvos. Malk pjovimo scena Ledo laike (Parulskis 1994: 50) apraoma nurodant Lietuvoje populiari ventj v. Antano ir v. Onos ikonografij. Pagrindiniai v. Antano atributai yra knyga, Kdiklis Jzus ir lelija (Lanzi & Lanzi 2003: 156), su knyga rankose paprastai vaizduojama ir v. Ona, Mergels Marijos motina bei mokytoja (Lanzi & Lanzi 2003: 37). Ledo laike dd-v. Antanas pjauna nugriauto tvarto lentas, kurios metaforikai virsta knygomis (pjovme malkas, lentos nugriauto/tvarto, rstai, storos kaladi/knygos, lapas po lapo/riev po rievs, dd prie pjklo/ventas antanas), mama-v. Ona ias malkas-knygas renka prakrom (atjo mama, venta ona/i dangaus nusileido, sak/paimsiu pagal kok, prakrom). Toki religini simboli traktuot, suponuojani ribos tarp sacrum ir profanum, ventenybs ir kasdienybs skiri niveliacij lietuvi kritika linkusi vadinti postmodernjimo ar postmodernizmo enklais. Pasirinkus iros tak, Parulskio poetinis pasaulvaizdis gali bti nusakomas citata i paties parayto eilraio tai buvimas be Apvaizdos (Parulskis 1994: 136-137). Kita vertus, egzistencinis nerimas, kanios semantika, (tobuls formos) ilgesys (kad galiau, o kad galiau/visa tai, k patyrs, ilieti aminas/formas, nors akimirksnio nuvitim, kad galiau/negaliu... (Parulskis 1998: 67)) Parulskio postmodernizm atitolina nuo klasikinio vakarietiko postmodernizmo, diugiai postulavusio didiojo naratyvo mirt, aidybikum, nostalgijos nebuvim. Taigi kyla klausimas: jei lietuvikasis postmodernizmas (konkreiai Parulskio atvejis) enkliai skiriasi nuo to, k postmodernizmu vadina vakarieiai, ar svoka iuo atveju vartojama tikslingai? Silau kitoki Parulskio poetinio pasaulvaizdio interpretacij. Kontrast prisodrinta, atri Parulskio retorika, kurios centrins ays sensualizmas, okiruojanti religini vaizdi traktuot, polinkis vizualum, emblemikum, bjaurumo estetika (kno-pvanios msos, laini kaljimo, kno-kirmli buveins vaizdiniai), pranaikos intonacijos ir lyrizmo jungtis leidia mstyti apie ssajas su barokiniu pasaulvaizdiu (ir, be abejo, retorika). i interpretacija nra visikai nauja: literatrolog Brigita Speiyt Parulskio eilrai architektonik lygina su Bakos tekstais, teigia, kad Parulskio poezija yra paskutinis baroko pasauljautos proveris XX a. antrojoje pusje (Speiyt 2005: 233). Barokas paradoksali epocha, yminti paskutin mginim susigrinti prarast ar beprarandam vienov, sujungti tai, kas nutol, kno ir dvasios plotmes, scientistines nuostatas ir transcendencij. Barokin architektonika kontrast architektonika, kurioje dera ironija, groteskas, teatralikumas ir pamaldumas,
201

sensualizmas ir intensyvi religin jausena. Baroko metafora, baroko konceptas tai ne teksto puoybos ar aidybos elementai, o mogaus ir Dievo smons principas, kurio pagrind sudaro atrus, smojingas mstymas, besiremiantis nepanai dalyk suartinimu, nesujungiam sujungimu (Lotman 2004: 179). Menotyrininkas Heinrichas Wlfflinas (XX a. pr.), ubaigdamas ir apibendrindamas ne vien ami trukusius svarstymus apie baroko kaip savarankikos epochos (ne)egzistavim, barok silo traktuoti ne vien kaip konkrei istorin epoch, bet ir kaip universali mstymo paradigm, kurios opozicija klasicizmas (Wlfflin 2000). Wlfflino linij tsia (ir sava linkme kreipia) mstytojai postmodernistai Gillesis Deleuzeas, Greggas Lambertas: barok siloma suvokti kaip vyraujanios tradicijos isekimo manifestacij, t. y. postmodern reikin (Deleuze 1998; Lambert 2004). Panai traktuot suponuoja ir Dariaus Kuolio silymas apmstyti paraleles tarp baroko ir postmoderni laik (Dariaus Kuolio knygos... 1995: 12). Kita vertus, mstant apie postmodernizmo ir baroko santyk kyla nemaai klausim. Vis pirma baroko rib klausimas. Nei Deleuzeas, nei Lambertas neatsako klausim, kas tiksliai yra ir, svarbiausia, kas tikrai nra barokas. Baroko-klosts, barokins emblemos konceptai leidia barokikum identifikuoti kone bet kur. Istorins baroko epochos teoretik darbuose pagrindinis barokins retorikos ypatumas kontrast poetika: atrus stilius, pasak Sarbievijaus, pasiymi tuo, kad i pairos prieingi elementai pasirodo turintys bendr tak. Tuo tarpu postmoderni architektonika remiasi prietara: kaip teigia Linda Hutcheon paradoksalia, visus lygmenis apimania prietara (Hutcheon 1988: 4), kuri grindia centro nebuvimo idja. Maiau spekuliatyvi yra Jurijaus Lotmano kultrins atminties koncepcija. Barokins (ar bet kurios kitos) retorikos, o per j ir pasaulvaizdio, kaip tam tikro istorinio-kultrinio kodo aktualizavimas reikia ne ilg laik kultrinje periferijoje slypjusi struktr atgimim ar grim, o interpretacij-vertim, t. y. naujo kodo krim naudojantis senojo (ar senj) artefaktais. Tokio vertimo galimyb ir poreikis atsiranda, susidarius palankiam sociokultriniam kontekstui. XX a. 10 deimtmeiu XXI a. pr. itin aktualios tampa savo akn, lietuvikojo identiteto paiekos, tad susidomjimas LDK istorija (barokas ilgiausiai LDK truks periodas) ir literatra itin iauga. lietuvi kalb veriami Sarbievijaus, kiek vliau Bakos tekstai, jzuit dramos, publikuojami kultrologiniai straipsniai, LDK studijos etc. XX a. pabaigoje Lietuvoje barokikumas interpretuojamas kaip rezignacij ir nihilizm postuluojantis mstymo (ir raymo) bdas, iplinta tiek, kad mnratyje Metai pasirodo literatrologo Mindaugo Kvietkausko straipsnis-manifestas Nenoriu neobaroko (Kvietkauskas 2001: 111114). Verta pasvarstyti, k barokins retorikos elementai, barokinis religinis pasaulvaizdis, kurio interpretacija sudaro Parulskio eilrai architektonikos branduol, suteikia Parulskio poezijai. Vis pirma, tai galimyb veikti sustabarjus, poetinmis klimis virtus neoromantizm ir sovietmeiu steigt optimistin didiojo mogaus, savo nuoira sprendianio pasaulio likim, mit. Abstrakt, nuo gyvybs apna apvalyt simbol keiiant gyva, vidin prietaringum ilaikania metafora, aminojo atgimimo mitui prieinant subjektyvi individo, kurio individualumas atsiskleidia tik suvokus savo paeidiamum, bt, siekiama poetins kalbos ir pasaulvaizdio (taip pat ir religinio pasaulvaizdio) atnaujinimo. Devintuoju deimtmeiu religingumas Lietuvoje gavo specifin pobd: pastebimas krikto bumas, kultini kunig, vienuolyn lankymas fiksuojamas ir
202

groinje literatroje. Pavyzdiui, Jurgos Ivanauskaits XX a. pab. XXI a. pr. paraytuose romanuose Rojaus sodai, Sapn nublokti, Ragana ir lietus ir kt. religin patirtis, ventumas fetiizuojami tikrja io odio prasme. iame kontekste Parulskio poezija gali bti suvokiama kaip reakcija: dekonstruojamos ne pamatins kategorijos, o pavirinis religinio pasaulvaizdio lygmuo, iardomos mstymo ir raymo apie religines patirtis klis. Vienijanio centro idjos neatsisakoma: transcendencija ilieka siekiamyb, buvimas be Apvaizdos nra natrali ir sau pakankama, tuo labiau aisminga btis. Beformikumas arba formos perteklius, daugiaformikumas, radikalus sensualizmas, ironija postuluojami kaip (poetin) realyb, tuo tarpu siekiamyb tik tariamja nuosaka manoma aminoji forma.

Literatra
Dariaus Kuolio knygos Asmuo, Tauta, Valstyb aptarimas. Baltos lankos 5, 1995. p. 932. Delioz, . 1988. Skladka. Leibnitz i baroko. Moskva: Logos. Gregg, L. 2004. The Return of the Baroque in Modern Culture. London: Continuum. Hutcheon, L. 1988. A Poetics of Postmodernism. London/New York: Routledge. Kubilius, V. 1997. Literatra istorijos lyje, Vilnius: Diemedio leidykla. Kvietkauskas, M. 2001. Nenoriu neobaroko, Metai, 2, p. 111114. Lanzi, F. & Lanzi. G. 2003. ventieji globjai ir j simboliai, Vilnius: Alma littera. Lotman, J. 2004. Kultros semiotika, Vilnius: Baltos lankos. Parulskis, S. 1994. Mirusij. Vilnius: Baltos lankos. Parulskis, S. 1998. Mortui sepulti sint. Vilnius: Baltos lankos. Speiyt, B. 2003. iemos balsai: poetiniai 19882002 met debiutai. In. G. Vilinas (Ed.), Naujausioji lietuvi literatra. Vilnius: Alma littera, p. 181201. Speiyt, B. 2005. Baroko augintiniai (XIX a. vidurio lietuvi literatros romantizmas). In A. Birger & D. ioyt (Ed.), Sambalsiai. Vilnius: Vilniaus dails akademijos leidykla, p. 213233 Wlflin, H. 2000. Pamatins meno istorijos svokos. Vilnius: Pradai. virginija CiBaRausK, PhD student in the A. J. Greimas Centre of Semiotics and Literary Theory, Faculty of Philology, Vilnius University. Area of scientific interest: semiotics of culture, sociocritique, intertextuality.

203

Religious Experience & Tradition. Conference Proceedings. Kaunas: Vytautas Magnus University, 2012, p. 204 ISBN 978-9955-12-775-8 e-ISBN 978-9955-12-776-5 This volume presents a collection of articles and materials from international interdisciplinary conference Religious Experience and Tradition held on 11-12th of May in 2012. The articles of this volume present the investigations on religion, religious tradition and religious experience in more than thirteen countries of the world and represent a wide variety of disciplines. The publication of this book is sponsored by the Japan Foundation. iame leidinyje pristatoma tarptautins tarpdalykins mokslins konferencijos Religin patirtis ir tradicija mediaga. Konferencija vyko 2012 met gegus 1112 dienomis Kaune, Vytauto Didiojo universitete. Straipsniuose ir straipsni santraukose daugelio skirting disciplin atstovai i daugiau nei trylikos pasaulio ali pristato religijos ir religins patirties tyrinjimus. Leidinio rmjas Japonijas Fondas.

RELIGIOUS EXPERIENCE & TRADITION

Conference Proceedings

Lithuanian language editor / Lietuvi kalbos redaktorius Robertas Keturakis Layout designer / Maketuotoja Irena Sabaliauskait Cover designer / Virelio autorius Audrius Rakauskas

Publisher: Vytauto Didiojo universiteto leidykla S. Daukanto g. 27, LT-44246 Kaunas Printer: Morknas ir Ko Draugysts g. 17, LT-51229 Kaunas 2012 05 07. Issuance by Order No. K12-046